Rc7

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺒﻊ ‪2010 - 2009/7‬‬

‫ﺘﻬﺘﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺔ ﺒﻨﺸﺭ ﺍﻷﺒﺤﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻟﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﻴﺭ‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺔ ﺃﻜﺎﺩﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻜﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺘﺼﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﻤﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺼﺩﻱ ﻤﺭﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺭﻗـﻠﺔ‬

‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ(‬ ‫ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪(IAS/IFRS‬‬ ‫ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‬ ‫ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠـﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ )ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (E.G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ‬ ‫ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬

‫‪ Etude de quelques paramètres économiques chez les chameliers algériens‬‬ ‫‪ - http://rcweb.luedld.net‬ﺇﻳﺪﺍﻉ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ - 2002/110 :‬ﺭﺩﻣﺪ ‪ISSN : 1112-3613 :‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺔ ﺃﻜﺎﺩﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻜﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺘﺼﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﻴﺭ‬ ‫ﺠﺎﻤﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺼﺩﻱ ﻤﺭﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺭﻗـﻠﺔ‬

‫ﺘﻬﺘﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺔ ﺒﻨﺸﺭ ﺍﻷﺒﺤﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻟﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﻴﺭ‬

‫ﺒﻊ ‪22001100//22000099 -- 0077‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺍﻟﺴﺎ‬ ‫ﺴﺎﺒﻊ‬

2

‫ﻣﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺻﺪﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺭﻗـﻠﺔ‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻤﺩﻴﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺑﻮﻃﺮﻓﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﲪﺪ )ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ(‬

‫ﺭﺌﻴﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺭﻴﺭ‪ :‬ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﲞﱵ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻤﺴﺌﻭل ﺍﻟﻨﺸـﺭ ‪ :‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺷﻌﻮﰊ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺴﺘﺸﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺌﻤﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺃﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻗـﺎﺩﺓ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺳﲑﺟﻴﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻜﻮﻧﺎ ‪ -‬ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﰐ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻚ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺭﻓﻌﺖ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺸﺘﺎﻕ )ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳍﺎﴰﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﳏﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﲪﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﻗﺪﻱ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﻴﺪ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺗﻮﻣﻲ ﺻﺎﱀ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﻋﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﻤﺎﺭ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺳﻄﻴﻒ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﻨﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺭﺍﺗﻮﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻠﻒ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﲞﱵ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺑﺮﺍﻕ ﳏﻤﺪ )ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﻧﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻭﻥ )ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺦ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ(‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺧﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺯﺍﻕ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻮﺍﻁ(‬

‫‪3‬‬

4

‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺴﺘﺸﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﻣﺪﺍﱐ ﺑﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﻴﺚ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﻗﻮﻳﺪﺭﻱ ﳏﻤﺪ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻮﺍﻁ(‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﻮﺣﻨﻴﺔ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﻧﻮﻓﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﻳﺪ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ(‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﻓﺮﺣﻲ ﳏﻤﺪ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻮﺍﻁ(‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﻋﺰﺍﻭﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺮ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﺷﻌﻮﰊ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﺯﻱ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﻣﺼﻴﻄﻔﻰ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻒ )ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﺑﻐﺮﺩﺍﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺸﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﲪﺪ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ(‬

‫ﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺘﺼﺎل ﺒﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺻﺪي ﻣﺮﺑﺎح ‪ -‬ورﻗــﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻤﺨﺒﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻤﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺅﺴﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺩﺍﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪http://rcweb.luedld.net :‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ ‪rcweb@luedld.net :‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

6

‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺎﺩﳝﻴﺔ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﲝﺎﺙ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺸﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌ ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﺛﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ – 2‬ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺑﺎ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺸﺘﺮﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺎ ﺑﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Microsoft Word‬ﺑﻨﺴﻖ ‪) RTF.‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،Traditional Arabic :‬ﻣﻘﺎﺳﻪ ‪ ،14 :‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ‬ ‫‪ ،Times New Roman :‬ﻣﻘﺎﺳﻪ ‪ ،(12 :‬ﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 15‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﳍﻮﺍﻣﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻼ ؛ ﻭﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪ ،Traditional Arabic :‬ﻣﻘﺎﺳﻪ ‪ ،(12 :‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ )‪ (Les mots clés‬؛ ﻭﻧﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )‪ (La ponctuation‬؛ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳍﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ‪ 2.54‬ﺳـﻢ ﻭﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻦ ‪ 2.6‬ﺳﻢ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 1.5‬ﺳﻢ ؛ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ 0.88‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻜﻢ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،Article_modèle.dot :‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،(Article_modèle_Fr.dot :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻳﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ )ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺷﻜﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺐ( ؛ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿـﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪.Article_Standard.pdf‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﺗﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﻨﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﲰﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳـﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻛﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ )ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ( ؛ ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﲰﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 4‬ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺛﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺐ ‪ :‬ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪" ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ )ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪" ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ"‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪ :‬ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪" ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ"‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ )ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬‫‪ - 5‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪) ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺒﺲ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻼ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 6‬ﳛﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ( ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺱ ﲟﻀﻤﻮ‪‬ﺎ ؛ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺔ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ُ - 7‬ﺗﻌﱪ ﻣﻀﺎﻣﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺁﺭﺍﺀ ﺃﺻﺤﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﻱ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺳﲑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺔ ‪http://rcweb.luedld.net/pa.htm :‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻧﻨﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻝ ﳜﺎﻟﻒ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﻼﻡ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 10‬ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪rcweb@luedld.net :‬‬ ‫ ‪ -‬ﳝﻜﻨﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺔ ‪http://rcweb.luedld.net :‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

8

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻻﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﻴﺎﺽ‬

‫‪11‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﻣﻌﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﺎﺱ & ﻋﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﻤﺎﺭ‬

‫‪27‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻤﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﻴﺪﻳﺶ ﳏﻤﺪ & ﺳﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭ‬

‫‪43‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺳﻮﻳﺴﻲ‬

‫‪55‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺧﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ‬

‫‪71‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ،(IAS/IFRS‬ﺯﻏﺪﺍﺭ & ﺳﻔﲑ‬

‫‪83‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﱘ ﺍﳋﻨﺎﻕ‬

‫‪93‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻱ ﳏﻤﺪ ﳊﺴﻦ‬

‫‪107‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ )ﺩ‪.‬ﺡ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺓ‬

‫‪123‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ – ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ‪ ،-‬ﻣﻮﻻﻱ ﳋﻀﺮ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺯﺍﻕ‬

‫‪137‬‬

‫ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺯﺭﻗﻮﻥ‬

‫‪153‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻠﻴﻢ ﻏﺮﰊ‬

‫‪169‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺻﺎﱀ‬

‫‪181‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺻﻢ ﺷﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻲ‬

‫‪195‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲤﺠﻐﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬

‫‪205‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻭﻱ‬

‫‪217‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠـﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ )ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺝ‬

‫‪229‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻳﻜﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ & ‪.‬ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻲ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ‬

‫‪245‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺩﱄ ﺷﻮﻗﻲ‬

‫‪259‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻉ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺳﻬﺎﻡ‬

‫‪267‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﲞﱵ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ & ﺷﻌﻮﰊ ﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﺯﻱ‬

‫‪275‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (E.G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺸﺎﻭﻱ‬

‫‪287‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﲪﻴﺪﺓ ﳐﺘﺎﺭ‬

‫‪295‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‬

‫‪305‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬

‫‪315‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻌﺰﻭﺯ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ‬

‫‪331‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺱ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺭ‬

‫‪345‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﻳﻠﺪ ﻋﻔﺎﻑ‬

‫‪353‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺸﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ‬

‫‪367‬‬

‫‪Etude de quelques paramètres économiques chez les chameliers algériens,‬‬ ‫‪Abdekader ADAMOU & BAIRI Abdelmadjid‬‬

‫‪10‬‬

‫‪-1-‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﳏﻤـﺪ ﻋـﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﻴــﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺻﺪﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﺎﺡ‪-‬ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺭﻫﺎﻧﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﲡﺎﻩ ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘـﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴـﺪ‪ :‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻨﺬ ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺗﺴﻌﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻐﲑﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻭﻣﺬﻫﻼ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﲝﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ‪ .‬ﻫـﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﳌﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﶈـﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌـﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺟﺘﺎﺣﺖ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ "ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ" ﺟﻌﻠﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺡ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ؟ ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﳏﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺃﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻭﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺇﻃﻼﻋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰲ ﺗﺮﲨﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳊﺪﺍﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻏﻤـﻮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺘﺒـﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﲟﻔﻬﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳـﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻴﻮﻱ‪(... ،‬؛ ﻭﺳﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺍﶈﻴﻂ" ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ "ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ" ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﳏﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺪﺛﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ؛ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜـﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﳎﺘﻤﻌﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻪ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ؛ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﲜﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﲡﺎﻩ ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ "ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ"‪ ،(Parties prenantes) 1‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1-1‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺠﺄ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﲑ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﻔﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟـﻞ ﺩﻓـﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺩﻣـﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،2‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪" :‬ﺍﻟﺘـﺪﺍﺑﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ"‪ ،(Les mesures réglementaires) 3‬ﻭ"ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰﻳﺔ" )‪ (Les mesures incitatives‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻇﻬﺮ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ 4‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ "ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻋﻴـﺔ" )‪.(Approches volontaires‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﱃ ﺇﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺗﻪ‪ .5‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫‪11‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﻢ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.6‬‬ ‫‪ -1-1-1‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ )‪ (Normes‬ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺇﻻ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﲢﺖ ﻃﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﰲ ﺗﺴﺪﻳﺪ ﻏﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ‪:7‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ )‪ :(Normes de qualité d’environnement‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺛﺎﱐ ﺃﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺑﻮﻥ )‪ (CO2‬ﰲ ﺍﳉﻮ؛‬ ‫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻹﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ )‪ :(Normes d’émissions‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻹﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﻣﻠﻮﺙ ﻣﻌﲔ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﳏﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ؛‬ ‫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ )‪ :(Normes de produit‬ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﱰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ )‪(Recyclage‬؛‬ ‫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ )‪ :(Normes des procédés‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟـﺐ ﺇﺳـﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴـﺔ‬‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ )ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻹﲰﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ(‪.8‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺇﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﳕﻮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ "ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ" )‪ (Externalités‬ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﻴﺔ )‪ (Mesures institutionnelles‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻨﻊ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﺸـﻄﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ‪‬ﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺳﻴﻢ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﶈﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻷﻱ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﳎﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .9‬ﻓﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺩﻓﻌـﺖ ﲟﺆﺳﺴـﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻃﻠـﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺀﻣـﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﻴـﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (Harmonisation internationale‬ﰲ ﳎـﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸـﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌـﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻀـﺎﺀ ﻋﻠـﻰ "ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴـﺔ ﺍﻟﻀـﺎﺭﺓ" ‪(Concurrence‬‬ ‫)‪ dommageable‬ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻹﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻴﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺚ )ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺻﺮﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ .10‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲤﻮﻗﻊ "ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ" ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﺠﺄ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺸﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺻﺮﺍﻣﺔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﺭﺍﺩﻉ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻔﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﲔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺝ "ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﳑﺘﺜﻞ"‪ (Comportement conformiste) 11‬ﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺪﺩﻩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ‪ 12‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲜﻬﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﰲ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪.13‬‬ ‫‪ -2-1-1‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺘﺠﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﲔ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺪﳘﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ "ﺑﻴﻘﻮ" ‪(Arthur Cecil‬‬ ‫)‪ Pigou‬و"ﻛﻮﺍﺯ" )‪.(Ronald Harry Coase‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -1-2-1-1‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ "ﺑﻴﻘﻮ"‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺗﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ )ﺍﻹﺗﺎﻭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻣـﻮﺍﻝ ﺗﻘـﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ "ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ" )‪ .((Les pratiques propres‬ﻓﻠﺴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﱃ "ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺙ‪-‬ﺍﻟـﺪﺍﻓﻊ"‬ ‫)‪ (Principe pollueur-payeur‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻀﻲ ﺑﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺙ ﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻘـﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴـﻠﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺗﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲨﻊ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﶈﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ؛ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﲢﻔﻴﺰﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻠﻮﺛﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﻧـﺎﺕ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲝﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺴﻒ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﳍـﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻔـﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺇﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ "ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ" )‪(Taxes de financement‬؛‬ ‫ ﺍﳋﻔﺾ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﳛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨـﻮﻉ ﻣـﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﶈﻔﺰﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ" ) ‪ ،(Taxes incitatives à la source‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﳌﺒـﺪﺃ "ﺍﳌﻠـﻮﺙ‪-‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻓﻊ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺴـﻤﺢ ﺑــ "ﺇﺳـﺘﺪﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﺛـﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴـﺔ" ) ‪Internalisation des‬‬

‫‪ ،(externalités‬ﺃﻱ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ )ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ( ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ )ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ(‪ .‬ﻭﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺧﺎﺻـﻴﱵ‬ ‫"ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﻘﲔ" )‪ 14(Incertitude‬ﻭ"ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ" )‪ 15(Incomplétude‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴـﺔ‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ "ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﲨﺎﻋﻴﺔ" )‪.16(Coût collectif‬‬ ‫‪ -2-2-1-1‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ "ﻛﻮﺍﺯ"‪ :‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠـﻰ "ﺍﻟﺴـﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴـﺔ" )‪ ،(Biens environnementaux‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ؛ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﳛﺪﺩ ﳍﺎ ﺳﻌﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﻨﻈﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﻐﻼﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ‬ ‫"ﺣﻘﻮﻕ )ﺭﺧﺺ( ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺚ" )‪ (Droits à polluer‬ﻭﺍﳊﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳـﻮﺍﻕ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﲢﻮﻳﻞ "ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ" ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺳﻠﻌﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ "ﺍﳊﻖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺚ" ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻟﻪ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺣـﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻳﺘﺠﺰﺃ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﻘﻮﻕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﺰﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻠﻜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﺇﺿﺎﰲ ﺇﻻ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ "ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ" ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﱂ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺚ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌـﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺧﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺚ‪ .17‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴـﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﲨﺎﻋﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ )ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻹﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ( ﳚﺐ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ؛ ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺚ‪ .‬ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ ﳊﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﲢﻔﻴﺰﻳﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺇﻧﺘـﻬﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﱄ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻸﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃـﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬـﻲ‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻓﺤﺴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﲤﻨﺢ ﺃﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺘﺮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﺼـﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-1-1‬ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌـﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺠﻊ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ" )‪ (Auto-organisation‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻳﺜﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ )ﻭﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪:18‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ )‪ :(Les systèmes volontaires publics‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺩﻓﺎﺗﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺗﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺨﺮﻁ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻮﻋﻲ ﻭﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑـﻞ ﺍﻹﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣـﻦ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻـﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌـﻲ"‬ ‫)‪ (Ecoétiquetage‬ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻢ )ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ( ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ" )‪ (Ecolabel, Ecocertificat‬ﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﺩﻓﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻫﺬﻩ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑـ‪" :‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ" )‪ ،(Performance environnementale‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﲤﻜﻦ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ" )‪ (Agences nationales de normalisation‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺮﺍﻑ" )‪.(Reconnaissance‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴـﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴـﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼـﻨﺎﻋﺔ ‪(Les accords environnementaux‬‬‫)‪ :négociés‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺗﱪﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟـﺐ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬـﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺒﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﰲ ﺍﻵﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ؛ ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﻮﻡ( ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺗﻔﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻭﺿﺤﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ )‪ :(Les accords privés‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺗﱪﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ )ﺃﻭ‬‫ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ( ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﺮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﳎـﺎﻭﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ ﻣـﻦ ﳝﺜﻠـﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﲨﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﳏﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲨﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻨﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌـﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿـﻊ‬ ‫ﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ )‪ :(Les engagements unilatéraux‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﱪﻧﺎﳎﻬـﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺷـﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ" )‪ (Autoréglementation‬ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻭﺃﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣـﻞ ﻣـﻊ ﳐﺘﻠـﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ؛ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻀﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ؛‬ ‫ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺰﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ؛‬ ‫ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ؛ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﻳﻘﺒﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻗﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺳـﻠﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﱪﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻃﻮﻋﻲ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣـﻦ ﺧـﻼﻝ‬ ‫"ﻃﻠﺐ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ" )‪ (Demande Verte‬ﻫﻮ ﰲ ﳕﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪14‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻋﻴﺔ( ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻘﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻵﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﻳﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﻭﻟـﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻘﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ "ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪-‬ﻣﻴﺰﺓ" )‪ (Cout-avantage‬ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻓﺸﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻮﻗـﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ؛ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ‪.19‬‬ ‫‪ -2-1‬ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﲤﺎﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺿﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﳊﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓـﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ؛ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﻀـﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺎﺕ ﺃﻣـﺎ ﻣﺸـﻜﻠﺔ ﻣـﺪﻯ ﺷـﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (Légitimité‬ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﰲ ﺑﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ؛ ﰒ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀـﻐﻮﻁ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺣﻠـﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲤﺎﺭﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺒﺒﺎ ﰲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺿﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳎﺘﻤﻌﻴﺔ )‪ (Sociétales‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ؛ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺎﺭﺱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﻠﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳـﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﰲ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻋﲔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﲨﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1-2-1‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ؛ ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ "ﻭﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ" ) ‪Agences‬‬ ‫‪ (de notation‬ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎﺕ" )‪ (Indices éthiques‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﻋـﻼﻡ ﺍﳌﺴـﺎﳘﲔ ﺑــ"ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳـﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴـﺌﻮﻟﺔ"‬ ‫)‪ (Pratiques responsables‬ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﺎﳌﻲ ﻣﻮﺣﺪ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺷﺎﺭﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻳﻨﻈﺮﻭﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧـﻪ ﳐـﺎﻃﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲰﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﺰ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﳍﻢ ﻟﻺﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻢ ﻳﻀﻐﻄﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ"ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻝ" )‪ ،(Investissement responsable‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋـﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻳﻮﱄ ﺃﺻﺤﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻭ"ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﳋﻀـﺮﺍﺀ" )‪(Fonds verts‬‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺇﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﰲ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﰲ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺜﺒـﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻠﺠﺄ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ "ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ" )‪ (Audits environnementaux‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﲣـﺎﺫ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ .20‬ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﲡﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﳎﱪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼـﺔ ﺗﺘﻨـﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﳎﻬﻮﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻄﻤﺄﻧﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳـﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺘـﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-2-1‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﻨﻜﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻳﻠﺠﺌﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ )ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ (...،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﲝﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳـﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌـﻲ؛ ﻭﰲ‬ ‫‪15‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌـﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ‪21‬؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﲝﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-2-1‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺃﺛﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ؛ ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻭﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﻭﻥ ﳌﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﻭﻥ ﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪ .22‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺿـﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ؛ ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤـﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴـﺔ" )‪(Valeur écologique‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺷﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲰﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺝ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ؛‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳍﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4-2-1‬ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻋﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻋﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﺮﺩ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﲔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻭﻻﺋـﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻏﺒﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻋﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﳉﺬﺏ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﻮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎ ﻣﻨـﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﻠﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺨﺬ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺗﱪﻫﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ؛ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﶈﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗـﺒﲏ ﻫـﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴـﻠﻊ ﲟﻨﺤﻬـﺎ ﻋﻼﻣـﺔ‬‫)‪ (Marque‬ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻉ؛‬ ‫ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺜﺎ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ؛‬‫ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﺪ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ )ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ(" )‪(Pollution sonore‬؛‬‫ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪(... ،‬؛‬‫ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪ -5-2-1‬ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺸﺂ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﲡﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟـﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺛﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻄﻬـﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗـﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ‪‬ﺪﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺠﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻀﻰ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻡ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌـﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻬﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺄﻣﻦ ﱂ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﻞ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺗﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻲ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻼ‪‬ﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﺮﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﲢﺘﺮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺜﲏ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣـﻦ ﺃﺷـﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲣﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﲢﺪ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺒﻌﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿـﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.23‬‬

‫‪16‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -6-2-1‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﺑﻌﻼﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺪ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑـﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺎﺭﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭﺍ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﺇﻥ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻨﻌﺪﻣـﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻼ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴـﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﻤﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻛﺸﺮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻷﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﺵ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﳏﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.24‬‬ ‫‪ -7-2-1‬ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﻬﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺍﻓﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﰲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫"ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ" )‪(Les externalités industrielles‬؛ ﻭﺑﺎﺗﺖ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ‪‬ﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻏـﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ .25‬ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﲢﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻻ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺪ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻈﺎﻫﺮ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﲢﺴﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﲟﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪ؛‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﺠﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﳒﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗـﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺸـﺂﺕ‬‫ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺰﺓ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻋﺮﻗﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ؛‬ ‫ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﻋﺎﻭﻯ ﻗﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﶈﺎﻛﻢ ﺿﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﲨﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﻭﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ( ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻏﻴﺐ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻫﻴﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠـﻬﺎ ﻣـﻊ ﺍﻟﺸـﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ؛ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻏﻴﺒﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺍﺋﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﰲ ﲢﺎﻟﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪.26‬‬‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﱐ ﺇﱃ ﺿﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8-2-1‬ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲡﺘﻤﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﻄﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﰲ ﺣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻭﲤﺜﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍ ﰲ ﲢﺴﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﲟﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺳﺘﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﲟﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺳﺘﺨﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮﻳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺴـﺌﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻔـﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﻞ ﺷﱴ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻀﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄـﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺜﺎﻕ ﳚﱪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﳏﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﰲ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﲔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﳍﻴﺌـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﲤﻨﺢ ﺇﻋﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻭﰲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-1‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻺﺟﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻗﺘﻨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -1-3-1‬ﺍﶈﻔﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻛﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ؛ ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺞ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻻ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴـﻮﻳﻘﻲ ﺍﻟـﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﻬﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺎ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺷـﺎﺭﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻴـﻞ ﺍﳌﺴـﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻚ ﰲ ﺧﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﱃ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪.27‬‬ ‫‪ -2-3-1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ )‪(Différenciation concurrentielle‬‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻭﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎ‪‬ﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ "ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ" )‪ .(Concentration du marché‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﺰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲣﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳑﻴﺰﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻊ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ "ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ" )‪ .(Eco-produits‬ﺍﳊﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺷﺮﳛﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴـﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺇﺿﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ؛ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﳉﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻔﻘﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-3-1‬ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻫﺪﺭ ﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻃﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓـﺮﺹ ﲢﻘﻴـﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻦ‪ ،‬ﰎ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻋﺎﺋﻘﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ "ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮ" )‪ (Hypothèse de Porter‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﲑ "ﻣﺎﻳﻜﻞ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮ" ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻓﻨﺪﻭﺍ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ "ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔـﺔ" ) ‪Technologies‬‬ ‫‪ (propres‬ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺗﺜﻤﲔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .28‬ﻓﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺭﻛﺖ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4-1‬ﺃﺧﻼﻕ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ )‪(Ethique des dirigeants‬‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻧﻔﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺷـﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻃﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻔﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﻭﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪﺍﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﺒﺘﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﳛـﺎﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻣـﺎ ﺗﺴـﻴﲑ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻭﺍﻓﻌﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ‪ .29‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺷﺮﻛﺎ‪‬ﻢ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﻢ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﳌﺪﻯ ﲡﺬﺭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ‪:30‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺫﻭ "ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻲ" )‪ (Environnementalisme réformiste‬ﻳﻮﻇﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ؛ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ‬‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﺬﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ "ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ"؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺫﻭ "ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻜﺎﱄ" )‪ (Environnementalisme radical‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤـﻴﻂ ﺍﳊﻴـﻮﻱ‬‫ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ؛ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌـﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻫـﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ ﰲ "ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﲤﺎﺷﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﳚﻨﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺒﲏ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .31‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴـﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻌﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ‪‬ﺪﺩ ﺇﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻛﱪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻋـﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘـﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﺬﺭﺓ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -5-1‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻔﻴﺔ )‪(Facteurs de contingence‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻔﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺒﲏ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺼﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﰲ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1-5-1‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺈﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸـﺄﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﲟﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻗﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺄﺓ؛ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﺴﺒﺒﲔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻗﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﺗﺮﺙ ﰲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﺘﺎﺩﺍ ﻣﻠﻮﺛﺎ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺮﻭﻧـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠـﻰ ﻋﻜـﺲ‬‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺜﺎ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳـﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺻﺒﻐﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺎﺩﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﱴ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺌﻬﺎ ﻣـﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﲑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻃﺮﺩﻳﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻴﻞ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ؛ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸـﺄﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ؛ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﺼﺪﻕ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻐـﻴﲑ ﺳـﻠﻮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺗﺴﻴﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻓﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻳﻀـﺎ ﺗﻐـﻴﲑﺍ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺄﺓ‪.32‬‬ ‫‪ -2-5-1‬ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺮﻭﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﲰﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪(...،‬؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﳒﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﲤﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻷﻧﺸﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳒﻤﺖ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،33‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻀﺮﺭ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺛﺔ "ﺗﺸﺮﻧﻮﺑﻴﻞ" ﺳﻨﺔ ‪1986‬ﻡ؛ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﳒﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﻘﺪﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-5-1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻔﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ؛ ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﲡﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻗﻞ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺗﺒﲏ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ‪:34‬‬ ‫ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲡﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ( ﻣﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺟـﺪﺍ ﻭﻟﻴﺴـﺖ‬‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﺣﺠﻤﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﳛﺘﺬﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻷﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ؛‬ ‫ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺴـﺆﻭﻟﻴﺎﺕ؛‬‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺛـﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺑﺈﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ "ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻔـﺎﺀﺍﺕ" )‪ ،(Modèle des ressources et des compétences‬ﳒـﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼـﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﳑﻴﺰﺓ ﻛﻘﺼﺮ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4-5-1‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ )‪(Affiliation internationale‬‬

‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﳎﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﻫﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﺒﲎ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﺎ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻛﺈﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻀـﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﲤﺎﺭﺳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲰﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﲨﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺎﻉ ﻋـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻐﻮﻃﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻉ )‪ (Filiales‬ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﲝﻜﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﻤﺎﺋﻬـﺎ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻌـﺎﺕ ﺻـﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (Groupes industriels‬ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﻧﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﳉﻨﺴﻴﺎﺕ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺍﺕ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﺮﻭﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺻـﺮﺍﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻮﻕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺮﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺸـﻂ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.35‬‬ ‫‪ -5-5-1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ )‪ (Innovation‬ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻟﻺﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﻨﺖ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻫﺠﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺳـﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺇﻧﺘـﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻼﺀﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜـﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪36‬؛ ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌـﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻔﻬـﻮﻡ "ﺍﻟﻨﻈـﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﻨـﺪﻣﺞ )ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺪﳎـﺔ(" ‪(Integrated‬‬ ‫)‪ Management System / Système de Management Intégré‬ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺴﻔﺔ ﲝﻴﺚ ﳚﻤﻊ ﺑـﲔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6-5-1‬ﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﲟﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺇﺳﺘﺜﻤﺮﺕ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ 37‬ﻻ ﻳﻔﻜﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺮﻗﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺟﺰﺀﻩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺃﺻـﻨﺎﻑ ﻫـﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -1-2‬ﺃﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺕ ‪" :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺎﻋﻲ" )‪(Comportement écodéfensif‬؛ "ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺜﻞ" )‪ (Comportement écoconformiste‬ﻭ"ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻋﻲ" )‪.(Comportement écosensible‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬

‫‪ -1-1-2‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﻣﺎﱄ ﲝﺖ ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﳌﻦ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﺞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﻫـﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﳚﺐ ﲡﻨﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼـﻠﺤﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ‪-‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺃﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ -‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﲏ ﻭﻫﻲ ﳎﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺿـﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﻱ ﻏﲑ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻏﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺃ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺃﺻـﺒﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﲡﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-1-2‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺜﻞ )ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﺘﺜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺬﻫﺐ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﱴ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﳍﺎ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻻ ﻣﻔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﲢﻤﻠـﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺍﻫﺎ؛ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﺄﻣﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﳜﻔﺾ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﺘﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺪﻣﺞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘـﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺬﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﳑﺘﺜﻞ ﻫﻮ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺮﺭ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺟﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻯ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-1-2‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ "ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺒﺎﻗﻲ" )‪ .(Proactif‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﰲ ﻣﺴـﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺪﺩﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘـﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜـﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺫﻭ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻣﺎ ﳓﻮ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺪﺩ( ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ؛ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻨﺒـﺄ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺗﺘﺨﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﺟﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻓﻌـﻼ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﲎ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﺼﻮﳍﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺸـﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ )ﺃﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﲎ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﺎ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻋﻴﺎ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ؛ ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .39‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﱪﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﻨﺎﺹ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﳓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺫﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻭﻳﻨﻤـﻮ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﺮﺩ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻊ؛ ﻓﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻟـ"ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ" )‪ (PNUE‬ﺻﺪﺭ ﰲ ﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ ‪2008‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺣﺠـﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺑـ ‪ 1370‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ 2740‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪2020‬ﻡ‪40‬؛‬ ‫ ﲢﺴﲔ "ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ" )‪ (Qualité du site‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﺑﻴـﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴـﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ؛‬ ‫ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -2-2‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻘـﺎﺭﺑﺘﲔ ﻹﺩﻣـﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪" :41‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ" )‪ (Approche additive‬ﻭ"ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ" )‪.(Approche systémique‬‬ ‫‪ -1-2-2‬ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻛﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣـﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻣﻜﻤﻼ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺫﻭ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻤـﺘﻐﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﳍﺎ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﲏ؛ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﳝﻴـﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜـﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻮﻛﺎ ﺩﻓﺎﻋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﱴ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴـﺎﺋﺪﻳﻦ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ؛ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻮﺻﻒ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﳑﺘﺜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﳊﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﺎ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﳌـﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ؛ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌـﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌـﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ )ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺒﻜﺮﺍ ﰲ ﺳﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻷﻫﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-2-2‬ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭﻱ ﰲ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴـﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺗﻐـﻴﲑﺍ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﻫﻨﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺳﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺬﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻣـﺎ ﻓﺮﻋﻴـﺎ ﻟﻨﻈـﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ "ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ" )‪ ،(Eco-fonction‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺿﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ؛ ﻓﻤﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺳـﻌﺮ ﺁﻟـﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘـﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻌﻄﻰ ﳎﺮﺩ ﺑﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺠﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﻭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﲤﻜﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ‪‬ﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﲢﻔﻴﺰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻬﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﲤﺎﺭﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺇﻗﺘﻨﺎﺹ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻧﺸﺄﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺭﺑﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻹﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺩﺍﻓﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺃﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻋﻮﻥ ﲞﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺧﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﺮﺍ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻫﻮ ﺻﺎﱀ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺇﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻬـﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺩﻭﺍﻓـﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﲝﻮﺙ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺖ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﳌﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺒﺬﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫‪" -1‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ" )‪ (Stakeholders Théory / Théorie des parties prenantes‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺼﺎﱀ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺒﻨﺎﻩ "ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﲪﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ" )‪.(Shareholder Théory / Théorie des actionnaires‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﺓ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﲟﻌﺎﳉﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺣﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ )‪.(Command and control‬‬‫‪ -4‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ؛ ﰒ ﺗﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺇﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﻌﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻮﱄ ﺇﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻘﻖ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﺎﺀﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺷﻌﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻃﻤﻮﺡ ﺷﻌﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻺﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻬﺪﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪- Persais E, La relation entre l’organisation et son environnement : le cas de l’écologie, Revue‬‬ ‫‪Française de Marketing, n°167, 1998, pp 27-41.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪- Bonnieux F & Desaigues B, Economie et politiques de l’environnement, Dalloz, Paris, 1998, pp‬‬ ‫‪124-125.‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫ﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﲝﻴﺚ‬‫( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻷ‬Technologie propre) "‫ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ "ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ‬-8 ‫ ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ‬،(Technologie de/en bout de chaîne) "‫ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ؛ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ "ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬ .‫ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺎﰿ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ‬،(End-of-pipe Technology) "‫ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ "ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬ 9 - Salamitou J, Management environnemental : application à la norme ISO 14001 révisée, Dunod, Paris, 2004, p24.

10 - Raspiller S & Riedinger N, Les différences de sévérité environnementale entre pays influencent-elles les comportements de localisation des groupes français ?, Economie et prévision, N°169, Paris, 2005, pp197-210.

.‫( ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‬2 ‫ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﱄ )ﺭﻗﻢ‬-11 ‫ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻮ‬،‫ ﺇﻥ ﺇﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‬-12 .‫ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬،‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ 13 - Chiroleu-Assouline M, Efficacité comparée des instruments de régulation environnementale,

Notes de synthèse du SESP (Ministère de l'Ecologie, de l'Energie, du développement durable et de l'Aménagement du territoire), n° 167, Paris, 2007, p6. ‫( ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺻﺎﻏﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻷﳌﺎﱐ ﻫﺎﻳﺰﻧﱪﺝ‬Le principe d'incertitude) "‫ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ "ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﻘﲔ‬-14

‫ ﻭ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ؛ ﺃﻱ‬،‫ﻡ‬1927 ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﺃﻥ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺘﲔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺿﺌﻴﻞ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻮﺭﺕ‬‫( ﻫﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﰎ ﺑﺮﻫﺎ‬Théorème d'incomplétude) "‫ "ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ )ﺑﺮﻫﺎﻥ( ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬-15 .‫ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺘﲔ ﻭﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‬،‫ﻡ‬1931 ‫ﻏﻮﺩﻝ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ 16 - Beaumais O & Chiroleu-Assouline M, Economie de l’environnement, Bréal, Paris, 2001, pp78-83.

،(2008/10/25 ‫ )ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ‬،‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ‬،‫ ﺃﻱ ﻫﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬:‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﳝﺔ‬،‫ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺴﻜﻮ‬-17 http://www.unesco.org/most/sd_arab/Fiche3a.htm

18

- OCDE, Les approches volontaires dans les politiques de l’environnement : Efficacité et

combinaison avec d’autres instruments d’intervention, OCDE, Paris, 2003, pp20-21.

19 - Bürgenmeier B, Economie du développement durable, De Boeck, Bruxelles, 2éme édition, 2005, pp138-140.

20 - Persais E, Op-cit, pp30-31.

21 - Boiral O, Protéger l’environnement naturel et la santé des travailleurs, Revue Internationale de Gestion, Volume 22, N°4, Montréal, 1997, p51.

22 - Chauveau A & Rosé J.J, L’entreprise responsable, Editions d’organisation, Paris, 2003, p11.

23 - Folus D, Apports de l’assurance et des marché de capitaux à la gestion des risques environnementaux, XIIème Conférence de l’AIMS, Carthage, Juin 2003, pp10-12 24 - Lanoie P & Laplante B, Des billets verts pour des entreprises vertes, Revue Internationale de Gestion, Volume 17, N°4, Montréal, 1992, pp41-47.

25 - Laville E, L’entreprise verte, Village Mondial, Paris, 2002, p71.

‫ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﳑﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﳎﺎﻟﺲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ‬،‫ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬-26 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﱪﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺭﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ )ﺍﻹﺷﻬﺎﺩ ﺑﺴﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺎ( ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎ‬ 24

2010 - 2009 / 07 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

27

- Boiral O & Jolly D, Stratégie, compétitivité et écologie, Revue Française de Gestion, N° 89, Paris, 1992, pp80-95.

28 - Lanoie P & Tanguay G.A, Dix exemples de rentabilité financière liés à une saine gestion environnementale, Cahier de recherche CIRANO, N°05-98, Montréal, 1998, p3.

29 - Chauveau A & Rosé J.J, Op-cit, pp278-280.

30 - Butel-Bellini B, l’intégration de la donnée écologique dans la gestion de l’entreprise : une analyse contingente au niveau des sites de production, Thèse de Doctorat en sciences de gestion, IAE, Université des sciences et technologies de Lille, 1997, pp192-194.

31 - Boiral O, Environnement et gestion, Les Presses de l’Université Laval, Laval, 2007, p299.

32 - Ibid, pp180-181.

33 - Gallez C & Moroncini A, Le manager et l’environnement, Presse polytechniques et universitaires Romandes, Lausanne, 1ére édition, 2003, pp1-2.

34 - Persais E, Op-cit, pp36-37.

35 - Froger G & Andriamahefazafy F, Les stratégies environnementales des organisations internationales dans les pays en développement : continuité ou ruptures ?, Mondes en développement, Volume 31, N°124, Bruxelles, 2003, pp49-76

.222‫ ﺹ‬،2002 ،‫ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‬،‫ ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‬،‫ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺋﻞ‬،‫ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬،‫ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﺍﻭﻱ‬-36

‫ ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‬-37 .‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‬ 38 - Butel-Bellini B, Op-cit, pp141-150 ‫ ﺍﳊﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﻢ( ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﰲ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬،‫ﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ )ﻛﱪ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ‬-39 .‫ﳎﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬ 40 - PNUE, Information Presse, Programme des Nations Unies pour l'environnement (PNUE), En ligne, (Page consulté le 15/12/2008), http://www.unep.org/Documents.Multilingual/Default.asp?DocumentID=545&ArticleID=5929&l=fr 41

- Butel-Bellini B, La prise en compte de la protection de l’environnement dans le management

de l'entreprise, Journée d’étude AIMS : Développement durable et entreprise, Angers (France), 2003, pp8-9.

25

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺑﻮﻣﻌﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﺎﺱ‪ ‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺳﻄﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺳﻄﻴﻒ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﻴﻠﺔ ﲜﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻏﻞ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﻠﻔﺔ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻭﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﲔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺣﺪ ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻫﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻮﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺪﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺎﹰ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ؛ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﲰﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳊﻀﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻭﺍﻻﳒﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺎﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﲟﺎ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺷﻬﺪﻧﺎ ﺍﳒﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﲤﻜﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺬﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﻖ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺷﻬﺪﻧﺎ ﺇﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻃﺮﺃﺕ ﺗﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺟﺬﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻟﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺳﻨﺪﺍ ﺩﺍﻋﻤﺎ ﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﻛﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻞ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺗﺘﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻫﻮ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺳﺒﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﻌﺎﰿ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ؛‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ؛‬ ‫‪.5‬ﺳﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻄﺎﳌﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺣﱴ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻖ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ‬

‫ﻛﺒﲑ ﲟﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ .1‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﳕﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﱂ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ‬ ‫‪27‬‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺯﺕ ﻧﻘﻠﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﲟﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺟﻮﺏ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﲰﻲ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1987‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﳉﻨﺔ )‪ (Brundtland‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ "ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،"2‬ﻓﻬﻲ "ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ."3‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﻘﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻄﺮﺩﺓ ﲤﻜﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻭﺗﻮﻇﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﳏﺼﻠﺔ ﳚﲏ‬ ‫ﲦﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﲡﲏ ﲦﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺟﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﰲ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﺮﺩ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﲑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺳﺎﺋﺪ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﴰﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﲝﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﳏﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺇﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺛﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻄﺮﺩ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻭﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﲔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺣـﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺧﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ‪ .‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘـﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼـﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻠﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺘﺪﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺇﳕﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.5‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺭﻳـﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ "ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮ ﻳﻘﻊ ﰲ ﺻﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳛﻖ ﳍﻢ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﳛﻴﻮﺍ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺋﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ‪ ."6‬ﻓﻼ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺸﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﻬﻠﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻚ ﻓﲑﻭﺱ ﻧﻘـﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﲟﻼﻳﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮ ﰲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﲝﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﻼﻳﲔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﺒﻬﻢ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .7‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺭﻏﲔ ﺗﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ " ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔـﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺛﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ."8‬ﻓﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴـﺔ ﻭﺗﺴـﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻏﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺣﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑـﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴـﺘﻮﻯ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻏﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻋﺎ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﻩ ﻟﻴﺸﻤﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﳉﺴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﺴﻊ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺎﺩﻳﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳـﺪ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﲰﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‬

‫‪28‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳊﻀﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻱ ﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺎﺕ ﻫـﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣـﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﲢﺴﻦ ﻣﻄﺮﺩ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻣﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻻﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1-3‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻣﺎ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﻴﺸﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﳎﻬﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻣﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺘﻪ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤـﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺒـﺪﺃ ﺃﻥ ﻫـﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ(‪.9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻓﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻛـﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﻘـﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (1‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﲢﺴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺸﻴﺔ‪ ،10‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻟﻸﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺸﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﻴﺸﻬﺎ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻧﻘﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﳜﺺ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺽ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻘﻠﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻃﺎﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻠﻴﺔ(‪ .11‬ﻓﺎﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻘﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﺖ ‪ %28‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪.122002‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺗﻐﲑﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻘﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ ،(3‬ﳒﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ ﻛﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻃﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻨﺴﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪ 13‬ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻔﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻔﺘﺮﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻮﲪﺮﻭﻥ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜـﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔـﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻘـﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻃﺎﻥ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﳝﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻛـﻞ ﺳﻨـﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺀ ‪ 30000‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ %50‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺸـﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴـﺔ‪ .14‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻝ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )ﺭﻗﻢ ‪،(2‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﻭﺍﳉﻨﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻠﻎ ‪ %10.5‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .2006‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻳﺔ ‪ 60‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﻓﻤﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻨﺲ ﺍﻷﻧﺜﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﻋﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺎﺷﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺽ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺮ‬ ‫ﳝﺜﻼﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ‪ 35‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 60‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(3‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻼﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺽ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻡ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺮ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ ‪ %4.38‬ﻭ‪ %2.10‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺳﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﲤﺜﻞ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %31‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻡ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %12.5‬ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺮ‪.‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺗﻜﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺿﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-3‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1970‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫" ﺣﺎﻟـﺔ ﻟﻌـﺪﻡ ﺍﳌـﺮﺽ"‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1970‬ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻋﺎ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﲤﺜﻞ "ﺣﺎﻟـﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠـﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌـﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻘﻠـﻲ‪ ."15‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻋﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮﺍ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2000‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻥ ﺑـ "ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ‪ ،2000‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﺤﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ" ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﻧﺸﺮﻩ ﰲ ‪ 24‬ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .2000‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺔ ﻫﺪﻓﻬـﺎ‪ ،16‬ﻭﺿـﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤـﺔ ﺻﺤﻴـﺔ ﺗﺴﻤـﺢ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑـﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟـﺔ ﻓـﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘـﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴـﺔ "‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1-2-3‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ " ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﳎﻬﻮﺩ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺪﻓﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻌـﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋـﺎﺕ‪ ."17‬ﻓﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﲨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1-1-2-3‬ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻫﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﺘﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﲔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﰲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻴﺴﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺪﻑ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻳﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﲤﺜﻞ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﺤﻲ؛ ﻭﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻣﺼﺤﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ) ‪Espérance de Vie Corrigé de‬‬ ‫‪ .(l’Incapacité‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ "ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ"‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ‬ ‫‪30‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﻲﺀ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺟﺰﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻟﻪ ﺍﳘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻝ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﻛﺎﻟﺸﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻰ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﻤﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﻘﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﲑﺍﺕ )‪ .(Paludisme, Schistosomiase‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳒﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﻠﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺩﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻔﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-1-2-3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ " ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ ."18‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﳊﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻘﺒﲔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﲢﻔﻴﺰﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﺍ ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﻢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺎﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺣﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﺮﻑ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺼﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻨﻒ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺣﺘـﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺮﺿـﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻰ ﻭ ﳜﺺ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺸﻐﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻄﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴـﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑـﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤـﻲ ﻟﻼﻧﺸﻐﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺿﻰ ﻭﻋﺎﺋﻼ‪‬ﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ "ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺍﺀ" ﺃﻗﻞ ﺇﳊﺎﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎﺀ" ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﺘﻔﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﲞﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3-1-2-3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺯﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺄﻥ‬ ‫"ﺗﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﻨﺎ" ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺎﺩﻻ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺼﻠﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺄﻥ " ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻐﺬﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻮﳍﻢ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﻢ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ ."19‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺎﺋﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻏﲑ ﻏﺬﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﺋﻼﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳚﺐ‬ ‫‪31‬‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﺴﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﻢ ﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-2-3‬ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻞ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ .(5‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋ‪‬ﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺘﺄﰐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 72‬ﻭ‪ 37‬ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 45‬ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 81‬ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ )ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .(4‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﲟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺛﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺆ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻠـﺖ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒـﺔ ‪ 84‬ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ‪ 192‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮﺓ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ .110‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﳊﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳒﺪﻫﺎ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 91‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ .75‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﻛﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺑﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﻨﻬﻮ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻻﺯﻟﺖ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ "ﺑﺎﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻰ‪ ،‬ﻧﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ"‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻠـﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻰ‪.20‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﲑ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺱ ﰲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﻓﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﻮﺍﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ‪ 98‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻮﺃ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 114‬ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ‪ 192‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺛﺮﺕ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ – ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ -‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴـﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1-4‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪،‬‬

‫ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻬﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺬﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺿﻌﻒ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﻗﻠﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1-1-4‬ﺿﻌﻒ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﱴ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (6‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨـﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺼﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺠﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴـﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨـﺎﺗﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪32‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻓﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﰐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﱂ‬ ‫ﺃﲨﻊ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ‪ %13.1‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1999‬ﻟﲑﺗﻔﻊ ﺇﱃ ‪ %15.2‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .2003‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪ %9‬ﻭ‪ .%15.2‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻧﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ %10.8‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %11‬ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪1999‬‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .2003‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺻﺮﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ %13.1‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﲡﻬﺎ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﱂ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ ،%3.8‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﻭﺗﻮﻧﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻧﻔﺎﻗﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ‪ %5‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ ﳑﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﻧﻈﲑﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻝ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺣﱴ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺼﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻃﻨﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﲟﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺼﻴـﺐ ﺍﻟﻔـﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (7‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1999‬ﺇﱃ ‪.2003‬‬ ‫ﲝﺴﺐ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﺗﺄﰐ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺃﲨﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ‪ 5711‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2003‬ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑـ ‪ 5035‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﰒ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﺑـ ‪ 3204‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﱂ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ 241‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1999‬ﻭﺳﻨﺔ ‪.2003‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﺣﺘﻠﺖ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﰲ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 900‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻄﺮ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ 862‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2003‬ﻭﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪661‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ ﺑـ ‪ 573‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ‪ 71‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 1999‬ﺇﱃ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2003‬ﺑﺎﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ 171‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪.%70.66‬‬ ‫‪ .2-1-4‬ﻗﻠﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﺀ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﱂ ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺒﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺷﻬﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 30416000‬ﻧﺴﻤﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2000‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 31848000‬ﻧﺴﻤﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،21%4.07‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﺓ ﱂ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪.%2.8‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﳌﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2000‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺳﻮﺀﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺎﺻﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺤﻮﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ %55‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪2003‬‬

‫‪33‬‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ،%22‬ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺏ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺤﻪ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(8‬‬

‫‪ ،%20‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﰲ‬

‫ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﻮ ‪ %2‬ﻭﺍﳉﻨﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﰊ‬

‫‪،%1‬‬

‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻌﻘﺪ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺪ ‪ 13‬ﺃﺑﺮﻳﻞ ‪ 2008‬ﰲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻪ ﺑﺮﺋﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻮﺗﻔﻠﻴﻘﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﲎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳋﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .22‬ﺇﻥ ﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻨﺠﺮ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-4‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﳒﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪:23‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳓﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﰐ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﺮ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻀﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻁ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﳉﻔﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﶈﺮﻭﻣﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﳏﺴّﻦ ‪ %15‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪2004‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲤﺜﻞ ‪ %13‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪.242002‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﺔ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ )ﻣﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻷﲰﻨﺖ ﲟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪،‬ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﻤﺴﻴﻠﺖ ﻭﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﲰﺪﺍﻝ‬‫ﺑﻌﻨﺎﺑﺔ ‪ ...‬ﺍﱁ (؛ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﻴـﺚ ﺑﻠـﻎ ﺣﺠـﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳـﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 325100‬ﻃﻦ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ‪25‬؛‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﳝﻮﻏﺮﺍﰲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺣﻀﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﳎﺘﻤﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﺮﺕ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﻭﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻵﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﺣﺎﺩﺍ ﰲ ﺃﻣﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻮﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺬﺍﺋﻲ‪ 26‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﰲ ﺃﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﰲ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ....،‬ﺇﱁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3-4‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﺀ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪ :‬ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ (2007) 27‬ﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ ،104‬ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 0.733‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2005‬ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 108‬ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2002‬ﲟﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫‪ ،280.704‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (9‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ .2005/1975‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 51‬ﺣﺴـﺐ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﱐ ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪2005‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ،29%21.5‬ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ‬

‫‪43‬‬

‫ﺳﻨﺔ‬

‫‪2002‬‬

‫ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ .30%21.5‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻴﺸﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻠﻎ ‪ %2‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ )‪ (2005-1990‬ﻭ‪ %14.4‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻜـﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻴﺸـﻮﻥ ﺑـ ‪ 2‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪ .31‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻠﻎ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺟﻴﲏ‪ 32‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ ‪،35.5‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﺍﺭﻕ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻴﺸﻮﻥ ﲢﺖ ﻋﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2007‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻠﻎ ‪ %22.6‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )‪ (2004‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ %12‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .1988‬ﻓﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻃﻦ ﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺪﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪34‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻔﺸﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ‪ .33‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .5‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪:‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 84‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺸﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﻘﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻨﻘﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻃﺎﻥ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﲢﺘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 45‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 81‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﲰﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺑﺎﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﲝﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻱ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﻦ ﻣﻄﺮﺩ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:34‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻣﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺄﻫﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻲ ﰲ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‬‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻸﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺼﺎﺋﻴﲔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﳍﻀﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻃﲑ؛ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 26‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻭ ‪ 8‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻼﺝ ﻭ‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 92‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺝ؛‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﻃﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ؛‬‫ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺪﻻﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﻨﻴﺴﺔ ﻭﳏﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﳌﺰﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪:35‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺴﺴﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻟﻸﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺮﺑﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺒﻴﺔ؛‬‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻛﻦ ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ؛‬‫‪35‬‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﲟﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﲝﻮﺙ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﻦ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻷﻥ ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺋﻦ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﱪﺍﻣﺞ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪.... ،‬‬ ‫‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﺍﱐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﳊﻀﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﲞﻠﻖ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻼﺕ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ؛‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻜﻴﻔﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﳋﻔﺾ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ؛‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ؛‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﻒ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﳍﺬﺍ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﺎ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻤﺔ؛‬‫ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﺔ؛‬‫ ﺇﺫﻛﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ؛‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗ‪‬ﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬‫ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻃﲏ ﻟﻠﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ؛‬‫ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻨﺪﺍ ﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﻋﻤﺎ ﳍﺎ؛‬ ‫ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﲤﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺼّﺮ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻑ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﻹﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﲣﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ؛‬‫ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﹼ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﺘﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗ‪‬ﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻃﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﺮﺿﲔ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ‪‬ﻢ ﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬﻭﻥ ﻭﳏﺮﻛﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ؛‬ ‫ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﺦ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ – ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ‬‫ﺍﳊﻀﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ -‬ﰲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻭﻣﺒﻬﻤﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﺇﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻏﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬﺓ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﲝﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﻬﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺄﻣﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺛﺮﺕ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻒ ﳐﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﳊﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻮﺀ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺛﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺯﺣﻒ ﺍﻻﲰﻨﺖ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲣﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﺤﻲ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻔﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻬﻮﺽ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ اﻟﺠﺪاول‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ .(1‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﻓـﻲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻓـﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﲔ ﺳﻨﺔ‬

‫‪ 1990‬ﻭ‪2005‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬

‫‪1990‬‬

‫‪1992‬‬

‫‪1995‬‬

‫‪1997‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬

‫‪2002‬‬

‫‪2005‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ‬

‫‪67.157‬‬

‫‪67.916‬‬

‫‪68.649‬‬

‫‪69.138‬‬

‫‪70.22‬‬

‫‪70.94‬‬

‫‪71.734‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‬

‫‪2.8‬‬

‫‪2.9‬‬

‫‪3.1‬‬

‫‪3.3‬‬

‫‪3.5‬‬

‫‪3.5‬‬

‫‪3.4‬‬

‫‪Source: Conseil National Economique et Social, Rapport National sur Le Développement Humain,‬‬ ‫‪Algérie 2006, p.21‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ .(2‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﻭﺍﳉﻨﺲ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬

‫‪2006‬‬

‫ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻧﺎﺙ‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫‪18-0‬‬

‫‪2.9‬‬

‫‪2.4‬‬

‫‪2.6‬‬

‫‪24-19‬‬

‫‪3.4‬‬

‫‪3.0‬‬

‫‪35-25‬‬

‫‪3.6‬‬

‫‪5.1‬‬

‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫‪4.3‬‬

‫‪59-35‬‬

‫‪12.7‬‬

‫‪24.3‬‬

‫‪18.5‬‬

‫‪ 60‬ﻓﻤﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬

‫‪42‬‬

‫‪60.4‬‬

‫‪51‬‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫‪8.4‬‬

‫‪12.6‬‬

‫‪10.5‬‬

‫‪Source: Ministère de la Santé, Office National des Statistiques, Suivi de la situation des Enfants et‬‬ ‫‪des Femmes, Rapport 2007, p.32.‬‬

‫‪37‬‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ .(3‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬

‫‪2006‬‬

‫ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‬

‫‪18-0‬‬

‫‪24-19‬‬

‫‪34-25‬‬

‫‪59-35‬‬

‫‪60+‬‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻡ‬

‫‪0.06‬‬

‫‪0.13‬‬

‫‪0.57‬‬

‫‪7.82‬‬

‫‪31.15‬‬

‫‪4.38‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺮ‬

‫‪0.16‬‬

‫‪0.23‬‬

‫‪0.42‬‬

‫‪4.13‬‬

‫‪12.52‬‬

‫‪2.10‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬

‫‪0.22‬‬

‫‪0.26‬‬

‫‪0.46‬‬

‫‪2.91‬‬

‫‪10.59‬‬

‫‪1.70‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻮ‬

‫‪0.7‬‬

‫‪0.8‬‬

‫‪0.91‬‬

‫‪1.80‬‬

‫‪3.09‬‬

‫‪1.20‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‬

‫‪0.24‬‬

‫‪0.26‬‬

‫‪0.31‬‬

‫‪1.65‬‬

‫‪6.98‬‬

‫‪1.100‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫‪1.27‬‬

‫‪0.26‬‬

‫‪0.31‬‬

‫‪1.65‬‬

‫‪6.98‬‬

‫‪1.11‬‬

‫‪Source: Ministère de la Santé, Office National des Statistiques, Suivi de la situation des Enfants et‬‬ ‫‪des Femmes, Rapport 2007, p.32.‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(4‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪2005‬‬

‫ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ‬ ‫‪110‬‬

‫‪84‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬

‫‪91-90‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬

‫‪52-50‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﳒﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫‪99‬‬

‫‪75-74‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻻﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‬

‫‪45‬‬

‫‪81‬‬

‫‪114‬‬

‫‪Source: OMS: Rapport sur la Santé Dans Le Monde 2006, Organisation Mondiale de la Santé,‬‬ ‫‪Genève,, p.175‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(5‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫‪0.992‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬

‫‪0.994‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬

‫‪0.984‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫‪0.961‬‬

‫‪10‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫‪0.936‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ‬

‫‪0.916‬‬

‫‪16‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬

‫‪0.907‬‬

‫‪25‬‬

‫ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬

‫‪0.902‬‬

‫‪17‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬

‫‪0.906‬‬

‫‪26‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫‪0.894‬‬

‫‪26‬‬

‫ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ‬

‫‪0.879‬‬

‫‪27‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬

‫‪0.886‬‬

‫‪30‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫‪0.867‬‬

‫‪29‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬

‫‪0.882‬‬

‫‪41‬‬

‫ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬

‫‪0.836‬‬

‫‪37‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‬

‫‪0.838‬‬

‫‪38‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪43‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺮ‬

‫‪0.829‬‬

‫‪42‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫‪0.824‬‬

‫‪45‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫‪0.829‬‬

‫‪44‬‬

‫ﻗﻄﺮ‬

‫‪0.812‬‬

‫‪46‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‬

‫‪0.824‬‬

‫‪45‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬

‫‪0.810‬‬

‫‪53‬‬

‫ﻗﻄﺮ‬

‫‪0.813‬‬

‫‪52‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‬

‫‪0.785‬‬

‫‪72‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‬

‫‪0.774‬‬

‫‪81‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫‪0.701‬‬

‫‪75‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‬

‫‪0.770‬‬

‫‪83‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‬

‫‪0.698‬‬

‫‪82‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻦ‬

‫‪0.761‬‬

‫‪87‬‬

‫ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ‬

‫‪0.683‬‬

‫‪91‬‬

‫ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬

‫‪0.733‬‬

‫‪91‬‬

‫ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‬

‫‪0.664‬‬

‫‪94‬‬

‫ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ‬

‫‪0.723‬‬

‫‪103‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‬

‫‪0.637‬‬

‫‪97‬‬

‫ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‬

‫‪0.719‬‬

‫‪108‬‬

‫ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬

‫‪0.628‬‬

‫‪149‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‬

‫‪0.519‬‬

‫‪134‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‬

‫‪0.524‬‬

‫‪Source: OMS: Rapport Mondial sur la Santé dans le Monde, Pour un système de Santé Plus‬‬ ‫‪Performant, Genève 2000,, pp175-174.‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ .(6‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴـﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗـﺞ ﺍﶈﻠـﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟـﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ ﻭﺑﻌـﺾ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣـﺔ ﻣـﻦ ﺳﻨـﺔ ‪ 1999‬ﺇﱃ ﺳﻨـﺔ ‪2003‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬

‫‪1999‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬

‫‪2001‬‬

‫‪2002‬‬

‫‪2003‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫‪3.7‬‬

‫‪3.5‬‬

‫‪3.8‬‬

‫‪3.5‬‬

‫‪3.5‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬

‫‪4.6‬‬

‫‪4.7‬‬

‫‪4.9‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪5.1‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‬

‫‪5.5‬‬

‫‪5.6‬‬

‫‪5.7‬‬

‫‪5.6‬‬

‫‪5.4‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫‪4.3‬‬

‫‪4.2‬‬

‫‪4.7‬‬

‫‪4.5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫‪4.7‬‬

‫‪3.9‬‬

‫‪4.2‬‬

‫‪4.2‬‬

‫‪4.1‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻣﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬

‫‪3.8‬‬

‫‪3.2‬‬

‫‪3.7‬‬

‫‪3.4‬‬

‫‪3.3‬‬

‫ﻗﻄﺮ‬

‫‪3.6‬‬

‫‪2.8‬‬

‫‪2.9‬‬

‫‪3.3‬‬

‫‪2.7‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺮ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪5.2‬‬

‫‪5.4‬‬

‫‪5.9‬‬

‫‪5.8‬‬

‫ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‬

‫‪11.3‬‬

‫‪11.7‬‬

‫‪11.7‬‬

‫‪10.8‬‬

‫‪10.2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‬

‫‪1.9‬‬

‫‪1.7‬‬

‫‪1.6‬‬

‫‪1.8‬‬

‫‪2.7‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬

‫‪13.1‬‬

‫‪13.3‬‬

‫‪14‬‬

‫‪14.7‬‬

‫‪15.2‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬

‫‪9.3‬‬

‫‪9.3‬‬

‫‪9.4‬‬

‫‪9.7‬‬

‫‪10.1‬‬

‫ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬

‫‪10.8‬‬

‫‪10.6‬‬

‫‪10.8‬‬

‫‪10.8‬‬

‫‪11.1‬‬

‫‪Source: OMS: Rapport sur la Santé Dans Le Monde 2006, Organisation Mondiale de la Santé, Genève, pp.199-201.‬‬

‫‪39‬‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ .(7‬ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺩ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1999‬ﺇﱃ ﺳﻨﺔ‬

‫‪2003‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﲟﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ – ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻻﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪-‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬

‫‪1999‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬

‫‪2001‬‬

‫‪2002‬‬

‫‪2003‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫‪61‬‬

‫‪63‬‬

‫‪68‬‬

‫‪75‬‬

‫‪89‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬

‫‪56‬‬

‫‪54‬‬

‫‪57‬‬

‫‪60‬‬

‫‪72‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‬

‫‪122‬‬

‫‪114‬‬

‫‪118‬‬

‫‪120‬‬

‫‪137‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫‪329‬‬

‫‪372‬‬

‫‪387‬‬

‫‪373‬‬

‫‪366‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﺭﺕ‬

‫‪681‬‬

‫‪704‬‬

‫‪737‬‬

‫‪650‬‬

‫‪661‬‬

‫ﻗﻄﺮ‬

‫‪773‬‬

‫‪816‬‬

‫‪808‬‬

‫‪871‬‬

‫‪862‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺮ‬

‫‪68‬‬

‫‪71‬‬

‫‪63‬‬

‫‪71‬‬

‫‪55‬‬

‫ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‬

‫‪578‬‬

‫‪574‬‬

‫‪582‬‬

‫‪566‬‬

‫‪573‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‬

‫‪14‬‬

‫‪17‬‬

‫‪12‬‬

‫‪11‬‬

‫‪23‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬

‫‪4335‬‬

‫‪4588‬‬

‫‪4934‬‬

‫‪5324‬‬

‫‪5711‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬

‫‪2730‬‬

‫‪2404‬‬

‫‪2425‬‬

‫‪2637‬‬

‫‪3204‬‬

‫ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬

‫‪3881‬‬

‫‪3572‬‬

‫‪3774‬‬

‫‪4220‬‬

‫‪5035‬‬

‫‪Source: OMS: Rapport sur la Santé Dans Le Monde 2006, Organisation Mondiale de la Santé,‬‬ ‫‪Genève, pp.199-201‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ .(8‬ﻋـﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴـﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳـﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪2000‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴـــﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬

‫‪2001‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ 2000‬ﻭ‪2003‬‬

‫‪2002‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫‪2003‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬

‫‪35115‬‬

‫‪224‬‬

‫‪34770‬‬

‫‪217‬‬

‫‪33319‬‬

‫‪187‬‬

‫‪31004‬‬

‫‪177‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪962‬‬

‫‪14‬‬

‫‪600‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‬

‫‪13087‬‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫‪13465‬‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫‪13236‬‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫‪13466‬‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬

‫‪6416‬‬

‫‪31‬‬

‫‪2661‬‬

‫‪32‬‬

‫‪5960‬‬

‫‪32‬‬

‫‪6046‬‬

‫‪32‬‬

‫ﻋﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬

‫‪3393‬‬

‫‪392‬‬

‫‪3132‬‬

‫‪395‬‬

‫‪4244‬‬

‫‪412‬‬

‫‪3517‬‬

‫‪359‬‬

‫ﻋﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺩﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬

‫‪450‬‬

‫‪38‬‬

‫‪494‬‬

‫‪42‬‬

‫‪470‬‬

‫‪35‬‬

‫‪439‬‬

‫‪30‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫‪36‬‬

‫‪Source: Office National des Statistiques, www.ons.dz/santé‬‬

‫‪40‬‬

2010 - 2009 / 07 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

(2005-1975) ‫ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬.(9) ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ 2005

2000

1995

1990

1985

1980

1975

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬

0.733

0.702

0.672

0.652

0.613

0.562

0.511

‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬

Source: Human Report Development (2007-2008), United Nation Development Programm, New york,

: ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ .15.‫ ﺹ‬،1997 ‫ ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‬،‫ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‬،‫ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﺃﺳﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ‬1 2 Gélinier., O, Simon., F-X., Billard., J-P, Muler., J-L, Développement durable: Pour une entreprise compétitive et responsable, éd:ESF, 3ème éd, Paris 2005, p.21.

3 Gélinier., O, Simon., F-X., Billard., J-P, Muler., J-L, (2005), Ibid, p.19. .16.‫ ﺹ‬،‫ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬،(1997)‫ ﺃﺳﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ‬4 .11.‫ ﺹ‬،2001‫ ﺟﻴﻨﻴﻒ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‬،‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‬5 .46.‫ ﺹ‬،1992 ،‫ ﺭﻳﻮ ﺩﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﲑﻭ‬،‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬6 .5.‫ ﺹ‬،2007 ‫ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮ‬28 ‫ ﺍﳋﻤﻴﺲ‬،2202 ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬،‫ ﺻﺤﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺎﻅ‬،‫ ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﻛﺎﻇﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻴﺐ‬7 .8.‫ ﺹ‬،‫ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‬،(2007) ،‫ ﻛﺎﻇﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻴﺐ‬8 9 Castiel., D, Economie de la Santé : Quel Avenir, 2d : Management Société, Paris 1999, p.83.

10

Conseil National Economique et Social (2006), Ibid, p.23.

Kadar,M, Système et politique de Santé Au Magreb, Le 02 Juin 2003, le guide de la médecine et de la santé en Algérie, www.santémaghreb.com..

12 Kadar,M, (2003), Ibid.

11

‫ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬.2000 ‫ ﺳﻨﺔ‬%11 ‫ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲤﺜﻞ‬،2004 ‫ ﺳﻨﺔ‬%15 ‫ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺀ ﳏﺴﻦ‬13 .239.‫ ﺹ‬،(2009-2007) ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬ 14

Kourta., D, El, Concer: l’une des causes essentielles des décès en Algérie, El Watan, 10 avril 2005.

15

Santé et services sociaux, La Santé dans une perspective de Développement durable, Mémoire présenté au ministère de l’environnement dans le cadre de la consultation publique sur le Plan de Développement durable du Québec, Février 2005, p.17.

16 OMS: Rapport Mondial sur la Santé dans le Monde, Pour un système de Santé Plus Performant, Genève 2000, p.8.

17 OMS (2000), Ibid, p.9.

18 OMS (2000), Ibid, p.85.

19 OMS (2000), Ibid, p.86.

20

Kourta., D, (2005), Ibid.

21

www.ons.dz/santé.

23

. 2008 ‫ ﺃﺑﺮﻳﻞ‬13 ‫ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺆﻭﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪ‬22 Kadi., A, La Gestion de l’Eau en Algérie, Journal des Sciences Hydrauliques, Vol 42, n°2, Avril 1997, p.196. .www.pogar.org ‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﳕﺎﺋﻲ‬24

25

Samir., R, L’urgence de la mise en place en Algérie d’une stratégie pour une gestion efficace des déchets dangereux et la lutte contre la pollution industrielle, l’Expression jeudi 17 août 2006

– ‫ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬،‫ ﳐﱪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺾ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬، ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬: ‫ ﻋﺰﻭﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ‬26 .15، 14‫ ﺹ‬، 2001 ‫ﻗﺴﻨﻄﻴﻨﺔ‬ 27

Human Report Development (2007-2008), United Nation Development Programm, New york, p.245.

Human Report Development (2004), United Nation Development Programm, New york, p.141 29 Human Report Development (2007-2008), Ibid, p.254.

30 Human Report Development (2004), Ibid, p.148.

31 Human Report Development (2007-2008), Ibid, p.254.

28

41

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫‪ 32‬ﻳﻘﻴﺲ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺟﻴﲏ ﺍﻟﻼﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 100‬ﺍﻟﻼﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Kadi., A, (1997), p.196.‬‬

‫‪33‬‬

‫‪ 34‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺆﻭﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ‪ 13‬ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻞ ‪. 2008‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬

‫‪Kaid Tlilane., N, Espace, Emploi et Environnement: Cas de l’Algérie, Laboratoire Economie et Dévelopement,(2005),‬‬ ‫‪Université Abderrhmane Mira, p.7.‬‬

‫‪ 36‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﱵ ‪ 2000‬ﻭ‪ 2001‬ﰎ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪42‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﻌﺔ ‪Bental maghnia‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺑﻠﻤﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃ‪ /.‬ﻣﻜﻴﺪﻳﺶ & ﳏﻤﺪ ﺃ‪ /.‬ﺳﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺪﻑ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﳊﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﻌﺔ ‪ ، Bental Maghnia‬ﺪﻑ ﺗﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ‪،‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻭﺗﺴﺮﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ‪(Fuzzy set theory) 1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪LINGO‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺫﺭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺃﻥ ﲡﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣـﺔ ﻛ ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ـﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺬﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌـﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﲑﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﲰﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﳚﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﻘـﺪ ﻓﺮﺻـﺎﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺢ ‪،‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻬﺎ ‪ ،...‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﱄ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺗﻜـﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻃﺎﻗـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻃﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﺬﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫـﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ )‪ ،(Aggregate production planning‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺄﺩﱏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﻰ ) ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ‬ ‫ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﻌـﺔ ‪ Bental maghnia‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳـﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺜـﻞ‬ ‫ﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﺄﺩﱏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﰲ ﺿﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻴﻂ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﻌﺎﰿ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﱃ ‪-:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ؛‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ؛‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ‪.Bental maghnia‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪:‬‬ ‫"ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﲔ ‪ 6‬ﺇﱃ ‪18‬ﺷﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺒﺄ ﺑﻪ"‪ ،3‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻀﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺗﺤﺪ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻼ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪43‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪- : 4‬‬

‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ؛‬ ‫• ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﺩ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺮﳛﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻛﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ )ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ (...‬ﻭﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ (....‬؛‬ ‫• ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﰲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ؛‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﻢ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻲ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ،‬ﳚﻌﻞ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺛﺮﻩ ﲟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺩﱏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﺄﺩﱏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺃﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺑﺬﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻤﺬﺟﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1955‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ‪ Holt, Modigliani , Mûth and Simon 5‬ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﰎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﲣﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻒ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1955‬ﲤﻜﻦ ‪6 Bowman‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ )ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺟﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪،‬‬

‫‪44‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﻴﺔ ) ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ (‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻡ ‪7 Hess and Hanssmann‬ﳕﻮﺫﺟﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﲤﻜﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1960‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪،‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ‪،‬ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ‪ ،8Buffa and Miller (1979‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫)‪ ، Hackman and Leachman (1989)10 ،Elsayed and Boucher (1985‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ‪Johanson and Montgomery‬‬ ‫‪ (1974)11‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪12 (1981) Khoshnevis‬ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ Eilon(1975)13‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ )‪ (Subcontract‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﲔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻌﱪ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻴﻂ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆ ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺟﺪﺍ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺿﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻛﺪﺓ )ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-3‬ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‪:‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺳﻨﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻻ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﺎ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺘﲔ ﻭﳘﺎ ‪-:14‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ؛‬ ‫• ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ : vit‬ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻮﺝ ‪ i‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ؛‬ ‫‪ cit‬ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻮﺝ ‪ i‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t + 1‬؛‬ ‫‪ : rt‬ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪ : d it‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ‪ i‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪ : K it‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻮﺝ ‪ i‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪ I oi :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻮﺝ ‪ i‬؛‬ ‫‪ : Pit‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻮﺝ ‪ i‬ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪ : I it‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻮﺝ ‪ i‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪ : H t‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪45‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ : Ft‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺮﳛﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪ : I it .Min‬ﺃﺩﱏ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﳐﺰﻭﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻮﺝ ‪ i‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪ : Wt‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪ : WMin‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪ : WMax‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬؛‬ ‫‪ : N‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ؛‬ ‫‪ : T‬ﺍﻷﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ؛‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ‪ :‬ﺗﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ؛‬ ‫‪T‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪t =1‬‬

‫‪t =1‬‬

‫‪t =1‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫‪MinZ 1 = ∑∑ (vit Pit ) + ∑ (rtWt + ht H t + f t Ft ) + ∑ (cit I it ) + ∑ ( H t + Ft ) .‬‬ ‫‪i =1 t =1‬‬

‫ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪:‬‬

‫‪Pit + I i ,t −1 − I it = d it‬‬ ‫‪I it ≥ I it .Min‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Wt − Wt −1 − H t + Ft = 0‬‬ ‫‪WMin ≤ Wt ≤ WMax‬‬

‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻭﺗﺴﺮﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Pit − K it * Wt ≤ 0‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Pit , I it ,Wt , H t , Ft ≥ 0‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﺎﺋﺺ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻛﺪﺓ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﺜﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ...‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1965‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪15L. Zadeh‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ )‪ ،( fuzzy set théory‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﴰﻠﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻴﺎﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1978‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ 16 Zimmerman‬ﺃﻭﻝ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺩﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ )‪ ، (Membership functions‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ‪ 17‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،1‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:18‬‬

‫‪46‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪⎧1.........if .....z i ≤ z i′‬‬ ‫‪⎪ u‬‬ ‫‪⎪ z − zi‬‬ ‫‪f i ( z i ) = λ = ⎨ iu‬‬ ‫)‪...if ....z i′ < z i < z iu ..................(1‬‬ ‫‪′‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪⎪ i‬‬ ‫‪⎪0.............if ....z ≥ z u‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫⎩‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ : z i′‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﱏ ﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ؛‬ ‫‪ : z iu‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ؛‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ )‪ Zimmerman(1978‬ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻲ‪: 19‬‬ ‫‪Max..λ‬‬

‫‪st‬‬

‫) ‪λ ≤ (z iu − z i ) (z iu − z i′‬‬ ‫‪Cx ≤ c‬‬ ‫]‪λ ∈ [0..1‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ ‪ : λ‬ﺗﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﻭﻫﻲ ﳏﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ‪ 0‬ﻭ ‪ 1‬؛‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ Zimmermann‬ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ λ‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺭﺿﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ) ‪Degree of‬‬

‫‪ (satisfaction of the decision maker‬ﻭﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﳏﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ‪ 0‬ﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟـﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ‪ ،%100‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﺭﺍﺽ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ، %100‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺿﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﻣﻨﻌﺪﻣـﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﻏﲑ ﺭﺍﺽ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ‪ z i′ < z i < z iu‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ‪ λ‬ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ ، ( z iu − z i ) z iu − z i′‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻈﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ، λ‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪Bental‬‬ ‫‪.Maghnia‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ‪: Bental Maghnia‬‬

‫‪ .1-5‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴـﺔ ‪ :Bental Maghnia‬ﲣﺘﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﻌﺔ ‪ Bental Maghnia‬ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﰲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺮﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪.....‬ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Bentonite‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﺘﻮﻧﻴﺖ )‪(BEN‬‬ ‫‪Terre Décolorante‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺭﺍﻧﺖ )‪(TD‬‬ ‫‪Carbonate de calcium‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻡ )‪(CAL‬‬

‫‪47‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )‪3×8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪175‬‬ ‫ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﳋﻤﻴﺲ ﺣﻴﺖ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺭﺍﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪68‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﲔ ﺇﱃ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻓﻮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﳚﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﳍﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﰲ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،CAL،TD،BEN‬ﻭﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺘﺬﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ‪ 4 ،3 ،2‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺪﺭﺑـ ‪ 24‬ﻳﻮﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺗﺬﺑﺬ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺛﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﲰﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴـﺔ ‪ ،Bental maghnia‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ Bental maghnia‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ‪-:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ 6‬ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ )‪ 6‬ﺃﺷﻬﺮ( ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﳚﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ؛‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ )‪ (BEN ,TD,CAL,‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ‪-:‬‬ ‫‪I 10 = 1856.25.Tons.of .BEN‬‬ ‫‪I 20 = 1029.Tons.of .TD‬‬ ‫‪I 30 = 1860.Ton.of .CAL‬‬

‫‪ .4‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ )ﺷﻬﺮ( ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﳐﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 500‬ﻃﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻮﺝ؛‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻭﺗﺴﺮﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﰎ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺮﳛﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ht = 5178.DA :‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ‪ f t = 4155.DA‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ؛‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ rt = 2694.706.DA 21‬؛‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ )ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﰲ ﻭﺭﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 55‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ) ‪ ( WMin = 55‬؛‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﰲ ﻭﺭﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 68‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫) ‪ ( WMax = 55‬؛‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪ 68‬ﺃﻱ ) ‪ ( W0 = 68‬؛‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﳎﺘﻤﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 6000 :‬ﻃﻦ ؛‬ ‫‪48‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ، 2‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2-5‬ﳕﺬﺟﺔ ﻭﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ Bental maghnia‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻧﻀﺮﺍ ﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﻪ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ Bental maghnia‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪t =1‬‬

‫‪t =1‬‬

‫‪t =1‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫) ‪MinZ ≅ ∑∑ (vit Pit ) + ∑ (rtWt + ht H t + f t Ft ) + ∑ (cit I it ) + ∑ ( H t + Ft‬‬ ‫‪i =1 t =1‬‬

‫≅ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ = ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ؛‬ ‫ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ‪:‬‬

‫‪I 10 = 1856.25‬‬ ‫‪I 20 = 1029‬‬ ‫‪I 30 = 1860‬‬

‫‪W Min ≤ Wt ≤ W Max‬‬ ‫‪≤ 6000‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪it‬‬

‫‪∑I‬‬

‫‪I it ≥ 500‬‬

‫‪W0 = 68.‬‬

‫‪Pit − K it × Wt ≤ 0‬‬ ‫‪Pit + I i ,t −1 − I it = d it‬‬ ‫‪Wt − Wt −1 − H t + Ft = 0‬‬

‫ﺣﱴ ﻧﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﲟﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻏﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺟـﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬـﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ‪،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﱪﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ )‪ 36000000‬ﺩﺝ ﻭ ‪39000000‬‬ ‫ﺩﺝ ( ﻛﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ، 5‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪⎧1...........if ....z ≤ 36000000‬‬ ‫‪⎪ 39000000 − z‬‬ ‫⎪‬ ‫⎨ = )‪f i ( z‬‬ ‫‪...if ...36000000 < z < 39000000..........2‬‬ ‫‪⎪ 3000000‬‬ ‫‪⎪⎩0.............if ....z ≥ 39000000‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (2‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪W Min ≤ Wt ≤ W Max‬‬ ‫‪≤ 6000‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪it‬‬

‫‪∑I‬‬

‫‪I it ≥ 500‬‬

‫)‪Zimmerman (1978‬‬

‫‪Pit − K it × Wt ≤ 0‬‬

‫‪Max.z = λ‬‬ ‫‪Subject...to‬‬

‫‪Wt − Wt −1 − H t + Ft = 0‬‬

‫‪λ ≤ (39000000 − z ) 3000000‬‬

‫‪Pit + I i ,t −1 − I it = d it‬‬

‫‪I 10 = 1856.25‬‬

‫‪t = 1.,2.,......,6‬‬

‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ‬

‫‪i = 1.,2.,3‬‬

‫‪Pit , I it ,Wt , H t , Ft ≥ 0‬‬

‫‪I 20 = 1029‬‬ ‫‪I 30 = 1860‬‬ ‫‪W0 = 68‬‬

‫‪49‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Wt , H t , Ft‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻵﱄ ‪ ،LINGO‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ،3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺄﺩﱏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 3‬ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ λ = 0.8642‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﺭﺍﺽ )ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ( ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪%86.42‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺑـ ‪ 36407350.00‬ﺩﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﻠـﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎﻣﻌﻘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻃﻮﱠﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ )‪.Zimmerman(1978‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ ﰲ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﻌﺔ ‪ Bental Mghnia‬ﲟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﲰﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺁﺧﺬﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﰒ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،LINGO‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﲢﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊـﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﳌﺘﺨﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﺩﱏ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﳏﺘﺮﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﺐ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ‪ ،...‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳚﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳚﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﰲ ﺿﻞ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﳚﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ )‪، (Fuzzy multi- objective mathematical programming‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﰲ ﲝﻮﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪50‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪.2‬ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ‪BEN‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸـﻜﻞ ‪ .1‬ﺃﺣـﺪ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‬

‫‪f i (zi ) = λ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪zi‬‬

‫‪z iu‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ‪BEN‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪z i′‬‬

‫‪Source :Reay-Chen Wang , Tien-Fu Liang , "Aggregate‬‬ ‫‪production planning with multiple fuzzy goals", International‬‬ ‫‪Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology ,Vol 25,‬‬ ‫‪2005,PP 589–597.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪. 4‬ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ‪CAL‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ .3‬ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ‪TD‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﲟﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﲟﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸـﻜﻞ ‪ . 5‬ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪Bental Maghnia‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪.1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ CAL،TD،BEN‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻮﺝ‬

‫‪BEN‬‬

‫‪TD‬‬

‫‪CAL‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﻦ )‪(CAP‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪:‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3900000‬‬

‫‪3600000‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺭﻏﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ )ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ(‬

‫‪51‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻬﻤﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﻠﺐ ‪،‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪،‬ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫‪K it‬‬

‫‪cit‬‬

‫‪vit‬‬

‫‪d it‬‬

‫اﻟﻔﺘﺮة‬

‫‪17.794‬‬ ‫‪15.367‬‬ ‫‪18.602‬‬ ‫‪16.985‬‬ ‫‪17.794‬‬ ‫‪17.794‬‬ ‫‪3.883‬‬ ‫‪3.353‬‬ ‫‪4.059‬‬ ‫‪3.706‬‬ ‫‪3.883‬‬ ‫‪3.883‬‬ ‫‪14.558‬‬ ‫‪12.573‬‬ ‫‪15.220‬‬ ‫‪13.897‬‬ ‫‪14.558‬‬ ‫‪14.558‬‬

‫‪208.796‬‬ ‫‪208.796‬‬ ‫‪208.796‬‬ ‫‪208.796‬‬ ‫‪208.796‬‬ ‫‪208.796‬‬ ‫‪848.721‬‬ ‫‪848.721‬‬ ‫‪848.721‬‬ ‫‪848.721‬‬ ‫‪848.721‬‬ ‫‪848.721‬‬ ‫‪139.149‬‬ ‫‪139.149‬‬ ‫‪139.149‬‬ ‫‪139.149‬‬ ‫‪139.149‬‬ ‫‪139.149‬‬

‫‪3293.493‬‬ ‫‪3293.493‬‬ ‫‪3293.493‬‬ ‫‪3293.493‬‬ ‫‪3293.493‬‬ ‫‪3293.493‬‬ ‫‪21646.608‬‬ ‫‪21646.608‬‬ ‫‪21646.608‬‬ ‫‪21646.608‬‬ ‫‪21646.608‬‬ ‫‪21646.608‬‬ ‫‪1296.109‬‬ ‫‪1296.109‬‬ ‫‪1296.109‬‬ ‫‪1296.109‬‬ ‫‪1296.109‬‬ ‫‪1296.109‬‬

‫‪1177.225‬‬ ‫‪923.021‬‬ ‫‪883.342‬‬ ‫‪1071.99‬‬ ‫‪1379.269‬‬ ‫‪1315.222‬‬ ‫‪128.620‬‬ ‫‪163.777‬‬ ‫‪164.617‬‬ ‫‪166.005‬‬ ‫‪193.317‬‬ ‫‪206.662‬‬ ‫‪1164.191‬‬ ‫‪463.447‬‬ ‫‪659.034‬‬ ‫‪425.240‬‬ ‫‪78.967‬‬ ‫‪478.221‬‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬

‫) ‪BEN ( P1t‬‬

‫) ‪TD ( P2t‬‬

‫) ‪CAL ( P3t‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ 3‬ﺍﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻟﻠـ‪ 6‬ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪BENTAL‬ﻣﻐﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻬﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ‬

‫‪Ht‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺢ ‪Ft‬‬

‫‪2008‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ‬

‫‪BEN‬‬

‫‪TD‬‬

‫‪CAL‬‬

‫‪BEN‬‬

‫‪TD‬‬

‫‪CAL‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫‪68‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1856.25‬‬

‫‪1029‬‬

‫‪1860‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﻧﻔﻲ ‪2008‬‬

‫‪68‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪679.025‬‬

‫‪900‬‬

‫‪695.809‬‬

‫ﻓﻴﻔﺮﻱ ‪2008‬‬

‫‪68‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2008‬‬

‫‪68‬‬

‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪743.996‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪267.638‬‬

‫‪500‬‬

‫‪736.603‬‬

‫‪500‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1074.857‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪659.038‬‬

‫‪605.228‬‬

‫‪571.986‬‬

‫‪500‬‬

‫ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻞ ‪2008‬‬

‫‪68‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1154.980‬‬

‫‪94.019‬‬

‫‪425.24‬‬

‫‪774.505‬‬

‫‪500‬‬

‫‪500‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻱ ‪2008‬‬

‫‪68‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺟﻮﻥ ‪2008‬‬

‫‪68‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1209.992‬‬

‫‪193.317‬‬

‫‪78.967‬‬

‫‪605.229‬‬

‫‪500‬‬

‫‪500‬‬

‫‪1209.992‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬

‫‪206.662‬‬

‫‪478.221‬‬

‫‪500‬‬

‫‪500‬‬ ‫‪ 36407350.00‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪500‬‬

‫‪Wt‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ‬

‫‪λ‬‬

‫‪0.8642‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫‪LINGO‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣـﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌـﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﳌﺒﻬـﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪ Fuzzy‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻣﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ LINGO‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﳐﺘﺺ ﰲ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪- Reay-chen Wang , Tien-Fu Liang"Applying possibilistic linear programming to aggregate production‬‬ ‫‪planning",international journal of production economics,vol 98, 2005,pp 328-341.‬‬

‫‪52‬‬

2010 - 2009 / 07 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4

- Geoff Buxey, " Strategy not tactics drives aggregate planning " , International journal of production economics (2003) ,vol 85 , p 331-346 5

- Holt , C.C , F. Modigliani and H.A.Simon , "Linear Decision Rule for production and Employment Scheduling " Management Science , vol 2 , 1955 , PP1-30.

6

- Bowman .E.D , "Production Scheduling By the Transportation Method of Linear programming", Opérations Research Society; 1955,pp 100-103.

7

- Hanssman , F. and S.W.Hess , " A Linear programming Aproach to production and Employment Scheduling", Managament Science , I . 1960 , PP46-51.

8

- Buffa . Elwood. S and Jeffery G . Miller , " Production and Inventory Systems : Planning and Control" , 3 rd Edition , Homewood Illinois : Richard D . Irwin .Inc ., 1979, p 197.

9

- Elsayed. A and Thomas O. Boucher, " Analysis and control of production Systems " , New jersey : Prentice-Hall, 1985, p 240.

10

- Hackman, Steven T., And Robert C. Leachman,"A General Framework for Modelling Production”, Management Science , Vol.35 , N°4, 1989, pp.478-495.

11

- Johanson , Lynwood A. and Douglas C.Montgomry, "Operations Research in production planning, Scheduling and Invontory Control" , New York : John Wiley , 1974, pp356.

12

- Khoshnevis, Behrokh, Philip M.Wolfe, and M.Palmer Terrell, "Aggregate planning Models Incorporating Productivity- an Ovrview " , International Journal of Production Research , Vol.20 , N°5 , 1981, pp 555 – 564.

13

- Eilon , Samual, " Five Approaches to Aggregate Production Planning" , AIIE Transactions , Vol. 7 , N°2 , 1975.

15

.Bental maghnia ‫ﻤﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺘﲔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺔ‬‫ ﻷ‬، ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﻨﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﲔ‬14 - Zadeh, L. A.. “Fuzzy sets". Information and Control,vol 8 , 1965, PP 338–353.

16

- Zimmermann, H.J, " Fuzzy programming and linear programming with several objective functions", Fuzzy Sets and Systems,vol 25 , 1978 , PP 175-182.

.‫ ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﻏﲑ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ‬، ‫ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‬17

18

- Reay-Chen Wang , Tien-Fu Liang ., " Aggregate production planning with multiple fuzzy goals International" , Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology ,Vol 25, 2005, PP 589–597.

19

- Zimmermann, H.J.1978 ,op-cite.p 183. .‫ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺔ‬

‫ﰎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ‬

-20

‫ ﰎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﳏﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﰒ ﺃﺧﺬ‬-21 .‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﰊ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﻢ‬ .597-589 ‫ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﺹ‬Reay-chen Wang, Tien-Fu Liang , 2005 ‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬-22 53

‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺳﻮﻳﺴﻲ – ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻳﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺟﺎﺀ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻧﻘﺪ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻻﻗﺖ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺨﻠﺺ ﻻﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ ﺗﺒﲏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﻛﻬﺎ )ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ( ﺃﻭ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﱪﺭ ﻭﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ –ﻫﺪﻑ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ -‬ﻣﺮﻫﻮﻥ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﲟﺪﻯ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ . création de la valeur‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﳓﻮ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﲎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺮﻙ ﻭﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﳛﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻔﺮﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ )ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﲔ( ﲟﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﳍﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻟﻴﺘﺴﲎ ﳍﺎ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﺘﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ‬ ‫ﻓﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﱴ ﻋﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﻢ ﻭﺗﺴﺨﲑﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺂﺕ ﲞﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.(...،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻯ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰲ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺘﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺘﺒﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺼﺪ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻔﻲ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﳑﺰﻭﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﺘﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﳏﻮﺭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪55‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬

‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،La création de valeur‬ﺇﺫ ﺗﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺿﻤﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﲔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﲔ – ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪﻣﻪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫)ﻫﲑﳚﻮﺍﻳﻦ‪ (1993 ،‬ﻭ)ﻛﺎﰊ ﻭﻫﲑﳚﻮﺍﻳﻦ‪ - 1(2001 ،‬ﻭﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ La droite de valeur‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﻣﻨﻪ‪2‬؛‬‫ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻜﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﲰﻌﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎﻕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ EVA3‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﳒﺪﻩ ﻗﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﻤﻞ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺎﻓﺲ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺁﻧﺬﺍﻙ‪.4‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻨﻈﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ( ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﳏﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪5‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﳏﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ؛ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻤﺴﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺑﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﻧﻈﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺎ ﰲ‪:6‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳋﻄﻂ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ؛‬‫ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ؛‬‫ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺄﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻟﻸﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ‪‬ﺎ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﳍﺎ ﳎﺎﻻ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺽ ﰲ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ‬ ‫ﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﳍﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍ ﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎﻕ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﱂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺯﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﳓﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳝﺜﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺒﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻌﺮﺓ ﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ _1-1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪ : ROI7‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ" ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ" ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‪ .8‬ﻭﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﳏﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻮﻑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺴﺐ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ؛ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ /‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﲟﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺛﻼﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺔ ﺿﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ؛ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﻣﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.9‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﺪﺳﲔ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳒﺪﻫﻢ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳝﺎﺭﺳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺇﻻ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،10‬ﻭﳒﺪﻫﻢ ﻻ ﳝﻠﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪56‬‬

‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬

‫ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳒﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﱄ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻓﻌﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﺠﻴﻌﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺣﺪﺍ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،11‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﻬﻢ )ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﳛﻮﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺻﺎﳊﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺃﺧﺬﻩ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ )ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ( ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ؛‬ ‫ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﲣﺺ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ؛‬‫ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﲔ ﻓﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﳒﺪﻩ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﲔ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺃﻧﻔﺴﻬﻢ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﺪﻭ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﲔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺠﻌﻠﻬﻢ ﻳﺘﻔﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ )ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺋﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﲢﺴﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﳊﻬﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺋﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ )ﻛﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ‪ .(...،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳒﺪﻩ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﻘﺪﳝﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺍﻗﺘﻨﺎﺅﻩ ﻭﺗﻮﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﻌﻠﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﳛﻈﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻄﺮﺡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺴﺒﺒﲔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﲔ ﳘﺎ‪:13‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ(‬‫ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺭﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ( ﻭﺭﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺳﲔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﳒﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻵﻧﻴﺔ )ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺴﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺪﺓ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ )ﺩﻭﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ( ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﳒﺪﻫﺎ ‪-‬ﻭﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪ -‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪.14‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬

‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺟﺤﺎﻓﺎ ﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﰲ ﺃﻏﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﺪﺭ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﳒﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻓﻌﻬﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﳒﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﺋﺪ؛ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﳛﻘﻖ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻀﻴﻴﻊ ﻓﺮﺹ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺩﻓﻌﺖ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﻌﺪ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﲑﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻠﺠﺄ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﻴﺎﺯﺓ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻜﺜﻒ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪.15‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺇﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ" –ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ )ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳍﺮﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻖ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺪﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.16‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﱂ ﻳﺴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺠﻠﺖ ﰲ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ‪ 17‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪-‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ -‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ .18‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻪ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﲔ ﲟﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ .19‬ﻓﺄﻣﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺯﺕ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﻟـ"ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ" ﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬ ‫ﺑـ"ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ _2-1‬ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ"‪ RI20‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﰲ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻛﺪ "ﺳﻠﻮﻥ" ‪ Sloan‬ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ "ﺳﻨﻮﺍﰐ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻨﺮﺍﻝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺯ"‪ 21‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﺖ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﻭﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪،22‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﳕﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺑﺢ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺣﻈﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ "ﺟﻨﺮﺍﻝ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻚ"‪ ،23‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ 24‬ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻖ ﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ )ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃ‪‬ﻢ ﻳﺸﲑﻭﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻀﻞ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ "ﺟﻨﺮﺍﻝ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻚ" ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻋﻘﺐ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻳﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ" ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺫﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ "ﺟﻨﺮﺍﻝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺯ" ﰲ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﲟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺁﻧﺬﺍﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺝ ﺷﻬﺮﺗﻪ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ " ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ"‪.‬‬

‫‪58‬‬

‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ" ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﲢﻤﻴﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،25‬ﰲ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪﻩ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.26‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻗﺪﱘ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻛﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺬ "ﺁﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﲰﻴﺚ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﻼﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﺎ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻮﻙ‪ .27‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻫﺘﻢ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪-‬ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ -‬ﻫﻮ "ﺑﺮﻳﻨﺮﺍﻳﺶ"‬ ‫‪ ،Preineich‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪ 28‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،29‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ )ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻀﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻼﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ( ﻣﻄﺮﻭﺣﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻗﺴﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﳒﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ( ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺮﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ(‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ( ﺳﻨﺼﻞ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳛﺴﺐ ﻟـ"ﺑﺮﻳﻨﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ "1930 ،‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ‪-‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ‪ ،-‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ‪ Réconciliation‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ )ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﺹ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،30‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺮ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺧﺼﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺇﻻ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ "ﺑﺮﻳﻨﺮﺍﻳﺶ" ﻗﺪ ﺃﻋﻄﻰ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ‪.31‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻘﻴﺲ "ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ" ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﳍﺎ‪ ،32‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺐﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﳌﺴﺆﻭﱄ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﰱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،Contrôlabilité33‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﲔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﳑﺜﻼ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ "ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ" ﰲ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﲤﺜﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ )ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ( ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﲢﺖ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﺮﺟﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﲔ( ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.34‬‬

‫‪59‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬

‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ ﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﻼﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ( ‪ Entités décentralisées‬ﰲ ﻇﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺬﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﳍﺎﻡ‪ .35‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﻛﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﻮﻥ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺞ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﰲ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﰲ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﲑ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﰲ ﻧﻈﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﳊﻮﺍﻓﺰ ﺣﱴ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲟﺎ ﳛﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .36‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﱪﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ "ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ" ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻮ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﲑ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﰲ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﲰﺢ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﳏﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ .37‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺎﺩﳝﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻔﻜﲑ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ ﺛﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻪ ﻭﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﲏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺧﻠﻮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺪﺍﺭﻙ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﻷﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻛﺎﺩﳝﻴﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﳌﺎ ﺣﻘﻘﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﲔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬

‫‪ :1-2‬ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪ _1-1-2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺣﺴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﻮﺭ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ " ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ"‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺚ ﻭﺇﺣﻴﺎﺀ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ‪ .‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ"‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﲤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﲟﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ )ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻣﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ" ﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺍ‪‬ﺎ )ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺃﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻭﻥ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ -،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ -‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ"‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ‪ -‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﰲ "ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ"‪ -‬ﺇﱃ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﺋﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ EVA‬ﻟـﺴﺘﺎﺭﻥ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻮﺍﺭﺕ‪J.M.Stern et G.B.Stewart‬‬

‫‪60‬‬

‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ "ﺟﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻥ ﻭ ﺝ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺕ ﺳﺘﺎﻭﺍﺭﺕ" ‪– Joel Stern et G.Bennett Stewart‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻣﻪ "ﻣﻮﺩﳚﻠﻴﺎﱐ ﻭﻣﻴﻠﺮ‪ ،F.Modigliani et M.H.Miller "1961 ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ "ﻭ‪.‬ﻫـ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻛﻜﻠﻴﻨﻎ ﻭ ﻡ‪.‬ﺱ‪ .‬ﺟﻨﺴﻦ" ‪ W.Mecling et M.C.Jensen‬ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻞ ﻟـ"ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻥ ﻭﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭﺩ" ﰲ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻓﻬﻤﻪ ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﺮﻥ "‪ .41‬ﻭﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻭﻳﻀﻴﻒ "ﻛﺎﰊ ﻭﻫﲑﺟﻮﺍﻳﻦ‪ "2001 ،‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ "ﻣﻮﺩﳚﻠﻴﺎﱐ ﻭﻣﻴﻠﺮ‪.42"1966 ،1961 ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪ .43Incitation‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﳒﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻟﺒﺬﻝ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﳓﻮ‬ ‫ﲢﺴﲔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺂﺕ ﻭﺍﳊﻮﺍﻓﺰ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،44‬ﻓﻴﺘﺠﺴﺪ ﰲ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺬﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﻓﻖ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﻴﺴﻬﻢ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺖ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﲑ )ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ( ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﳑﺜﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .45‬ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ "ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ"‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻌﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ"‪ -‬ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺑﻞ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ )ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﱐ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﺰﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻊ؛ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ 46‬ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ ﺣﱴ ﻭﺇﻥ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:47‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ = ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ – )ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ × ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ(‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ = )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ – ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ(× ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺃﻋﺮﺍﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﳒﻠﻮﺳﻜﺴﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ‪ NOPAT‬ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‬ ‫)ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ‪ WACC‬ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﺤﺔ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﲔ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ﰲ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﶈﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ‪ .49‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﻮﻥ ‪-‬ﻣﻨﺬ‬ ‫ﻋﻬﺪ ﺁﺩﻡ ﲰﻴﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ( ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻐﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺜﺮﻭﺓ‬ ‫‪61‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ ،50‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻌﻘﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪-‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺟﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ – ﲝﻴﺚ ﳛﺴﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﲢﻔﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﲔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻻﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .51‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺭﺑﻄﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﻱ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ‪ .MVA52‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ"‬ ‫‪ EVA‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ )ﺳﻨﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ "ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ‪ MVA‬ﲢﺴﺐ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﳊﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪ ،53‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:54‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬

‫‪MVA = ∑ EVA tt‬‬ ‫) ‪t =1 (1+ k‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬

‫‪= (ret − k t )× C t‬‬

‫‪t‬‬

‫‪EVA‬‬

‫‪ :EVAt‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪t‬؛‬

‫‪ :Ct‬ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪t‬‬

‫‪ : Ret‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪.t‬‬ ‫‪ :Kt‬ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﺤﺔ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪.t‬‬ ‫ﻭﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻑ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:55‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬

‫‪∑ (EVA‬‬ ‫) ‪1+ k‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬

‫‪t=1‬‬

‫‪+‬‬

‫‪t0‬‬

‫‪=C‬‬

‫‪to‬‬

‫‪V‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ‪ :Cto :‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ )ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ( ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺻﻴﻐﱵ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ‬‫ﻻ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‬‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ)ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ( ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ(‪ ،57‬ﻭﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﺍﻻﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﳒﺪﻫﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺣﻮﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﳚﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،Goodwill‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻼﻙ‪ ،58(...،‬ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ .59‬ﺣﻴﺚ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ ،60 Fair value‬ﻭﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ 61‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.62‬‬

‫‪62‬‬

‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬

‫ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻴﺴﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﰲ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﺻﺎ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‪:63‬‬

‫) ‪= EVA t + ∆ C (1 + k t‬‬

‫‪t‬‬

‫‪CFD‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻻ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺑﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:64‬‬ ‫∞‬

‫‪∑ (EVA‬‬ ‫) ‪1+ k‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬

‫‪+‬‬

‫‪t0‬‬

‫‪=C‬‬

‫‪VM‬‬

‫‪t=1‬‬

‫‪ :2-1-2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ :1-2-1-2‬ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺒﲔ ﻭﻧﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬

‫‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:65‬‬

‫‪-1‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬ ‫‪-5‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺮﻑ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺮﳛﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺛﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺑﺜﺮﻭﺓ ﲪﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲢﻔﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺠﻴﻌﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﺄ‪‬ﻢ ﻣﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﲪﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﳛﻘﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﳛﻘﻖ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻠﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳒﺪ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﰲ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﳋﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،Stratégie/Finance66‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﲢﻜﻤﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ ﰲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.67‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﺘﺒﲔ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﺮﺗﻪ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺣﻮﻛﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﳓﻮ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺑﺘﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﱀ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :2-2-1-2‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ : 68‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:69‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﳋﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺃ‪‬ﻤﺎ ﻻ ﳝﺜﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﱂ ﳛﻤﻼ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲢﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﳍﺎ‪.70‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﲢﻔﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﳌﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ MEDAF‬ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﲑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ EVA‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ "ﺑﻴﺘﺎ" ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻣﻌﺘﱪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .71‬ﻭﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫‪63‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬

‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﲢﺖ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﱪ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻜﻤﺎ ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺒﲑﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﻣﺎﻡ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪- ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،72‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲢﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﳍﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ ، EVA‬ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﻳﻊ ﰲ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،73‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺪﻋﻮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﱄ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.74‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﳉﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ‪-‬ﻛﻐﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ -‬ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻗﺼﲑ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻨﺠﺮ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﲟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑ ‪ ،Risque du court-termisme‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﺪ ﳜﻔﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﳌﻜﻔﺂﺕ ﻭﺍﳊﻮﺍﻓﺰ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ .75‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﲤﻜﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪ ،76‬ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ –ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ‪ -‬ﺗﺴﻴﲑﺍ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .77‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻼﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻌﻘﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻭﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﳍﺎ‪ .78‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳊﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺘﻬﺎ ‪ Start up‬ﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎﺕ‪.79‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻐﲑﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﺓ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪-‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ -‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻷﻭﻟﺌﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﻨﺪﺳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﻛﺰﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .80‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺭﺩ "ﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭﺕ"‪ 81‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺑﻄﻪ ﲟﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Stern, Stewart & Co‬ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺃﻃﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ "ﳏﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ" ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﶈﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﺴﺎ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ‪ .82‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻜﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺩﺳﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ‪-‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺒﺘﻜﺮﺓ ﳍﺎ‪،-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍ ﻣﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺴﺒﻮﻥ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‪.83‬‬

‫‪64‬‬

‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬

‫ﰲ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ؛ "ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ" ﻭ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ "ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ"‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﻮﺭ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﱐ ﳍﺎ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﲟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) ...،‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‪) ...،‬ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ(‪،84‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﻐﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﲡﻌﻠﻬﻢ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻙ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻣﺒﲏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﲟﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﲑ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﻸ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻏﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺋﺺ( ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ _2-2‬ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺎﻛﱰﻱ ‪ :‬ﰎ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﲔ ﻫﺎﻣﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ -‬ﻭﳘﺎ‪:85‬‬ ‫ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺎﻛﱰﻱ ‪1994 ،McKinsey‬؛‬‫ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻓﻠﺘﻢ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﺴﻦ‪.861995 ،‬‬‫ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ "ﻣﺎﻛﱰﻱ" ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻋﺘﱪ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺘﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻀﺎﺡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:87‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ= ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ + Explicite88‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺄﰐ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻥ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆ ﺑﻪ )ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ _1-2-2‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺎﳓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ )ﻣﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﻨﲔ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻸﻣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ 89(NOPAT‬ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﳍﺎ ﳐﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻼﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﰲ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺯﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺪﻳﺪ( ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺠﺰﺓ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:90‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ )ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ(= ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ‪ +‬ﳐﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻼﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﻭﻧﺎﺕ – ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ – ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺃﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺸﺮ )‪ (10‬ﺇﱃ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ )‪ (15‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺎﻟﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪ Les entreprises cycliques‬ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻀﺞ‪ ،91‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﻧﻘﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ؛ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻗﺼﺪ ﳕﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻄﻮﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ )ﺭﻭﺍﺝ ﻭﻛﺴﺎﺩ( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ )‪ (03‬ﺇﱃ ﲬﺲ )‪ (05‬ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﱏ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ‪ Sous- evaluation‬ﺃﻭ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‪.92‬‬

‫‪65‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬

‫ﻳﻘﺮ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺸﺮ )‪(10‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﲬﺴﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ)‪ (15‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈ‪‬ﻢ ﻳﻨﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﰲ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪‬ﺎﻟﲔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‪:93‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﺣﱴ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﳝﺘﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺴﺔ ﻛﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺎ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﻳﺔ(؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻭﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﰐ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻨﻤﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﳍﻮﺍﻣﺶ )ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ( ﻭﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .94‬ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﲟﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺳﻴﻨﺎﺭﻳﻮﻫﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﺅﻻ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺸﺎﺅﻣﺎ ( ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﺎﺭﻳﻮﻫﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ _2-2-2‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﳊﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﺄﺗﻰ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﳌﺎﳓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﳑﺜﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻨﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﲢﺴﺐ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﺤﺔ ﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫) ‪k ct = k et × (E t /V t )+ k dt × (1−τ )× (D t /V t‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ :Kct‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﺤﺔ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪، t‬‬ ‫‪ :Vt‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪(Vt= Et+Dt) t‬‬ ‫‪ :Et‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ :Dt‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺿﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ :Ket‬ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ t‬ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪MEDAF‬؛‬ ‫‪ :Kdt‬ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ؛‬

‫‪τ‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪ _3-2-2‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ)ﺍﻷﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆ ﲟﺎ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ –ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﺺ ﺑﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻈﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﱪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ "ﻣﺎﻛﱰﻱ" ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪ %56‬ﻭ‪ %125‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﰎ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻩ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﰲ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺜﻤﺎﱐ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .95‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳚﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ‬

‫‪66‬‬

‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻐﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ )ﲤﺘﺼﻬﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﱪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ "ﻣﺎﻛﱰﻱ" ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ .96‬ﻭﺳﻨﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﲏ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﺍ)‪ 75‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﻳﺪ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ؛‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻻ‪‬ﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬

‫)‬

‫‪/ (k c − g‬‬

‫‪t+1‬‬

‫‪V t = CFD‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ :Vt‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ :CFD t+1‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ؛‬ ‫‪ :Kc‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﺤﺔ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ )‪(WAAC‬؛‬ ‫‪ :g‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻼ‪‬ﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ )ﻣﻊ ‪. (g<kc‬‬‫ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﻤﻮ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻻ‪‬ﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،97‬ﻭﲢﺴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬

‫) ‪Vt = (REt +1 × (1 − g / r )) / (kc − g‬‬

‫‪ :RE t+1‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (NOPLAT‬ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ؛‬ ‫‪ :g‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﻼ‪‬ﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻟـ ‪ RE‬؛‬‫‪ :r‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﰲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ‪-‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ -‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ‪‬ﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻂ ﻟﻜﻼ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺴﺒﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﲔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﳋﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﳍﺎ ﺑﺎﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﲝﻴﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ )‪ (15‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪-‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﻭﻫﺎ‪ .-‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﻠﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻭﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﲰﻲ ﺑﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﲔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﲔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻜﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﳍﻤﺎ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﳘﺎ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﲔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ "ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺍﺭﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ" ﻟﻪ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ"‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺘﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﲡﺪ ﺟﺬﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ "ﻣﺎﻛﻴﱰﻱ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ" ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻤﻪ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﺮﺍﺋﻘﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ )ﳏﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،(...،‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪-‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻗﺪﱘ‬ ‫ﻇﻬﺮ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺷﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﲟﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﺮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰒ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻜﲑ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﲞﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -(1‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬

‫‪- G.Hirigoyen, "Nouvelles approches du lien stratégie finance", in : Revue française de gestion, N°92, Janvier-février‬‬ ‫‪1993, PP : 64-73.‬‬ ‫‪- J.Caby et G.Hirigoyen, "La création de valeur de l’entreprise", 2e édition, Economica, Paris, 2001, PP : 15-32.‬‬ ‫‪ -(2‬ﺳﻨﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻧﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬

‫‪- J.Caby et G.Hirigoyen, La création de valeur de l’entreprise, Op.cit, PP : 15-20.‬‬ ‫‪ -(3‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ "ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ‪Myers,‬‬ ‫‪ 1996‬ﲝﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ ، Metric wars‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Boston Consulting Group s Holt Value Associates‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ‪ ،CFROI‬ﻭﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Alcar‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﻮﻣﺔ ‪ DCF‬ﻭﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Marakon‬‬ ‫‪ Associates‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﻮﻣﺔ ‪ ، DEP‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ KPMG Peat Marwich‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪Economic‬‬ ‫‪ . Value Management EVM‬ﰲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪- R. Myers, The metric wars, CFO; The magazine for chief financial officers. in:‬‬

‫ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪" ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ"‪ ،‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،56:‬ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،200 ،‬ﺹ‪.101:‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪) - A.D.Chalandler, Organisation et performance des entreprises .In : A. Nabet , "Les systèmes de gestion par la‬‬ ‫‪valeur : une analyse de leur impact sur les logiques de contrôle de deux groupes français", Thèse de doctorat en‬‬ ‫‪sciences de gestion, Non publier, Université Paris 09 dauphine, 2001, P :85-86.‬‬

‫‪ -(5‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﺪﻱ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬

‫‪-F.Pierre et E.Besançon, "Valorisation d’entreprise et théorie financière", Edition d’organisation, Paris, 2004, PP :14‬‬‫‪61.‬‬

‫‪ -(6‬ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.101:‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪) - ROI : Return On Investment.‬‬ ‫‪-A. Nabet , Op.cit, P :86.‬‬ ‫‪)- H.Bouquin, "Le contrôle de gestion", 4e édition, PUF, 1998, P : 258.‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪)- R.Teller, "Le contrôle de gestion- pour un pilotage intégrant stratégie et finance", Les essentiels de la gestion,‬‬ ‫‪Editions‬‬ ‫‪management et société, 1999, P : 109.‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪)- Idem.‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪)- A. Nabet Op.cit, P :88.‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪)- RN.Anthony et J.Dearden, Management control systems :text and cases,. in: Idem.‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪)- H.Bouquin, Op.cit, P : 261.‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪)- R.Teller, Op.cit, P : 109.‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ(‪)- Idem.‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪)- RN.Anthony et J.Dearden, Management control systems :text and cases, in: A. Nabet ,Op.cit, P :89.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫‪ -(18‬ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.105:‬‬

‫‪19‬‬

‫)ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ(‪)- H.Bouquin, Op.cit, P : 264.‬‬ ‫‪)- RI : Residual Income.‬‬ ‫‪)- Sloan, My years with General Motors, 1993.‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ(‪)- A. Nabet, Op.cit, P :89.‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪)- Id.‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪)-H.T.Johnson & R.S.Kaplan, Relevance lost. The rise and the fall of management accounting,. in: P.Zarlowski,‬‬ ‫‪"Pilotage par la valeur: étude théorique et analyse d’un exemple de mise en œuvre", Thèse de doctorat en science de‬‬ ‫‪gestion, Non publier, Université Paris Dauphine, 1996, P: 149.‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬

‫‪68‬‬

‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬ ‫‪ -(25‬ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.105:‬‬ ‫‪ -(26‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.105:‬‬ ‫‪-(27‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.106-105 :‬‬

‫‪28‬‬

‫‪)- G.Prenreich, The fair value yield of common stock, . In: M.Bromwich & M.Walker, "Residual income past and‬‬ ‫‪future", Management accounting research, Vol 9, P: 393.‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪)- A. Nabet , Op.cit, P :89.‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪)- M.Bromwich & M.Walker, Op.cit, P: 396.‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪)- Id.‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪)- A. Nabet , Op.cit, P :89.‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪)- K.A.Merchant, How and why firms disregard the controllability principle .In: Ibid, P :91.‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪)- P.Zarlowski, Op.cit, P: 150.‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪)- A. Nabet , Op.cit, P :89.‬‬

‫‪ -(36‬ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.100-99:‬‬

‫‪)- H.Bouquin, Op.cit, P : 269.‬‬ ‫‪)- EVA : Economic Value Added.‬‬ ‫‪)- A.Nabet , Op.cit, P :94.‬‬

‫‪ -(40‬ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻣﲔ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﺍﺩﻓﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬

‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬

‫‪- P.Zarlowski, Op.cit, P: 149.‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﺍﺩﻓﲔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻷ‪‬ﻤﺎ ﳝﺜﻼﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺎ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺣﺴﺎ‪‬ﻤﺎ ﻻ ﲣﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪)- AL.Ehrbar, Economic Value Added: The real keyto creating wealth,. in:‬‬

‫‪41‬‬

‫‪)- J.Caby et G.Hirigoyen, La création de valeur de l’entreprise, Op.cit, P : 13-14.‬‬ ‫‪)-A.Nabet, Op.cit, P :93.‬‬

‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.106:‬‬

‫‪ -(44‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ‪ EVA‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ‪ Stern, Stewart & Co‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﺕ ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻟـﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ‪www.eva.com:‬‬

‫‪-G.B.Stern, "The quest for value", New York, Harper Business,1991.‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪)- A.Nabet , Op.cit, P :95.‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ(‪)- H.Bouquin, "Comptabilité de gestion", Sirey, Paris, 1997, P : 280.‬‬

‫‪-(47‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.107:‬‬

‫‪- A.Nabet, Op.cit, P :95-96.‬‬

‫‪- ( 48‬ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪:‬‬

‫‪EVA® = NOPAT- Charge du Capital. EVA® = NOPAT – (WACC * CE). EVA® = [(NOPAT/CE) – (WACC)] * CE.‬‬ ‫‪Avec : NOPAT (Net Operating Profit After Tax), WACC (Weighted Average Cost of Capital), CE (Capital‬‬ ‫‪Employed),‬‬ ‫‪ROCE (Return On Capital Employed).‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪)- A.Black, P.Wright et J.Bachman, Gestion de la valeur actionnariale, Dunod, Paris, 1997, P :65.‬‬

‫‪ -(50‬ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.107:‬‬

‫‪)- A.Nabet , Op.cit, P : 96.‬‬ ‫‪)- MVA : Market Value Added.‬‬

‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬

‫‪ -(53‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻥ ﻭﺳﺘﻴﻮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ‪ MVA‬ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ ﻷﻟﻒ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ »The Stern Stewart Performance 1000 »:‬ﰲ ﳎﻠﺔ "ﺑﻨﻚ ﺃﻭﻑ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ" ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺸﺮ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﳎﻠﺔ ‪ Fortune‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ Sunday Times ،‬ﰲ ﺇﳒﻠﺘﺮﺍ‪ Capital ،‬ﰲ ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ Financial Post‬ﰲ ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﰲ‪ - :‬ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.107:‬‬

‫‪- T.Copeland, T.Koller et J.Murrin, "La stratégie de la valeur : L’évaluation d’entreprise", Traduit par V.Phalippou‬‬ ‫‪(Valuation Measuring and Managing the value of companies), Edition d’Organisation Paris, 2002, P : 154.‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪)- J.Caby et G.Hirigoyen, La création de valeur de l’entreprise, Op.cit, P :23.‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪)- Id.‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪)- A.Nabet , Op.cit, P : 96.‬‬ ‫‪ -(57‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ( ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳌﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﲟﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺮﺗﺐ ﺃﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺣﻮﺍﻓﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﰲ‪ :‬ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.126:‬‬ ‫‪ -(59‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ‪.139-125:‬‬

‫‪)-Voir: A.Nabet , Op.cit, P : 96.‬‬

‫‪)- Y.Bernheim, Etat-Unis : information sur les justes valeurs,. in : A.Nabet , Op.cit, P : 96-97.‬‬

‫‪69‬‬

‫‪58‬‬

‫‪60‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬ :‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ‬،(‫ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻜﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ )ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬-(61

- R. Demestère, "Pour une vue pragmatique de la comptabilité", In : Revue française de gestion, N° 157, 04/2005, PP : 109-113.

63 64

.127 :‫ ﺹ‬،‫ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‬،‫ ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‬-(62

)- J.Caby et G.Hirigoyen, La création de valeur de l’entreprise, Op.cit, P : 26. )- Id.

.140-139 :‫ ﺹ‬،‫ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‬،‫ ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‬-(65 ‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬،‫ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﲞﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺣﻴﺰﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﱄ‬-(66 :‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ‬

L.Batsch, "Finance et stratégie", Economica, Paris, 1999.

G.Hirigoyen, "Stratégie et finance : approche par la création de valeur", Encyclopédie de gestion, 2e édition, Economica, Paris, 1997, PP : 3064-3092.

- G.Hirigoyen, Nouvelles approches du lien stratégie finance, Op.cit, PP : 64-73.

-

:‫ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ‬-(67

- A.Nabet , Op.cit, PP : 99-101.

‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﳋﺼﻮﺹ‬،‫ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬،‫ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬-(68 :‫ﺇﱃ‬

-

J.Caby et G.Hirigoyen, La création de valeur de l’entreprise, Op.cit, PP : 81-99.

:‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ‬،‫ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬-(69 .146-139:‫ ﺹ ﺹ‬،‫ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‬،‫ ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‬-

-

A.Nabet, Op.cit, PP : 97-99.

M.Albouy, "Théories, applications et limite de la mesure de la création de valeur", in : Revue française de gestion, Janvier-février 1999, P :88-89.

- J.Caby et G.Hirigoyen, La création de valeur de l’entreprise, Op.cit, PP : 81-99.

70 )-G.Charreaux et P.Desbrieres, "Gouvernement d’entreprise : création de valeur au-delà des actionnaires", Les cahiers de l’audit, N°3, Quatrième trimestre 1998. P :13.

71 )- M.Albouy, Théories, applications et limite de la mesure de la création de valeur, Op.cit, P :89.

72 )-I.Shaked, A.Michel et P.Leroy, "Pourquoi L’EVA s’est imposée", L’Expansion management review, Septembre 1998, P : 56.

73 )- A.Nabet , Op.cit, P : 96-97.

74 )- E.Salustro, "Vers l’adoption de règles communes", L’Expansion management review, Septembre 1998, P :81.

.144-143 :‫ ﺹ‬،‫ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‬،‫ ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‬-(75

76 77

)- M.Albouy, Théories, applications et limite de la mesure de la création de valeur, Op.cit, P :89-90. )- A.Nabet , Op.cit, P : 99.

78 )- J. Stern, "Le père de l’EVA répond de critiques", L’Expansion management review, Septembre 1998, P : 87.

79 )- C.Hoarau et R.Teller, "Création de valeur et management de l’entreprise", Collection Entreprendre, Vuibert, Paris, 2001, P :107.

80 )- P.C.Brewer, G.Chandra and C.A.Hock, Economic Value Added (EVA): Its uses and limitations, . in:

.145 :‫ ﺹ‬،‫ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‬،‫ ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‬-

81

)- G.B.Stewart, "EVA : fact or fantasy", Journal of applied corporate finance, Vol7, 1994, P:76 82 )- D.Hqnsen and M. Mowen, Cost Management; accounting and control,. in:

.142 :‫ ﺹ‬،‫ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‬،‫ ﻫﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﳋﻮﱄ‬-

83

)- R. Lowenstein, Rethinking the latest economic elixir,. in:

84 85

)- A.Nabet , Op.cit, P : 98. )- J.Caby et G.Hirigoyen, La création de valeur de l’entreprise, Op.cit, PP : 21-30.

.104 :‫ ﺹ‬،‫ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬-

:‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ‬،‫ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬-(86

-87Ibid, PP : 26-30. )- T.Copeland, T.Koller et J.Murrin, Op.cit, P : 154.

‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬-(88 .‫ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﺤﻦ ﺑﺼﺪﺩ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬،‫ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬

89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96

)- Net Operating Profit After Tax. )- J.Caby et G.Hirigoyen, La création de valeur de l’entreprise, Op.cit, P: 21. )- T.Copeland, T.Koller et J.Murrin, Op.cit, P : 270. )- Id. )- Ibid, P : 270-271. )- Ibid, P : 271. )- Ibid, P : 311-312. )- Ibid, PP : 313-317.

.‫ﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬‫ ﺗﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﻤﻮ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻻ‬-(97

70

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺎﺫ ‪ :‬ﺑﻮﺧﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺑﺬﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺟﻬﻮﺩﹰﺍ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﻣﻨﺎﺧﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈـﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳـﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﳉﺬﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﱃ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼـﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺪﻳـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻄﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻄﻴﺔ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﺨﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺾ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺤ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺗﻘﻒ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺩ ﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴـﺘﺪﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺗﺪﻧ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﺿ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1995‬ﻭﺣﱴ ‪ ،2006‬ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺒﺬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄـﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ‪ -‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ‪ -‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ ‪ -‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﺴﺎ ‪ -‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺩﺳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺑﻌﺎ ‪ -‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻣﻨﺎ ‪ -‬ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ‪ -‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ "ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﲰﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﻃﻨﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺏ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴـﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻇﻒ ﰲ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳐﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺲ‬ ‫ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ"‪(1).‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ‪ -‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﺢ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬

‫ﲣﻔﻴﻒ ﺃﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﳌﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬـﻲ ﺗﻘـﻮﻡ‬

‫ﺑﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ "ﻋﺐﺀ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻨﺎﻉ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻀﺔ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪71‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ(‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈ ‪‬ﺮ‪‬ﺍ ﳌـﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻃﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﻧﺼﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ )ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﳌﺜﻞ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﺰﺕ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺴﻜﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺇﳘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﰲ ﲡﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ – ﲟﺎ ﻓﻴﻬـﺎ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ -‬ﺑﻀﻌﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﲟﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺴﺠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺇﳘﺎﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻲ‪(2).‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺄﻣﺲ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬـﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺴﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﻻﺣ ﹰﻘﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺑـﲔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻷﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﺭ ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻷﺑﺴﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﳍﺬﺍ ﻳﱪﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋـﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴـﺔ ﻭﺗﺸـﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﲟﺎ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺘـﺎﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﳕﻮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺘﻀﺢ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿـﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﻟﻌـﺮﰊ ﰲ ﳎـﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻲ ﻛﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺣﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﳘﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ %28‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ‪ 17.58‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2006‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﲦﺎﻧﲔ ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺑﺴـﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻋﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺮﻳﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻳﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺟﺘﺬﺍﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳـﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴـﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻃﻤﺌﻨﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻋﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﲑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻛﻤـﺎ ﺳـﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﺿـﺤﻨﺎ ﺫﻟـﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ؛ ﻭﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺸـﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %71‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﳐﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %48‬ﰲ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ %35‬ﰲ ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ %32‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ %30‬ﰲ ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ %28‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ %20‬ﻗﻲ ﻓﻠﺴﻄﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ %18‬ﰲ ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻴﻬـﺎ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﻧﹰﺎ ﻛﺒ ‪‬ﲑ‪‬ﺍ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ،%15‬ﻭﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ‪ ،%12‬ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ ‪ ،%10‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ ‪(3).%8‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %53‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨـﺎﱄ ‪17.5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ %45‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﲝﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎ ‪‬ﻋ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻌﻤﻤﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﺼﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﻧﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻕ ﻋﺮﰊ ﳑﻴﺰ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺒﻨﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻏﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣـﺎ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻦ ﻭﻣﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﳑﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻄﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﱂ ﺗﻌﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺃﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻴﺸﺔ ﻣﺘﺪﻧ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻤﻮ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻣـﺎ ﻫـﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻐﲑ ﻣﻼﺣﻆ ﻳﺘـﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﰲ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ‪ %8‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %10‬ﺳـﻨﻮ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﱪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻛﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﲎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻔﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻠـﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺋﺾ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﱪﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟـﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ )ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪.(%20‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ ‪ -‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﲟﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺧﺺ ﳍﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻒ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1995‬ﻭﺣﱴ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﻋـﺎﻡ ‪2006‬‬ ‫ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1.43‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1995‬ﺇﱃ ﳓﻮ ‪ 17.5‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2006‬ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺒﻠـﻎ‬ ‫‪ ،%1124.8‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2005‬ﳓﻮ ‪ 38‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﻠﻐﺘﻪ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺮﺻﺪﻫﺎ‪(4).‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻌﻴﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1995‬ﻭﺣﱴ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2006‬ﳓﻮ ‪ 82‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬ ‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ "‪ ("1‬ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1995‬ﻭﺣﱴ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ - 2006‬ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ -(1‬ﻳﻼﺣـﻆ ﺃ‪‬ـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1.43‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1995‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 2.09‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ .1996‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺼـﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣـﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﺮﺕ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1997‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳔﻔﺾ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ 1.58‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟـﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺗـﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻌﺎﺵ ﻗﺪ ﻋﺎﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋـﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ ،1998‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴـﺔ ﻣـﻦ ‪1.58‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1997‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 2.31‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1998‬ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪.%46‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ ،2000 - 1999‬ﰒ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺍﲡﺎ ‪‬ﻫ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﺪﺀﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،2001‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ‪ 11‬ﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ ‪ 2001‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﺩ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺀﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻗـﺪ ﺷـﻬﺪ ﻋـﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 2005‬ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺒﻮﻕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﳓﻮ ‪ 38‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟـﻚ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺄﰐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﰐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺾ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﺫﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣـﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﻬﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺨﻤﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻠﻴـﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪73‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ(‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﻬﺪ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻃﻔﺮﺓ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺒﻮﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻆ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴـﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼـﻨﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ‪-‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﺮﻭﻉ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻭ ﲤﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﰲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‪) .‬ﻭﺳـﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻮﺩ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺸﻲﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺷﻬﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2005‬ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺰﻳـﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜـﺒﲑﺓ ﺍﻟـﱵ ﺷـﻬﺪ‪‬ﺎ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،2005‬ﺇﺫ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌـﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﳓﻮ ‪ 28.8‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ )‪ %75.8‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ .(2005‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻀ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋـﺎﻡ ‪ 2005‬ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺗﺰﺍﻳـﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺃﻳ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﻛـﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻟﻨﺪﻥ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﻳﻮﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻠﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺭﺀﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣـﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺟﺮﺓ ﻭﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻐﺘﺮﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﰲ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺪﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،2005‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻃﻔﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﺖ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2006‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ .2005‬ﻓﻮﻓ ﹰﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻎ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﳍﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪2006‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 17.57‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 37.26‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،2005‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﳔﻔﻀﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %50.5‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪.2005‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺷﻬﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋـﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 2005‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻄﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟـﺬﻱ ﺣـﺪﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴـﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،2006‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺳﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻨـﺬ ﻋـﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪) 1995‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ "‪"1‬ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ( )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2005‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﻬﺪ ﻃﻔﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻭﺿﺤﻨﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﺴﺎ ‪ -‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳋﱪﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﶈﻠﻠﲔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴـﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪(5):‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﲢﺴﻨﺖ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺫﺑـﺔ ﻟﻼﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺣﺒﻬﺎ ﲢﺴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﲤﺜﻠﺖ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺪﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻤﻼﻗـﺔ ﻛـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻄـﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﳌـﻮﺍﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴـﻜﻚ‬ ‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﺮﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﲔ ‪ ،2005‬ﻭ‪ 2006‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻚ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻀ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺟﺒﻞ ﻋﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺷﺠﻌﺖ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻨﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬـﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﲤﻠﻴﻜﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺮ ﺑﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺃﻓﻨﺪﻱ ﻭﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ؛‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺟﺬﺑﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫* ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﺎﺀ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑـﻨﻈﲑﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌـﺎﱂ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻣﻬ ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺗـﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻭﲢﺪﻳ ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺍ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻴﻀﻴﻒ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﺎﻣ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻟﻌﺒﺖ ﺩﻭ ‪‬ﺭ‪‬ﺍ ﰲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺑﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻀ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻂ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﻳ ‪‬‬ ‫* ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ‪/‬ﺃﻳﻠﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ 11‬ﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ‪/‬ﺃﻳﻠﻮﻝ ‪ 2001‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻇﻬـﺮﺕ ﰲ ﺑﻌـﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺳـﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳒﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﳑـﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺳـﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻄﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻄﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻂ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﱪﻣﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺛﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﲑﺓ ﻟـﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﻂ ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺜﻤﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺰ ًﺀًﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺑﻨﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺰ ًﺀًﺍ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺘﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﳎﺘﻤﻌﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻭﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ )‪ 60‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ( ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺟ ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﲝﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪1200‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪) .‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﻌﻮﺩ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺸﻲﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺣﲔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ(‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺳﺎﺩﺳﺎ ‪ -‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ ﳍﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ‬

‫‪ ،2006‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 7563‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ %43‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ )ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲦﺎﱐ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﻧﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ 2905‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ﳓﻮ ‪ %17‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ )ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻬﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺳـﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﺳ ﺘﺤﻮذت ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 2715‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﲝﺼﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﳓﻮ ‪) %15‬ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻬﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺳﺒﻊ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 1794‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ‪) %10‬ﺗﻮﺟﻬـﺖ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﲦﺎﱐ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ( ﻭﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 783‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ‪ ،%4‬ﻭﻣﺼﺮ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 646‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ‪ .%3.7‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺷـﻜﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺼﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ %93.3‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪) 2006‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(2‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ ، (3‬ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ ،2006‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺣﺼﺘﻬﺎ ‪ 4837‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﲟﺎ ﻧﺴـﺒﺘﻪ ‪ %27.5‬ﻣـﻦ ﺇﲨـﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺘـﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼـﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺮ )‪ 3265.4‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ‪ %18.58‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ(‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺗـﻮﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﲝﻮﺍﱄ )‪ 2366.8‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ‪ ،(%13.47‬ﰒ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ )‪ 2335‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼـﺔ ‪ ،(%13.29‬ﰒ ﺍﻟﺴـﻮﺩﺍﻥ‬ ‫)‪ 2004‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ‪ ،%(11.40‬ﰒ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ )‪ 1097.6‬ﻣﻠﻴـﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼـﺔ ‪ ،(%6.25‬ﰒ ﺍﻟـﻴﻤﻦ ﲝـﻮﺍﱄ‬ ‫)‪ 858.3‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ‪ ،(%4.88‬ﰒ ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ )‪ 461.4‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ‪ ،(%2.63‬ﰒ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﲝـﻮﺍﱄ )‪350.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ‪.(%1.99‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ - 2005‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﻬﺪ ﻃﻔﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻭﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،2006‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻠﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ )ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ( ﺗﺮﺍﺟ ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﻬﺪﺗﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻧﺲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﻣﻦ ‪ 153.8‬ﻣﻠﻴـﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2005‬ﺇﱃ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 2366.8‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،2006‬ﻭﰲ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 363.1‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺇﱃ ‪ 3265.4‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ 203.9‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺇﱃ ‪ 858.3‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺣﻈﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ‪ -‬ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ ‪ %80‬ﻣـﻦ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1995‬ﻭﺣﱴ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪.2006‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺣﺎﺯﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ )‪-1995‬‬ ‫‪ .(2006‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻳﺄﰐ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺛﻘﺘـﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻨـﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻘﺘﻬﻢ ﺑﻐﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺸـﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘـﺔ ﺍﳌﻠـﻚ ﻋﺒـﺪ ﺍﷲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺎﻃﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀـﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻘﺮﹰﺍ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﻋﺐ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻻ ﺑﺄﺱ ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑـ ‪ .%10‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﱂ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﻂ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﺘﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﺎﱐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻘﺮ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ -‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺑﻌﺎ ‪ -‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ‪ -‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﲔ ‪ ،2005‬ﻭ‪ ،2006‬ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻏﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺸﲑ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌـﺮﰊ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1995-1974‬ﻗﺪ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺑﻨﺤﻮ ‪ 670‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ ﻗـﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﻨﺤﻮ ‪ 12‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 56 :1‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠـﻪ ‪ 56‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪(6).‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﺀﹰﺍ ﲝﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،2002‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﱂ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧـﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﻲ ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ .400:1‬ﻭﺗﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺳﻮﻳﺴـﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﺫﺑﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺗﺄﰐ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤـﺎ ﺗﻮﺟـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﲞﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﻌﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ‪‬ﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ‪ -‬ﻭﺑﺼـﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻـﺔ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻳﺴـﺮﺍ‪-‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﻭﻕ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻀ‪‬ـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺟﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﲞﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺬﺑﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻳ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻃﺮﺩﹰﺍ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻫﺠﺮﺓ ﺭﺀﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻭﻋﺰﻭﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﺘﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺾ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻓﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﻛﻤـﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴـﺔ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻏﲑ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻀﻄﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﰲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﻴﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﲑﻭﻗﺮﺍﻃﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﳋﺎﻧﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺴـﺘﺜﻤﺮ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻋﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﺭﻳﺢ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﱴ ﺍﳊﺼـﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺳـﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌـﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻠﻚ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺇﱃ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ(‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ ﺍﻓﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻔﺘﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﺮﺻـﻮﻓﺔ‬‫ﻭﺟﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﺳﻄﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﳉﻮﻯ … ﺍﱁ‪ .‬ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓـﺈﱃ ﺍﻵﻥ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﻃﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻀﻄﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﺠـﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺇﻣـﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﳊﺠﺰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻟﻨﻘـﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠـﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺳـﻮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻑ ﳉﺬﺏ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣـﻦ ﺗﻄـﻮﺭ ﺑﻌـﺾ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻇﻞ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋـﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﺯﻓـﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠ ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ )‪ (18‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺔ‬‫ﻀ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﻏﲑ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﻀﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳ ‪‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﻌﻠﻬﻢ ﳛﺠﻤﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪ -‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺣﺎﺋ ﹰ‬‫ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻓﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷـﺮﺓ‬‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺼـﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳊـﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺟﻨـﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻕ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﺇﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺿﺮﺑﺖ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪.1997‬‬ ‫ﻀ‪‬ـﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺠـﺮﺓ ﺭﺀﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﱂ ﺗﺆﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﱃ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕـﺎ ﺃﺩﺕ ﺃﻳ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﻭﳑﺎ ﻻ ﺷﻚ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳـﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻋـﻮﺩﺓ ﺭﺀﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣـﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺟﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻣﻨﺎ ‪ -‬ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻫﺠﺮﺓ ﺭﺀﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻹﺑﻘـﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﺬﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺬﻟﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺀﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻐﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﻪ ﻏﲑ ﺫﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﻣﺎ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺬﻝ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﲢﺴﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﹰﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﻭﻃﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﲢﻮﻟﺖ ﺭﺀﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋـﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﳎﺮﺩ ﺇﻳﺪﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻄﺮﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻳﺪﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻇﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪(7).‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺧﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺀﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣـﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ -‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫‪78‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﻨﺴﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺫﺑﺔ ‪ -‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋـﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈ ‪‬ﺮ‪‬ﺍ ﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺬﻟﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﳒﺪ ﺍﻵﰐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺳﻠﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺟ ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﳎﻠﺲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺸﺌﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﲡﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺍﳌﺴـﺘﺜﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻼﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺠﺰ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻜﻢ ﻗﻀﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺺ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﺖ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﺎﰱ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌـﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺭﺩ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻀ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﺯ ﰲ ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﲤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺒﲏ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﺪﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜـﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﻳ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺟﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺑﺬﻝ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﲢﺴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻇـﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟـﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﳊـﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺙ ﰲ ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﲡﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﱯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴـﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺗـﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﲡﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺍﻟﺸـﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴـﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻔﻮﺗﻨﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﲟﺒﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﻧﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ -‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧـﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﰎ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﰐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﲨﻌﺖ ﳓﻮ ‪ 4000‬ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸـﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻓـﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪(8).‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿـﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﳉﺬﺏ ﻭﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﳉﺬﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﺯ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ(‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺛﺒﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺛﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﲑﻭﻗﺮﺍﻃﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1995‬ﺇﱃ ‪2006‬‬ ‫‪1995‬‬

‫‪1996‬‬

‫‪1997‬‬

‫‪1998‬‬

‫‪1999‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬

‫‪2001‬‬

‫‪2002‬‬

‫‪2003‬‬

‫‪2004‬‬

‫‪2005‬‬

‫‪2006‬‬

‫‪1.43‬‬

‫‪2.09‬‬

‫‪1.58‬‬

‫‪2.31‬‬

‫‪2.18‬‬

‫‪1.81‬‬

‫‪2.64‬‬

‫‪2.91‬‬

‫‪3.84‬‬

‫‪5.95‬‬

‫‪37.26‬‬

‫‪17.57‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬

‫‪2006-1995‬‬

‫ﺍﻟـﻌـﺮﺑﻴـــﺔ ﺍﻟـﺒـﻴـﻨـﻴــﺔ‬

‫‪81.62‬‬

‫ﺣـﺠـــــﻢ ﺍﻻﺳــــﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟـﻔـﺘـﺮﺓ ﻣـﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪" ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ"‪ ،2006 ،‬ﺹ‪157‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (2‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪2006‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼـﺪﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠــــﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔـــــﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‬

‫ﺗـﻮﻧـﺲ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪0.2‬‬

‫‪2617.2‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬

‫‪53.2‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪2324.1‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1000.0‬‬ ‫‪99.0‬‬

‫‪25.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺗـﻮﻧﺲ‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪19.0‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺍﳉـﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫‪0.0‬‬

‫‪1.1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫‪793.7‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪0.2‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪759.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪40.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺳﻮﺭﻳـﺎ‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪2.0‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪48.0‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪7.1‬‬

‫‪7.5‬‬

‫‪4.3‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳـﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟـﻌﺮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻄﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻠـﺴﻄﲔ‬ ‫ﻗـﻄـﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻟـﺴﻌـﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟـﺴـﻮﺩﺍﻥ‬

‫ﻟـﺒـﻨـﺎﻥ‬

‫‪238.0‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪20.6‬‬

‫‪870.0‬‬

‫‪401.3‬‬

‫‪2733.8‬‬

‫‪25.5‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪3.3‬‬

‫‪56.2‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪24.0‬‬

‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫‪555.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪138.9‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪0.4‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪16.0‬‬

‫‪7.8‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪37.0‬‬

‫‪9.0‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1.0‬‬

‫‪12.0‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪224.0‬‬

‫‪80‬‬

‫ﻟﻴـﺒـﻴﺎ‬

‫‪25.8‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺟــﻤﺎﻟ‬ ‫ـﻲ‬

‫ﻣـﺼـــﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻟـﻤﻐـﺮﺏ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤــﻦ‬

‫‪11.3‬‬

‫‪10.6‬‬ ‫‪155.6‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪7.4‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪7563.0‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪183.5‬‬

‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪50.0‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪2.1‬‬

‫‪243.6‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪36.6‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪842.2‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪2715.2‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫‪0.6‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪2.0‬‬

‫‪0.4‬‬

‫‪196.8‬‬

‫‪0.4‬‬

‫‪16.4‬‬

‫‪0.1‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪53.9‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪2905.5‬‬

‫‪24.0‬‬ ‫‪783.1‬‬

‫‪31.9‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳـﺖ‬

‫‪94.5‬‬

‫‪29.4‬‬

‫‪20.0‬‬

‫‪76.0‬‬

‫ﻟـﺒﻨـﺎﻥ‬

‫‪0.2‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪0.0‬‬

‫‪168.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪163.0‬‬

‫‪1400.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪11.0‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫ﻣـﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻐـﺮﺏ‬

‫‪6.9‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪6.2‬‬

‫‪242.0‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻴـﻤﻦ‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1.9‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪4.0‬‬

‫‪381.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‬

‫‪1097.6‬‬

‫ﻟـﻴﺒﻴﺎ‬

‫‪3.3‬‬

‫‪40.0‬‬

‫‪49.0‬‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪58.5‬‬

‫‪113.0‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪1793.6‬‬

‫‪153.0‬‬

‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪7.0‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪498.3‬‬ ‫‪15.8‬‬

‫‪9.6‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪0.2‬‬

‫‪645.9‬‬

‫‪0.2‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫‪89.0‬‬

‫‪858.3‬‬

‫‪17575.7‬‬

‫‪1.5‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫‪350.1‬‬ ‫‪3265.4‬‬ ‫‪461.4‬‬ ‫‪2335.0‬‬ ‫‪2004.0‬‬ ‫‪4837.0‬‬ ‫‪2366.8‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ"ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ"‪ 2006‬ﺹ ‪ ،156‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ)‪(10‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (3‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ ‪2006‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻀﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﻨﻴًﺎ ﲟﻼﻳﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻻﺭﺍﺕ‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻀﺎﻓﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟـﺴـﻌـﻮﺩﻳـﺔ‬

‫‪4837‬‬

‫‪%27.5‬‬

‫ﻣــﺼـــﺮ‬

‫‪3265.4‬‬

‫‪%18.58‬‬

‫ﺗــﻮﻧــﺲ‬

‫‪2366.8‬‬

‫‪%13.47‬‬

‫ﻟــﺒـﻨـﺎﻥ‬

‫‪2335‬‬

‫‪%13.29‬‬

‫ﺍﻟــﺴــﻮﺩﺍﻥ‬

‫‪2004‬‬

‫‪%11.40‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‬

‫‪1097.6‬‬

‫‪%6.25‬‬

‫ﺍﻟــﻴــﻤــﻦ‬

‫‪858.3‬‬

‫‪%4.88‬‬

‫ﻟــﻴـﺒـﻴـﺎ‬

‫‪461.4‬‬

‫‪%2.63‬‬

‫ﺍﻟـﻤـﻐـﺮﺏ‬

‫‪350.1‬‬

‫‪%1.99‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺪﻱ ﺃﲪﺪ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺳﺎﱂ‪".‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤـﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺛﻨﲔ ‪2007/10/1‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻋﻠـﻲ ﻟﻄﻔـﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻋﲔ ﴰﺲ‪،‬ﺹ ‪124:‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ‪،‬ﺹ‪125:‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﰊ ﻋﺮﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،1998‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﲑﻣﻮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ 1998/11/25-23‬ﺣـﻮﻝ " ﻣﻨﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ" ﺍﺭﺑﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺹ )‪.(4‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ ،2006‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻃﻲ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ "ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪132:‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺡ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻲ‪" ،‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺇﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴـﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪.2005 ،23‬ﺹ‪36:‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻆ‪ ،‬ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ‪" ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺮ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ ،95‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﺍﻥ ‪ ،476-475‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪/‬ﺃﻛﺘﻮﺑﺮ ‪ .2004‬ﺹ‪30:‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ(‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -8‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ )ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ( ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻧﻌﻘﺪ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪– 20‬‬ ‫‪ ،2004/9/22‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.754 – 753‬‬

‫‪82‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪(IAS/IFRS‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪.‬ﺯﻏﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﲪﺪ & ﺍ‪.‬ﺳﻔﲑ ﳏﻤﺪ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎﺀ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﰲ ﺃﺳﺲ ﻭﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﺢ ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﳏﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻮﻕ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﰲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺪﻑ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﺒﺎﺕ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺇﱃ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ) ‪.( IAS/IFRS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻬﲏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﺎﺩﳝﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﱂ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻞ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﱘ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳍﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﱀ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﳑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﳓﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻣﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﲔ ﲣﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﳏﺎﺳﱯ ﻋﺎﳌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -I‬ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ‪-‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪ -‬ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﱂ ﻳﺄﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻓـﺮﺍﻍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟـﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﲤﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻮﺣﺪ ﻟﻺﻓﺼﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺮ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺒـﻊ ﻫـﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﳎـﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﺀﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﺮﺩ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﻞ ﺍﻣﺘﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ)‪ .(1‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻓﺼـﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﺨﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪83‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪(IAS/IFRS‬‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻼﳘﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻛﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﴰﻞ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﻪ "ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻔﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﻣﺶ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀﻠﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻟﻴﺲ ﳍﺎ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺎﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ")‪ .(2‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -II‬ﻣﻘﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‬

‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌـﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ)‪:(3‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﻬﺗﻢ‪ :‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﰲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻤﻬـﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴـﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﺒﻴـﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟـﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳍﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﱀ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻥ ﲣﺘﻠـﻒ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺼﺢ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﻭﺇﺻـﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻌـﺎﻳﲑ‬‫ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳒﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﳉﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ،(IASB‬ﺣﻴـﺚ ﲢـﺎﻭﻝ ﲢﺴـﲔ ﺟـﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﺢ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -III‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘـﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺘـﱪ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﳚﺐ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻠﺤـﻖ ﺍﻟﻘـﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺮ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﲢﺖ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﳊﺼﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﳌﻦ ﻳﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ)‪ .(4‬ﻓﻴﺠﻮﺯ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺴﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜـﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﱪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-IV‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﺎﳌﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﲔ ﳘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳊﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﻃﺮﻕ‬

‫‪- 84 -‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﺒﺌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﺔ ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ)‪.(5‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻓﺎﻥ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﺘﻠﺨﺺ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺍﲡﻬﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﱯ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻏﻲ ﰲ ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪ 17‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭ‪ 14‬ﺟﺪﻭﻻ ﺁﺧﺮ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻛﺒﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﺮﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳌﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ) ‪.( IAS/IFRS‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺟﺎﺀ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺛﻘﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﺮﺱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﲪﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﳛﻈﻰ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﲑ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺼﺢ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ)‪ .(6‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﳓﻮﻯ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﳏﺎﺳﱯ ﻋﺎﳌﻲ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -V‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺣﺴﺐ) ‪(SCF‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺴﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2010/01/01‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺟﻬﻮﺩﺍ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻀﲑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻴﻪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪ ،‬ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺛﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻀﲑ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﲢﻀﲑ ﺍﶈﺘﺮﻓﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﲔ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 85 -‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪(IAS/IFRS‬‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -1-V‬ﲢﻀﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﲢﻀﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳜﻀﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻭﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻷﺟﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﲟﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺟﺎﺀ ﰲ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪07‬‬ ‫–‪ .(7)11‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﲟﺴﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﳏﺎﺳﱯ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺰﻳﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳛﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ)‪ (8‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،19/90‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﲟﻮﺟﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﻘﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﲔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﳐﺮﺟﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﻌﻰ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﳏﺎﺿﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻠﺘﻘﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳜﻀﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺯﻣﲏ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﺪﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﲔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﱪﳎﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﲟﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻌﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-V‬ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﰎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺭﻭﺛﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳚﺐ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﲢﺪﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﳒﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺪﻭﻧﺎ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ) ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ( ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻀﻤﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ (‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫ﻫﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﺐ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﲑ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺷﻲ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ)‪ ،(9‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻼﻙ ﻭﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻴﺎ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺯﺓ؛‬‫ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ؛‬ ‫‪- 86 -‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ ﻓﺎﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﻧﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﻏﲑ ﻣﱪﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺆﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﱯ ﺍﳋﺎﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -3-V‬ﲢﻀﲑ ﺍﶈﺘﺮﻓﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﲔ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﻨﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺴﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪ (CNC‬ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬

‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺪ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻭﲢﻀﺮ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ)‪:(10‬‬ ‫ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻬﻨﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﲔ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﻭﲤﻜﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﻨﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻮﻑ ﲤﺲ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻬﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﲔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﺳﺒﲔ )‪ (IFAC‬ﺪﻑ ﻛﺴﺐ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺧﱪﺍﺀ‬‫ﳏﺎﺳﺒﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ؛‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﲔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ ﻭﺍﶈﺘﺮﻓﲔ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﻧﺐ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻖ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﲔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﲔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﱪﺍﺀ ﳏﺎﺳﺒﲔ‪ ،‬ﳏﺎﻓﻈﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﳏﺎﺳﺒﲔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﻲ ﺣﺜﻴﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﳑﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﺢ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﺒﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ؛‬‫ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ -VI‬ﻣﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫ﲤﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻘﺪﺓ ﻭﺑﺎﳋﺼﻮﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﳓﻦ ﺑﺼﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻃﺒﻌﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺮﺷﺎﺩ ﺑﻨﺺ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ )‪ ،(IFRS1‬ﻭﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺗﺒﻌﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﻄﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺒﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻣﻨﺬ ‪. 2005/01/01‬‬ ‫‪ -1-VI‬ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻫﻮ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ)‪:(11‬‬ ‫‪- 87 -‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪(IAS/IFRS‬‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ؛‬

‫‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ؛‬

‫ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ)‪ (IFRS1‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ،( IFRS‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪:(01‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ )‪(SCF‬‬

‫ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ أول ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﻤﺤﺎﺳﺒﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‬

‫‪2009/01/01‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻷول ﺣﺴﺐ) ‪(SCF‬‬

‫‪2009/12/31‬‬

‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‬

‫‪2010/12/31‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﳕﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ؛‬ ‫ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﳌﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﲟﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ) ‪.(SCF‬‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ)‪ ،(12‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2010/01/01‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺏ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲟﻘﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻫﻮ ‪2010/12/31‬؛‬‫‪- 88 -‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻫﻮ ‪ 2009/01/01‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ‪.2010/12/31‬‬ ‫‪ -2-VI‬ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2010/01/01‬ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻀﻊ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳒﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ )‪ (IFRS1‬ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺑﺄﺛﺮ ﺭﺟﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﰲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﲰﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ)‪ (13‬ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺻﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﳝﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑـ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺄﺛﺮ ﺭﺟﻌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ؛‬‫ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ) ‪(SCF‬؛‬‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ) ‪ (SCF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ )‪ (IFRS1‬ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺎﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﻑ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ؛‬‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻛﺄﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﻑ؛‬‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﻋﺘﺮﻑ ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ (PCN‬ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ) ‪(SCF‬؛‬‫ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺮﻑ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻛﺄﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ‬‫ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﲏ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﳏﻞ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﳚﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻪ؛‬‫ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺄﺛﺮ ﺭﺟﻌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻻ ﲰﻴﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ (PCN‬؛‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﺆﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ) ‪.(SCF‬‬

‫‪- 89 -‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪(IAS/IFRS‬‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -VII‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ)‪ ،(14‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻨﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺟﺎﺀ ﰲ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ )‪ (IFRS1‬ﻭﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻔﺼﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ) ‪ (SCF‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ؛‬‫ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﺯ؛‬‫ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﲟﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﱴ ﲤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ؛‬ ‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭ‬‫ﺗﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ؛‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺁﺧﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﻋﻦ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺣﺪﺛﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ)‪.(15‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺄﺛﺮ ﺭﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ )‪ (IFRS1‬ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺄﺛﺮ ﺭﺟﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﱪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )‪.(IFRS1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﲑ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﲣﺪﻡ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﱂ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻣﻔﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻧﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﱂ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪. 2010/01/01‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻨﺤﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﲔ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﳍﻢ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺑﺸﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﻩ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺘﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﲔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺸﺘﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻄﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﳊﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 32‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪.‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺳﻨﺔ‪ ، 2010‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺮﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪- 90 -‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ .2009/01/01‬ﻭﳍﺬﺍ ﳚﺐ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺎﺩﳝﻴﲔ ﻭﻣﻬﻨﻴﲔ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﲔ ﻭﻫﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﲰﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺒﲏ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ ﺑﺎ‪‬ﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﲟﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ) ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .( 2004 ،‬ﺹ‪.17 :‬‬ ‫)‪ (2‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺯﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﻬﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ .(2005 ،‬ﺹ‪.578 :‬‬ ‫)‪ (3‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺯﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ‪596-586 :‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺪﱐ‪" ،‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻮﻛﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻣﺪﻗﻘﻲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪،‬ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻰ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،2007 / 12/ 5-4‬ﺹ‪.15:‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺃﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﳉﻨﺴﻴﺔ‪) ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ (2004 ،‬ﺹ ﺹ‪.348 – 347 :‬‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﺃﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ‪.349 -348 :‬‬

‫)‪ (7‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،11‬ﺍﳉﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ،74‬ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ،04‬ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺥ ﰲ ‪.2007 / 11 / 25‬‬ ‫)‪ (8‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،23‬ﺍﳉﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ،19‬ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺥ ﰲ ‪2009 / 03 / 25‬‬

‫‪(9) Des robert,J,F. Méchin,F. Puteaux,H. normes IFRS et PME.(Paris :DUNOD,2004),pp :219-220.‬‬ ‫‪(10)Lamine Hamdi,M, "La profession comptable au Maghreb" ,(Algérie-Libye-Maroc‬‬‫‪Mauritanie-Tunisie), document de séminaire,2006,pp :12-13.‬‬ ‫‪(11) Journal Officiel de L’union Européenne. L 111/5 -17/04/2004.‬‬ ‫‪(12) JOURNAL OFFICIEL DE L'union européenne. L 111/7 -17/04/2004.‬‬ ‫‪(13) Pascale delvaille , norme comptable internationales ( généralités – présentation et évaluation dans le comptes‬‬ ‫‪individuels), (INTEC .2005/2006/) P :61.‬‬ ‫‪(14) DFCG, Norme IAS /IFRS (que fait il faire comment s'yprendre), 2éd(d’organisation 2004/2005), p.551‬‬ ‫‪(15) DFCG, op.cit,.P.553.‬‬

‫‪- 91 -‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﱘ ﺍﳋﻨﺎﻕ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﻼﻳﺎ )ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ(‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﲏ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺍﻻﻭﻓﺮ ﺣﻈﺎﹰ ﳌﻮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺸﻬﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﱪ " ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ " ﺍﺣﺪ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺠﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﱃ ﳏﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﺍﻻﻧﺴﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺍﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪‬ﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺧﺰ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺗﺮﺍﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺎﻟﻔﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎﺭﻛﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺎﰐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻳﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ‪ ،‬ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﺒﲑ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻻﳘﻴﺘﻪ ﻟﻼﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤـﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪﺕ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﳌﺎ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻭﻳﻔﺴﺢ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﳍﻢ ﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪ " ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ " ﺍﺣـﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺠـﺰ ﻋـﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﰲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺴﻬﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺫﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻓﺮﺿﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻭﱃ )ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ( ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﲞﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ‪‬ﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓـﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴـﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺧﺰ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺗﺮﺍﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺎﻟﻔﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎﺭﻛﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﻪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﺘﺎﰐ ﰲ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺫﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﱃ ﳏﺎﻭﻟـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ) ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﺘﺴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳘﻴﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺘﻠـﻚ ﺍﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﺸﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤـﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﻛﺎﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺄﰐ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﳏﺎﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﶈـﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺠﻴـﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌـﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﱃ ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﲑﺍ ﺟـﺎﺀ ﺍﶈـﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻫﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳒﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﳘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣـﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1-1‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ) ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﱪﺓ( ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ) ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﳝﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﺗﺬﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻐﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ) ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﱪﺓ( ﻻﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ) ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴـﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺫﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻐﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-1‬ﺍﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺠﻠﻰ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻳﻜﺘﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳘﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﺴﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﰐ‪:‬‬

‫‪93‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ "ًﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ " ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺫ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﳌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻪ ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺎﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﱪﺓ ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌـﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3-1‬ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﻃﲑ ﻣﻌﺮﰲ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻧﻴﹰﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﳉﺎﻣﻌـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ) ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ (‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ )ﰲ ﻛﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ( ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4-1‬ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﳎﺎﻣﻴﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﲑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ )ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ (‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨـﺔ ﻋـﻦ ﺍﳌـﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺪ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﺣﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﲟـﺎ‬

‫ﻳﻨﺴﺠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺏ ) ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﱪﺓ (‪:‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ )ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ( ﻭﺗﻔﺴﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻻﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﲡﺮﻳﱯ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﳋﱪﺓ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ )ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ( ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻇﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪‬ﺎ]‪.[1‬‬

‫‪ 5-1‬ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﱃ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ) ‪ ( 0.05‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳـﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ( 0.05‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ )ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ( ﻭﺑﲔ ) ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿـﻴﺔ (‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 6-1‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ )ﳎﺘﻤﻊ( ﻭﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫‪ 1-6-1‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﲑﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳏﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺑﻐﺪﺍﺩ ) ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ( ﻭﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﴰﻠﺖ ﺍﺭﺑﻊ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻫﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻻﳘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ ﻭﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﻐﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨـﻬﺮﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﻠﻴﺔ ) ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻓﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺙ (‪.‬‬ ‫‪: 2-6-1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ :‬ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺫﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳـﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻧﺴﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﰎ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )‪ (81‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ )‪ (6‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (5‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) ‪ ( 70‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺫ‪.‬‬ ‫‪94‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ 3-6-1‬ﻭﺻﻒ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻻﻫﻢ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳉﻨﺲ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (1‬ﺍﱃ ﺍﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺎﺙ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺑﻠﻎ ) ‪ ( 30‬ﺍﻱ ﳝﺜﻠﻮﻥ ) ‪ ( %43‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) ‪ ،( 70‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻜﺎﻥ ) ‪ ( 40‬ﻭﲟﺎ ﳝﺜﻞ ) ‪ ،( %57‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺎﺙ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺘـﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻣﺜـﻞ ﻫـﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ) ‪ ( 27‬ﺳﻨﻪ ﺍﱃ ) ‪ ( 62‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ) ‪ ( 1‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﺰﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺌـﺔ‬

‫) ‪ ( 40-31‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ) ‪ ( %30‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻱ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﺮﻳﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﻢ ﻳﺘﺮﻛﺰﻭﻥ ﺣـﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺌـﺔ‬ ‫) ‪.( 40-31‬‬

‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (1‬ﺑﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﲪﻠﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ) ‪ ( 54.3‬ﺍﱃ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﲪﻠﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟـﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ) ‪( 45.7‬‬

‫ﺑﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﱃ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲪﻠﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺪﺍﺛﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (1‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣـﻦ ) ‪( 10‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﱃ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ )‪ (30‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻮﺯﻋﻮﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ) ‪ (10‬ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺸﻜﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﻪ ) ‪.( %37‬‬

‫‪7-1‬ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻄﺮﻗﺖ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﻪ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺸﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻟﻼﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﰲ ﲨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪ 1-2‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﲑ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸـﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳـﺮﻯ‬

‫) ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻼﱐ‪ [2] (2003 ،‬ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ" ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﻴـﺖ ‪،‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﺍﻧﻴـﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ"‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿـﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ" ﻓﻀﺎﺀﹰﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﺪﺭﺳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﲟﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺒﹰﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﺪﺭﺳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﲔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﲑ ]‪ .[3‬ﺍﻱ ﺍﻥ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫـﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴـﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻛﺎﺩﳝﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﱪ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺗﻘﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺘﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ( ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺼـﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻻﰐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1-1-2‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻭ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﺸـﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻨـﺎﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳚﺎﰊ ﻭﻣﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻻﳒﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺗﻔﻘﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺎﺩﳝﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺫ ) ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺱ (‪ :‬ﺗﻐﲑ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺱ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﺎﺭ ﺑـﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻮﺟـﻪ‬

‫ﻭﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ]‪ .[4‬ﻭﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺱ ﰲ ﺑﻴﺌـﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠـﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪95‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﱃ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﻬﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺫﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻢ )ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ(‪ :‬ﳝﺘﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻓﺎﻋﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻏﺒﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻛﺜـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﻟﺘﺤﻤـﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﱃ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ]‪.[6‬‬

‫• ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﳛﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﰲ ﻣﻬﻨﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳚﺎﺑﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺗﻄـﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﳎﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﹰﺎ ﻭﺛﻘﺎﻓﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﹰﺎ ]‪.[7‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ (‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪Virtual Class room‬ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟـﺪﺭﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﺎﹰ ﺧﺎﺻﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺫ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻓﻬﺎ )‪(Turoff ,2008‬‬

‫]‪[8‬ﺑﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ " ﻓﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﲤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺳـﻂ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼـﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤـﺪﺓ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ"‪ .‬ﻭﳑﺎ ﳝﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻟﺘﻀﻢ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ ‪ Curriculum‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻣﺘﻼﺋﻤﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﻣﺜـﻞ ﻫـﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﲔ ﻭﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﺒﲏ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴـﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤـﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺮﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﻪ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺗـﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳـﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘـﻮﱘ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ]‪.[9‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ‪ Education Multimédia‬ﺍﻳﻀﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺍﱃ " ﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴـﻬﻢ ﺍﺳـﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ"]‪ .[10‬ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺎﻃﺐ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﻣـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺪﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺎﺕ‪،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﻮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2-1-2‬ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﹰﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﹰﺍ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﳏﻠﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﻋﺎﳌﻴﹰﺎ ]‪ .[11‬ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺗﻌﺰﻳـﺰ ﺍﻟـﺘﻔﻜﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺴﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ]‪.[12‬ﻣﻊ ﳏﺎﻭﻟـﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜـﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔـﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿـﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺹﺓ]‪.[13‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤـﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺃﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻤﻢ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳕﻮﺫﺟﺎﹰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺎﹰ ‪ Educational Model‬ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﻗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﺠﻴﻌﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻻﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻣﻼﺋﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻻﳕﻮﺫﺝ‬

‫‪96‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻤﻲ ]‪ [14‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﻭﺭﻳﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻏﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪Entrepreneurial‬‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴـﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺑﺴـﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﱃ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻭﺍﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﳚﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺳـﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻡ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﲏ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪﺓ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﲰﻌﺔ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﳍﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘـﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ]‪.[15‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﲏ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﱄ ﻗﻮﻱ ﳚﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺴﲑ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﻯ]‪ ( Limon , 2002) [16‬ﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻗﺪ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺴـﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲣﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼـﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻳﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﻪ ﺍﱃ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ‪ Customized Learning‬ﻭﺍﻣـﺘﻼﻙ‬

‫ﻣﻨﺘﻮﺟﹰﺎ ) ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﻴﻪ ( ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺣﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣـﻦ ﺧـﻼﻝ ﺗﻘـﺪﳝﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳕﻮﺫﺟﺎﺕ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﲝﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻳﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎ‪‬ـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﱵ ﻭﺍﳌﻜـﺎﱐ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ]‪.[17‬‬ ‫‪ 2-2‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ :‬ﲤﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳝﺜﻠـﻮﻥ ﺭﺍﺱ ﺍﳌـﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﰲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻ ﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻬﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﱪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺎﺣﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻟﻠﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـﺬﻛﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺍﱃ ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻋﻘﻮﻝ ﺧﱪﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺼﲑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣـﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻬﻴﺌﺎﺓ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻻﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﰎ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻛﺎﻻﰐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1-2-2‬ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ Knowledge Base‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻘﺪﺓ ]‪ .[18‬ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﺧﱪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻮﺍﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺤﻮﺍﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ Knowledge Acquisition Facility‬ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋـﱪﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﲔ ]‪ .[19‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻳﻀﹰﺎ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺤﻮﺍﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻦ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ]‪. [20‬‬

‫• ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ‪ :‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ‪ Inferences engine‬ﻋﻨﺼـﺮ ﺍﻟـﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈـﺎﻡ ‪ Reasoning‬ﻭﺗﺴـﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﻗﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳊﻘﺎﺋﻖ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ]‪ [21‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﱃ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪97‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫• ﺍﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ ‪ Explanation Facility‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﳊﻘﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ]‪ [22‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗـﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺴـﺘﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳉﻮﺍﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻟﲔ)‪.(How) (Why‬‬

‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻤﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪ User interface‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘـﺔ ﺗﺴـﻬﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪.[23‬‬

‫• ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﳚﺮﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺼﻤﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺑﻌـﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﺿـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ‪ The Development engine‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ]‪.[24‬‬

‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ Refining System Knowledge‬ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻔﻜﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﻪ ﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻠﻪ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﱃ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻔﻜﲑ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-2-2‬ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﺘﱪﻣﻦ ﳏﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺍﺩﺧـﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓـﺔ ﺍﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﲔ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻟﻜﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﱪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ Knowledge Engineer‬ﲟﻌﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟـﺬﻱ ﻳﺴـﺘﻨﺒﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺼﻤﻢ ﺍﳕﻮﺫﺟﹰﺎ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﳋﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺒﲑ ]‪ ،[25‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺎﺗﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻤﺮﺷﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﺒﲑ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺕ ﺍﺳـﺘﻨﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓـﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻔﺮﺓ‪.‬‬

‫• ﺍﳋﺒﲑ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ‪ The Expert‬ﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻐﺬﻯ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ ﻧﺴـﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﱃ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﲤﺜﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﱃ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍ ﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ‪ The User‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗـﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﰲ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﰲ ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3-2-2‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺱ ﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ Knowledge Acquisition‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻨﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﻭﺗﺸﻔﲑﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤـﻌﺮﻓﺔ ]‪. [26‬‬

‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﻮ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴـﻴﻢ ﻳﺴـﻌﻰ ﺍﱃ ﺍﻗﺎﻣـﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻣـﺎﹰ ﺻـﺤﻴﺤﺎﹰ‬

‫& ‪Validation‬‬

‫‪Verification‬ﺍﻱ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺣﱴ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ]‪.[27‬‬

‫• ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ Knowledge Representation‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻮﺍﺫ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺩﺧﺎﳍـﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﻄﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺩﻻﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﺎﻅ‪ ،‬ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪98‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﻮﺍﺭﺯﻣﻲ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﻔﻜـﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈـﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Inference‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻼﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳋﻠﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ‪ knowledge Explanation‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻭﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﺍﳘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﱐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﺮﻱ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﺎﻻﰐ‪ :‬ﻳﺴـﺘﻨﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻳﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳕﻮﺫﺟﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻗﻞ ﲝﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸـﺎﺭﺓ )‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻤﻮﻝ ‪‬ﺎ ( ﻭﺗﻐﺬﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪،‬ﻳﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻳﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﻣـﺮﺓ ﺍﺧـﺮﻯ‪) .‬ﻫـﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻻﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﱃ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﰲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺒﺎﻁ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺬﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ( ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴـﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌـﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ( ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳـﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓـﺔ ﲬﺴـﺔ‬

‫ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ )ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓـﺔ‪،‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ )ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﳑﺎﺭﺳـﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻـﺮ ﻭﺧﺼـﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1-3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳـﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺑﻌـﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺷـﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺼـﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻـﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪،‬ﻛﺎﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Mean‬ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﰊ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻋـﻦ ﻣـﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﲡﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﱵ ﺍﺩﱏ ﻭﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ‪،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﹰﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1-1-3‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ 1-1-1-3‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻀﻤﻦ " ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ " ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﲬﺴﺔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴـﺔ ﻭﺍﻟـﱵ ﺗﻌﻜـﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ "ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺓ " ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉـﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (2‬ﻭﻛﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺄﰐ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﹰﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﹰﺎ ) ‪ ( 3.397‬ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺟﺪﹰﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (2‬ﻭﲟﺪﻯ ﻋﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ‪ ( 0.4‬ﻭﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ‪ ،( 7‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﲤﺘﻠﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ ( 2‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ) ‪ ( 2.947‬ﻭﺑﺎﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻴـﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫) ‪ ، (1.840‬ﻭﲟﺪﻯ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ‪ ( 0.1‬ﻭﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ‪.( 6.6‬‬

‫• ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ) ‪ (3.046‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳـﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴـﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ) ‪. ( 1.668‬‬

‫‪99‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫• ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ ( 2‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﳓـﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴـﺎﺭﻱ ﻛـﺎﻥ ) ‪( 3.452‬‬ ‫ﻭ) ‪ ( 1.909‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﺮﺍﻭﺣﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﲔ ) ‪( 0‬‬

‫ﻭ ) ‪. ( 6.5‬‬

‫• ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ) ‪ ( 2‬ﺍﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﹰﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﹰﺎ ) ‪( 3.230‬‬ ‫ﻭﲟﺪﻯ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ‪ (0‬ﻭﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) ‪.( 6.6‬‬

‫ﻭﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﲤﺘﻠﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻭﺧﱪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳـﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓـﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﱃ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﻦ ﺧﱪ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈـﺎﻡ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﲤﺘﻠﻚ ﺧﱪﺓ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-1-1-3‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ " ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ " ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴـﺔ ﻭﺍﻟـﱵ ﺗﻌﻜـﺲ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪.(2‬‬ ‫•ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺴـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴـﺔ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﲔ ) ‪ ( 0‬ﻭ ) ‪ ( 6.6‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ ) ‪ ( 3.173‬ﻭﺑﺎﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ) ‪.( 1.931‬‬

‫• ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (2‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﲔ )‪ (0‬ﻭ)‪ ،(6.6‬ﻭﲟﺘﻮﺳﻂ ) ‪( 2.647‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﺎﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ) ‪.( 1.984‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ ( 2‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴـﺎﺱ ) ‪ ( 3.732‬ﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ )‪.(1.751‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿـﻴﺔ ﻭ ﰲ ﳎـﺎﻝ ﺍﳋـﱪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﲟﺘﻮﺳﻂ ) ‪ ( 4.012‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺘﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﰲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﱏ ) ‪ ( 0‬ﻭﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ) ‪.( 6.9‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﺒﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺧـﱪﺓ ﺑـﺒﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-1-3‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ ( 2‬ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻷﰐ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ) ‪ ( 3.214‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪:‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻻﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺘﺸﺘﺖ ﺍﻛـﱪ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺫ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺍﻻﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ) ‪. ( 1.681‬‬

‫‪100‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃﻱ ﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳘﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺔ " ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ "‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﳘﻴـﺔ" ﻟﻨﻈـﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑـﲔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﻠﻮﺏ ‪ person‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪) .‬ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ( ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ ) ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺑـﲔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1-2-3‬ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺙ‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﲢﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ) ‪(0.05) ،( 0.01‬‬

‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ ،(3‬ﺍﻱ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻧﺴﺠﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻛﺒﲑﹰﺍ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﱃ‪.‬‬

‫• ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (3‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺴﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿـﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﲢﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ) ‪. (0.05) ، ( 0.01‬‬

‫‪ 2-2-3‬ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ) ‪ (4‬ﻣﺼـﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃـﺎﺕ ﺑـﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ) ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻞ ( "ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﻪ " ﻭﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ) ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ( " ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ " ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻭ ﺭﻓـﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ( ﻭﺍﻻﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻼ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﲔ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 1-2-2-3‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (4‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ‪:‬‬

‫• ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻇﻬﺮﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (4‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴـﺔ ﺑﻨﻈـﺎﻡ‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ) ‪ ( 4‬ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ) ‪ ( 4‬ﻭﻛﺎﻧـﺖ‬ ‫ﲨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ) ‪ ،( 0.01‬ﻭﺣﻘﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ ) ‪(0.455‬‬ ‫ﻭﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ) ‪ ،( 0.01‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴـﺔ ﺍﺳـﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫• ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ ( 4‬ﺍﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ) ‪ ،( 0.01‬ﳑﺎ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﳘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﺫﻟﻚ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ) ‪ ( 0.572‬ﻭﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ) ‪ ( 0.01‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫• ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺴـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﳘﻴﺔ ﺧﱪﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺴـﺎﻡ ﰲ ﳎـﺎﻝ ﺍﺳـﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫• ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ ﺧﱪﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸـﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ) ‪ ( 0.01‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ) ‪ ( 0.01‬ﺍﻳﻀﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪101‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫• ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ ( 4‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻌـﺪ ﻭﺍﺑﻌـﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ) ‪ ،( 0.01‬ﻭﲢﻘﻘﺖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﺫ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ‪ ( 0.686‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺺ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺣﻘﻖ ) ‪ ( 20‬ﻋﻼﻗـﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳـﺔ‬ ‫ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻻﻝ ) ‪ ( 0.01‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ ) ‪ ( 20‬ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-2-2-3‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ) ‪ ( 5‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻞ )ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ( ﻭﺑـﲔ‬

‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ) ‪ ( 5‬ﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳـﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﲢﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ) ‪ ،( 0.01‬ﻭﺑﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﲨﺎﱄ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿـﻴﺔ ) ‪( 0.691‬‬ ‫ﻭﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ) ‪ ،( 0.01‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻞ )ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ( ﻟﻪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 4‬ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺰﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺫﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﺍﱃ ﺍﻃﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ) ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﳑﺎﺭﺳـﺔ ( ﻗﺎﺑﻠـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﳌﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻻﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ )ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳـﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓـﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ( ﳑﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺆﺷـﺮ ﻟﺼـﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ " ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ " ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳـﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻃﺮﺩﻱ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﱃ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ " ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ " ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺫﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﲑﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺧﺰ‪‬ـﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻣـﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺫﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺍﻥ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﱃ ﺍﳘﻴـﺔ )ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ( ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ " ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ "‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﻻﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻬﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪102‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ " ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ " ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ " ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ " ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺤﻮﺍﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓـﺔ ﻭﲤﺜﻴﻠـﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤـﺎﺕ–‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺯﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺫﺓ ﰲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﰲ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻌﺖ ﺷﻮﻃﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺞ ﺍﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﲢﻔﻴﺰ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺿـﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ ( 1‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻤﻠﺤﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﻭﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬

‫ﺍﳉﻨﺲ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻨﺎﺙ‬ ‫ﺫﻜﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪40-31‬‬ ‫‪50-41‬‬ ‫‪60-51‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪15-11‬‬ ‫‪20-16‬‬ ‫‪25-21‬‬ ‫‪30-26‬‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﻓﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻓﻮﻕ‬

‫‪103‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪42.9‬‬ ‫‪57.1‬‬

‫‪70‬‬

‫‪100‬‬

‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪17.1‬‬ ‫‪30.0‬‬ ‫‪25.7‬‬ ‫‪24.3‬‬ ‫‪2.9‬‬

‫‪70‬‬

‫‪100‬‬

‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬

‫‪54.3‬‬ ‫‪45.7‬‬

‫‪70‬‬

‫‪100‬‬

‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬

‫‪37.1‬‬ ‫‪11.4‬‬ ‫‪12.9‬‬ ‫‪11.4‬‬ ‫‪10.0‬‬ ‫‪17.1‬‬

‫‪70‬‬

‫‪100‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺠﺩﻭل ) ‪ (2‬ﺍﻟﺨﻼﺼﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬

‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬

‫ﺍﻻﳓﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺕ‬

‫‪0.4‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪3.397‬‬

‫‪2.029‬‬

‫‪0.1‬‬

‫‪6.6‬‬

‫‪2.947‬‬

‫‪1.840‬‬

‫‪0.1‬‬

‫‪6.5‬‬

‫‪3.046‬‬

‫‪1.668‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪6.5‬‬

‫‪3.452‬‬

‫‪1.909‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪6.6‬‬

‫‪3.230‬‬

‫‪1.776‬‬

‫‪0.2‬‬

‫‪6.4‬‬

‫‪3.214‬‬

‫‪1.576‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪6.6‬‬

‫‪3.173‬‬

‫‪1.931‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪6.6‬‬

‫‪2.647‬‬

‫‪1.984‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪6.4‬‬

‫‪3.732‬‬

‫‪1.751‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪6.9‬‬

‫‪4.012‬‬

‫‪1.904‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪6.5‬‬

‫‪3.391‬‬

‫‪1.681‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬

‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬

‫‪V1‬‬

‫ﻨﻅﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺭﺍﻀﻴﺔ‬

‫‪V2‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ) ‪ ( 3‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺘﺒﺎﻁﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ‬

‫ﻨﻅﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1.000‬‬

‫‪0.821‬‬ ‫‪1.000‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪**0.581‬‬ ‫‪*0.740‬‬ ‫‪1.000‬‬

‫‪*0.463‬‬ ‫‪**0.591‬‬ ‫‪**0.527‬‬ ‫‪1.000‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪0.434‬‬ ‫‪0.616‬‬ ‫‪*0.535‬‬ ‫‪**0.778‬‬ ‫‪1.000‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻤﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺭﺍﻀﻴﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫* ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ‪P < 0.05‬‬ ‫** ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ‪P < 0.01‬‬

‫‪104‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪**0.417‬‬ ‫‪**0.528‬‬ ‫‪**0.456‬‬ ‫‪**0.474‬‬ ‫‪**0.533‬‬

‫‪**0.343‬‬ ‫‪**0.458‬‬ ‫‪**0.457‬‬ ‫‪**0.505‬‬ ‫‪**0.537‬‬

‫‪**0.376‬‬ ‫‪**0.510‬‬ ‫‪**0.654‬‬ ‫‪**0.695‬‬ ‫‪**0.723‬‬

‫‪**0.480‬‬ ‫‪**0.537‬‬ ‫‪**0.609‬‬ ‫‪**0.644‬‬ ‫‪**0.656‬‬

‫‪1.000‬‬

‫‪**0.866‬‬ ‫‪1.000‬‬

‫‪**0.630‬‬ ‫‪**0.666‬‬ ‫‪1.000‬‬

‫‪**0.627‬‬ ‫‪**0.622‬‬ ‫‪**0.901‬‬ ‫‪1.000‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ ( 4‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪ Person‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ) ﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ( ﻭ ) ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﻪ (‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮات اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬

‫اﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة‬

‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬

‫اﻟﻤﻤﺎرﺳﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬

‫اﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬

‫اﻻﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫اﻟﻌﺪ‬ ‫د‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬

‫‪**0.417‬‬

‫‪**0.343‬‬

‫‪**0.376‬‬

‫‪**0.480‬‬

‫‪**0.455‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪%100‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬

‫‪**0.528‬‬

‫‪**0.458‬‬

‫‪**0.510‬‬

‫‪**0.537‬‬

‫‪**0.572‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪%100‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ‬

‫‪**0.456‬‬

‫‪**0.457‬‬

‫‪**0.654‬‬

‫‪**0.609‬‬

‫‪**0.609‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪%100‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬

‫‪**0.474‬‬

‫‪**0.505‬‬

‫‪**0.695‬‬

‫‪**0.644‬‬

‫‪**0.649‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪%100‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬

‫‪**0.533‬‬

‫‪**0.537‬‬

‫‪**0.723‬‬

‫‪**0.656‬‬

‫‪**0.686‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪%100‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ‬

‫اﻻهﻤﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﲨﺎﱄ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬

‫‪V4‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫اﻟﻌﺪد‬

‫‪%100‬‬

‫* ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ‪P < 0.05‬‬ ‫** ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ‪P < 0.01‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ) ‪ ( 5‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪ Person‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ) ﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ( ﻭ ) ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﻪ (‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪V1‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬

‫**‪0.562‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ‬ ‫**‪0.535‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫**‪0.686‬‬

‫**‪0.682‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﲨﺎﱄ‬ ‫**‪0.691‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪%100‬‬

‫* ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ‪P < 0.05‬‬ ‫** ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ‪P < 0.01‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫]‪ [1‬ﺻﻨﻒ )ﻗﻨﺪﻳﻠﺠﻲ‪ ( 34 : 2002 ،‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪) :‬ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻬﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻮﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﲟﺎ ﻳﻨﺴﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺤﻮﺛﺔ )ﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ( ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺏ )ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﱪﺓ( ‪ ،‬ﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬

‫]‪ [2‬ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻼﱐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺴﲑ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻪ ﻭﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪﻩ"‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻓﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪،2003 ،‬ﺹ‪4‬‬

‫]‪ [3‬ﺩﺍﻭﺩ‪،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﻭ ﺑﻠﺤﺒﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﲪﺪ ﳒﻴﺐ "ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 4:2002‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻂ‪http://www.ac4mit.org ،2005/5/6‬‬

‫"‬

‫"‬

‫]‪ [4‬ﻧﺸﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ ﺣﺴﲔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ ‪119 – 117 : 2004 ،‬‬

‫]‪ [5‬ﻧﺸﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ ﺣﺴﲔ ‪ :2004 ،‬ﺹ‪.117‬‬ ‫‪[6] Limon,C.C.," The Virtual University Customized Education in a Nutshell, in "Technology‬‬ ‫‪ Enhanced Learning,Goodman,2002:198‬‬ ‫]‪ [7‬ﻧﺸﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ ﺣﺴﲔ ‪.118 :2004 ،‬‬ ‫‪[8] Turoff,M." Designing a Virtual Classroom", online in 14/09 /2008‬‬ ‫‪http://168.144.129.112/Articles/Designing%20a%20Virtual%20Classroom.rtf‬‬ ‫‪105‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫]‪ [9‬ﻋﺒﺪﺍﳍﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ‪"،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ" ‪،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫]‪ [10‬ﺳﻼﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻆ‪" ،‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻜﻨﻠﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ" ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺯﻭﻱ‪،‬‬

‫‪،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ ‪:1996،‬ﺹ ‪6‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ :2002،‬ص‪.107‬‬

‫‪[11] Limon , 2002 , Ibid.: 18‬‬ ‫‪[13] Holt, H.Barrett, B, Yhus, A.O. "The Glottal Virtual University. E- learning for‬‬ ‫‪Sustainable Future", UNEP, 2003, WWW.gra.Unu.edu.‬‬

‫]‪ [14‬ﺻﺎﱀ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ )‪ ،(2003‬ﻣﺪﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻏﻴﺔ‪،‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪:‬ﺹ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ‪2005/4/11‬‬

‫‪www.gulfkids.com/ar/index.php?action=show_res&r_id=68&topic_id=1294 - 222k – ‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪[14] Limon , 2002 , Ibid: 189‬‬

‫]‪ [15‬ﺍﻧﻴﺲ‪،‬ﺣﺴﲔ‪"،‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ" ‪،‬ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪،‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪،‬‬

‫‪ :2005‬ﺹ‪.237‬‬

‫‪[16] Limon , 2002 , Ibid [15] 200.‬‬ ‫‪[17]Limon, 2002, Ibid: 194-195.‬‬ ‫‪[18] Turban, E, Rainer, R.K., & Potter, R., “Introduction to Information Technology”, SOHN‬‬ ‫‪WILLY & SONS, Inc , USA , 2003. p401‬‬ ‫‪[19] McKeon, P.G & Leitch, R.A,, “Management Information Systems- Managing with‬‬ ‫‪computers”, The Dryden Press. 1993, p3-5.‬‬ ‫‪[20] Dym, C.L., Levitt, R.E., “Knowledge- Based Systems in Engineering” , Mc Graw-Hall,‬‬ ‫‪Inc,USA, 1991, p 15‬‬ ‫‪[21] Dym, C.L & Levitt, R.E., “Knowledge- Based Systems in Engineering”, Mc Graw-Hall, Inc,‬‬ ‫‪1991, p 15‬‬ ‫]‪ [22‬ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﳒﻢ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻮﻯ ﺍﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺒﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ‪“ ،‬ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺭﻳﻪ – ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺻﺮ” ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻭﺍﺋﻞ‪،‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ، 2005‬ﺹ ‪.165‬‬

‫]‪ [23‬ﻣﻜﻠﻴﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﳝﻮﻧﺪ ‪“ ،‬ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ” ‪،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺐ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ‪،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﻳﺦ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‬

‫‪ .2000 ،‬ﺹ‪. 633‬‬

‫]‪ [24‬ﻏﺮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺪ ﻭﺣﺠﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﳏﻤﺪ‪" ، (1999) ،‬ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺭﻳﻪ – ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ" ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻌﻪ ﺍﻻﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﺹ‪.483‬‬

‫‪[25] Dym, C.L., Levitt, R.E., “Knowledge- Based Systems in Engineering”, M Graw-Hall, Inc,‬‬ ‫‪1991. p17‬‬ ‫‪[26]Gains,B.R.,(1990) "Knowledge Acquisition Systems", in Knowledge Engineering ,Volume‬‬ ‫‪(1) ,Fundamentals, Deli, McGraw-Hill Publishing company,‬‬ ‫‪. p66.‬‬

‫]‪ [27‬ﺗﻮﺭﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺮﺍﱘ‪،‬ﻣﻠﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺮﱘ ﻭﻭﻳﺜﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﲨﺲ ‪ "،‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ" ﺑﺎﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﺷﻌﺒﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬

‫‪،‬ﺹ‪662‬‬

‫‪106‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬

‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻱ ﳏﻤﺪ ﳊﺴﻦ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ‪ :‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺃﻻ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﲡﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻜﺘﺴﺐ ﺻﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﳕﺎ ﲡﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﱪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺴﻊ ﲢﺪﻩ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲰﻴﺖ ﺑﺎ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ )‪ ،( Large Economic Spaces‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﳓﻮ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺘﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﲡﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻤﻮﻳﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ ‪.‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺘﲔ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ NCMSA‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ، 1991‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ NAFTA‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .1994‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﺣﲔ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﺕ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﳝﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻻﻧﺪﻳﻦ ‪ ،ANDEAN‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺑﺪﺃ ﲡﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﳑﺜﻼ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ‪ GAFTA‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1997‬ﻭ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ‪ CACM‬ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﺴﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ‪ ASEAN‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪، 1992‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﲡﻤﻊ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺳﻴﻔﻴﻚ ‪ ، APEC‬ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﰊ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪، 1994‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺃ ﻣﻊ ‪ 34‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﻟﻸﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺘﲔ ) ‪ ،(FTAA‬ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻸﺫﻫﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻫﻮ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺩﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ؟ ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻈﲑ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ؟‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫" ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫" ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫" ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫" ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫"‬

‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺷﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﺏ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﲑﻱ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺣﱴ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺭﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ﺑﺪﺀ ﲟﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺷﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﰲ ﺣﻘﺒﱵ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺎﳘﺖ ﰲ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﳉﻴﻠﲔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻭ ﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻭ ﻳﻀﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﲜﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ‪Viner‬ﻭ ‪ Balasa‬ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﲔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺆﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ ،J.EMead ,Melvin, Lipsey, Bhagwati, Gehrels‬ﻭ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ‬ ‫‪107‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻵﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﰲ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺏ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺗﻌﺒﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ‪The Basic Theory of‬‬ ‫‪ Economic Integration‬ﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻤﲔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﲔ ﺑﺸﺆﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ Jhonson‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻹﳘﺎﳍﻢ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭ ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﻏﺒﻮﻥ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺩﻋﺖ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﳘﺖ ﰲ ﻧﺸﺄ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱪﻫﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﺟﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻘﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ :‬ﳌﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲡﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﲏ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲑﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ؟‬ ‫‪Cooper,‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳉﻮﻫﺮﻱ ﻳﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻓﻜﺮﻳﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ)‪ ،( Economic Theory of Protectionism‬ﻭ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﲨﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻲ ﻛﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﲪﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﱪﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺗﺒﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳉﻮﻫﺮﻱ ﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻮﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺃﲨﻌﻮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺩﺍﻓﻊ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﲪﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﻊ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﱪﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺮ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻣﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻟﻘﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﲰﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﺑﻀﻼﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﳍﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪. .1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳚﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﺠﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺑﺰﻏﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻟﻺﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺬ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺇﱃ ﻛﺘﻠﺘﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺧﺮﺟﺖ ﻧﺰﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺣﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺟﺘﺎﺣﺖ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﱰﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﰒ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺭﺃﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﺒﻴﻼ ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺼﺎﳊﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪108‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻟﻘﺪ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺃ ﺑﺈﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ‬ ‫)‪ (NAFTA‬ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﰲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺃﻃﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﱃ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺗﻴﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﲤﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻫﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻼﻫﺎ ﺍﻹﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﲔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﻤﻌﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﰲ ﺃﺭﺧﺒﻴﻞ ﺭﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺑﺮﺯ ﲰﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ )‪ (3‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻐﻠﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺬﻫﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻪ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﱴ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ )‪ .(Open Regionalism‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺛﲑ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﻭﺿﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺘﻞ ﺃﺑﻴﻚ )‪ ،(APEC‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺍﻫﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫© ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ‪ :Open Membership‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﳛﻖ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫© ﺷﺮﻁ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻊ ‪ :Non-prohibition Clause‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻱ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﲡﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﺘﻤﺘﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫© ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ‪ :Selective Liberalization And Open Benefits‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﲡﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ‪ ،MFN‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﲟﻴﺰﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺗﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،Continental Trade Blocs‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﲰﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻻﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫• ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺛﺎﻟﺜﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪109‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻝ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺑﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1994‬ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﻞ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﳉﺎﺕ ﻓﻜﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﲔ ﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﲔ ﱂ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻤﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﺘﻞ)‪ .(5‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺗﲑﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ %75‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺄﰐ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (01‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﲬﺲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺇﱃ ﲦﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﰲ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﱯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﱃ ﳓﻮ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﳝﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻘﺖ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﺗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﱂ ﻳﺆﺗﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﲦﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺳﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ)‪:(6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻜﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﰲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﱪﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳊﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﲡﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻛﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻨﻬﺎﺟﺎ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﳏﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﱪﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ‪‬ﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﰲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ NAFTA‬ﻭ ﻋﻀﻮ ﰲ‬ ‫ﲡﻤﻊ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺳﻴﻔﻴﻚ ‪ APEC‬ﻭ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻵﰐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺫ ﺇﱃ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻗﻴﻮﺩﺍ ﲪﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺴﺎﻳﺮ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (02‬ﻳﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪110‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﲔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﻣﲔ ﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ )‪:(7‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﺎﻫﻠﻪ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﳍﺎ ﳏﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﻳﺸﲑﻭﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻭ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﺯ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ Economic Efficiency Gains‬ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﱴ ﲤﺜﻞ ﲰﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻜﺴﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻻ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻔﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻴﺎﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﱴ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ‪ Static Gains‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﺎ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪Economies of Scale‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﻤﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻒ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺩﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1.3‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫© ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﻭﻓﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﻭ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ‪. Research and Development‬‬ ‫© ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(8‬‬

‫‪111‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫©‬

‫©‬ ‫©‬ ‫©‬ ‫©‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻸﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﺠﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻔﺎﺫ ﻟﻸﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﲡﺎﺭﻱ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻛﱪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺿﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﳏﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻋﻄﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ‪.‬‬

‫‪.2.3‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ ﺃﻓﺮﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺷﻜﻠﺖ ﰲ‬ ‫)‪(9‬‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫©‬

‫©‬

‫©‬

‫ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺖ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ‪ EC‬ﻭ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻊ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ‬ ‫ﺍﲡﻬﺖ ﺃﻭﺭﺑﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ‪ EU‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﺼﻨﺎ ﺃﻭﺭﺑﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﺎﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺑﻴﺔ ﺭﲟﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪‬ﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺴﻜﺮ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻛﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﻴﺎﰐ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺙ ﰲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺃﻭﺭﺑﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﻟﻴﺸﻤﻞ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺃﻭﺭﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﻯ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﻪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﺷﺠﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﳔﺮﺍﻁ ﰲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻲ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻇﻢ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﺭﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﻼﻝ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻛﺸﺮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺃﻡ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ؟‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻳﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻻﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﻫﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﰲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ‪‬ﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ؟ ﻭ ﻫﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ؟‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﻌﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺒﺎﻁ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﱂ ﲢﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻋﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﻫﻞ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﻋﻢ ﻗﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻟﻺﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ؟ ﺭﲟﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻌﻢ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﳌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﳚﺐ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺸﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪112‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻀﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ‪ :24‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﺕ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ 1994‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ‪،‬ﻭﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ‪،‬ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺯﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ‪ :05‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺄﰐ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ " ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ" ﻭ‪‬ﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻈﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲤﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﲔ ) ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﳔﺮﺍﻁ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ‪ :05‬ﻣﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻔﺘﻘﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺭﺥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍ ﺍﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺳﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﲟﻌﲎ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﻫﻨﺎ ‪ :‬ﻫﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻺﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ؟‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﲟﻌﲎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﻞ ﻳﺼﺐ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻘﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﻤﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﳕﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭ ﻏﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎﺝ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 24‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲤﺘﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺎﺭﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﳓﻮ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻳﺸﺠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺯﺩﻫﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﰲ ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﲑ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻭ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻔﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻲ)‪:(10‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ‪ %84‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﳛﺘﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺳﺘﻪ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪113‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫•‬

‫•‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺪﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﺒﲎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ % 08‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻋﻤﻖ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ‪ ( .....‬ﰲ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻃﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺧﺘﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳛﺘﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﲤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻫﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫© ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﳉﻌﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫© ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻘﺖ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫© ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺍﺯﺍﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳕﻮﺍ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ ﻭﺿﻠﺖ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺣﱴ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺑﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﲢﻮﻟﺖ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻴﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺣﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﻒ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ –ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻮﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ -‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﰎ ﺇﺑﻼﻍ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،1998‬ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪312‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺑﻠﻐﺖ ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ‪ 170‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ‪ 65‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﻼﻍ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ)‪ .(11‬ﻭ ﺑﺈﲨﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺷﻬﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻴﺎ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺭﻋﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﳕﺖ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 54‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2006‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬ﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪.(01‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﳌﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺎ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﰊ ﻟﻠﻜﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺘﲔ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﰊ )ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺘﲔ( ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﺳﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ )ﻧﺎﻓﺘﺎ( ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﻮ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺃ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ )ﻣﲑﻛﺴﻮﺭ( ﻭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺁﻧﺪﻳﺎﻥ(‬ ‫ﰲ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﳉﻨﻮﺏ ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﻴﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ﻭ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪.02‬‬ ‫‪114‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻟﻌﻞ ﺃﺑﺮﺯ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ ‪ ،Intra-regional Trade‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺕ ‪ % 40‬ﰲ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﳕﻮﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ % 48‬ﻋﺎﻣﻲ ‪ 2005-2003‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻹﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻳﻀﻢ ‪ 25‬ﺑﻠﺪﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ‪ 15‬ﰲ ﻣﺎﻱ ‪ ،2004‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳍﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﰊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3470‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﺇﱃ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 5137‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﻟﺘﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 7602‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻊ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ‪ ،2007‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪.03‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ )ﺍﻵﺳﻴﺎﻥ( ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﳑﺎﺛﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‪ 211‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2003‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 305‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﻭﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2007‬ﺇﱃ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 437‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ % 44‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺃ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﲑﺍ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1308‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 1634‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﰒ ‪2040‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻊ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ‪ ،2007‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ % 25‬ﻓﻘﻂ)‪.(12‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻟﻌﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﰲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ‪ %62.8‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2007‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ‪ % 60.6‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﻭ ‪% 45‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺘﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2007‬ﻟﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﺇﱃ ‪ % 25.7‬ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.03‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻮ "ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ" ﺃﻭ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﺎﺫ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺃ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳜﻠﻖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﰲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺳﻮﻯ ‪ %10‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ)‪.(04‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻼﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻸﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻘﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻁ –ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻴﻠﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭ ﺃﻻ ﲣﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺎﺋﺾ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲑﺍﺩ ﰲ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻴﺲ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲑﺍﺩ ﰲ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﻓﺈﻥ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺎﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﲢﻞ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﻮﻥ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﲞﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﳏﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ )ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ( ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺟﻠﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﳛﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﺫﻭ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻡ ﻓﻬﻮ ﳛﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲑﺍﺩ ﺃﺩﱏ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫‪115‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﻷﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺍ ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺸﺄ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺅﻩ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﻼ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ –ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ‪ -‬ﻳﻜﻔﻼﻥ ﻟﻸﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻛﺤﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪﺕ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﱐ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻬﻤﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﺸﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﲪﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻺﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﱯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺸﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻛﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﻓﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺯﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪......‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻣﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲟﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺸﺄ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﲣﻀﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄ ﳌﻔﺎﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺜﻔﺔ ﻹﳚﺎﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺒﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ)‪. (13‬ﻭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄ‪ .‬ﻭ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﳏﻠﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻭ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺧﻄﺮﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻣﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻴﺔ) ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻄﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ( ﻭ ﲬﺲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﱂ ﲣﻄﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻠﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﻴﺒﻮﰐ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫)‪(14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎ(‬ ‫• ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳊﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻔﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳊﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺟﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﻏﻮﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺆﲤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲤﺖ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺃ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺽ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻻﺕ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺩ ﻗﺪ ﻭﻟﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ‪ ، TRIPS‬ﻭ ﴰﻮﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑـ ‪ . TRIPS PLUS‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳊﻘﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ‪.TRIPS‬‬

‫‪116‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫•‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﰲ ﻋﺎﱂ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻓﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻌﻨﻴﻪ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺃ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ؟ ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﳌﺎ ﳚﺮﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻋﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺮﻉ ﳓﻮ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻻ ﲤﻠﻚ ﻣﻘﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﱴ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﺪﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻜﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺃ‪ ،‬ﲡﺎﺭﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ؟ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﱐ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.1.2‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﺘﻞ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﲔ ﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻭﳍﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺧﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎ؟‬ ‫ ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻬﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺮﺡ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻻ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺘﺘﺤﺪ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻡ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﺔ ﻭ ﲣﻀﻊ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺧﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻠﻴﺔ؟‬ ‫ﻭ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺃﻭ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻭ ﻟﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﰲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆ ﺑﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻫﻲ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﻟﺘﺒﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﻵﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫)‪(15‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﲔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﻣﻀﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺩﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ –ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻺﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﳝﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﰲ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻼﻣﺢ‬ ‫)‪(16‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪117‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﲨﺎﻋﻲ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﺺ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺜﻤﺔ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﳜﻠﻖ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻤﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫)‪(17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﰲ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ :‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﰲ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳔﻔﻀﺖ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺰﻣﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﳔﻔﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﳔﻔﻀﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﲔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﻓﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﰲ ﳜﻔﺾ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺸﺠﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﻥ ﺛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻼﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﰲ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﲏ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﲡﺎﻩ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2.2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﻃﺮﰲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﻘﺘﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﳌﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﲔ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(18‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﻭ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻘﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺃﻭﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺎ ﺑﻔﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻋﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪118‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫• ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ :‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻀﻄﻠﻊ ﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺯﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻖ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﲡﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﳎﺮﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺤﻲ‪ Shallow Integration ،‬ﻟﺘﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ‪ Deep Integration‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺸﺄ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﺖ ﻣﺼﺎﱀ ﻭ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻃﻮﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺘﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻮ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻜﺎﺯ ﰲ‬ ‫ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻛﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺃﻱ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺷﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﱪ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ – ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ - Economic Integration process -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﳝﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﻘﺖ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﱂ ﻳﺄﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﲦﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺳﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻹﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﺎﺑﻜﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﰲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻳﺪﻋﻮ ﺇﱃ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ –‬ ‫– ‪ Effeciency Gains‬ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﱴ ﲤﺜﻞ ﲰﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﺴﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻭﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﺍﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﳚﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺍﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪119‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻻ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻔﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻴﺎﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻛﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﱴ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ‪ –Static Gains-‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﺎ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ – ‪ – Economies of scale‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺗﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﻘﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ :(01‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻕ ﺃﺳﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺳﻴﻔﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ‬

‫ﺩﻭﻝ‬

‫ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫‪26‬‬

‫‪26‬‬

‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﱯ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﴰﺎﻝ ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪20‬‬

‫‪35‬‬

‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‬

‫‪08‬‬

‫ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪48‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫‪11‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻟﻜﻞ‬

‫‪02‬‬

‫‪06‬‬

‫‪05‬‬

‫‪08‬‬

‫‪04‬‬

‫‪04‬‬

‫‪11‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻟﻜﻞ‬

‫‪07‬‬

‫‪12‬‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫‪29‬‬

‫‪09‬‬

‫‪09‬‬

‫‪29‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪World Bank, Global Economic Prospects, Washitington, 2005, p : 24 :‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ : (02‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬

‫ ‬

‫ ‬

‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬

‫ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﻼﻝ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠﺖ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺟﺰ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﺮﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﳕﻮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪:‬‬

‫ ‬

‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬

‫‪S.Lawrence ,Op.cit, P18‬‬

‫‪120‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬

‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ‪.‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ :(03‬ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪) 2007،2005،2003‬ﲟﻠﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻻﺭﺍﺕ‪(% ،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪2007‬‬ ‫‪2005‬‬ ‫‪2003‬‬ ‫‪437‬‬ ‫‪304.6‬‬ ‫‪211.1‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪2007‬‬ ‫‪2005‬‬ ‫‪2003‬‬ ‫‪25.7‬‬ ‫‪25.5‬‬ ‫‪25.1‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‬

‫‪3470‬‬

‫‪5137‬‬

‫‪7602‬‬

‫‪60.6‬‬

‫‪64.1‬‬

‫‪62.8‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺘﺎ‬

‫‪1308‬‬

‫‪1634‬‬

‫‪2042‬‬

‫‪44.8‬‬

‫‪43.0‬‬

‫‪45.1‬‬

‫ﺍﻵﺳﻴﺎﻥ‬

‫‪Source: - ESCWA, based on IMF, Direction of Trade Statistics Yearbook, 2005; and IMF, Direction of Trade‬‬ ‫‪Statistics Quarterly,2006, p:102‬‬ ‫‪- World Trade Organisation, Annual Repport, Jenneva, 2008, p: 139.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ :(01‬ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪:‬ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﻴﻒ‪ ،2007،‬ﺹ‪.34 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ :(02‬ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪:‬ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﻴﻒ‪ ،2007،‬ﺹ‪.67 :‬‬

‫‪121‬‬

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬: (03) ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ 2007 ،2005 ،2003 ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ 64,1

62,8

60

50

44,8

43

40

30

45,1 2003 2005 2007

25,1

25,5

‫ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ‬:(04) ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ .2003-1983 ‫ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ -1983) ‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﺮآﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ (2003

70 60,6

‫ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬: ‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬

25,7

20

‫اﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎت اﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻷﻃﺮاف‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

10

0 ‫اﻵﺳﻴﺎن‬

‫اﻹﺗﺤﺎد اﻷوروﺑﻲ‬

‫اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺘﺎ‬

.03 ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬:‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‬

The World Bank, Global Economic Prospects, :‫اﻟﻤﺼﺪر‬ Making Regionalism Complementary, washington, 2006, p :52.

:‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ .23 ‫ ﺹ‬،2004‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬،‫ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬،"‫ "ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬،‫( ﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻔﻴﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﰎ‬1) .17 ‫ ﺹ‬،2001 ‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬،‫ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﻫﺮﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬،"‫ "ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬،‫( ﺃﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ‬2) (3) Alen Winters, "Regionalism Versus Multilateralism", Working Paper N: 1687,International Trade Division , International Economics Department, The World Bank, Washington D.C, 1996, pp:2-3.

(4) J.Frank and Shang-Jin Wei, "Open Regionalism in a world of Continental Trade Blocs", IMF Working Paper WP/98/10, Geneva, 1998,p:08.

(5) Lawrence Summers, "Regionalism and The World Trading System", Policy implication of trade and currency zones, Studies of Federal Bank of Kamas City, 1991, pp:295-302.

(6) Panl Krugman, "The More Toward Free Trade Zones", Policy implication of trade and currency zones, Studies of Federal Bank of Kamas City, 1991, pp:6-5.

(7) Laucian Cernat, "Assessing Regional Trade Arrangements: Are South-South RTAs More Trade Diverting", Study series No: 16, Division on International Trade in Good and Services, UNCTAD, New York, 2001, p:03.

(8) C.Carnnen, "Regional Economic Integration", published in 26-03-2005, File/A/Regional Economic Integration, htt/www.du.edul-ccacho/curent.html,pp:1-2.

(9) I bid, p:05.

‫ "ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬،(‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺏ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ )ﺍﻻﺳﻜﻮﺍ‬، ‫( ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬10) .138 ‫ ﺹ‬،2007 ‫ ﻧﻴﻮﻳﻮﺭﻙ ﻣﺎﺭﺱ‬،"2006 ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬

(11) Je-Ann Crawford and Roberto V.fiorentino, "The Changing Landscape of Regional Trade Agreement", World Trade Organization", Discussion Paper N:08, 2005, p:12.

(12) World Trade Organisation, Annual Repport, Jenneva, 2008, p: 139 (13) Laurence Summers, Op Cit, p:308.

(14) Mariane Hmarchand, "The Political Economy of New Regionalism", The Third World Quarterly, London 2005, p:209.

(15) S.L Baier, "The New Regionalism: Causes and consequences", A paper written for The Inter-American Development Bank and CEP conference, University of Notre-Dame, 2006,p:14.

.149 ‫ ﺹ‬،1998 ‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬،‫ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬،"‫ ﺃﻧﺸﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ‬:‫ "ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬،‫( ﺣﺴﲔ ﻋﻤﺮ‬16) ‫ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‬،"‫ "ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﲑﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‬،‫( ﲰﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻮﺯﻱ‬17) .09 ‫ ﺹ‬،2002 ‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬،‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ (18)

S.L. Bair, Op Cit, p:08.

122

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪-‬‬

‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺓ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﳛﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻌـﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑـ ‪ " :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ"‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺳـﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜـﻲ ﳝﻜـﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴـﺔ ﺍﳌﺴـﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ) ﺃﻭﻻ( ﰒ ﲢﺪﻳـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ)ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ( ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ؛ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﲤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻋﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻪ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳍﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﺑﺮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺿﺨﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳒﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﳏﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻫﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﺭﺩﺓ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺟﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻳﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻨﺔ ﺑﺸﺆﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺑﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ(‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺿﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﺎ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﳏﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﻳﺲ ﺻﺮﺡ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﰐ ﻟﻪ ﳜﺘﺺ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪،‬ﻭﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ؟ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﳏﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ؛‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ؛‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ‪- :‬‬ ‫ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺴﻲ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿـﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﺬ ﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1-1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﺭﻳﻮﺩﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﲑﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﺍﺯﻳﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1992‬ﺃﻋﻄـﻰ ﺻـﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻬﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﲎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳـﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺸـﺮﻭﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻬﻴﺊ ﻟﻸﺟﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﴰﻠﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﺎﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧـﻪ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪123‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫»ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻻﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼـﻮﻝ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻩ«‪.1‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ‪» :‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟـﱵ ‪‬ـﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗـﻮﻓﲑ ﻣﻨﺘﺠـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ)ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ(ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﻀﺮ ‪‬ﺎ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻀﻮﺏ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻮﺛﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻧﻀﻮ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌـﱰﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺇﲨﺎﻻ«‪ .2‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻛﺮﻛﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ‪» :‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺍﺯﺍﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣـﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ«‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻣﻲ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤـﻊ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﲟﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪.4‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻮﺍﺭﺉ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﻘﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻃﺎﺭﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻛﻠﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﱰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﻮﺍﺟﺰ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪‬ﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻀﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﻭﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺸـﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻹﺯﺍﻟـﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻐﺎﻡ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺸﻴﻴﺪ ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﺪﺭ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌـﻲ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﲡﻨﺐ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻗﺪﺭ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻴﺪﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻮﺍﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻥ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﳎﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﲟﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻭﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻼﺀ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ‪.‬ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪ .‬ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﻛـﺎﻵﰐ‪ : 5‬ﺍﻟﻔﺌـﺔ ﺃ )‪ : (Category-A‬ﺗﺸـﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺧﺰﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷ‪‬ﺎﺭ ﻭﳏﻄـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻧﺊ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪...‬ﺇﱁ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ )‪ : (Category-B‬ﺗﺸـﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺸـﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳـﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻗﺎﻣـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺬﺑﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺼﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﲜﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﳍﺎ ﻭﺃﺣﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔﺝ )‪ :(Category-C‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ‪ /‬ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ‪ /‬ﺻﺮﻑ ﺻﺤﻲ ( ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺩ )‪ : (Category-D‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺸـﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﶈﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﲰﺎﻙ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺠﲑ ﺍﻷﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﻥ ﻭﺍﶈﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﱰﻫﺎﺕ‬

‫‪124‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ....‬ﺇﱁ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ‪ :‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻇﻔﲔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺈﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﺪ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻭﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ‪ :‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﻤﻴﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺬ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﲤﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻋﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1978‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ‪» :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﺟـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﺎ«‪ ،6‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴـﺔ )ﳉﻨـﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺘﻼﻧﺪ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ‪» :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﱯ ﺣﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ«‪ .7‬ﻭﰲ‪1987‬ﻋﺮﻓﺘـﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ‪» :‬ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﱯ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﻢ«‪ .8‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻼﻧﺪ( ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻔﻬـﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ" ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1987‬ﻭﻫﻮ ‪» :‬ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛـﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻗـﺪﺭﺍﺗﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﺒﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻨﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﻴﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﻢ«‪.9‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﻧﺸﺄ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﱂ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﻌـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﳕﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺪﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻘﺪﺗﻪ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1972‬ﰲ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﻛﻬﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪113‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺑﻌـﺪﻫﺎ ﻣـﺆﲤﺮ‬‫ﺭﻳﻮﺩﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﲑﻭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﺯﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ‪1992‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﺘﺠﺖ ﻋﻨﻪ "ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ" ﲟﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﺩﺭﺟﺖ ﰲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻨـﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘـﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﻟﱪﻭﺯ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻓﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻵﰐ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ : 1968‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲨﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺟـﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﲝـﺎﺙ‬ ‫ﲣﺺ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : 1972‬ﻧﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺸﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﺼﻼ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻨﺸﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺳـﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2100‬ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺳﻮﻑ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺧﻠﻼ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸـﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺴـﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﻧﻀﻮﺏ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﰎ ﺍﻧﻌﻘﺎﺩ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﻛﻬﻮﱂ‪ ،‬ﰎ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : 1987‬ﰎ ﺑﻠﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪125‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ : 1992‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ )ﺗﺸﺮﻧﻮﰊ ﻣﺜﻼ( ﻭﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﲨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻀﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻌﻘﺪﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﺯﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺭﻳﻮ ﺩﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﲑﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﺍﺯﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻀﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺃﳓﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : 2002‬ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪100‬ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﻻﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ ﰲ ﺟﻮﻫﺎﻧﺰﺑﻮﺭﻍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻀـﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﲤﺜﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪. 1-2‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺗﻌﲏ‪" :‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺠﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘـﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻹﺳـﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳـﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻭﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ"‪.10‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺻﻴﻎ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﲟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-2‬ﻣـﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳـﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌـﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1-2-2‬ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ‪:‬ﻭﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﲟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﺼﻠﺖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﺎ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﳐﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﲨﻊ ﺍﳌﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ)ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ( ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ‪‬ﻢ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﰐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻳﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﰒ ﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﰲ ﲢﺼﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.II‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ) ﺍﻟﻮﺯﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪ ....‬ﺍﱁ( ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﰲ ﺃﻃﺮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻳﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﰲ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻂ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﻌﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﳌﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺮ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‪.‬‬

‫‪126‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.III‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫‪.IV‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﶈﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺿﻴﻔﺖ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﲢﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﲟﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.2-2‬ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺇﱃ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﲢﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ‬ ‫‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﳍﺎ ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﻴﺴﺮﺓ ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﳌﻼﺀﺓ )ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﲤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺽ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﰎ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﻭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺔ ﻗﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﲑ)‪ : (IBRD‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻺﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﲑ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻭﺃﻛﱪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،1945‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺑﻨﻚ ﲤﻠﻜﻪ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ 183‬ﺑﻠﺪﺍ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺘﺮﺿﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺘﻌﲔ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺍ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ‪ .12‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﲪﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،1970‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺣﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ 1989‬ﰲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﺣﱴ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﲰﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﳎﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﳕﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻭﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪ 189‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﻘﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،2002‬ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪2001‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻻ ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺸﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺏ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ :‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻘﺎ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﲟﺴﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫‪127‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﺬ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﻪ ﰲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1999‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪ 1763‬ﻗﺮﺿﺎ ﺑﺈﲨﺎﱄ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ‪52 384‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭﺍ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺎ ﻭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ‪85‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.13‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﳐﺼﺺ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻬﺪﺭ ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻟﻠﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ ‪-‬ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ‪ :‬ﳝﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﻭﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﺮﻣﺖ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺿﻪ ﳋﻤﺲ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻌﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺛﻠﺚ ﺇﱃ ﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻼﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪2001‬‬‫ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ‪ 9‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﺭﻭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻗﺪﺭ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﻄﺮﺓ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 561.7‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻳﻮﺭﻭ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‪ ،14‬ﺪﻑ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﺼﺺ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ‬ ‫‪ 580‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻳﻮﺭﻭ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪.METAP‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﺳﻴﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﺳﻴﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﺳﻴﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺍﺀ ﻭ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﺮ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻗﺎﲰﺎ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﻟﻸﻋﻮﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪-2001‬‬ ‫‪ 2015‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﺒﲎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2002‬ﻭﺗﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺖ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 2002‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 5.6‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭﺍ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺎ ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺧﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪ 4.5‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 250‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭﺍ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺎ ﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺧﻄﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺣﺼﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ 8‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﺽ‪ .15‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‬

‫‪128‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻵﺳﻴﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﰲ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1999‬ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻓﺘﺢ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻀﻢ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﻴﺴﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪.II‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﳍﺎ ﺍﳌﻨﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﳍﺎ ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻀﻢ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ :‬ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻳﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲤﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻡ ﻷﻓﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻨﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪ 6‬ﻭ‪ 7‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻑ ﺻﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2002‬ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻀﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻭﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ 10‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 0.83‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭﺍ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺎ‪،16‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻭﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﳕﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻭﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪ 189‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﻘﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﻗﺮ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻭﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ ‪-‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ) ‪ : (FEM‬ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺳﻨﺔ‪1990‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﶈﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺼﺪﻯ ﻷﺭﺑﻊ ‪‬ﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪AME‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲ‪:17‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺢ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺃﻫﻢ‬ ‫‪.III‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻸﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﲝﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪: 18‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻤﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻼﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ) ‪. (ICPA‬‬‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻴﺪﺍ ‪.MEDA‬‬‫ﺏ‪.‬ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ)‪: (ONU‬ﻭﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﳕﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﲢﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪.IV‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻄﺎﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﺎﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﱪﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻭﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺳﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺣﻮﺯ‪‬ﺎ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪129‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﺖ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺮﻣﻲ ﺇﱃ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺴﻤﲔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﲔ ﳘﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.1-3‬ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﰎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻞ ‪" :‬ﻣﻦ ﻳﻠﻮﺙ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ"‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳊﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺯﻉ ﰲ‬ ‫‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1996‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ‪128‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‪119‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﺭ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ 20‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﺧﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻧﻌﺎﺵ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ‪ ،2004-2001‬ﻳﺮﻣﻲ ﳐﻄﻂ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﺲ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻹﻧﻌﺎﺵ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺗﺒﻠﻎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺑﺔ ‪ 970‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ) ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 320‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ ‪ 0.69‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ 1998‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺎﻥ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻼﺩﻧﺎ ﲢﺘﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳒﺪﻫﺎ ﲤﺲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ‪ 09 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺝ‪.‬‬‫ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﺽ ‪ 8,2 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺝ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ‪ 5,5 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺝ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ‪ 03:‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭﺩﺝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ ‪ 1,7 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺝ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ‪ 1,2 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺝ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﺗﻪ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﰎ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺿﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،1992‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﰎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﺮﺓ)‪ ،(TAPD‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﲡﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺟﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪2003،2002،2000‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪:19‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺇﺧﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﻴﺔ )‪ : (TEOM‬ﻭﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﱰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ‪640‬ﺩﺝ ﻭ ‪1 000‬ﺩﺝ‪/‬ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ‬‫‪/‬ﻟﻠﻌﺎﺋﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺭﺳﻢ ﲢﻔﻴﺰﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪2002‬ﺑـ ‪:‬‬‫‪24 000‬ﺩﺝ ‪/‬ﻃﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ 2002‬ﺑـ ‪:‬‬‫‪10 500‬ﺩﺝ‪/‬ﻃﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻨﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـﺜﻼﺙ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻹﳒﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ ،2004‬ﻭﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﻋﺎﺅﻩ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﳏﻠﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑـ ‪ 10.5 :‬ﺩﺝ‪/‬ﻛﻎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪130‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺏ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ )‪ : (TAPD‬ﻭﳜﻀﻊ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﱄ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻭﺉ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﱂ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،2000‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺑـ ‪9000 :‬ﺩﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻭ‪20 000‬ﺩﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﱯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﻱ ﻭ‪120 000‬ﺩﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺮﺧﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ ،2003‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﳛﺴﺐ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﳉﻮﻱ ﻭﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 30‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺎﻭﺓ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﺀ ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ ،1993‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺇﺗﺎﻭﺓ ﲡﱮ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺼﻞ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ )ﺑﻠﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﻮﻳﺔ( ﻭﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﲤﻠﻚ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﺁﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺗﺎﻭﻯ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‪ 4‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺏ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻏﻮﺍﻁ‪،‬‬‫ﻏﺮﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺪﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻣﻨﻐﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ )‪ : (FEDEP‬ﰎ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲡﺴﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﺠﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ ،2001‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﲑﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 75‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 75‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻞ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ‪ 75‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﱰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ‪ 50‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ‪ 20.‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳝﻨﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﺘﺘﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺇﲨﺎﻻ ﰲ ‪:‬‬‫ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻒ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬‫ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﲟﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﻊ‪.‬‬‫ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﻤﻨﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﲤﻨﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﻬﺪ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻓﻴﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺼﺎﺋﻴﲔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪131‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺏ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻟﻺﻗﻠﻴﻢ )‪ : (FNAT‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪،1995‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﳌﻨﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑـ ‪:‬‬ ‫*ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﻲ ) ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻭﺍﺕ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑـ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﲟﺠﺎﻝ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻧﺴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺕ‪.‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻭ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ )‪ : (CEAT‬ﻭﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﲤﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.1‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﲝﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺠﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(FNPLZC‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،2003‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬

‫ﺝ‪.‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺒﻴﺔ )‪ : (FLDDPS‬ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،2002‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺧﺼﺺ ﻟﻪ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺎﱄ ﺃﻭﱄ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪500 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻮﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻋﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﲤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑـ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﺮ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺟﻦ ‪.‬‬‫ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺪﺍ ﺧﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﰊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺷﻲ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2-3‬ﻣﺼـﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻧﻌﻘﺪ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﺩﻭﱄ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻸﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ )‪ ،( PNAE-DD‬ﺑﻔﻨﺪﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺻﻤﺔ ﻳﻮﻣﻲ ‪17‬ﻭ‪ 18‬ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ 2002‬ﺷﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ‪.FEM‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪.FADES‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ‪.FSD‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ‪.FMA‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻴﺔ‪.FIDA‬‬ ‫‪132‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪.BEI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻓﺮﻳﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ‪.BAD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪.BID‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺧﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﰊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ 34 BEI‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﲤﻮﻳﻼﺗﻪ ﰲ ﺣﻮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2001‬ﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﲝﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻨﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ‪ 1997‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑـ ‪ 733 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪869‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﺭﻭ ﻟﺘﻮﻧﺲ ﻭ‪ 977‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﺭﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﻐﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ)‪ ،(FADES‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻛﺪ ﳑﺜﻠﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﲑ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺍ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﰊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺢ ‪ 5.1‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﳒﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺑـ ‪7 :‬ﻣﻼﻳﲔ ﺃﻭﺭﻭ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺣﺖ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﺎﳓﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ ﻭﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺗﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،BID‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻣﻨﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻗﺮﺿﺎ ﲟﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 32.07‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻱ"ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺩ ﺭﻳﻎ" ﺑﺘﻘﺮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻻﳒﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻨﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1975‬ﻗﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ 2.2 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪1.7‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺧﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ) ‪ : (CPI‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻟﻮﺣﻈﺖ ﰲ ﻭﻻﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺳﻨﺔ ‪1995‬ﻭﺑﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫"ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺽ ﲟﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 78‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪1996/09/11‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﰲ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ‪(19)1997‬ﻭﰎ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﲰﺪﺓ ‪35 : ASMIDAL‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪32,5: ENSIDAR‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ‪ 10,5: MATE‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﲔ ‪:‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﰐ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﳎﻤﻊ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﲰﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺳﻔﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺮﻭﺟﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳎﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﰲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﻔﻲ‪ ،2005‬ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﰐ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﰎ ﲢﺴﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﳐﱪﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺻﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺎﳘﺖ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﺮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﲰﻴﺪﺍﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﺩﺕ ﺇﱃ‬‫ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺱ ﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺃﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺘﺮﻭﺟﲔ ﻭﺍﳉﺰﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻮ‪ ،‬ﳏﺴﻨﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﻭﻻﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺑﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﲢﺴﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻗﺪ ﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪133‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻸﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ‪ 600 000 :‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﻠﻔﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳌﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬‫ ﳐﻄﻂ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲤﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﲟﺴﺘﻐﺎﱎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﺽ ﻟﺘﻄﻬﲑ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﳍﻀﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻄﻬﲑ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺬﺭﺓ ﲟﻐﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻄﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ AL2821‬ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 250‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﲟﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺏ ﰲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻥ ﻭ‪ 22‬ﳏﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﻬﲑ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺬﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ‬‫‪ AL3743‬ﲟﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 110‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﰐ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﻠﻒ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﺪﺭ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ‪19‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﺏ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺽ ﲟﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 89‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﰲ ‪.1997‬‬‫ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ :‬ﻫﺒﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 7‬ﻣﻼﻳﲔ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪20‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳊﻈﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻟﺔ ‪ :‬ﻫﺒﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 7‬ﻣﻼﻳﲔ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (PNUD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ‪:‬‬‫ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﺑﺮ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺸﺮﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﻫﺒﺔ ﲟﺒﻠﻎ ‪900 000‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑـ ‪ 1,8 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻫﺒﺔ ﲟﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 300 000‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ -1-‬ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻫﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻨﺎ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻛﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﲣﻠﻮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳍﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻛﺮﻛﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻳﻜﺘﺴﺐ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻭﺍﶈﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻠﻤﺲ ﺿﺂﻟﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﺺ ﻛﺒﲑ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻼﺩﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﳉﻨﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﱂ ﻳﺮﻗﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺍﻷﳌﺎﱐ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﲣﺘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺑﻼﺩﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﳕﻮ ﺍﳊﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﳛﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﲔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﲔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﱪﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻌﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﲜﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺟﺰﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻹﳒﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪134‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ %‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﺃﱄ ﻳﻘﻀﻲ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪،‬ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ %‬ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺮﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎﺝ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺮﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ %‬ﺇﻥ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﳕﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺳﻪ ﺑﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﲪﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ %‬ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﺓ – ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ -‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﲜﺪ ﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﳊﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﻧﻔﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻻﺩ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﱰﱄ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺕ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻋﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻤﻠﺤﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﻭﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ :1‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻫﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‬

‫ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻸﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬‫ ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻬﲑ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺬﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﰐ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﻭﺩ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﲏ ﺍﻷﳌﺎﱐ )‪(GTZ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ)‪(PNUD‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪547.600.000‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬

‫‪10.000.000‬ﻣﺎﺭﻙ‬ ‫‪ 1.862.000‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺮﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ )ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ‪ 04‬ﳐﺎﺑﺮ ﻣﻴﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ‬‫‪591.296‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺮﻳﺎﻝ ‪ 12.500.000‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،1999 ،02:‬ﺹ‪.26:‬‬ ‫‪ 439.000‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﺃﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،01:‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،2005 ،‬ﺹ‪.33:‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺻﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺷﻮﺡ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ‪112.:‬‬ ‫‪135‬‬

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

Le Management environnemental au .GUYONNARD Françoise Marie, WILLARD Frédirique,3 développement durable des entreprises , ADEME, France, 2005, p : 05

‫ ﺟﺎﻧﻔﻲ‬،‫ ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‬،25:‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬،03:‫ﻠﺪ‬‫ ﺍ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬،‫ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﺑﺎﺑﻜﺮ‬-4 http://www.arab-,api.org/devbrdg/a_development_bridge.htm,03/04/2006,،2004 ..13.‫ ﺹ‬،1995 ،‫ ﻣﺼﺮ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬،01: ‫ ﻁ‬،‫ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﻋﺰﺓ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ‬،‫ ﲰﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺮﺍﻭﻱ‬-5 ،2000 ،‫ ﻣﺼﺮ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬،1:‫ ﻁ‬،‫ﺎﺀ ﺷﺎﻫﲔ‬ ‫ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ‬،‫ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‬،‫ﺩﻭﺟﻼﺱ ﻣﻮﺳﺸﻴﺖ‬-6 17. :‫ﺹ‬ ،1993‫ ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‬،4: ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬،20 : ‫ﻠﺪ‬‫ ﺍ‬، ‫ ﻭﺍﺷﻨﻄﻦ‬،‫ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‬،‫ﲰﺎﻋﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬-7 7. -6 : ‫ﺹ‬.‫ﺹ‬ 8-CHAOUCHE Yelles, ZOHRA Fatima, Utilisation des ressources naturelles et des énergie renouvelables en économie de l' environnement, Séminaire national de Economie de l'environnement et développement durable, centre universitaire de MEDIA le 06-07Juin2006, p : 01.

،‫ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬:‫ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ‬،(‫ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺯﻝ) ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬،‫ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﳕﺎﺭﻛﻴﺔ‬-9 07.:‫ ﺹ‬،2004 ‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺯﻝ) ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬،‫ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﳕﺎﺭﻛﻴﺔ‬-10 97.-08:‫ﺹ‬.‫ ﺹ‬،2004 ‫ ﻣﺎﺭﺱ‬، ‫ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬،(‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ 14.:‫ ﺹ‬،2001،‫ ﻭﺍﺷﻨﻄﻦ‬،01: ‫ﻠﺪ‬‫ ﺍ‬،2001‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‬-11 .193:‫ ﺹ‬،2003 ،‫ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‬،‫ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬،1:‫ ﻁ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﺑﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﺠﺎﺭ‬-12 13http://www.bcie.org/spanish/oej/documentos/OEJ_PPT_133_2007_PPT_tendencias.pdf

16/06/2006, 14-SMAHI Ahmed , BENAYAD Samir, Financement du développement durable et lutte contre la pauvreté en Algérie(une voie vers la réalisation des OND), Séminaire national d'économie de l'environnement et développement durable, centre universitaire de MEDIA le 06-07Juin2006, p:07.

15-Ministère de L'Aménagement du Territoire et de L'Environnement, Rapport sur l'état et l'avenir de l'environnement (RNE) 2003,., p.p : 320.

16-Ministère Des Finances, Ministère De L'Aménagement Du Territoire et de L'Environnement, Arrête interministériel fixant la nomenclature des recettes et dépenses du fonds national pour l'environnement et la dépollution, article : n°2, Algérie, 17/06/2002, p : 01.

17-Ministère De L'Aménagement Du Territoire et De L'Environnement, L'Algérie de 2020(un projet d'aménagement du territoire intégrant les enjeux d'un développement durable), ..Algérie, date d'édition inconnu, p.p : 40-41 18-Office National de L'Irrigation et du Drainage(ONID), Projet OUD RIGH (Réalisation des travaux d'aménagement de la vallée de l'oued righ, Algérie, 2006, p : 02.

19-Ministère de l'Aménagement du Territoire et de L'Environnement, Rapport d'audit sur les opération financières relatives au projet " contrôle de la pollution industrielle", Algérie, date d'édition inconnu, p : 02.

.26 : ‫ ﺹ‬،1999 ،‫ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬،02 : ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬، ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‬،‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬-20

136

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ – ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ –‬ ‫ﺃ‪/‬ﻣﻮﻻﻱ ﳋﻀﺮ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺯﺍﻕ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺻﺪﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﺎﺡ ﺑﻮﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺑﻮﻧﻮﺓ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ‪:‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﰊ ﺑﻜﺮ ﺑﻠﻘﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻠﻤﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪:‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﻟﺪ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺰﺩﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻓﺮﺹ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪,‬ﻓﺒﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻜﻤﻬﺎ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﺚ ﻭﻃﺄﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪:‬ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪ ,‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ‪,‬ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪,‬ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ,‬ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪...,‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﳓﻮ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﻄﺖ ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﲢﻔﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎ ﹰﻃﹰﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷ ‪‬ﺮ‪‬ﺍ ﻭﻭﺛﻴ ﹰﻘﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﱘ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪,‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻋﻮﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﻴﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﲟـﺎ ﻳﻜﻔـﻞ‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻰ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻭﺧﻠﻖ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪,‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﲣﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺐﺀ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ,‬ﻏﲑ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻇﻠﺖ ﻣﺘﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﱂ ﺗﺼـﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴـﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻤﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻈﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻓﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻧﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺎﺗﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ؟‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺆﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﻫﻮ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻠﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﰲ ﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻄـﺮﻭﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1-1‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻫﻲ‪:1‬‬ ‫­ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫­ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫­ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﱪﺯ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﲤﺎﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﲝﺎﻻﺕ "ﻓﺸﻞ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ" ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫‪137‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ –ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲟﻌﲎ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﳌﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﳌﻀﺮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﳏﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ‪ ,‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ( ‪,‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑﻭﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﻢ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﱴ ﺃﻭﻟﺌﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺒﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﻭ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻳﱪﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪....‬ﺍﱁ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﰲ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﲟﺎ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻭ ﳏﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻓﻼﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻭ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻇﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭ ﲣﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻭ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-2-1‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ :‬ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﳏﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴـﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺗﺆﻫﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﻳـﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺷﱴ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻳﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺛﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳـﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘـﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﲑﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻋﺰﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪,‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺧﻠﺺ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﺤﺴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺃﻛﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘـﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻹﳚـﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻧﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﻛـﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﻴﺊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (1‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﴰﻠﺖ ‪ 50‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺑﲔ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲝﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 15‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 5‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﳔﻔﻀﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪11.9‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﻭﺣﺖ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﺑﲔ ‪ 3‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻭ‪ 5‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﺇﱃ ‪9.9‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﺍﳔﻔﻀﺖ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ‪ 3‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪138‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻫـﺬﺍ ﻋـﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﱂ ﺗﺘﻐﲑ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﰲ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻡ؛ ﻓﻌﱪ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﺮﺹ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ‪,‬ﻭ ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ) ‪ ( 2005‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﳕﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻔﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ ﲢﻔﻴﺰ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺷـﺮﺍﻛﻪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﺭﺍ ﻳﺸﻜﻼﻥ ﺷﻴﺌﹰﺎ ﻓﺸﻴﺌﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﳕﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻇﻒ‬‫ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫⇐ ‪ -‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫⇐ ‪ -‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ‬‫ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻹﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﲟﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ "ﳎﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺗﻠـﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻭ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺹ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ"‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪: 5‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪-‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‪:‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺳـﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴـﺔ ﺍﳌـﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﻫﺎ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﰊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻹﲨـﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤـﺎ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ ﺗﻔﺎﺅﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﳑﺎ ﳛﻔـﺰﻫﻢ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻗﺪﻡ "ﺟﺮﺗﲔ" ﻭ"ﻓﻴﻼﻧﻮﻓﺎ" )‪ (Greene and Villanueva 1991‬ﺩﻻﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨـﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗـﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭ ﲤﺘﺪ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺠﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻥ ﺑـﺎﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺍﻟـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﲰﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ‪.6‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻻ ﰲ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﺬﺍ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰎ ﺗﺪﺑﲑﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻴـﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺑـﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺘﺠﺰﺓ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﺛﺮ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻤﺎﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﱯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺣﲔ ﺷﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺣﱴ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﱰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻴﻮﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﲣﻔـﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻳﺸﺠﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺏ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ "ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﻮﻥ ‪-‬ﺷﻮ" ﰲ ﺃﻭﺍﺋـﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺒﲎ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﲔ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪,‬ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸـﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺎﺩﻯ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﺒـﺔ ‪‬ـﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪139‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ –ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺳﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺭﲝﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﱯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺳﻔﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻋﺎﻡ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪.7‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﲤﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﺄﰐ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﲢﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟـﱵ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌـﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺳﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ "ﺑﺎﰲ" )‪ (Buffe 1986‬ﺃﻥ ﺧﻔـﺾ ﺍﻟﺴـﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻺﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﳏﻠﻴﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺳـﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘـﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺺ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﰲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻹﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﳏﻠﻴﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻳﺸﺠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﰲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻷﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﳋﻔﺾ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺳﺆﺍﻻ ﲡﺮﻳﺒﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ‪ :‬ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﻣﺴـﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺩﺧـﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﳌﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺧﻮﳍﻢ‬ ‫–ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺪﺧﺮﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﻴﺐ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﲢﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷـﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻀـﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺃﺭﺑـﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻔﻘﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟـﺔ ﺗﻮﻗـﻊ‬ ‫ﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺃﺻﺤﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﳊﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ‪ ,‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺿـﺮﺍﺋﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‪ - ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ – ﺇﱃ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﳑﺎ ﻗـﺪ ﻳـﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻛﺄﺛﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺡ‪ -‬ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﲪﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺺ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﻔـﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜـﻮﻣﻲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺺ ﳐﻄﻂ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻀﺨﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷـﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺭﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﳑﺎ ﳛﻔﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻧﻔـﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜـﻮﻣﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻺﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ؟‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻹﺗﺼـﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼـﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‪ (...‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫‪140‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻏﲑ ﳎﺪ ﻭ ﳛﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﺰﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻌﻬﻢ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﲎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﳎﺪﻳﺎ ﻭ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻛﺪﺗﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﻓﻦ ﻭ ﻭﻟﻴﻤﺎﻧﻮ‬ ‫)‪ (Serven and Solimano 1991‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻺﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ‪.8‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﻼﺱ )‪ (Blass 1988‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻜﺴـﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒـﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻧﺎﻓﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﻗﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻓـﻊ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋـﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﻜـﺬﺍ ﳒـﺪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﺁﺛﺎﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﺼـﺎﰲ ﻟﻺﻧﻔـﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﻜـﻮﻣﻲ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻫﻮ ﳏﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺥ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺯ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﳏﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﲑﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﲰﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﻧﻊ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺿﲑ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺣﺴـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﰲ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳎﺪﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻘـﲑﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣـﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳛﲔ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺳﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺳـﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﻣﻨـﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻧﺰﻳﻔﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻓﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺳﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺎ ﲝﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﻨـﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻷﺭﺻﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻔﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﳑﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻟﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ )‪.(sachs 1988‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺭﺻﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﻻ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣـﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻇﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺨﻢ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗـﻴﻘﻦ ﻗﻄـﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻬﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻌﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺒﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈـﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺟﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻳﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ "ﺟﺮﺗﲔ" ﻭ "ﻓﻼﻧﻮﻓﺎ" ﺃﻥ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺳﻠﱯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﳑﺎ ﳜﻔﺾ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪141‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ –ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻷﺭﺻﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﺺ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺳـﻌﺎﺭ ﳑـﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﻓﺘﻘﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ ﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﲨـﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﻡ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﳌﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﻳﻌﲏ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﺠﻮﺓ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻲ( ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺑﺮﺯﺕ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻘﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺩﳝﻘﺮﺍﻃﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﲢﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﺆﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻷﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻔﻀﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﻢ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻛﺘﻨﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ –ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﱯ – ﺃﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﳍـﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗـﺔ ﲟﺨﺘﻠـﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﻜﺎﳍﺎ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 28‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳـﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ "‪"Sule. O. and Dani R. 1992‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﲢﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺴـﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳊﻘـﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳـﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋـﺪﺓ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻀﺮ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺬﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﻘـﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳـﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﳜﻔﺾ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺃﻭﺯﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻇﻬﺮ "‪ "R. S. Basi‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳـﻲ ﻳـﺆﺛﺮ ﰲ ﺍﲣـﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘـﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ، %63‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﶈﻔﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺔ ﻟﻼﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ – ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﶈﻔﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﲤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺃﻭﱄ ﳏﻔﺰ‬ ‫‪.10‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺘﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﲑﺍﺩ‪ ...‬ﺍﱁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳌﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﻇﻢ ﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺳـﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﺒﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴـﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻌـﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﺠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻘﺪﺭ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﺎﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺠﺢ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ,‬ﻭﺃﺷﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﳚـﺐ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻗﻀﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻒﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺜـﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺗﻌـﺪﻳﻼ‪‬ﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪142‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﻫﻲ ﲰﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪,‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﺿـﻮﺣﻬﺎ ﻳﻘﻠـﻞ ﲢﻔﻴـﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﳒﻮ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﺮﺩﺩﻭﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺑـﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴـﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﳓﻮ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪:‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳـﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴـﺔ ﻟﺪﻭﻟـﺔ ﻣـﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗـﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗـﺔ ﻭﺍﳌـﻮﺍﻧﺊ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‪,‬ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪،‬ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﻌﻴﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﲤﻜﲔ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺐﺀ ﻣﺸـﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﱪ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﻜﺜﻒ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺻﺎﺭ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﱪ ﺗﻘﻨﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﲎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳـﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﲎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴـﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻـﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﻈﻤـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.11‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﺋﻢ ﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋـﺎﺹ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺔ‪ ,‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﲔ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯ‪ -‬ﺣﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﲏ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻃﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﻗﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺪ ﲣﻠﻒ ﺗﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ" ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﲜﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﺎﺫ ﻓﺎﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ,‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻜﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﻀﺔ ﲡﻌﻞ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻏﲑ ﺭﲰﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﲑ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰲ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻥ ‪ %80‬ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﲑ ﺗﻌﺎﰿ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺭﲰﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﺎﺩ ﲝﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨـﻚ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻔﺴﺎﺩ ﺃﻥ ﳜﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ 0.5‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %1‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺖ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻼﺀﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1-3‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ :‬ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﳏﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺗﺆﻫﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺷﱴ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻟﲔ ﺭﻗﻢ ) ‪2‬ﻭ‪ (3‬ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ 1990-1982‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ‬ ‫‪143‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ –ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1986‬ﱂ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﺸـﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﺠﺄ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭ ﲤﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻠﻎ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﱏ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1991‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪.%6.08‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1990‬ﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﳚﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺃﻋﻄﻰ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧـﲑ ﳝﻜـﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ %47.5‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2001‬ﻭ ﺃﻳﻀـﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔـﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ %23.78‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،1994‬ﰒ ﺇﱃ ‪ %28.84‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2006‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻥ ﺩﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﺈﳕﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.13‬‬ ‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﻧﺸﻂ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪,‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﲔ ‪70‬‬ ‫‪%‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %85‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻔﻲ ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %70‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‪ ,‬ﺃﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ,%75‬ﲨﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ ‪ , %80‬ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ ‪, 14 % 70‬ﻣﺼﺮ ‪ % 67.8‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴـﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄـﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﱂ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪.%50‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (4‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻼﻳﲔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪%63‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺏ‪ % 37‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄـﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﺸﺄ ﳌﻨﺎﺻﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ,‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻳﺘﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺻﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ‪ 4026‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 5120‬ﺳـﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2004‬ﰒ ﺇﱃ ‪ 5080‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪ 2005‬ﰲ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻘﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻛﱪ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﺸﺊ ﳌﻨﺎﺻﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﰒ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﳍﺮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ ﺻﻐﲑﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‪ %90‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺤﺖ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻫـﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﳕﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﲎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺗﺒﲎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻫﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﰱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻭﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﱐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﶈﻔﺰﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﱐ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ( ﻭ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ ‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬‫ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ) ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ(‬‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (5‬ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪.2007-2000‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ‪‬ﳑ‪‬ﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﳒﺤﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻـﺔ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴـﻖ ﺑﺮﻧـﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺻـﻼﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ)‪ (1998/1994‬ﺍﳌﺪﻋ‪‬ﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﰎ ﺍﻟ‪‬ﺘ‪‬ﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻌ ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻻﺕ ﺍﻟ‪‬ﺘ‪‬ﻀﺨﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪144‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻷ ﹼﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺳﺠﻼ ﻓﺎﺋﻀﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﰎ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴـﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴـﺔ ﻭ ﺷـﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﲢﺴﻨﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-2-3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻷﺟﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺪﺭﺝ ﺃﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ ﲟﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺑﲔ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺭﺻﺪ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻣﺆﺷ ‪‬ﺮ‪‬ﺍ ﻓﺎﻋﻼ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ‪،‬ﻭﺃﺩﹰﺍﹰﺓ ﻟﺘﻔﺤﺺ ﻧﻘـﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﰲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﺩﹰﺍﹰﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﳉﺰﺋـﻲ ﺑﻐﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻮﺽ ﺑﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (6‬ﺃﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺷﻬﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 74‬ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 82‬ﰎ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 81‬ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2007‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺭﺗﺒﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﻧﺲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺸﺠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﻬﺮﻳﺎ ﻋﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ )‪ (P.R.S‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟـﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺨـﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ‪ (ICRG) International Country Risk Group‬ﻣﻨﺬ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،1980‬ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻐـﺮﺽ ﻗﻴـﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺨـﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘـﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ 140‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ‪ 18‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ‪ %50‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ( ‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ‪.( %25‬‬‫ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ)ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ‪.(%25‬‬‫ﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﱃ ﲬﺲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺇﱃ ‪ 49.5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ - .‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 50‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 59.5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻦ ‪ 70‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 79.5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻦ ‪ 60‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 69.5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻦ ‪ 80‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 100‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺿﻪ‪.15‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﲝﺴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺗﺮﺍﻭﺣﺖ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪(7‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺭﻭﻣﻴﲏ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺭﻭﻣﻴﲏ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ) ﰲ ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ﻭﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﳉﻬﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻳﻐﻄﻲ ‪ 185‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ 20‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺜﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﱐ ﻟﻠﻘﻄـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗـﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳـﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺼﲑ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﲰﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳋﺼﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﲑ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﳐﺎﻃﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ)‪ (8‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺭﻭﻣﻴﲏ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪145‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ –ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ )ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2004‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺟـﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴـﺔ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻴﻴﺲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻐﻄﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ 178‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﴰﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪.2008‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲟﺠﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺗﻠـﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷـﺮﺍﺕ ﺑـﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﱪ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪9‬ﻭ‪ (10‬ﺃﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮﺍ ﰲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺗﻮﻧﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﺑﻠـﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﲢﺘﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ "ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪."2007‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺷﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻘﺪﺕ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻃﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﻭ ﻏﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﻔﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﶈﻜﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺗـﺮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻇﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﲑﻭﻗﺮﺍﻃﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﻮﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺸﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎ ﰲ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.16‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺪﻋﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﳕـﻮ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ‪,‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﻻ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﲪﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﻻﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺰﺍﲪﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (11‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪.17‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﳛﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻳﺰﺍﺣﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌـﺎﻡ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﻤﻨﻮﺣﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﱐ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺍﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻫـﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴـﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪ %50‬ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ %80‬ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،1998‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻨﺼﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻤـﻦ ‪%19‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻨﱵ ‪1998‬ﻭ ‪ 1999‬ﻗﻔﺰ ﺇﱃ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ %43‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 2003 ،2002‬ﻭ ‪ 2004‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻭﺻـﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ %50‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ,‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﻡ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻀﺎﻋﻔﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠـﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ %6‬ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1998‬ﺇﱃ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ %12‬ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪,2005‬ﻭ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻮﺭﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟـﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ‪ %40‬ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪ %56‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﻭ ‪ %61‬ﰲ ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪:18‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﻘﺪ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺑـ‪ 14‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ‬‫‪ 24‬ﻳﻮﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻠﻒ ‪ %21.5‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﺲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ‪ 10‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ‪ 11‬ﻳﻮﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻠـﻒ ﺳـﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪ %9.3‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ‬

‫‪146‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009 / 07‬‬

‫ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺭﺅﺳﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴـﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺟﺮﺗﻪ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2001‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ‪ 12‬ﻭﻻﻳـﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋـﺪﻡ ﺗـﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﱯ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻼﻋﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴـﲑﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﳛﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 18‬ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﻣﻘﻴﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.20‬‬ ‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻞ‪ ,‬ﻓﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﺽ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﳌﺰﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﺸـﺎﻁ ﺍﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻹﺿـﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺣﺶ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻘﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﳕﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺰﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺴـﺘﻐﻠﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ‪ %30‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻐﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ 180‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻡ‪ 2‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻋﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪ 80‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻡ‪ ، 2‬ﻭ ﳍﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺒﲔ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﰲ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﺴﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺿﻌﻒ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪.21‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﺎﺩ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﺎﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﲢﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺻﻨﻔﺖ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 99‬ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺪﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﺎﺩ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ 2007‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻧﺲ ﻓﺎﺣﺘﻠﺖ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 63‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 22, 76‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺷﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ‪ %34.3‬ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﺳﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻮﻥ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ %7‬ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﳍﻢ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﺷﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼ‪‬ﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.23‬‬ ‫ج‪ -‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻱ ‪ :‬ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻋﺪﺩﺕ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ‪ 566‬ﺳﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﲟﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 2.7‬ﻣﻠﻴـﻮﻥ ﻣﺘـﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‪،‬ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﺘﺪﺧﻞ‪،‬ﺃﻱ ‪ % 10‬ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ‪,‬ﻭﺃﻛﺪﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻳﺴﻴﻄﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ % 40‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪ - ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺒﻠـﻎ ﺣﺠـﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻲ‪ %34.1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ )‪ (2000-1999‬ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻭﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﻫﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻠـﻒ‪ .24‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘـﺎﱄ ﻓـﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﺒﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﱪﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ‪،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﲔ ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻓﻌﻼ ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﻣﺰﺭﻳﺎ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺸﺠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺩﻭﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﺜﻴﻒ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪،‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﳏﻠﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﺭﻋﺔ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﺄﺗﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻃﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳـﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﱐ‪ ,‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﰲ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺳﺎﺳـﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧـﺎﺕ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ‪ ,‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ‪ ,‬ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ,‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ ‪ ,‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣـﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳـﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺳﻮﻕ ﻟﻸﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ‪ ,‬ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪147‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ –ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ‪ ,‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲟﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﺿﺔ ‪ ,‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻨﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ,‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷـﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪,‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲝﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫­ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻧﺸﻂ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣـﺎﺑﲔ ‪ %70‬ﺇﱃ ‪%85‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﱂ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪%50‬‬ ‫­ ﺇﻥ ﺗﺒﺎﻃﺆ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﺿـﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻤـﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄـﺎﻉ ﺍﳋـﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫­ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺕ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺷﺮﻃﺎ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﳋﻠﻖ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ,‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﲑﻭﻗﺮﺍﻃﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺸـﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﳕﻮ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(1‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ‪:‬ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﲔ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ )‪% (1998-1970‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪18.3‬‬ ‫‪19.9‬‬ ‫‪24.6‬‬ ‫ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪9.9‬‬ ‫‪11.9‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬‫‪8.4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9.5‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪%3‬‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ‪% 3‬ﻭ ‪%5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪%5‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪:‬ﻋﺪﻱ ﻗﺼﻴﻮﺭ‪,‬ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻺﳕﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺹ‪101‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(2‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ‬

‫‪2004‬‬ ‫‪1994‬‬ ‫‪1984‬‬ ‫‪1974‬‬ ‫‪%52‬‬ ‫‪%53.4‬‬ ‫‪%69.5‬‬ ‫‪%58.6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪%48‬‬ ‫‪%46.6‬‬ ‫‪%40.5‬‬ ‫‪%41.4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪%100‬‬ ‫‪%100‬‬ ‫‪%100‬‬ ‫‪%100‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻺﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ)ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ 2001-1963 :‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.(2003-1995 :‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(3‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ‪%‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ‪%‬‬ ‫‪42.26‬‬ ‫‪47.5‬‬ ‫‪45.71‬‬ ‫‪45.8‬‬ ‫‪39.4‬‬ ‫‪29.7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﶈﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪%‬‬ ‫‪49.09‬‬ ‫‪40.4‬‬ ‫‪26.41‬‬ ‫‪27.1‬‬ ‫‪24.2‬‬ ‫‪23.9‬‬ ‫‪79.72‬‬ ‫‪80.54‬‬ ‫‪61.58‬‬ ‫‪31.3‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪%‬‬ ‫‪75.39‬‬ ‫‪75.9‬‬ ‫‪66.93‬‬ ‫‪45.2‬‬ ‫‪41.6‬‬ ‫‪20.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪%‬‬ ‫‪92.93‬‬ ‫‪90.19‬‬ ‫‪92.17‬‬ ‫‪72.7‬‬ ‫‪75.6‬‬ ‫‪67.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪%‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺷﻴﱯ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻮﺭﻱ ﳏﻤﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪,‬ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺣﻮﻝ"ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ‪:‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮﺍﻑ" ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ‪http://www.arab-api.org/conf_0309/p23.pdf‬‬ ‫‪1981‬‬

‫‪1986‬‬

‫‪148‬‬

‫‪1990‬‬

‫‪1997‬‬

‫‪2001‬‬

‫‪2006‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪:(4‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪2005-2003‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪304‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫‪2216‬‬ ‫‪2658‬‬

‫‪2004‬‬ ‫‪2003‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪1592‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪1412‬‬ ‫‪1361‬‬ ‫‪715‬‬ ‫‪345‬‬ ‫‪804‬‬ ‫‪500‬‬ ‫‪868‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪800‬‬ ‫‪713‬‬ ‫‪1945‬‬ ‫‪2208 3668‬‬ ‫‪1452‬‬ ‫‪5120‬‬ ‫‪2678 6684‬‬ ‫‪4026‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻺﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ)ﻧﺸﺮﺓ ‪(2007‬‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪1617‬‬ ‫‪1060‬‬ ‫‪968‬‬ ‫‪4153‬‬ ‫‪7798‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪:‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪395‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫‪2454‬‬ ‫‪2964‬‬

‫‪2005‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪1352‬‬ ‫‪664‬‬ ‫‪1125‬‬ ‫‪1939‬‬ ‫‪5080‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗـﻢ )‪ :(5‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ) ‪( 2007 -2000‬‬

‫‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ‪PIB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪15.3‬‬ ‫‪17.7 23.70 25.00 27.30 29.77‬‬ ‫ﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻉ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪12.91 11.88‬‬ ‫‪7.11‬‬ ‫‪8.36‬‬ ‫‪0.23‬‬ ‫‪4.05‬‬ ‫‪9.8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ)‪(%‬‬ ‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫‪1.6‬‬ ‫‪3.56‬‬ ‫‪2.58‬‬ ‫‪1.4‬‬ ‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫‪0.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ‬ ‫‪28.95 21.72 11.12‬‬ ‫‪8.48‬‬ ‫‪4.36‬‬ ‫‪7.06‬‬ ‫‪8.93‬‬ ‫ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ)ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ(‬ ‫‪24.86‬‬ ‫‪21.2‬‬ ‫‪13.1‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪7.7‬‬ ‫‪12.8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪16.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‪%‬‬ ‫‪5.05‬‬ ‫‪16.5‬‬ ‫ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ(‬ ‫‪21.4‬‬ ‫‪23.5‬‬ ‫‪22.6‬‬ ‫‪22.6‬‬ ‫‪25.3‬‬ ‫‪- 56.18 43.11 32.92 23.11 17.96‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ )ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ(‬ ‫‪11.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪:‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ( ﻭﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺍﳌﻮﺣﺪ ‪2008/2007‬‬ ‫‪2000‬‬ ‫‪2.15‬‬

‫‪2001‬‬ ‫‪2.7‬‬

‫‪2002‬‬ ‫‪4.7‬‬

‫‪2003‬‬ ‫‪6.9‬‬

‫‪2004‬‬ ‫‪5.2‬‬

‫‪2005‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬

‫‪2006‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪15.7‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(6‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﺲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ‪2007/2003‬‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪1380‬‬ ‫‪1059‬‬ ‫‪1212‬‬ ‫‪4393‬‬ ‫‪8044‬‬

‫‪2007‬‬ ‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫‪14.1‬‬ ‫‪11.80‬‬ ‫‪3.7‬‬ ‫‪31.5‬‬ ‫‪23.33‬‬ ‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫‪99.33‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪104/2003‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ‪/2004‬ﻣﻦ ‪104‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ‪/2005‬ﻣﻦ ‪117‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ‪/2006‬ﻣﻦ‪125‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ‪/2007‬ﻣﻦ ‪131‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪World Economic Forum, The Global Competitiveness. Report 2007-2008, Geneva 2007 p.p14-20:‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪/‬ﺭﺿﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ ‪:‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺹ‪53‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪:(7‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﳐﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬

‫‪2002‬‬

‫‪2003‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫‪63.8‬‬

‫‪65.8‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‬

‫‪72‬‬

‫‪73.5‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬

‫‪2007‬‬ ‫‪78.5‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬

‫‪73.3‬‬ ‫‪75.3‬‬ ‫‪72.8‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪:‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺮﺓ ‪2007/2003‬‬

‫‪149‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ‪2008‬‬ ‫‪77.5‬‬ ‫‪71.3‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ –ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(8‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﺲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺭﻭﻣﲏ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﳐﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫‪2003‬‬ ‫‪41.29‬‬ ‫‪57.74‬‬ ‫‪53.76‬‬

‫‪2002‬‬ ‫‪40.79‬‬ ‫‪57.17‬‬ ‫‪53.57‬‬

‫‪2006‬‬ ‫‪45.97‬‬ ‫‪55.77‬‬ ‫‪53.54‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ‬

‫‪ 2007‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪46.89‬‬ ‫‪56.53‬‬ ‫‪54.28‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪:‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺮﺓ‪2007 /2003‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(9‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﺲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪2007/2006/2005‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ‪178/2007‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ‪ 175/2006‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ‪ 155/2005‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫‪129‬‬ ‫‪115‬‬ ‫‪102‬‬ ‫‪125‬‬ ‫‪116‬‬ ‫‪123‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪www.worldbank.or 2006/2007/2008‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(10‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ " ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ" ‪ 178/2007‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﺲ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬

‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻐــﺮﺏ‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫‪165‬‬ ‫‪102‬‬ ‫‪135‬‬ ‫‪158‬‬ ‫‪132‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪114‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻧــﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋــﺮ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪131‬‬ ‫‪96‬‬ ‫‪108‬‬ ‫‪113‬‬ ‫‪118‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪156‬‬ ‫‪97‬‬ ‫‪115‬‬ ‫‪147‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪148‬‬ ‫‪157‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪114‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪117‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪gwww,worldbank,or،2008‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (11‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺐ‪%‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ‪% PIB/‬‬

‫‪2002‬‬ ‫‪56.5‬‬

‫‪2003‬‬ ‫‪57.4‬‬

‫‪2004‬‬ ‫‪56.02‬‬

‫‪2005‬‬ ‫‪50.39‬‬

‫‪1998‬‬ ‫‪80.0‬‬

‫‪1999‬‬ ‫‪80.0‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬ ‫‪70.6‬‬

‫‪2001‬‬ ‫‪68.7‬‬

‫‪43.5‬‬ ‫‪31.3‬‬ ‫‪29.4‬‬ ‫‪19.2‬‬ ‫‪19.0‬‬ ‫‪12.14‬‬ ‫‪7.93‬‬ ‫‪7.11‬‬ ‫‪6.08‬‬ ‫‪6.09‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ‪2005/2004/2000‬‬

‫‪42.6‬‬ ‫‪11.17‬‬

‫‪43.97‬‬ ‫‪11.02‬‬

‫‪49.90‬‬ ‫‪11.73‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺯﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺱ ‪,‬ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ –ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﲑﻭﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 2001‬ﺹ ﺹ‪36-33‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻧﻴﻔﲔ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﺢ ‪,‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ –ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪,-‬ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ (ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﺍﻥ ‪,‬ﲨﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﺹ‪.84‬‬

‫‪150‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺩ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻱ ﻗﺼﻴﻮﺭ ‪,‬ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﳕﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺹ‪101‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﳏﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪، 31‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ ‪ ، 2004‬ﺹ ‪.5‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﻮﱐ ﺍﳉﻮﺭﺍﱐ ‪:‬ﳏﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ 1997-1975‬ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ‪,‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺲ ﲨﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪2002‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪163-74‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﱘ ﺍﲪﺪ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻓﺆﺍﺩ‪ ,‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻭ ﺛﺄﺗﲑﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ 2001-1974‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ‬‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ 2004‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪84-72‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪/‬ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺸﲑ ﻃﺎﻫﺮ‪ ,‬ﳏﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ‪,‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ,51‬ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮ ‪ 2000‬ﺹ‪26-20‬‬‫‪ -6‬ﺩ‪/‬ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺸﲑ ﻃﺎﻫﺮ‪ ,‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺹ ‪20‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﻮﱐ ﺍﳉﻮﺭﺍﱐ‪ ,‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺹ‪142‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺸﲑ ﻃﺎﻫﺮ‪ ,‬ﳏﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺹ‪21‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺹ‪" ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻭ ﺃﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‬ ‫‪ ،"1992-82‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻋﲔ ﴰﺲ ‪ ،1995،‬ﺹ‪31‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻧﻈﲑ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﻮﱐ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺮ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ"‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻋﲔ ﴰﺲ‪ ،1986 ،‬ﺹ‪.317‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ ﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﺮ‪:‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﺃﺓ ﰲ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ‪,‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪. http://www.arab-api.org/conf_0309/p31.pd f‬‬‫‪ -12‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-13‬ﺷﻴﱯ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻮﺭﻱ ﳏﻤﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪,‬ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺣﻮﻝ"ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ‪:‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮﺍﻑ" ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ‪http://www.arab-api.org/conf_0309/p23.pdf 2009‬‬ ‫‪-14‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪,‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﺎ ‪:‬ﺍﻻﳒﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ‪,‬ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ ‪ 2005‬ﺹ‪.68‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،2006‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.79‬‬‫‪ -16‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،2003‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪90‬‬ ‫‪ -17‬ﺻﺪﻳﻘﻲ ﻣﻠﻴﻜﺔ‪ ,‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻲ ﻭﺃﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ –ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪,-‬ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ‪ 2007‬ﺹ‪.198‬‬ ‫‪-18‬ﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﺑﻮﺭﺍﻭﻱ‪ ,‬ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻓﺰ ﺍﳌﻤﻨﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﰲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ) ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪-‬ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ( ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﻨﺔ ‪, 2008‬ﺹ‪.163‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪www, worldbank, org/ doingbusiness 2007‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫‪- World Bank, pilot Algeria In vestment Climate Assessment, June 2003in http://siteresource,‬‬ ‫‪worldbank,org/ INTPSD/Resources/336195-1092412588748/Algeria-ICA-3pdf.‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪- CNES La configuration du foncier en Algérie : Une contrainte au développement‬‬ ‫‪économique,24emesession plénière, p.p60-64 .‬‬ ‫‪ -22‬ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺪﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﺎﺩ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪. 2007‬ص‪www.transparency.org/publicayion/gcr 8-5‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪- World Bank, pilot Algeria In vestment Climate Assessment, op, cit, p24‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪-www. Worldbank. Org/ documents/ papers links/ Informel Economy pdf.‬‬

‫‪151‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ‪.-‬‬

‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺯﺭﻗﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪،‬‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻞ ﺇﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﺃﺛﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﳓﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﻭﲞﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻺﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﺬ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1995‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﲞﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺪ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﳕﻂ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻠﺖ ﰲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ؛‬‫ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ؛‬‫ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ؛‬‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﲤﺜﻠﺖ ﰲ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺟﲑ ﻭﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ؟‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲣﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲟﺎ ﺳﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ؛‬‫ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ؛‬‫ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ؛‬‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺇﱃ ﳏﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﲔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻧﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ؛‬‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ؛‬‫‪ -1‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﳕﻮ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪153‬‬

‫ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﲢﺖ ﺇﺳﻢ »ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ«‪ ,‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻛﺈﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺮﺯﺕ ﻛﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺃﳒﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1-1‬ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻛﺈﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ )‪ (Privatization‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺟﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ,1983‬ﺃﻱ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳊﻘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺗﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ,‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻌﺔ ﻟـ ‪ Webster's New Collegiate Dictionnary‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺁﺧﺬﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﰎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻐﻮﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ "‪ "Grand Larousse‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1987‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺇﻋﺘﱪﻫﺎ "ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ »‪ «Action‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﳑﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ "‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳊﺪﺍﺛﺔ ﻋﻬﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻓﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﺮﰊ ﻟﻴﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ Privatization‬ﺍﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ 4:‬ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺼﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺪ‪ ,‬ﺍﻷﻫﻠﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻧﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱪﻓﺘﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻠﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ....‬ﺇﱁ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳒﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﲑﺍ»ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ«‬ ‫ﻭ»ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ« ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻭﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻓﻴﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺒﲑ »ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ« ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺭﻭﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻧﻴﺚ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺄﰐ ﺇﺻﻄﻼﺡ»ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ« ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ )ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻠﺔ( ﻭ ﺇﺻﻄﻼﺡ»ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ« ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ )ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ( ﻭﻗﺪ ﺟﺎﺀ ﰲ‬ ‫ﳐﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ )ﺧﺼﺺ( ﻳﻌﲏ ﺧﺼﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻲﺀ )ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ( ﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﺼﻪ ﺑﻜﺬﺍ )ﺧﺼﻪ ﺑﻪ(‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺧﺺ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺇﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﻭﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻌﲏ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺫﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺇﺻﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﲎ ﻭﺗﻌﻈﻴﻤﻪ ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﳊﺮﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻻﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻌﻞ ﻛﺄﻥ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ )ﺧﺼﺺ( ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺻﻄﻼﺣﻲ)ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ( ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪.6‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺻﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻬﺪ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ 84/81‬ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻮﺍﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺰﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﰎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1986‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪03/86‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺥ ﰲ ‪ 04‬ﻓﱪﺍﻳﺮ ‪ ,1986‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺳﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺘﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺇﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪,1981‬‬ ‫ﰒ ﺗﺒﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ ,19/87‬ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ)‪ (Exploitation Agricole Individuelle) (EAI‬ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ)‪(Exploitation Agricole collective) (EAC‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻪ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺎ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﲨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪ 7,‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﻔﻲ ‪ ,1988‬ﻣﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ 02/88‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪03/88‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ ,‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ 03/88‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ‪ ,‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ 01/89‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﻢ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ »ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑﻱ«‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ 8,‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 23‬ﻓﻴﻔﺮﻱ ‪ 1989‬ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ ﰲ ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪ 12‬ﻳﺪﻗﻖ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻭﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪ 18‬ﳝﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﳎﺎﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 10/90‬ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ 10/93‬ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬

‫‪154‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﲡﺴﺪﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ 1994‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲰﺢ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺴﻴﲑﻫﺎ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﻣﺴﻴﲑﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ‪,‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺟﺎﺀ ﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ 22/95‬ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪26‬ﺃﻭﺕ‪ 1995‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪10/96‬‬ ‫ﳉﺎﻧﻔﻲ ‪ ,1996‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﲰﺢ ﺑﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲣﻀﻊ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﻭﺑﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪ 2001‬ﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ 04/01‬ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺥ ﰲ ‪20‬ﺃﻭﺕ‪ ,2001‬ﻟﺘﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻉ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺘﲔ‪ ,‬ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪,22/95‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲞﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲤﺖ ﲟﻮﺟﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻟﻠﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ,‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻞ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ,‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 04/01‬ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﻴﲑﻫﺎ ﻭﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ 22/95‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻉ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺃﻭﺭﺩ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻌﻨﻴﲔ ﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫* ﺍﳌﻌﲎ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺟﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﳍﺎ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﲔ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ؛‬ ‫* ﺍﳌﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﲔ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﴰﻞ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺎ ﺿﻴﻘﺎ‪ ,‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺘﱪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﻥ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ» ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ«‪ ,‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻋﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ» ﺧﻮﺍﺹ« ﻓﻘﻂ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺸﻤﻞ ﺣﱴ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺑﺈﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻮﺍﺹ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺗﺄﻫﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ 04/01‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 13‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‪ »:‬ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺴﺪ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﲔ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ«‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻟﻐﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ,95/22‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺑﺼﻴﻎ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻐﻰ ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﲔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﻮﺯﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻱ ﺧﺎﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺯﺓ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ؛‬ ‫ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺼﺺ ﺇﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3-1‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺣﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ‪:‬‬ ‫* ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺰﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1998‬ﻭ ﺃﻭﺕ‪ ,2001‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳊﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﳐﻴﺒﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﳒﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ )‪ (%20‬ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﺪﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﺳﻲ‪ ,‬ﺭﻳﺎﺽ ﺳﻄﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻴﺪﺍﻝ؛‬ ‫‪155‬‬

‫ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________‬

‫ﺏ‪ -/‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ ENAD‬ﻭ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،HENKEL‬ﻭ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ‪HENKEL ENAD‬‬

‫‪ Algérie : HEA‬ﺑﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ 89,6‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﱃ ‪ % 60‬ﻛﺤﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﻭ ‪ % 40‬ﻛﺤﺼﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻊ‬ ‫‪ ،ENAD‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻣﺆﺳﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﲔ ﰲ ﻋﲔ ﲤﻮﺷﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺎﻳﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -/‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻀﺔ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﻳﺔ ‪ LNM‬ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ ،SIDER‬ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﻳﺔ )‪ (Arccelor-Mittal Steel Annaba‬ﺑﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ 18.004.720.000‬ﺩﺝ‪ُ ،‬ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪ % 70‬ﻛﺤﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﻭ ‪ % 30‬ﻛﺤﺼﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ‪SIDER‬؛‬ ‫ﺩ‪ -/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﻠﺔ؛‬

‫* ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﻭﺑﲔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2001‬ﻭ ‪ ,2002‬ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ (04/01‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ 20‬ﺃﻭﺕ ‪ ،2001‬ﻇﻬﺮ ﲣﻠﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺳﻮﻧﺎﻃﺮﺍﻙ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻋﻄﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻜﻴﺔ ﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺸﺮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺷﺎﺭﺕ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ‪ 1270 .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ 459‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ‪713‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﲟﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﲑ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ‪ 145‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻛﱪﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺮﻫﺎ ﳎﻠﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺰﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺳﻨﺔ‪ 2003‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ ‪ 2007‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫‪ 417‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(01‬‬ ‫ﲝﻴﺚ ﰎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺇﱃ ‪ 58‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2004‬ﰒ ‪ 113‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2005‬ﰒ ‪ 116‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2006‬ﰒ‬ ‫‪ 110‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2007‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﺴﱯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺑﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 192 %100‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪ 33 %50‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟـ‪ 11 %50‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺑـ‪ 69‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﲢﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺇﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﲢﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ؛‬‫ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﲢﺖ ﻣﻈﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 03‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫)ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ( ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﲟﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1-2‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1-1-2‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻛﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﳎﻤﻊ ‪ : Arccelor-Mittal Steel Annaba‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﳎﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺟﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻫﻨﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺇﲣﺬﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻬﻢ)‪ (SPA‬ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﳍﺎ ‪ 18.004.720.000‬ﺩﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻬﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺸﺌﺖ ﰲ‬ ‫‪18‬ﺃﻛﺘﻮﺑﺮ‪ 2001‬ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺄﻫﻴﻞ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺑﲔ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺳﻴﺪﺍﺭ) ‪Groupe‬‬ ‫‪Arccelor-Mittal Steel Annaba‬‬

‫‪156‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ (Sider‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ)‪ (LNM‬ﺍﳍﻨﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﲤﻠﻚ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ ،%70‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ .%30‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺧﺘﲑﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫* ﲢﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ؛‬ ‫* ﺇﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻷﻏﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ %70‬ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺩﻧﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ )‪ ،(2004/1999‬ﻭﻗﺴﻤﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﳑﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ )‪ ،(2001/1999) (Groupe Sider‬ﻭﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﳑﺜﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﻳﺔ )‪.(2004/2001) (Arccelor-Mittal Steel Annaba‬‬ ‫‪ 2-1-2‬ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻛﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻓﻨﺪﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﺳﻲ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﰐ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺖ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﰎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻓﻨﺪﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪ 25-95‬ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﳍﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﻣﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1999‬ﻃﺮﺡ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %20‬ﻟﻺﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﻬﻢ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﲰﻴﺔ ‪ 250‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻔﻠﺖ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺷﺪ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 14‬ﻓﻴﻔﺮﻱ ‪ ،2000‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬

‫ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻏﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻓﻨﺪﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺑﺮﺃﲰﺎﻝ ﺇﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ‪ 1,5‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺄﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %20‬ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﳍﺎ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 1.2‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﺩ‪ 10800 :‬ﻣﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪%80‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺰﺓ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﻊ ‪ 1.2‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﻬﻢ ﺇﲰﻲ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 250‬ﺩﺝ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 400‬ﺩﺝ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 15‬ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ ‪ 15‬ﺟﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ‪1999‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺷﲑﺓ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺷﲑﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 01/99‬ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 24‬ﻣﺎﻱ ‪1998‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ 20 :‬ﺟﺎﻧﻔﻲ ‪2000‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﻌﲑﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ 14 :‬ﻓﻴﻔﺮﻱ ‪1999‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺩﻧﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ )‪ ،(2003/1997‬ﻭﻗﺴﻤﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺘﲔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ )‪ ،(1999/1997‬ﻭﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ،(%20‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (2003/2001‬ﻭﺇﳘﺎﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2000‬ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3-1-2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻛﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻭﻻﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳑﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﳑﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﰲ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺃﺛﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ,‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﻴﻌﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪157‬‬

‫ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﰒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﰲ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1997‬ﻭﺣﱴ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2008‬ﺣﻮﺍﱄ )‪ (07‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ )‪ (17‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﰎ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺘﲔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺘﲔ )‪ (02‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﻮﳍﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ )‪ (08‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﳎﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )‪ (05‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺸﺌﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ )‪ (09‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(02‬‬ ‫‪ 2-2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻷﺛﺮ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﳑﺜﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ )‪ ،(Arccelor-Mittal Steel Annaba‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ %70‬؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﳑﺜﻠﺔ ﲟﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻓﻨﺪﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ %20‬؛‬ ‫ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﳑﺜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻭﻻﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﲤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ‪.%100‬‬ ‫‪ 1-2-2‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻲ )ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (03‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻲ )ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﲢﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻲ ﺍﶈﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ )‪ (ROA‬ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ )‪ (ROA‬ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻟﲑﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ‪%5.80‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﳏﻘﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺍ ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬ ‫‪ %112.86‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺣﻘﻘﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ‪ Mcdonald‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺦ ﺇﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺘﺮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﻱ ﳝﻠﻚ ﳎﻤﻊ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻭﺫﻭ ﺧﱪﺓ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﲝﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪%-45.09‬‬

‫‪158‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﰐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ )‪ (ROA‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ %3.74‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %5.63‬ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،%50.56‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﲢﺴﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﱂ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﰐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ )‪ (ROA‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻎ ‪ %-4.58‬ﻭﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻴﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪%-4.30‬‬ ‫ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،%6.11‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-2-2‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (04‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﲢﺴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ؛‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﳛﻘﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ‪ %68.15‬ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،%393.80‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﲢﺘﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪%90.19‬؛‬ ‫• ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪.%61.87‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‪%13.80‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﰐ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %8.90‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %11.46‬ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،%28.79‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪%37.55‬؛‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪.%6.67‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﰐ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﳔﻔﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %79.72‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %57.57‬ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،%27.78‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ %29‬؛‬ ‫• ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ‪.%113.81‬‬ ‫‪ 3-2-2‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (05‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﲢﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬ ‫‪159‬‬

‫ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________‬

‫• ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪%108.17‬؛‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪%6.18‬؛‬ ‫• ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪.%71.95‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺴﻦ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺃﻛﱪ ﰲ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻺﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ‪ ،%108.17‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ،%71.10‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺪﻳﺪ؛‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﰲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﳔﻔﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ %69.81‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %42.63‬ﳏﻘﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،%38.94‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪%61.87‬؛‬ ‫• ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪.%71.10‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ‪ %62.67‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %85.50‬ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،%36.43‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪%29‬؛‬ ‫• ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪%53.54‬؛‬ ‫ﻭﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﳔﻔﺾ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ %6.26‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ‪.%2.67‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %51.61‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %51.83‬ﳏﻘﻖ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،%0.44‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪،%6.67‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪.%7.12‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4-2-2‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (06‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﲢﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﰲ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ؛‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬ ‫‪160‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ‪%101.96‬؛‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ %39.56‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﺿﺌﻴﻼ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ %6.34‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﳛﻘﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ‪ %9.74‬ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،%85.60‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ؛‬

‫‪%18.07‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻳﺄﰐ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ %23.59‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %34.65‬ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪.%46.89‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﰐ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %9.54‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %12.47‬ﳏﻘﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪.%30.71‬‬ ‫‪ 5-2-2‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (07‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﲢﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﳔﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﱭ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻎ ‪%54.93‬؛‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺍ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺃﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﺿﺌﻴﻼ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ %6.5‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪%13.13‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﲢﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺕ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻧﺴﺐ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6-2-2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ‪ :‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ )‪ ،(R11) (ROA‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻳﺔ )‪ )(R31‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‪.(3 ،2 ،1 :‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ " ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻥ " ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﺩ )ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ( ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺍﻹﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬

‫‪161‬‬

‫ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ‪-‬‬

‫ ‬

‫_______________________________________________________‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻃـﺎﺭ ﺍﳌـﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻌـﺎﺋﺪ = )‪.% -19.64 = %5.8 + (%45.09‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃـﺎﺭ ﺍﳌـﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ = ‪.%13.90 = %18.07 + %9.74‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (01‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺮﺿﻲ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﰲ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﳑﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻧﻘﺎﺫ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺐ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺮﻯ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ » ﻭﻳﻠﺴﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻬﻴﺞ « ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (01‬ﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺷﻠﺔ ﻻ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻲ‪11.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻣﺎﺳﺒﻖ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﲢﺴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﲢﺴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﰲ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻃـﺎﺭ ﺍﳌـﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻌـﺎﺋﺪ = ‪.%4.69 = %5.63 + %3.74‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃـﺎﺭ ﺍﳌـﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ = ‪.%29.12 = %34.65 + %23.59‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (02‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺮﺿﻲ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﰲ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻣﺎﺳﺒﻖ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﲢﺴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﲢﺴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﰲ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻃـﺎﺭ ﺍﳌـﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻌـﺎﺋﺪ = )‪.% -4.44 = %(4.30)+ (%4.58‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃـﺎﺭ ﺍﳌـﺮﺑﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ = ‪.%11.01 = %12.47 + %9.54‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (03‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺿﻲ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﰲ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺴﻦ ﺿﺌﻴﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﻘﺎﺫ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺣﺴﺐ» ﻭﻳﻠﺴﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻬﻴﺞ « ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺷﻠﺔ ﻻ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪162‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (08‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﲢﺴﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﰲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺣﺘﻔﻈﺖ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ )‪ (ROA‬ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ،%112.86‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ، %393.80‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﺣﺘﻔﻈﺖ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺇﳔﻔﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ،%38.94‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﺣﺘﻔﻈﺖ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ %85.60‬؛‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲢﺴﻦ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (08‬ﺇﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﳕﻂ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻧﺴﱯ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﳕﻂ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﺡ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﻺﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ) ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %20‬ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ (‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﰐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺛﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﺎ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻻﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ‪%80‬؛‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﳕﻂ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﰐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺛﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﺮﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﱂ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳌﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﻤﻠﺤﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﻭﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(01‬ﺣﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ )‪.(2007-2003‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ) < ‪ ( %50‬ﺃﻏﻠﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ) > ‪ ( %50‬ﺃﻗﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺨﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺸﺘﺮﻭ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫‪2003‬‬

‫‪2004‬‬

‫‪2005‬‬

‫‪2006‬‬

‫‪2007‬‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬

‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬

‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬

‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬

‫‪192‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫‪58‬‬

‫‪113‬‬

‫‪116‬‬

‫‪110‬‬

‫‪417‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪163‬‬

‫ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ‪-‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(02‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ (EPE‬ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﻭﻻﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻢ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻨﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺭﻗﻠﺔ )‪(ETIWO‬‬ ‫ﻡ‪ .‬ﺻﻨﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﺕ‬ ‫)‪(EFMC‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬

‫‪2003/10/30‬‬

‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻨﻮﺏ ﺑﻮﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪(ETIWO‬‬

‫‪ 34.506.461‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪33‬‬

‫‪1998/08/01‬‬

‫ﻡ‪ .‬ﺻﻨﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﺕ )‪(EFMC‬‬

‫‪ 106.317.992‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪100‬‬

‫‪ 18.856.570‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪ 17.349.000‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪12‬‬

‫‪ 13.741.000‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪ 167.085.000‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪103‬‬

‫‪03‬‬

‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺭﻗﻠﺔ )‪(EDIMMA‬‬

‫‪1997/12/25‬‬

‫‪04‬‬

‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺬﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪(EDIPAL‬‬

‫‪1997/12/25‬‬

‫‪05‬‬

‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺭﻗﻠﺔ )‪(EDIED‬‬

‫‪1997/12/25‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻡ )‪(EPE‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺕ‪.‬ﺹ‪.‬ﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻲ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﺕ‬ ‫)‪(SOGDIMMA‬‬ ‫ﺵ‪ .‬ﺕ‪.‬ﺹ‪.‬ﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﻨﻮﺏ ﺑﻮﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪(SODIMMAS‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺕ‪.‬ﺹ‪.‬ﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑ‬ ‫)‪(SOGDIMA-PH‬‬ ‫ﺵ‪ .‬ﺕ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﻍ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻨﻮﺏ‬ ‫)‪(SODIPAT‬‬ ‫ﺵ‪ .‬ﺕ‪.‬ﻡ‪.‬ﻍ ﻟﻠﺠﻨﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ‬ ‫)‪(ESSAKEB‬‬

‫‪ 58.270.000‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪05‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﺕ‬ ‫)‪(SOCOED‬‬

‫‪ 15.408.000‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻮﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪(DIED‬‬

‫‪ 79.574.000‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪35‬‬

‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫‪314‬‬ ‫‪ 511,108,023.00‬ﺩﺝ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻣﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﻻﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(03‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻲ )ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ( ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪R5‬‬ ‫‪R6‬‬ ‫‪R10‬‬ ‫‪R11‬‬ ‫‪R12‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻖ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪(ROE‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ )‪(ROA‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫‪-285.70%‬‬

‫‪19.38%‬‬

‫‪-4.67%‬‬

‫‪-35.09%‬‬

‫‪29.67%‬‬

‫‪-3.97%‬‬

‫‪64.12%‬‬

‫‪7.68%‬‬

‫‪8.77%‬‬

‫‪-45.09%‬‬

‫‪3.74%‬‬

‫‪-4.58%‬‬

‫‪5.80%‬‬

‫‪231.24%‬‬

‫‪4.82%‬‬

‫‪-12.00%‬‬

‫‪8.91%‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫‪8.44%‬‬

‫‪22.70%‬‬

‫‪-110.57%‬‬

‫‪9.71%‬‬

‫‪31.46%‬‬

‫‪-110.93%‬‬

‫‪11.44%‬‬

‫‪11.69%‬‬

‫‪41.29%‬‬

‫‪5.63%‬‬

‫‪-4.30%‬‬

‫‪6.30%‬‬

‫‪-572.60%‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(04‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪R16‬‬ ‫‪R17‬‬ ‫‪R18‬‬ ‫‪R19‬‬ ‫‪R20‬‬ ‫‪R21‬‬ ‫‪R22‬‬ ‫‪R23‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳐﺰﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳐﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ‪BFR‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺰﻭﻧﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫‪13.80%‬‬

‫‪8.90%‬‬

‫‪79.72%‬‬

‫‪68.15%‬‬

‫‪11.46%‬‬

‫‪57.57%‬‬

‫‪43.99%‬‬ ‫‪ 404‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪18.38%‬‬ ‫‪ 116‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪215.90%‬‬ ‫‪ 119‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪147.91%‬‬ ‫‪ 37‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪23.80%‬‬ ‫‪ 98‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪3393.15%‬‬ ‫‪ 432‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 184‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 134‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 88‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 188‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 169‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 187‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 220‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 140‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 295‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ -57‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 448‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 1237‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 456‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 337‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪ 61‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬

‫‪-192.84%‬‬

‫‪-63.49%‬‬

‫‪-544.91%‬‬

‫‪-835.23%‬‬

‫‪-129.67%‬‬

‫‪-114.52%‬‬

‫‪103.87%‬‬

‫‪11.86%‬‬

‫‪49.25%‬‬

‫‪33.49%‬‬

‫‪14.60%‬‬

‫‪65.67%‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫‪164‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(05‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫‪R24‬‬ ‫‪R25‬‬ ‫‪R26‬‬ ‫‪R27‬‬ ‫‪R28‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫‪42.63%‬‬

‫‪51.83%‬‬

‫‪85.50%‬‬

‫‪69.81%‬‬

‫‪51.61%‬‬

‫‪62.67%‬‬

‫‪107.62%‬‬

‫‪6094.91%‬‬

‫‪100.11%‬‬

‫‪106.72%‬‬

‫‪159.51%‬‬

‫‪93.65%‬‬

‫‪6163.36%‬‬

‫‪329.95%‬‬

‫‪206.72%‬‬

‫‪241.04%‬‬

‫‪217.61%‬‬

‫‪207.62%‬‬

‫‪46.91%‬‬

‫‪65.44%‬‬

‫‪29.87%‬‬

‫‪64.59%‬‬

‫‪58.76%‬‬

‫‪28.00%‬‬

‫‪53.09%‬‬

‫‪34.56%‬‬

‫‪70.13%‬‬

‫‪35.41%‬‬

‫‪41.24%‬‬

‫‪72.00%‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(06‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫‪R29‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ(‬

‫‪128.02%‬‬

‫‪135.28%‬‬

‫‪166.16%‬‬

‫‪333.04%‬‬

‫‪162.15%‬‬

‫‪125.10%‬‬

‫‪R30‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻳﺔ(‬

‫‪76.22%‬‬

‫‪122.94%‬‬

‫‪112.46%‬‬

‫‪175.11%‬‬

‫‪145.17%‬‬

‫‪87.11%‬‬

‫‪R31‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ(‬

‫‪9.74%‬‬

‫‪23.59%‬‬

‫‪9.54%‬‬

‫‪18.07%‬‬

‫‪34.65%‬‬

‫‪12.47%‬‬

‫‪R32‬‬

‫ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪73.72%‬‬

‫‪99.01%‬‬

‫‪216.91%‬‬

‫‪148.89%‬‬

‫‪138.18%‬‬

‫‪230.66%‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(07‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪R33‬‬ ‫‪R34‬‬ ‫‪R35‬‬ ‫‪R36‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫‪107.24%‬‬

‫‪32.09%‬‬

‫‪90.94%‬‬

‫‪48.34%‬‬

‫‪27.88%‬‬

‫‪85.03%‬‬

‫‪354,849.34‬‬

‫‪870,749.39‬‬

‫‪234,933.06‬‬

‫‪1,192,277.91‬‬

‫‪1,185,710.75‬‬

‫‪197,347.45‬‬

‫‪1,545,048.79‬‬

‫‪1,200,359.75‬‬

‫‪1,509,728.94‬‬

‫‪3,331,063.09‬‬

‫‪1,568,632.17‬‬

‫‪1,259,909.92‬‬

‫‪-2,385,221.88‬‬

‫‪238,303.25‬‬

‫‪-49,591.79‬‬

‫‪363,334.84‬‬

‫‪358,887.05‬‬

‫‪-77,858.03‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(08‬ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ )‪(ROA‬‬

‫‪%112.86‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‬

‫‪%393.80‬‬

‫‪%28.79‬‬

‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫‪%-38.94‬‬

‫‪%0.44‬‬

‫‪%36.43‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ‬

‫‪%85.60‬‬

‫‪%46.89‬‬

‫‪%30.71‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬

‫‪%50.56‬‬

‫‪%6.11‬‬ ‫‪%-27.78‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫‪165‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﲢﺴﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪01‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪01‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪01‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪01‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‬ ‫ﲢﺴﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪02‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪02‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪02‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪02‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬ ‫ﲢﺴﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪03‬‬ ‫ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﻠﱯ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪03‬‬ ‫ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﻠﱯ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪03‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪03‬‬

‫ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ‪-‬‬

‫_______________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(01‬ﻋـﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(02‬ﻋـﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(03‬ﻋـﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫‪166‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪. Savas E.S, La Privatisation pour une société performante, Copyright, Paris, 1988, P. 01.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﴰﺎﻡ‪ ,‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ ,‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻗﺴﻨﻄﻴﻨﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﻌـﺪﺩ‪ ,1997 ,08:‬ﺹ ﺹ‪- 190 .‬‬ ‫‪.195‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪. Cohen Myrian, Sueur Alain, Les Privatisations Française, In revue française d'analyse financière, N:°110, Paris,‬‬ ‫‪1997, PP. 62 - 66.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﱂ ﻧﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﺮ‪ ,‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ,2002 ,‬ﺹ‪.24.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲏ‪ ,‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﱯ ﺣﻮﻝ » ﺭﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ« ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﻋﻤـﺎﻥ ‪ ,2002/05/ 28- 18‬ﺹ‬ ‫ﺹ‪.08 – 03 .‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪. Bouhezza Mohamed, L'évaluation économique des entreprises industrielles publiques en Algérie, Étude de cas sur‬‬ ‫‪quatre entreprise, Thèse de Doctorat, Faculté de droit, Des sciences économiques et de gestion, CEMAFI, Université de‬‬ ‫‪Nice, 2000, Non publiée, P.71.‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺩ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ » ﺳﻮﻓﻴﺘﺎﻝ«‪ ,‬ﺃﻭﻛﻠﺖ ﳍﺎ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ,95/22‬ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺥ ﰲ ‪ ,1995/08/26‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﳉﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ ,48‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪.1995‬‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ,04/01‬ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺥ ﰲ ‪ ,2001/08/20‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﳉﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ ,62‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪.2001‬‬ ‫‪ . 11‬ﻋﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﱪﻭﻙ ﳏﻤﺪ‪ ,‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﰲ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺇﲢﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ,‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ,‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ ,‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ,‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﳋﻤﺴﻮﻥ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻮﻥ‪ ,,2000 ,‬ﺹ‪.25.‬‬

‫‪167‬‬

‫ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻠﻴﻢ ﻏﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺳﻄﻴﻒ‬

‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨـﺺ ‪ :‬ﱠ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺜﲑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﳏﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻞ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ؛ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﱯ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ؛ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﺒﺘﻌﺪ ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﻮ‪‬ﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﳏﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺩﻋﲔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲤﻬﻴـﺪ ‪ :‬ﻳُﺸﻜﱢﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﰲ ﺃﺑﺴﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻮﺟﻪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺩﻋﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗُﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺘﲔ ُ‬ ‫ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﰒ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﺨﺼﻢ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ )ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ( ؛ ﻓﻼ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤَﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ‪‬‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‬ ‫ﺗُﻤﻴ‪‬ﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳُﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﱡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﶈـﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴـﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺃﺳﺲ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ؛‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ؛‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ‪ :‬ﺃﺳﺲ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺣﻜﻤﻪ ‪ :‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﱠﻠﺔ ؛‬‫ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺣﻜﻤﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭﻳﺔ∗ ﻭﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﺕ ؛‬‫ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪ :‬ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ‪ :‬ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ؛‬‫ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻻﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﳘﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﳜﺼﻢ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﲝﺼﺮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ِ ،‬‬‫ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﲝﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﻢ‪ ،‬ﰒ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﻼﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﻭﻧﺎﺕ‪ُ ،‬‬ ‫ُﻳﺨﺼﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ؛‬ ‫‪169‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ________________________________________________‬

‫ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ؛ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ )ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﻮﺯﻉ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﳜﺼﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﱠ‬ ‫ﲝﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳُﺨﺼﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﻀﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻘﺮﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﳐﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺆﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻣﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ‪:‬‬‫• ﻣﺆﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﱠﺩﺓ ‪ :‬ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺻﻞ ﳏﺪﱠﺩ ؛‬ ‫• ﻣﺆﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ‪ :‬ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳُﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﳏﺪﱠﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻣﻌﺪ‪‬ﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻱّ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻧﺴﱯ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﳐﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗُﺤﺘَﺠﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻘﺘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳐﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻫﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ : 1‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻟـﻎ ﻣﻘﺘﻄﻌـﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒـﻞ ﲢﺪﻳـﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑـﺢ‬

‫ﺑﻌـﺪ ﲢﺪﻳـﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑـﺢ‬

‫ﳐﺼﺼﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬

‫)ﻋﺐﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ(‬

‫ﺃﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬

‫ﳐﺼﺺ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻼﻙ‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ(‬

‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺢ(‬

‫ﺃﺻﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬

‫ﳐﺼﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳏ ﱠﺪﺩﺓ‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻣﻌﺪ‪‬ﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬

‫)ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ(‬

‫)ﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﱠﺭ ﰲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻞ ﳏﺪﱠﺩ(‬

‫ﳐﺼﺺ ﻋﺎﻡ‬

‫)ﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬

‫)ﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﳏﺪﺩﺓ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﱠ‬

‫)ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ(‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ :‬ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪" ،‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(11‬ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮ ‪ ،2000‬ﺹ ‪.409-402 :‬‬

‫‪170‬‬

‫ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺻﺎﰲ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﲝﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﱯ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ‪ُ ،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﱡﻤَﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ : 1‬ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﱯ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤَﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫××‬ ‫××‬ ‫‪%30‬‬ ‫‪%70‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﱡﻤَﺮ‬

‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﲑ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫××‬ ‫××‬ ‫‪%40‬‬ ‫‪%60‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪3‬‬ ‫×××‬ ‫××‬ ‫××‬ ‫‪%40‬‬ ‫‪%60‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺷﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪6‬‬ ‫×××‬ ‫××‬ ‫××‬ ‫‪%50‬‬ ‫‪%50‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺷﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪9‬‬ ‫×××‬ ‫××‬ ‫××‬ ‫‪%70‬‬ ‫‪%30‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺷﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﳌﺪﺓ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫××‬ ‫××‬ ‫‪%80‬‬ ‫‪%20‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫××‬ ‫××‬ ‫‪%100‬‬ ‫‬‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺣﺴﲔ ﺣﺴﲔ ﺷﺤﺎﺗﺔ‪" ،‬ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻓﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ("‪ ،‬ﲝﻮﺙ ﳐﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻌﻘﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺎﻧﺒﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺎ‪ ،1988 ،‬ﺹ ‪.136 :‬‬ ‫×××‬

‫ﺇﻥ ُﻭ ﹺﺟﺪﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺼﻴﺒﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺻﺎﰲ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﹾ‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﱠ‬ ‫ﺧﺴﺮ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣِﺪﺓ ﻛﻞﱞ ﲝﺴﺐ ﺭﺻﻴﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲜﺪﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (135) 122‬ﰲ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻌﻘﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪-22‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻧﺺﱠ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣَﺠﻤَﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﻪ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ "ﻻ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺷﺮﻋﺎﹰ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ 2001/12/27‬ﺣﻮﻝ‪ِ :‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﱡﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ؛ ﻷﻥ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﳘﺖ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺣﺼﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻹﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻘﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﲝﺴﺐ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺿﻤﻨﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺭﺃﺓ ﻋﻤّﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﱠﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺑﺢ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺿﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ"‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬

‫‪171‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ : 2‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳـﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳـﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴــﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺑﺈﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺑﺈﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤَﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤَﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤَﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﳉﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﳉﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﳉﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﳉﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﳉﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﳉﻤﻴﻊ‬

‫ﻭﻧﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳُﺘﺼﻮﱠﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪: 3‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺼﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺤﻮﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﲝﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ %30‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻤﱠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻛﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬

‫‪172‬‬

‫ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ : 2‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻴﺭﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫ﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍل‬

‫ﺍﺴﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺘﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل‬ ‫)‪ (-‬ﺃﺼﻭل ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﺴﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ‬

‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺠﺎﺭﻴـﺔ‬

‫)‪ (-‬ﺍﺤﺘﻴﺎﻁﻲ ﻨﻘﺩﻱ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻼﺕ ﺃﺠﻨﺒﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺍﺴﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻴﺔ‬

‫‪%70‬‬

‫)‪ (-‬ﺍﺤﺘﻴﺎﻁﻲ ﻨﻘﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺭﻴﻑ‬

‫ﻤﺼﺎﺭﻴﻑ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﻼﻜﺎﺕ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺨﺩﻤﺎﺕ ﻤﺼﺭﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫‪%30‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺃﺨﺭﻯ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤــﻭﻥ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤــﺮون‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ )ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ )ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺼﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ( ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ؛ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﰒ ﻳُﻀﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ : 3‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺈﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺭﻴﻑ‬ ‫ﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻴﺭﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍل‬ ‫ﺍﺴﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺘﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل‬ ‫)‪ (-‬ﺃﺼﻭل ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﺴﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ‬

‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺠﺎﺭﻴـﺔ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻼﺕ ﺃﺠﻨﺒﻴﺔ‬

‫)‪ (-‬ﺍﺤﺘﻴﺎﻁﻲ ﻨﻘﺩﻱ‬

‫‪%70‬‬

‫ﺯﻜﺎﺓ ‪ +‬ﻀﺭﻴﺒﺔ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺨﺩﻤﺎﺕ ﻤﺼﺭﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺍﺴﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻴﺔ‬

‫)‪ (-‬ﺍﺤﺘﻴﺎﻁﻲ ﻨﻘﺩﻱ‬

‫ﻤﺼﺎﺭﻴﻑ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻴـﺔ‬

‫‪%30‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺃﺨﺭﻯ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤـﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤـﺭﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪173‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻀﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﲝﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳُﻜﻤﱠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ : 4‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺼﺎرﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻴﺭﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍل‬

‫‪%70‬‬

‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺍﺴﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻴـﺔ‬

‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل‬

‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺠﺎﺭﻴـﺔ‬

‫‪%30‬‬

‫ ﺍﺴﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ‬‫ ﻋﻤﻼﺕ ﺃﺠﻨﺒﻴﺔ‬‫‪ -‬ﺨﺩﻤﺎﺕ ﻤﺼﺭﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻤﺼﺎﺭﻴﻑ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻴـﺔ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺃﺨﺭﻯ‬

‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤــﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤــﺭﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ :‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻀﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻳُﻔﺘﺮَﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ؛ ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳُﻮﺯﱠﻉ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﱠ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ؛ ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻓﺂﺕ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﳎﻠﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ؛‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬

‫‪174‬‬

‫ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ : 5‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍل‬

‫‪%70‬‬

‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺍﺴﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻴـﺔ‬

‫ﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻴﺭﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫‪%30‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻼﺕ ﺃﺠﻨﺒﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل‬ ‫ﺤـ‪ /‬ﺠﺎﺭﻴـﺔ‬

‫‪%‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﺴﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺨﺩﻤﺎﺕ ﻤﺼﺭﻓﻴﺔ‬

‫‪%‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺃﺨﺭﻯ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺭﻴﻑ‬ ‫ﻤﺼﺎﺭﻴﻑ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻴـﺔ‬

‫ﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻤـﺔ‬ ‫ﻤﺠﻠـﺱ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤــﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤــﺭﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‪ 4‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ "ﺑﻨﻚ ﻓﻴﺼﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﱐ" ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺗُﻌﺪّ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻌﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇ‪‬ﺎ ﺗُﺸﺮﹺﻙ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺸﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗُﺴﺘﺒﻌَﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻹﻟﺰﺍﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ُﻳ ﹺ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ "ﺑﻨﻚ ﺩﰊ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ" ﻭ"ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﱐ"ﻭ"ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﱐ"‪.5‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﲡﺮﺑﺔ "ﺑﻨﻚ ﺩﰊ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ" ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﱠﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺩﰊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﺘﺴﺎﻡ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﳝﺎﺛﻠﻬﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﻠﺨﺺ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﱠ‬

‫‪175‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ________________________________________________‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ : 3‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺩﰊ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪++++++++‬‬ ‫ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪+++++++‬‬ ‫)‪ (-‬ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬ ‫‪++++++‬‬ ‫ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪++++‬‬ ‫)‪ (-‬ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪+++++‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ × ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ = ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﱠﻠﺔ‬ ‫× ‪++++++++ = %100‬‬ ‫‪++++++++‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‬ ‫× ‪++++++++ = %80‬‬ ‫‪++++++++++‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫× ‪++++++ = %70‬‬ ‫‪++++++++‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫× ‪+++++ = %60‬‬ ‫‪++++++++‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﺃﺷﻬـﺮ‬ ‫× ‪+++ = %50‬‬ ‫‪++++++‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺷﻬـﺮ‬ ‫× ‪++++ = %50‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ‪++++++++‬‬ ‫‪ +++++++‬ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﱠﻠﺔ ‪+++++++++‬‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪/‬ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﱠﻠﺔ = ‪%+‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ =‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ × ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﱠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ =‬ ‫ُﻳﺨﺼﻢ ‪ %2.5‬ﻣﻦ ﺭﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﻀﺎﺭﺏ ‪+++++‬‬ ‫ﺭﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ – ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﻀﺎﺭﺏ = ‪++++‬‬ ‫ﺭﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﰲ =‬ ‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺭﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪/‬ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ = ‪%+‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ =‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻏﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﻌﺎﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.232-231 :‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺩﰊ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﰎ ﻓﻌﻼﹰ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻮﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ : 4‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺩﰊ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ‪/12/31‬ﻥ‬

‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﻫﻢ ﺇﻣﺎﺭﺍﰐ(‬ ‫ﺻﺎﰲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑـﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣـﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑـﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴـﻞ‬ ‫‪%100 1.027,1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‬ ‫‬‫‪100,8‬‬ ‫‪8,5‬‬ ‫‪92,3 1.027,1‬‬ ‫‪-6,5‬‬ ‫‪%80 3.611,3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪7,00‬‬ ‫‪253,1‬‬ ‫‪259,6 2.889,0‬‬ ‫‪-0,1‬‬ ‫‪%70‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ 9‬ﺷﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪6,15‬‬ ‫‪2,7‬‬ ‫‪2,8‬‬ ‫‪30,7‬‬ ‫‪43,9‬‬ ‫‪-0,3‬‬ ‫‪%60‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ 6‬ﺷﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪5,25‬‬ ‫‪12,6‬‬ ‫‪12,9‬‬ ‫‪143,8‬‬ ‫‪239,6‬‬ ‫‪-0,2‬‬ ‫‪%50‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺷﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪4,37‬‬ ‫‪6,2‬‬ ‫‪6,4‬‬ ‫‪71,0‬‬ ‫‪141,9‬‬ ‫‪-1,4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ‪%50 1.255,9‬‬ ‫‪4,38‬‬ ‫‪55,0‬‬ ‫‪56,4‬‬ ‫‪628,0‬‬ ‫‪-8,5‬‬ ‫‬‫‪329,6‬‬ ‫‪338,1 3.762,5‬‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪- 5.292,6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‬ ‫‬‫‪430,4‬‬ ‫‬‫‪430,4 4.789,6‬‬ ‫‪- 6.319,7‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﳏﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﻏﻲ‪" ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﺄﺻﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ("‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺭﻗﺔ‪ 9-7 ،‬ﺃﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،2002‬ﺹ ‪.354 :‬‬

‫ﻭﻳُﻼﺣَﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺩﰊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺈﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﲜﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺴﺘﺤﻖ ﻛﻤﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺣﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻭﻻ ﳛﻖ ﻟﻪ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻷﺟﺮ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ؛ ﻷﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳُﺤﻤ‪‬ﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺣﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫‪176‬‬

‫ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺟﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ؛‬ ‫ ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻟﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %100‬ﻭﻳُﻌﻄﱢﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %50-20‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﳊﻬﻢ‬‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﰱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ؛‬ ‫ ﳜﺼﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻫﺘﻼﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺎﺭﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﰲ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻫﻲ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻘﺪ‪‬ﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ؛‬ ‫ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ؛ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻘﺎﺿﻰ ‪ %2.5‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬‫ﺗُﻤﺜﱢﻞ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﻭﺗُﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﲡﺮﺑﺔ "ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﱐ" ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﱠﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﱐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺄﻣﻮﺍﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺻﺪﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻟﻺﻳﺪﺍﻉ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺮﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﺪّ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻟﻠﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺳُﺤِﺒﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﺪّﺗﻪ ؛‬ ‫ﺨﺼﻢ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %10‬ﻛﺎﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ∗∗ ﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻳ َ‬ ‫ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ُ‬‫ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻧﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﻤﻀﺎﺭﺏ ؛‬‫ ﺇﻥ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﺺ ‪‬ﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ؛‬ ‫‬‫ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ؛ ﲝﻴﺚ ﳜﺼﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻘﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﳔﻔﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪،‬‬ ‫ ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﻃﺒﱠﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﱡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻗﻴﻦ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺮ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﱐ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ "ﺩﻳﻮﻥ" ﻣﺪﻳﲏ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ∗∗∗‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻼ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪.6‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﲣﻠﻮ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﱐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺤﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﺎﹰ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﺎﺭﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻼﹰ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ؛‬‫ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪ ،%10‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ****‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ ؛‬ ‫ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﱂ ﻳُﻌِﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻭﺟَﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳُﺮﺍﻋﻲ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﻳُﻮﻓﱢﺮ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ؛ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ؛ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﲡﺮﺑﺔ "ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﱐ" ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﱐ ﺑﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﻜﻤﻬﺎ ؛ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒﹼ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﻭﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺤﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﻘـﺪﻱ )‪ (%20-18‬ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﲝﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﺤﺪ‪‬ﺩﻩ‬

‫‪177‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ؛‬ ‫ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ؛‬‫ ُﻳﺸﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬‫• ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ – )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪ +‬ﺍﳌﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤَﺮﺓ ﻛﺄﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ( = ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ؛‬ ‫• ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭﻳﺔ – )‪ %50-40‬ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﻮﻟﺔ( = ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻳَﺨﺼﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ %30‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ؛‬‫ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ ؛‬‫ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫‬‫ﻭﺗﺘﻠﺨﺺ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﱐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﱠ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ : 5‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﱐ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﺎﻟــﻎ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑــﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘــﻮﻕ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ‬ ‫)×××(‬ ‫)‪ (-‬ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﻜﻤﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﻜﻤﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫)×××(‬ ‫)‪ (-‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴـﺔ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‬ ‫)×××(‬ ‫)‪ (-‬ﳐﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﻛﺎﺓ‬ ‫)×××(‬ ‫)‪ (-‬ﳐﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫)×××(‬ ‫)‪ (-‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ‬ ‫)×××(‬ ‫)‪ (-‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺂﺕ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫)×××(‬ ‫)‪(-‬ﺣﻮﺍﻓﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‬ ‫×××‬ ‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ‪" ،‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤّﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻡ‪ ،2‬ﻉ‪ ،3‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ ‪ ،1994‬ﺹ ‪.61-60 :‬‬

‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳُﻼﺣَﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﱐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﺑﲔ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻪ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ ِ‬‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﺎﺭﻛﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻔﻬﺎ ؛‬ ‫ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺈﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳَﻌﺘﱪ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻓﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ∗∗∗∗∗ ؛‬ ‫ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻘﺘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺁﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻫﺎ ؛‬‫ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺈﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺷﺎﺭﻛﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﻼﹰ ﺃﻡ ﱂ ﺗﺸﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬‫‪178‬‬

‫ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 -2009/07‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ؛ ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﱠ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲣﺺّ ﻛﻼًّ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ؛‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﻭﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﱠﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ؛ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﺼﻢ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﻖ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﶈﺪﱠﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﰲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ؛‬ ‫ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ‪ :‬ﺗُﻌﺘﺒَﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ ‪:‬‬‫• ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ؛‬ ‫• ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ؛‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ؛‬ ‫• ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﻀﺎﺭﹺﺏ ﰲ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ؛‬ ‫• ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳُﻤﺎﺛﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺒﻴﱠﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻨﺴﺠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺣﺘﻪ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ؛ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺆﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫• )‪ (-‬ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ‬ ‫• )‪ (-‬ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ‬ ‫• )=( ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺑﺼﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻀﺎﺭﺑﺎﹰ ﻭﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﻣﺎﻝ(‬ ‫• )‪ (+‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫• )‪ (+‬ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ )ﻣﻀﺎﺭﺏ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﱠﺪﺓ‬ ‫• )‪ (+‬ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ )ﻭﻛﻴﻞ( ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﱠﺪﺓ‬ ‫• )‪ (+‬ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫• )=( ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‬ ‫• )‪ (-‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫• )=( ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ )ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻛﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫• )‪ (-‬ﺍﻟﺰﻛﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫• )=( ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫******‬ ‫• )‪ (-‬ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• )=( ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ )ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ(‬

‫‪179‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫∗ ﻋﻨﺪ َﻣَﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﱪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ :‬ﻟﻄﻒ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳـﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﲑﻣﻮﻙ‪ ،1995/1994 ،‬ﺹ ‪67-66 :‬؛ ‪97‬؛ ﺭﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﻭﻋﻮﺽ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺩﻟﻒ‪" ،‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴـﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺒـﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﶈـ ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺁﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﺸـﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ 17-15 ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻮ ‪ ،2005‬ﺹ ‪.214-213 :‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣَﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﻪ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪ ،2009/05/10 :‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪www.fiqhacademy.org.sa/qrarat/13-5.htm‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪" ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ"‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‬ ‫‪ ،2000‬ﺹ ‪.7-6 :‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺁﺩﻡ ﺇﺳﺤﺎﻕ ﺣﺎﻣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻯ‪ ،2003/2002 ،‬ﺹ ‪314 :‬؛‬ ‫‪.416‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ :‬ﻏﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﻌﺎﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺼﺮﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﳌﺎﺫﺍ‪ ..‬؟ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ‪ ..‬؟ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﱯ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺸﻖ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،1998 ،1‬ﺹ ‪231-228 :‬؛‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺛﺮ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﲜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،1996 ،1‬ﺹ ‪176-169 :‬؛ ‪238-222‬؛‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻒ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪99-74 :‬؛ ﺁﺩﻡ ﺇﺳﺤﺎﻕ ﺣﺎﻣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪317-303 :‬؛ ‪328-325‬؛ ﺭﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﻭﻋﻮﺽ ﺧﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.219-215 :‬‬

‫∗∗ ﻳُﻄﻠِﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ "ﳐﺼﺺ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ" ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳُﻘﺘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ !‬

‫∗∗∗ ﻫﻮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﺠﺰﻭﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﱂ ﻳَﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺩﻳﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻨﺬﺭ ﻗﺤﻒ‪" ،‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،49 :‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪ ،2009/05/10 :‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪monzer.kahf.com/papers/arabic/Success_Factors_of_Islamic_banks_Publication_Version.pdf‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺼﲑ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬ ‫**** ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﰲ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻓﻘﻪ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﺼﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺎﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﻮﻥ؛ ﳑﺎ ﻳُﻌﺘﱪ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﻞ( ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺗﻌﺎﻭﱐ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻨﻚ‬ ‫∗∗∗∗∗ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺩﰊ ﻛﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﱐ َ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ ﺃﺿﺎﻑ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫****** ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﰲ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺗُﻮﺣ‪‬ﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻤﻪ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪180‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺻﺎﱀ & ﺃ ‪ /‬ﻣﻌﺎﺭﰲ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺧﻴﻀﺮ‪ -‬ﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺮﻏﺒﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳑﺎ ﻻﺷﻚ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻥ ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﻧﺘﺴﺎﺀﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﺿﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻘﻠﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻦ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﻌﺮﻳﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺰﻭﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﺳﺎﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻛﺒﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻴﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﻧﺘﺴﺎﺀﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ؟ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ؟ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ؟ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻞ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ؟‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﻧﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺆﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ -‬ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻓﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﲔ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﰐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﰲ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺘﻘﺮﺭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﻜﺴﺖ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳍﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﲣﻔﻴﻀﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺩﱏ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1.1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﲑ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻫﻨﺪﻯ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (Efficient Market‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻩ ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﲤﺜﱠﻠﺖ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺜﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﲤﺜﱠﻠﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪181‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻟﺔ )‪ (Fair Value‬ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ )‪(Intrinsic Value‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻮﻟﱠﺪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺼﻮﻣﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺜﲎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻪ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ "ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳌﺴـﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﳍﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻻ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺑـﺄﻥ ﺗﻘـﺪﻳﺮﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﺑﺸـﺄﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﹰﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴـﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﺮﻓﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺘﻌﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻄﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﻬﻢ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻣﻘﺘﻨﻊ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺗﻪ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻣﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻋﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﻓﻘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻛﻔﺆﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺧﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫‬‫‪ .2.1‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺆﺓ ‪ :‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺷﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻬﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﳓﻮ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺛﺮﻭﺍ‪‬ﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺮﺿﲔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﱯ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲤﺎﺛﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﲟﻔﺮﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺎ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﻣﺎ ﺣﻘﻘﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻭﻥ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺍ‬ ‫• ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺃﻥ ﳛﻘﻖ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺈﻥ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﲎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﰲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﰲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺿﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﳍﺎ ‪.‬‬

‫‪182‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ .3.1‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﳘﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1.3.1‬ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﲏ ﺑﲔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪،5‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﳍﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻛﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﻌﻪ ﻭﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻷﻱ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﻩ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺷﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﳓﻮ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻋﻈﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2.3.1‬ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﲏ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎ( ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ )ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ‪‬ﺎ ﳊﺪ ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺛﺮﻭﺍ‪‬ﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﻳﻮﺿﺤﺎﻥ ﺭﺩﻭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ) :‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﱐ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﻛﻒﺀ ﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺸﺠﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﳛﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )ﺃ( (؛‬ ‫ ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮﺓ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻋﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻟﻦ ﳛﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻓﻴﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﲦﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )ﺏ( (؛‬ ‫ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﻐﺎﱃ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻘﺼﺪ ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳑﺎ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎ ؛ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ ﺭﻗﻢ )ﺃ(‪) ،‬ﺏ( (‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4.1‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻳﺒﺤﺜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﻌﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻬﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﻓﻘﺔ‪6‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ "ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻷﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ "ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻔﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻻﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺴﻦ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﲔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬ ‫‪183‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،7‬ﻭﺗﱪﺯ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺑﺎ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫"ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺭﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﳕﻮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ"‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺸﻤﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﲔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪...‬ﺍﱁ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﱴ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﻋﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳚﺐ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﳍﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺒﻜﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻠﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﺸﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺣﱴ ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﺆﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺗﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪،‬ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺳﱯ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﺰﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺴﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1.4.1‬ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺸﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻛﺸﻮﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺸﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﻬﺎ‪...‬ﺍﱁ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﻨﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺸﺮﻫﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺴﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺴﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﻦ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ"‪ "on line‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﰲ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻪ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺿﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪184‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ -‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺆﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻋﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﻓﻘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1.2‬ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﻕ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺿﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺳﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻭﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﳝﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﲟﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻖ ﰲ ﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻧﺒﺎﺀ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺳﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﲏ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺣﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﱴ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻳﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻈﺮ‪‬ﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻌﻮﺩﺍﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺒﻮﻃﺎﹰ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻌﺎﹰ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﺎﺀ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺎﺭﺓﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺳﺎﺭﺓﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻛﻔﺄ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻏﲑ ﻛﻒﺀ ﻓﻴﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻏﲑ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2.2‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻛﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1.2.2‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑـ"ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻌﺎﺭ" ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﺮﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ )ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﲔ( ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺒﺆ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻷﺧﺮ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺴﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳕﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2.2.2‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻬﻢ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺭﻙ‬ ‫‪185‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ )ﻭﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ( ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﳛﻘﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3.2.2‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ‪ :‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣـﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣـﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﲑﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﻘﻘﻪ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﺘـﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﳍـﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺬﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﻮﻥ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺑﺄﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﺍﳋﻼﻑ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﲢﻈﻰ ﺑﺘﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﶈﻠﻠﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﻳﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﰲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻲ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3.2‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﻖ ﲣﺼﻴﺼﺎﹰ ﻛﻔﺄﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﲝﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﻳﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺆﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﳍﺎ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﻳُﻌﱠﺪ ﺇﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺘﺮﺿﲔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻡ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓﹰ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﲢﻘﻖ ﲰﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﻥ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳘﺎ‪ :‬ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﲑ ﻭﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1.3.2‬ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﲑ "ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ "‪ :‬ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ‪‬ﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﲏ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻜﺒﺪﻭﺍ ﰲ ﺳﺒﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﻫﻈﺔ ﳑﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻏﲑ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺆﺓ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺼﻠﻮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﳛﻘﻘﻮﺍ ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﺎ ﻏﲑ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻷﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰ ﰲ ﺃﻱ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻣﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2.3.2‬ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ "ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ "‪ :‬ﻭﻳﻘﺼﺪ ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫∗‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺴﺮﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ )ﺻﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ( ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺭﺑﺢ ﻣﻐﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﲑ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻹﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺸﺠﻌﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺬﻝ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺪﺛﻪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻫﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺧﻠﲔ ﻭﳍﻢ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬

‫‪186‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬ ‫•‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﲞﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻟﻸﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﳛﻘﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﻣﱪﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺄﻣﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻧﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑـ"ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ " ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﳑﺎ ﳚﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﳛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺳﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺍﺀ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪‬ﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺻﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﳛﻜﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑـ"ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ" ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﺎﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﱪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻠﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺟﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﲟﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﴰﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻲ ﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ ﰲ ﳕﻮ ﺭﲰﻠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻐﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻞ ﻭﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1.3‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻧﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻴﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﺾ ﻣﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻣﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1.1.3‬ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ‪ :‬ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ – ﻻ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ‪: -‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﻸﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪1965‬ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻢ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1983‬ﰎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻥ ﲟﻮﺟﺒﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺷﻬﺪ ﺳﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻱ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﻣﺮ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﲤﺜﻠﺖ ﻛﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ‪ -1954‬ﺃﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 10‬ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺃﲰﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ 1,7‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺯﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﻭﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻊ ﻭﺷﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﳑﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺳﺠﻠﺖ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪ :2003 -‬ﲤﻴﺰﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻦ ﰎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺳﻨﻪ ‪ ،1983‬ﻭﺻﺪﺭ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﻘﻀﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺭﻗﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ‬ ‫‪187‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺍ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1990‬ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺄﻭﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺁﱄ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺛﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ 2001‬ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺟﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﲰﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ" ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ‪ :2005-2003‬ﺗﺄﺳﺴﺖ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﰲ ‪ 2003/07/31‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻼﻝ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﻸﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻱ ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﳚﻮﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺘﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﲰﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ﻟﻸﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﰎ ﺍﻓﺘﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻛﻮﻳﺘﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺕ ‪ ،1972‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﰎ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻟﻪ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪1976‬ﺻﺪﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻦ ﰎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻲ ﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲰﻴﺖ ﺑـ"ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ﻟﻸﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ"‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1977‬ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﰲ ‪.1983/04/18‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﱃ ﻭﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺷﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻄﺮﺡ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﳍﻢ ﻭﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺘﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻀﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﺳﻨﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺘﲔ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﺎ ﻟﺴﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺘﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﳍﺎ ‪.‬‬‫‪ .2.1.3‬ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ :‬ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ – ﻻ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ‪: -‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻴﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ‪ 66‬ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪1978‬ﺩﻋﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺳﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﲦﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﻋﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،1976‬ﻭﰎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻓﺘﺘﺎﺡ "ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ" ﺭﲰﻴﺎ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 1978 /04/01‬ﻭﺻﺪﺭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1990‬ﰒ ﺗﺒﻌﺘﻪ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﲢﻜﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﺘﺴﺒﲔ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ‪‬ﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺸﺘﺮﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﰲ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻋﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻛﺸﻒ ﺑﺄﲰﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ‬‫ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﲟﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪.‬‬

‫‪188‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻀﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺻﺎﰲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪ %75‬ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻉ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺘﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺻﺤﻴﻔﺘﲔ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﺮ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲟﺼﺮ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﺳﺴﺖ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،1883‬ﰒ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1898‬ﻭﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻭﰎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ ‪ 1910‬ﻭﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﲟﺰﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،1929‬ﰒ ﺗﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﺒﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺳﲑ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻛﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﰲ ﳎﺎﻟﺲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺐ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﳑﺎ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺕ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1960‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 626‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺟﻨﻴﻪ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1962‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 5.2‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺟﻨﻴﻪ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪1972‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ )‪ (1983 -1973‬ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ)‪ (1991-1983‬ﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﺪﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪.1986‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺻﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻮﻕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪1992‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲰﺢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻭﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﰲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﳏﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ‪ 1997‬ﺻﺪﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺘﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳓﻮ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺘﲔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺳﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2.3‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﲤﺎﺷﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ ﲣﺮﺝ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻗﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﺗﻔﺘﻘﺮ ﺇﱃ ﳐﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﻴﺪﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ‪‬ﻴﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﰲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﺃﻃﺮ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑـﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﲎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ ﲣﻀﻊ ﳊﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﺮﻫﻮﻧـﺔ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﲟﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻮﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﳛﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻫﻲ ﻭﲢﺘﺎﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﺪﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻧﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺘﻘﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪189‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﲟﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻀﻴﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﲔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪-‬ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ -‬ﻭﺳﻨﺪﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻓﺘﻘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﺻﺮﳛﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﺮﺍﻓﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﻭﻃﲏ‬‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬‫‪ -2‬ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﻠﺐ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺗﻘﻠﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺳﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺠﺰﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﰲ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻋﻘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1.3‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺛﻘﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﻨﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺧﺮﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺿﻌﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﺆﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﲟﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺻﺖ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺼﻨﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺘﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﰲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ :‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺍ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﳓﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻼﺻﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺿﻴﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺭﲰـﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻬﻢ ‪ ،(Market Capitalization‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻟﺔ‬

‫‪190‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻨﺴﺒـﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ 15،‬ﻓﺎﳌﻼﺣﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺼﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‬‫ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ‪ ،%100‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‪ ،%50‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻋﻦ‪ %50‬ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻄﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻫﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻠﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻌﻒ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﱪﺯ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﱪﻡ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺿﺂﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺑﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﻌﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﻴﺎﺯﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺎ ﺃﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻟﻮ‬‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﻷﻏﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺎ ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﺿﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺪﻻ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﲡﻨﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ ﰲ ﲦﺎﱐ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﺑﻠﻎ ‪ %4.5‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪،2004‬ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻦ ‪ ،%12.5‬ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،%11.1‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﱏ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺳﺠﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،%0.2‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺳﻠﻄﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،%0.4‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺜﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﻼﻡ ﰲ ﲢﺮﱘ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳋﱪﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺿﺂﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺫ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼ‬‫ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳒﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﺫﺑﺔ ﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﻴﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻀﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﻲ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻏﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﳍﺎﻣﺶ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬‫ﺑﻪ ﳌﺪﻯ ﺗﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪ %5‬ﻭ‪ ،%10‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﺘﺠﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﰲ ﺭﲝﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺜﱪ ﳐﺎﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﳍﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻬﻢ ﻣﻨﻪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻗﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﻛﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪.‬‬

‫‪191‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻫﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺇﱃ ‪ %70‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ 2400-800‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﺒﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺪﱐ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﻌﻬﻢ ﻭﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻻ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﺍﺋﺾ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺭﻏﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ‬ ‫ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺪﱐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﺎﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬‫ ﻫﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﱄ ‪.‬‬‫ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲞﻀﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3.3‬ﺳﺒـﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﲝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﻋﻮﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﰊ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﻕ ‪ :‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﰊ ﺍﳌﻌﲏ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﳍﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﺑﺴﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﻭﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺮﺓ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﻬﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗـﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﳎﻠـﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺑﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻـﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘـﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑـﺎﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﻟﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻒ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻏﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺸﺮﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪‬ﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻣﻬﻨﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻟﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﱴ ﺗﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪192‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ‪ :‬ﻟﺪﻯ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺠﻴﻌﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺩﺧﻮﳍﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﻀﺎ ﻣﻨﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﲰﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﰲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﻮﺻﺼﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﳌﺰﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﲏ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻨﻨﺔ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻷﻱ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﰊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲤﺎﺭﺳﻪ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﱴ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﲎ ﳍﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻘﺎﺀ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﲢﺮﺹ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻛﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ (IOSCO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﰲ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )ﺃ(‪ :‬ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺠﻌﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )ﺏ(‪ :‬ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﳏﺒﻄﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ(‬ ‫)ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻐﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ‬

‫ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻐﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪193‬‬

‫ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻨﲑ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻫﻨﺪﻯ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ"‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،1999 ،‬ﺹ‪38‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺜﲎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻪ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‪" ،‬ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺪﻭﺓ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪-‬ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﻭﺭﺅﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺑﻠﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ ،2005/12/11‬ﺹ‪.4‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺳﻌﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﻭﻉ‪" ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ"‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ -‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،2001 ،‬ﺹ‪.368‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺻﺎﱀ ﺍﳊﻨﺎﻭﻱ‪" ،‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،1998 ،‬ﺹ‪.132‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻔﺎﺭ ﺣﻨﻔﻲ‪" ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،2004 ،‬ﺹ‪.75‬‬ ‫‪" -6‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ"‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.181‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﺟﻲ‪"،‬ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ"‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺪﻭﺓ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.3‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻨﲑ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻫﻨﺪﻯ‪" ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ"‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.38‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻣﺜﲎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻪ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‪" ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ"‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.12‬‬

‫‪ -10‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺻﺎﱀ ﺍﳊﻨﺎﻭﻱ‪" ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ"‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.77‬‬

‫‪" -11‬ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ‪ ،2008.10.26‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪www.tadawul.net/forum/showthreaa.php?t=12‬‬

‫∗‬

‫ـ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﱯ ﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﰲ ﳊﻈﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪" -12‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻬﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ‪ ،2008.10.26‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪www.lows.org‬‬

‫‪ - 13‬ﺑﻮﻛﺴﺎﱐ ﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪" ،‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀ‪‬ﺎ"‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،2006/2005 ،‬ﺹ‪.260‬‬

‫‪ -14‬ﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺴﻲ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﳉﻨﺴﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ :‬ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺣﺪﺓ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ‪.74‬‬

‫‪ -15‬ﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﻛﻲ‪" ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺃﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪ 22/21‬ﻧﻮﻓﻤﲑ‪ ،2006‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.6،5‬‬

‫‪ -16‬ﺑﻮﻛﺴﺎﱐ ﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪" ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ"‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.271‬‬ ‫‪" -17‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ"‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.253‬‬

‫‪194‬‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺻﻢ ﺷﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﲟﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ) ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ( ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﰒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻌﺾ ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﰲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﲣﺮﻳﺞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﰒ ﳔﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﲤﺰﺝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ 1.‬ﻭﺣﻈﻴﺖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﱪ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﲢﺴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﹼﰎ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺷﻜﻜﺖ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﰲ ﳎﻼﺕ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺟﻌﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺎ ﳛﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺇﳌﺎﻣﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺯﺍﺋﻒ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺎﺛﲑ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻏﲑ ﺫﻟﻚ ؛ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻒ ﻋﺎﺋﻘﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﲤﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺎ‪‬ﺔ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺫﺍ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺑﻠﻴﻎ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﳕﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﺤﻘﲔ ﲟﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻃﻨﲔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﻟﻠﺪﺍﺭﺳﲔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳍﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﳌﺎ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻛﺎﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﳎﺎﻻ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﻌﻠﺖ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﻆ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺃﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﻬﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻠﺴﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺒﺎﺩﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﲑ ‪TOTAL QUALITY‬‬ ‫‪ MANAGMENT‬ﻭﲣﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ) ‪ ( TQM‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺮّﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ) ‪(QUALITY‬‬ ‫‪195‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________ ‪ ‬‬

‫ﻓﻬﻲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺭﻏﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ) ‪ (TOTAL‬ﻓﻴﻌﲎ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻣﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺑﺘﻘﻮﱘ ﺭﺿﺎﻩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺪﺭﺍﱄ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻨﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﱃ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ 4.‬ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ _ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ _ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬

‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬ ‫‪-5‬‬

‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ‪ PROBLEM SOLVING TECHNUQUE‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻕ ﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﺎﻥ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ‪ 5.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ‪ BENCHMARKING‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺴﻦ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺳﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ‪ SUGGESTION SYSTEM‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻇﻔﲔ ﺑﺎﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﺒﲎ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎ‪ 7.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪ JUST- IN TIME SYSTEM‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻭﻃﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ 8.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺮﳎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺰﻭﺩ ﳉﺎﻥ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺎ‪9.‬ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ‪ ‬‬

‫‪ 1.1‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﻇﻔﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺮﳚﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ) ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻀﻮ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻻ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ 10.‬ﻓﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺳﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﻋﻀﻮﺍ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ؛ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬

‫‪ .2.1‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﻇﻔﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻠﲔ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻏﺎﻳﺎﺗﻪ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ ﻭﲢﻤﻠﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪196 ‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻕ ﻭﻏﺎﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ‪ .‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲞﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺟﻮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ‪ .‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪12‬‬

‫ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ‪ mission ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺒﻘﻬﺎ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ‪ vision ‬؛ ﲢﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺇﳒﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﳓﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ؟ ﻭﺍﻳﻦ ﺓﻧﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ؟ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﻧﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻧﺮﻳﺪ؟ ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻫﻮ ) ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ( ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻼ ﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺳﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻠﲔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﲟﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪.‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺗﺬﺓ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺿﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺼﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﲨﺔ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺇ‪‬ﺎ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺒﺔ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﻇﻔﲔ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺗﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﳉﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻭﺳﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪197‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________ ‪ ‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺣﺎﺋﻼ ﺩﻭﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺍﻵﺭﺍﺀ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻓﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬‬‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺴﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻞ‪ .‬‬‫ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ‪ .‬‬‫ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺒﻮﳍﻢ ﻟﻸﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺲ‪ .‬‬ ‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻌﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﰲ‬‫ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﺠﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬‬‫ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩِﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﻀﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬‬‫ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ .‬‬‫ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﱪﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻪ‪ .‬‬‫ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺗﻔﻬﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﻇﻔﻮﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﻮﺍ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ ﺃﻡ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﳒﺎﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1.2‬ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﰲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ؛ ﺇﺫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﺜﻼ ﺑﺎﺩﺭﺕ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻣﺎﻭﻧﺖ ﺇﻳﺪﺝ( ﺑﻮﻻﻳﺔ ﺃﻻﺳﻜﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﳛﺘﺬﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻭﺗﺒﻨﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﰲ ﻭﻻﻳﺔ ) ﺩﻳﺘﺮﻭﻳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺣﺼﻠﺖ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﺔ )ﺕ ﻳﲏ ﺩﺭﺍﻱ( ﲟﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﻠﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﺋﺰﺓ ﻭﻳﻠﺰ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1995‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻃﺒﻘﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻳﻐﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺧﻠﺼﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻳﻐﻮﻥ ‪‬ﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺴﻠﻔﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺖ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﲢﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1993‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻛﺰﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺎﻟﻮﺭﻳﻮﺱ( ﻭﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ) ﺍﳌﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ( ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ( ﰲ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ) ﻧﻮﺭﺙ ﻭﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻴﺴﻮﺭﻱ ﺳﺘﺎﻳﺖ( ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1986‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻘﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪ 15.‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺄﺕ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺃﻃﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ؛‬ ‫ﺇﺫ ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺴﻬﻢ ﺇﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺗﻜﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬ ‫‪198 ‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﲏ؛ ﻭﺛﺎﻧﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻛﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳊﻘﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ؛ ﻭﺛﺎﻟﺜﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﺠﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ؛ ﻭﺭﺍﺑﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ؛‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺎﻣﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪ 16.‬ﻭﲦﺔ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺷﺘﻬﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﻌﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻳﲔ ﻳﺘﻔﻮﻗﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﲑﻫﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ) ﺡ(‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﺟﺎ ﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﳍﺬﻩ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺬﻕ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2.2‬ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻮﻋﺖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻨﻔﺖ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻭﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻮﺱ ﺑﺪﻭﻟﺔ ُﻋﻤﺎﻥ؛ ﺇﺫ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﻳﲔ‪18‬ﺇﱃ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻮﺱ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻞ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻛﺪﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ) ﺍﻷﻛﺎﺩﳝﻲ( ﻟﱪﺍﳎﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﳉﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﲟﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ :‬ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﺼﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲡﺮﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻗﻄﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﳉﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩﺍ ﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﺒﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻄﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ) ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﲝﺜﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺧﺮﳚﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺤﻨﲔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﲔ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﺼﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ‪‬ﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺼﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻛﺎﺩﳝﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﻭﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺒﲔ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺘﺄﻫﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺎﺩﳝﻴﲔ ﻋﱪ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻬﻢ ﳊﻀﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻯ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻓﺮﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﳍﻢ ﻓﺮﺻﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ‪ 19.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺗﺸﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﳎﺘﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ 20 ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﺎﻳﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﲟﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳊﺸﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺼﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻱ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﳌﻲ ﻭﳏﻠﻲ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻤﺜﻼ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﱪ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﳍﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺪﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﻮﻇﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻞ ﺗﺄﻫﻴﻼ‬ ‫‪199‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________ ‪ ‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﲜﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺳﻴﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﻭﳛﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﳚﺪ ﻓﺮﺹ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﻃﻨﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﳛﻘﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ؛ ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻘﻔﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﲤﺴﻜﻪ ‪‬ﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻮﳌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻮﳌﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﻋﻮﳌﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺩﳝﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﻤﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﺴﺒﻪ ﺍﻷﳕﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻔﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺳﻴﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻀﻴﻒ ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﲏ؛ ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﻪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﲏ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺷﺎﺭﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ‪ 22.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺘﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ :‬ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻬﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻹﺳﻬﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﰊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺿﻌﻒ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺮﺃﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ؛ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ؛ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺴﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ؛ ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ ﺍﳍﺠﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔﹰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺑﻼﺩﻫﻢ ﻭﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺏ؛ ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺮ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻮﻕ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ 23.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺫﺍ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻋﻈﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﻟﻠﻔﺮﺩ؛ ﺇﺫ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﰲ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺰﺯ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻨﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﻪ ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﰲ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﺭﺗﻪ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻫﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻃﺒﻘﺖ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﳒﺪ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻘﻠﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﰲ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﺍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﻮﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﺑﻼ ﺟﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﲝﺪ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻏﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﳏﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﺕ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﺯﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻢ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺻﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻣﻴﻪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﱐ ﻭﺇﻋﻼﻣﻲ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﳍﺎ ﲟﺎ ﳛﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪ 24 .‬‬

‫‪200 ‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠ ُﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﰲ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﲜﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﹼ‬ ‫ﹺ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺨﻮﺧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﳌﺘﻌﻠﻤﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﳝﻨﻌﻪ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﻭﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﻣﻮﻫﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺑﻐﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺣﺎﺋﺰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺭﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﺮﺻﻪ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻬﲏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﲏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﻋﻀﻮ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﲝﻀﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻢ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻭﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺘﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺰﺯ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺒﺎﺩﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺫﻛﺮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺁﺭﺍﺀ ﺩﳝﻨﺞ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﺎ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻴﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻭ‪‬ﻲﺀ ﻣﻨﺎﺧﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺎ ﻳﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﺎﻥ ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﳓﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻧﺎ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﲦﺔ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻭﺃﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ ﳍﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﲟﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳋﲑ ﻟﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ" ‪ ...‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﻘﻮﺍ ﺍﳋﲑﺍﺕ ‪ "..‬ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،148/‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻵﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﲑ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻴﻒ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻭﳏﺮﻛﺔ ﳍﻢ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺒﺒﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇ‪‬ﺎﺀ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺁﺯﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﳊﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﱪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻧﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﰲ ﲣﺮﻳﺞ ﻃﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻤﲔ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﱪ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﺭﻛﺰﺕ ﰲ ﺧﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺒﺪﻋﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﳌﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺧﻄﻄﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ‪2020‬ﻡ ﻋﱪ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ credit subsidies‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ‪tax‬‬ ‫‪ exception‬ﻭﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺷﺘﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﲟﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺍﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻴﺔ ‪ the new Development policy‬ﻭﺭﻛﺰﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﺍﰐ ﻋﱪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ .‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﲣﺎﺫ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺃﺟﻨﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻔﻮﺫ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪The‬‬ ‫‪ multimedia Super Corridor ‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻀﻊ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺧﺎﺭﻃﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﰲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻭﺷﺠﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ‪tertiary‬‬ ‫‪ university education‬ﻭﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﲏ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﲏ ﻋﱪ ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻮﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ‪، polytechnics‬‬ ‫ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﳌﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺘﲔ ﻭﳛﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﻋﻞ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﻫﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻓﺮﺻﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻃﻠﲔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭﺩﻓﻊ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪201‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________ ‪ ‬‬

‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ 25 .‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎﻩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﹰ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﺴﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﳍﺎ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻬﻴﺄ ﻭﻳﺪﺭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﻭﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺏ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﳛﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺣﱴ ﰲ‬ ‫ﳎﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺛﺮ ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺸﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪ :‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪1 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ‪Frederick. W. Taylor. 1911. The principles of scientific Management. New :‬‬ ‫‪York: Horper and Brothers; Shewhart, W.A. 1931. Economic Control; Juran, J. 1988. Juran on‬‬ ‫‪planning for Quality. New York: Free press.‬‬ ‫‪ 2 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﲔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪Mathews, J. 7 Katel, 1992. Cost of quality: faced with hard times :‬‬ ‫‪ business course on total quality management (TQM), News Week, PP. 48-49.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻏﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻋﺮﻓﺎﻥ ﺟﻮﳛﻠﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،1‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫‪2006‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪20‬؛ ﻭﻃﻌﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺷﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﺃﲪﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﳏﺴﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﺪﻱ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺬﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪2006 ،‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪ 12‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ؛ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﲪﺪ ﺑﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،1‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪2005 ،‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪ .20‬‬ ‫‪ 3 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎﻩ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ‪Juran, J. 1988. Juran on planning for Quality. New York: Free press; :‬‬ ‫;‪Crosby. 1979. Quality is free, New York Mc Graw Hill‬‬ ‫‪Deming, W.E. 1993. The new economics for industry, Government, Education. Cambridge‬‬ ‫‪mat: Massachusetts Institute of Technology Centre for advances engineering study; Feigenbaum,‬‬ ‫‪A.V. 1991. Total Quality Control, 3rd edn. New York: McGraw- Hill.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪Dale. B. G. 1994. Managing Quality, 2nd edu, UK: Prentice Hall :‬‬

‫‪International.‬؛ ﻭﺃﺑﻮ ﻧﺒﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪8‬؛ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪202 ‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪Oakland, J. S.1993. Total Quality Management, 2nd El, Butterworth Heinemann Ltd; :‬‬

‫‪Berghout,abdelazizi. Effective Higher Education: Dynamics &Institional Autonomy.‬‬ ‫‪International Seminar on Higher Education In the Muslim World: Challenges and Prospects. Kuala‬‬ ‫‪Lumpur, 24-25 March 2008. P.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬اﻧﻈﺮ‪Russel, R. S. Tayler B. W.1995. Production and Operation Management: Focusing on :‬‬ ‫‪Quality Competitiveness, Prenice Hall Inc.‬؛ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ )ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ( ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪ .91‬‬ ‫‪ 8 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ Menon, H, G.1992. In New Product Manufacturing- Mc-Grow Hill Inc. :‬‬ ‫‪ 9 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ .‬‬ ‫‪ 10 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﱐ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺻﺎﱀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺁﻓﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪1‬ﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺸﺮ‪1999 ،‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪118‬؛ ﻭﻛﻮﻣﺒﺰ‪ ،‬ﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺎﳌﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺧﲑﻱ ﻛﺎﻇﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺎﺑﺮ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪1971 ،‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪ .1‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻛﻮﻣﺒﺰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﻭﻗﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 11 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻏﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺟﻮﳛﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪81‬؛ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﲪﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺹ‪302‬؛ ﻭﻃﻌﻴﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺷﺪﻱ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪ .23‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎﻫﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪Symour.D1992. On Quality: Causing Quality in High education, New York: American :‬‬ ‫‪ council on Educatio, Ma cmillan Publishing.‬ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪382‬؛ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑ‪ ،‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﱀ‪" ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺄﻣﻮﻝ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺁﻓﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﲟﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ 25 – 24 ،‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2007‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺍﻻﳌﺒﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪ .7‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪Mac Robert, I. 1995. Hermeneutics and Human Relations, the Total Quality Review, :‬‬

‫‪ January/ February.P.45-52.‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺻﺮ ﺻﺎﱀ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﻣﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻕ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪2004 ،‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪97‬؛ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭ ﳏﻤﺪ‪" ،‬ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪1996 ،‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪ .17‬‬ ‫‪ 14 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﲪﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪316‬؛ ﻃﻌﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺷﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪45‬؛ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻧﺒﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪106‬؛ ﺳﻠﻄﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺳﻒ ﺣﺠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﲔ ﻓﻼﺡ ﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ :‬ﲢﺪﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺁﻓﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﲟﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ 25 – 24 ،‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2007‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺍﻻﳌﺒﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.7‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﲑﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪Fram, E. 1995. Not So Strange Bedfellows marketing :‬‬ ‫‪& Total Quality Management, Managing Service Quality, Vol5, no. 1, PP. 50-56; Kleindorfer.‬‬

‫‪203‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________ ‪ ‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪P.R.1993.TQM at the universities of Pennsylvania, Managing ServiceQuality, Vol. 6, No. 5.PP.20‬‬‫‪ 23.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪88‬؛ ﻭﺃﺑﻮ ﻗﺒﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪ .135‬‬ ‫‪ 16 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﺎﻓﻮﻗﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻮﺣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪2005 ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 17 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ‪ :‬ﺃﺑﻮ ﻧﺒﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.43‬‬ ‫‪ 18 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺎﻡ‪ "،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻮﺱ"‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺁﻓﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﲟﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ 25 – 24 ،‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2007‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺍﻻﳌﺒﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1919 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻧﺪﺟﺎﱐ‪ ،‬ﳒﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻔﻮﺭ‪ " ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻯ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﺎ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ :‬ﲢﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺁﻓﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﲟﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ 25 – 24 ،‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪2007‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺍﻻﳌﺒﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪Nankevis alan, Robert Compton, Maria bird. 2005. Human Recourse Management :‬‬

‫‪ Strategies and Processes, fifth edition, Nelson Austin Pty Limited. P. 10.‬‬ ‫‪ 21 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺩﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﻧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﲣﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪1994 ،‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.11‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﲪﺪ ﲨﻴﻞ ﲪﻮﺩﻱ‪ " ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ )‪ .(8‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪:‬‬

‫‪ http://www.ahewar.org/debat/show.art.asp?aid=150373 ‬‬ ‫‪ 23 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪1984 ،‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪19‬؛‬ ‫ﺭﺣﻞ ﰲ ﺃﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﳍﺠﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪1987 ،‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪ 15‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻓﺮﺟﺎﱐ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺩﺭ‪ّ ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺴﻜﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳊﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) ‪ (603‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﱪﺍﻳﺮ‪ ،2009 ،‬ﺹ‪.10‬‬ ‫‪ 24 ‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﺠﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ) ‪ ،(318‬ﺃﻏﺴﻄﺲ ‪،2005‬‬ ‫ﺹ‪.391‬‬ ‫‪ 25 ‬اﻧﻈﺮ‪shariffudeen, tengku Mohammad Azzam. Information Technology and the knowledge :‬‬ ‫‪Paradigm in Malaysia development’. In conference on ‘Globalism and the Muslim Ummah’.‬‬ ‫‪ International Islamic University Malaysia. 16‐17 October 1996. PP. 1‐18. ‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪2020‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ؛ ‪ ‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻝ ‪ . Charette, Daniel. E.Malaysia in the Global economy Crisis recovery and Road ahead.‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ http://www.dai.com/pdfMalaysia_in_the_Global_Eco :‬‬

‫‪204 ‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃ‪ /‬ﲤﺠﻐﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻭﳒﺎﺡ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻠﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻘﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻟﻄﺎﳌﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﳎﺎﻻﹰ ﺧﺼﺒﺎﹰ ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻬﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﶈﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﳌﺎ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻷﻥ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺁﺛﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﻟﺘﺸﻤﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻛﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﳍﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲣﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﲟﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﳑﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ "‪ "Les études de faisabilité‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺒﺜﻘﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻛﱪﻯ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻇﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﳍﺬﺍ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺗﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻷﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﲟﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺭﲝﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻲ ﳛﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻌﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺣﱴ ﳛﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯﻩ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -I‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -II‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -III‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -IV‬ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -V‬ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -I‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲤﺘﺪ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1936‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻀﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﻴﺰ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻀﺎﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺷﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﲟﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻧﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﱰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪Dean Joel‬‬ ‫‪205‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1951‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺻﺪﺭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻇﻬﺮ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﹰ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1950‬ﰲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﳉﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻋﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ)‪.(1‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻠﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ OECD‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،1969‬ﻭﰎ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،1974‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،1975‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1972‬ﻭﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،1993‬ﻭﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻳﺘﺒﻠﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻟﻴﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺠﻴﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﲝﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1-I‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺬ ﲝﺜﻬﺎ ﻛﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﱴ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻓﻴﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺨﺬﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﺯﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺼﺒﻮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ‪" :‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪ :‬ﺳﻮﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ")‪ .(2‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-I‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺘﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﲡﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﱪﺯ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﰲ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻻﺯﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳒﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻜﻠﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻹﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻬﻲ ﲝﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﱪﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ ﻹﳒﺎﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺭﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪...‬ﺍﱁ)‪.(3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺟﺪﻭﺍﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﳏﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﺭﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪206‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻭﺟﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﻭﺽ ﺗﺘﻨﺒﺄ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺸﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚﺐ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻛﺜﲑﺍﹰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﲞﱪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺪ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﻏﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ)‪: (5‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﻫﻞ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺳﻮﻕ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻤﺮﻩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ؟ ﲟﻌﲎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﻞ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ؟‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﻫﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ؟ ﲟﻌﲎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﻩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ؟‬ ‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ؟‬ ‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ؟ ﲟﻌﲎ ﻫﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ؟‬ ‫ﻣﺮﲝﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻨﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫـ‪ .‬ﻫﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ؟ ﲟﻌﲎ ﻫﻞ ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺴﻬﺎ ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭ‪ .‬ﻫﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ؟ ﲟﻌﲎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﻞ ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﲝﺎﹰ ؟‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (01‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -II‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﲨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1-II‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺠﻠﻰ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﰲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ)‪ : (6‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻻﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺎ ﲢﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﺻﺪ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺨﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﲤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﰲ‬ ‫‪207‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﰲ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ)‪ : (7‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﳕﻮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳚﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﱐ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻛﻼﳘﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﳍﺬﺍ ﻓﺎﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻠﺠﺄ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﰲ ﲢﺠﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻭﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ)‪ : (8‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﰒ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺿﻠﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﻐﲑﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﲡﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﺘﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﳌﻨﺢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺈﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﻘﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺗﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻇﻢ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﻹﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﺪ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-II‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪(9‬‬

‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻧﻔﻊ ﺻﺎﰲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺠﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺈﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﱪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺭﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﻛﻔﺎﺀﺗﻪ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪208‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -III‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺧﱪﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺭﻓﻬﻢ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﱴ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﻀﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺪ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ )ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﻋﻤﺮﻩ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ )ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻔﻪ( ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻗﻴﻤﻴﺎﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ)‪.(10‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻤﺎﹰ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ )‪:(11‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫‪.2‬‬

‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﳌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ‪ :‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﺄﺗﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﻌﲏ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﳍﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺑﺒﺤﺜﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﳌﱪﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪‬ﺎ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﳍﺬﺍ ﳚﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﲨﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -IV‬ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﻄﲑﺓ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﻭﻵﺟﺎﻝ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﹰ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﲟﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻋﱪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ Schumpeter‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻏﲑ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻛﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻳﻜﺘﻨﻔﻪ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ)‪.(12‬‬

‫‪209‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎﹰ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻴﺶ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻘﺪﺓ ﰲ ﳏﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﱂ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﲢﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ )‪ (Réaction‬ﺇﱃ ﻛﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫)‪(13‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ )‪(Pro- action‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺃﺣﺪﺛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺟﺬﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﻘﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻧﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻳﻘﲔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻱ ﳜﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻳﻘﲔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﳜﺺ ﳏﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻫﺎ )‪ .(14‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺎ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻛﺎﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﲔ ﺟﺪﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﲢﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﲑﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺟﻨﱯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ)‪.(15‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﺐ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﲟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﺁﺛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )‪ (VAN‬ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﲝﻴﺔ )‪ (TIR‬ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫)‪ ،(Période de remboursement‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻄﺪﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ‬ ‫ﳚﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﻧﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻭﺇﱃ ﺃﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ؟‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭ‪‬ﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻭﺍﶈﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺖ ﻣﻬﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﳏﻴﻄﻬﺎ( )‪.(16‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻘﲔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﳌﺎ ﺗﻜﻠﻤﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻫﺪﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻲ ﻭﻏﲑﳘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻴﺎﹰ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳍﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺑﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﳍﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ SWOT‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﱪﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(02‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﲟﺠﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻭﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﲑ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﳒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﰲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪210‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻷﺻﻮﻟﻪ ﻭﺧﺼﻮﻣﻪ ﻭﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﳝﺜﻼﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -V‬ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲣﺪﻡ ﺧﻄﻂ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻒ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﳒﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺘﲔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺘﲔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻨﺎﻉ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺪﻋﻮﻯ ﺳﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ‪ :‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﱪﺍﺀ ﺫﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﳑﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺿﻌﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺒﲑﹰﺍ ﻭﻋﻤﺮﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻮﱃ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﲞﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺻﻐﲑ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺘﻪ ﺿﺌﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻄﺒﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ)‪.(17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﻗﺪ ﳒﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺸﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﲢﻘﻖ ﳒﺎﺣﺎﹰ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎﹰ ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺿﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﺩﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ )‪:(18‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺛﻐﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﹰ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬

‫‪211‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﲢﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﲔ ﺟﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺨﻢ ﳑﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍﹰ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻌﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻭﻋﻤﻼﺋﻪ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺘﻤﺎﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫـ‪ .‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺰﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪.‬ﺇﻏﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﻄﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﻨﺘﻪ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻼﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺳﻨﺪﺕ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺁﻧﺬﺍﻙ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ )‪ ،(1962‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ )‪،(1970‬‬ ‫ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ )‪ ،(1979‬ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ )‪ .(1987‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺋﺺ ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﻼﺀﻡ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻨﺤﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﲔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺟﻌﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﳑﺎ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ)‪ .(19‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻴﺰﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﳋﺰﻳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﲟﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺍ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺇﱃ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،12/93‬ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ 03/01‬ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺒﺜﻘﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﳉﻨﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻃﲔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﻣﺎ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﺟﻢ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﳒﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺻﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﳎﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﺷﻴﺪﺓ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻻ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍﺀﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻘﲔ ﻭﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳔﻠﺺ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪212‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫‪-‬‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳒﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻪ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺭﺑﺢ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻛﻜﻞ ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﺘﻨﻔﻪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﲟﺤﻴﻂ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪﻭ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻛﻤﺔ ﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﳚﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺗﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺀﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻔﻮﺗﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻵﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺟﺘﺬﺍﺏ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‬‫ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲣﺪﻡ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ ﳑﻦ ﳍﻢ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﺪﺛﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺲ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳚﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺫﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﺼﺎﺣﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﰲ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪213‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ : (01‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‬

‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻌﲑﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆ ﺑﺎﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬

‫ﺍﻵﻻﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻭﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ‬

‫ﻃﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻛﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻴﺤﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺧﻠﻖ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬

‫ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‬

‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬

‫ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬

‫ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺎ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،1998 ،‬ﺹ ‪.23‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﻏﻨﻴﻢ‪" ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫‪214‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ : (02‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ )ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪(SWOT‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ‬

‫ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ ﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﻄﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻒ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﲝﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﻠـﺐ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﳐﺮﺟـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ‪STRENGTHS‬‬

‫‪ OPPORTUNITIES‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ‪THREATS‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ ‪WEAKNESSES‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﻏﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.17‬‬

‫‪215‬‬

‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺭﰊ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺭﰊ‪" ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﱵ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺼـﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴـﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺸـﺄﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،2002‬ﺹ ‪.107‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺴﻲ‪" ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ ،2003‬ﺹ ‪.19‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ‪" ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳـﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻴـﺔ‪" ،‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒـﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ ‪ ،2000‬ﺹ ‪.26-25‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﻏﻨﻴﻢ‪" ،‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪،2002‬‬ ‫ﺹ ‪.10‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻄﻴﺔ‪" ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،"BOT‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴـﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،2000‬ﺹ ‪.14-13‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.28-27‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺭﰊ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺭﰊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.110-109‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺼﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺷﻠﻮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺑﺮ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ‪" ،‬ﺃﺳﺲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺸـﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴـﺔ"‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ ‪ ،1996‬ﺹ ‪.26‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.26-25‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻃﻼﻝ ﻛﺪﺍﻭﻱ‪" ،‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺯﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ ‪ ،2008‬ﺹ ‪.32-31‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﳛﲕ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﲏ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪" ،‬ﺃﺳﺲ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳـﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﺸـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳـﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،2003‬ﺹ ‪.31‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ﻟﺴﻠﻮﺱ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﻙ‪" ،‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ"‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ‪ ،2003‬ﺹ ‪.05‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺣﲑﺵ‪" ،‬ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﳊﺼﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﲝﺜﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺒﻴـﺔ ﺣـﻮﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻐﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺳﻄﻴﻒ ‪ 28/25‬ﻣـﺎﻱ ‪ ،2003‬ﺹ‬ ‫‪.03‬‬ ‫‪ALAIN Spalanzani, "Précis de gestion industrielle et de production", office des publications -14‬‬ ‫‪universitaires, 1994, p 19-20.‬‬

‫‪-15‬‬ ‫‪-16‬‬ ‫‪-17‬‬ ‫‪-18‬‬ ‫‪-19‬‬

‫ﺃﲪﺪ ﻏﻨﻴﻢ‪" ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﹰﺎ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺎﹰ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ ،1998‬ﺹ ‪.20‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺣﲑﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.04‬‬ ‫ﻃﻼﻝ ﻛﺪﺍﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.34-33‬‬ ‫ﺃﲪﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﲰﻴﺔ ﺷﻠﱯ‪" ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ ﻭﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻯ"‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ ‪ ،2005‬ﺹ ‪.207-200‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺒﺶ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﺮ ﺇﳍﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﲰﻴﺔ‪" ،‬ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﲝﺜﻴـﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣـﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺣﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻴﻠﺔ‪ 15 ،14 ،‬ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻞ ‪ ،2009‬ﺹ ‪.20-19‬‬

‫‪216‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﹰ ﳌﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﺴﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳍﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺃﹸﺳﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﳛﻈﻰ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺄﳘﻴﺔ ﻛﱪﻯ ﰲ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﺎﻝ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﲔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺪﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﺃﻻ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻜﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺎ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﲑ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺀ؛ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﹸﺘّﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺳﲔ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻲ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﻏﻢ ﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ؛ ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺒﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻛﺎﺗﺐ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺋﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﹸﺘﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗُﻨْﺠﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻤﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ؛ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﻬﻮ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﲎ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﲟﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ ﻫﺎﻣﲔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﳉﻮﻫﺮﻱ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‪ :‬ﻫﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ؟‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺣﻈﻲ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1-1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺧﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﳏﺪﺩ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘّﺎﺏ ﺃﻋﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﻳﻦ ّ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ) ﺃﻱ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ( ﰲ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻪ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺫﻫﺐ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺧﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻻ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻱ ﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ )‪(To Perform‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﹸﺷْﺘﻘﺖْ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ )‪ ، (Performer‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪217‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬

‫_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺴﻌﻨﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﹸﺘﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺤﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ُﻳ ّ‬ ‫‪ -1.1.1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ : (A.Kherakhem‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ":‬ﺗﺄﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺮﺓ"‪ 2.‬ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﺘﺠﺴﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﻤﺎﺕ ﲟﺎ ﳛﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2.1.1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ : (D. Kaisergruber et J. handrieu‬ﻳﻌﱪ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺒﲔ ﻋﻦ‪ ":‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﲔ"‪ 3.‬ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﹶﺒﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻸﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3.1.1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ : (Miller et Bromily‬ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺒﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ":‬ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﳍﺎ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﲡﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ"‪ 4.‬ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻮ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﲔ ﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ) ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻌﲏ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﺸﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻜﻤﻦ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳُﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺷﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺃﻱ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻋﻘﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4.1.1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ : (Ph. LORRINO‬ﻳَﻌْﺘﱪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‪ ":‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﻕ )‪(V‬‬ ‫ﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗ ْ‬ ‫ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ )‪ ،(Ci‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ) ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ( ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ُ ،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺭﺑﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺮﺟﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺟﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﻬﻢ ‪‬ﺎﻣﺶ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ"‪ 6.‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ = ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ‪ -‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ‪ ، Max [V - Somme (Ci)] :‬ﺃﻱ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺠﺴﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ -‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ُﺗﻌﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ )ﺃﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﱠﰎ ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ؛ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺝ) ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ -‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ( ﺗﻌﱪ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪):‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ -‬ﺳﻌﺮ(‪) ،‬ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺔ‪ -‬ﺳﻌﺮ(‪) ،‬ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ -‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ ) ،‬ﱡﲤﻴﺰ‪ -‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5.1.1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ : (P. DRUKER‬ﻳﻨﻈﺮ" ﺩﺭﺍﻛﺮ" ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ":‬ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﳏﻘﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ"‪ 7.‬ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳍﺪﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺄﺓ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺴﺮﺓ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ َﻳﻌﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ؛ ﺇﺫﺍﹰ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪218‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -1.2‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ؛ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﳍﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻙ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻈﺎﻫﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻛﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2.2‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺪﻯ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻷﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻓﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺘﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﺠﻠﻰ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﰲ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺮﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﳘﻠﺖ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﰲ ﺃﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﲟﺪﻯ ﺗﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ُﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﱪﺓ ُ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ) ﺻﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻣﺎﺕ‪... ،‬ﺍﱁ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﲔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﲔ ﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﰲ ﺗﺴﻴﲑﻫﺎ؛ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1.3‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ : (Efficience, Effectiveness‬ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺮﺓ‪ 9.‬ﻭﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻋﺘﱪ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ‪ -‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﻢ‪-‬ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1.1.3‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ : (Vincent plauchet‬ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‪ ":‬ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻘﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻘﺒﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2.1.3‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ : (Walker et Ruibert‬ﺗﺼﺐ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺒﲔ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﺎﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺒﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺠﺴﺪ ﰲ‪ ":‬ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪....‬ﺍﱁ"‪ 12.‬ﺇﺫﺍﹰ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﲏ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲟﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫__________________________‬ ‫× ‪100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ =‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‬

‫‪219‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬

‫_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ) ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ( ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ) ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺮﺓ( ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3.1.3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ‪:‬‬‫‪Rm‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ( =‬ ‫‪Rp‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬

‫ ‪ :Rm‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ :Rp‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬

‫ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺒﲎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ‪:‬‬‫‪Mm‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ)ﻧﺴﺒﺔ( =‬ ‫‪Mp‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬

‫‪ : Mm‬ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ :Mp‬ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2.3‬ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ )‪ : (Efficacité, Efficiency‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺷﺄﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﻼ ﻏﺮﺍﺑﺔ ﹾ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﲔ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﻴﺔ‪...،‬ﺍﱁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻨﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1.2.3‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ : (Wellber et Ruekertsz‬ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻫﻲ‪ ":‬ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ "‪ 14.‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﲎ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2.2.3‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ : (Vincent plauchet‬ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻫﻲ‪ ":‬ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﻒﺀ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ"‪ 15.‬ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ﺗﺪﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ) ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‪ ":‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﺭ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺻﻔﺔ ﻣﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳌﺪﺧﻼ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﲟﺨﺮﺟﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﻋﻘﻼﱐ ﻭﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺰﺝ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‪ ":‬ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻧﻈﲑ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ‬

‫‪220‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺑﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﲨﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﲤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ) ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ -‬ﺗﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗُﻌَﺮﱠﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‪ ":‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﰲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ "‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻏﲑ ﻛﻔﺄﺓ ﻟﻮ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻄﻠﺒﺖْ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ؛ ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﲝﺠﻢ ﻣﺪﺧﻼ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻴﲑﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪....‬ﺍﱁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺗﻌﲏ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﺧﺮ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﲟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺑﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3.2.3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫‪Rm‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ( =‬ ‫‪Mr‬‬

‫= ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬

‫ ‪ : Rm‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ )ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ : Mr‬ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ( ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ) ﻧﺴﺒﺔ( =‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬

‫‪Rp‬‬ ‫‪Mp‬‬

‫‪ :Rp‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺒﺄ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Mp‬ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺒﺄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺒﺄ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﰲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻋﺮﻑ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﹰ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻﺗﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﻳﺎ ﻟﱪﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻴﺰﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﻓﻌﺎﹰ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﺠﺴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ) ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ( ﻟﻠﻤﻔﻜﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻬﻨﺪﺱ) ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻮﺭ( ﺭﺍﺋﺪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ"‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ"‪.‬‬

‫‪221‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬

‫_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﻑ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﰲ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺪﻻﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻟﻸﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻛﺂﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻃﺮﻕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﰎﱠ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻬﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻛﻌﻠﻢ ﻭﻓﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ) ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ(؛ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﺮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﰲ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ؛ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﱂ ﻳﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ْ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳊﻖ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺘﺒﲔ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﻟﻴﺸﻤﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺮ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (01‬؛ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﲤﺜﹼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻴﺸﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ) ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﱪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻌﲏ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻇﻞ‬ ‫ﺑـ)‪ ،(Shareholder value‬ﻟﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺎﱀ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ)ﻣﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪...‬ﺍﱁ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑـ)‪.(Stakholder value‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﰲ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﲣﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﻨﺒﺆ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﱘ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‪ ":‬ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ"‪ 23.‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﻧﺎ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻛـ" ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ " ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‪ ":‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﻴﱢﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺒﺬﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﻘﻘﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ"‪ 24.‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺔ) ﺃﻱ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ(؛‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻢ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ) ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ " ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ"‪ .‬ﺇﺫﻥ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥﱠ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ‪ 25:‬ﲣﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﲤﻜﲔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺗﲔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﻇﻒ ﻭﻣﺸﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﲔ ﻟﻸﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ ﺇﳒﺎﺯﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫‪222‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﲨﻴﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺪﺭﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﻇﻔﲔ‪ 26.‬ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﱠﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ) ‪Very‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(Extraordinary performance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯ )‪ ،(Outstanding performance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ ،(Good performance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ )‪ ،(Good performance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺪﻝ )‪ ،(Fair performance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ ) ‪Weak‬‬ ‫‪ ،(performance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺯﻡ )‪.(Crisis performance‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺒﲏ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﻧﺸﺌﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻫﻮ ﺳﺪ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ؛ ﻭﺳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ ﳏﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺳﻠﱯ ﻭﻫﻮ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻴﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹸﺃﻋﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ) ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻭﺡ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻤﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺋﺪﺍﹰ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﺎﹰ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﻘﻘﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺩﻓﻌﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ُﺗﻌﱪ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺃﺩﻕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗَﺴْﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺀﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻘﻘﺘﻪ ﰲ ﻣﺴﲑ‪‬ﺎ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﻭ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺃ؛ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ؛ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﳚﺎﺯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺋﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ)ﺭﺑﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﹰ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻﹰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﰲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻜﻠﻔﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳘﺎﳍﺎ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ)‪ (Stakholder value‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ؛ ﻭﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﰎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻼﺀﻡ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﲡﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﺰﺍﻭﺝ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﹰ‬ ‫ﻷﳘﻴﺘﻪ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﶈﻘﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻲ ؛ ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1.7‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ )‪ : (Balanced scorecard‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ) ﻭﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻭﻧﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺃﻥ ﳒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ‪ -‬ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ) ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪... ،‬ﺍﱁ(‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1990‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﺮﺭﺕ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ) ‪ ( Nolan Norton‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﹸﻋﺪﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ) ‪ ،( KPMG‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﻗﺖ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪223‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬

‫_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﳉﻨﺴﻴﺎﺕ؛ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺍﺗﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ" ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ" ﳑﺎ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﺖ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻤﻦ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻌﺎﻝ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ 29.‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﻴّﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ) ﻧﻮﺭﺗﻦ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻠﻦ‪ ( Norton et Kaplan -‬ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻜﻞ؛‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺒﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ؛‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻇﻔﲔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﳑﺘﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2.7‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ )‪ : (Tableau de Bord‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺟﺬﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻛﱪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻮﺩ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1980‬ﺑﻔﺮﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺮﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪ :‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻲ‪ ":‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﲡﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﲔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺎﺭﺳﻮﻧﻪ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﲔ ﲟﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﳓﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﲟﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﲤﻨﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﺑﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﲡﲏ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻷﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﲔ‪.‬‬‫ ﲤﻜﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻮ ﲝﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺮﺃﺳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﰲ‬‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3.7‬ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ‪ :‬ﱂ ﻳﻜﺘﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﲟﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻓﺈﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ) ‪ Philppe crapart‬ﻭ‪ (clarck Rod‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ" ‪ " Centralisés Les Mesures‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖْ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻮ ﰎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﲢﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﰲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‪:‬‬

‫‪224‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻵﺟﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫____________________________________ × ‪100‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﹸﺘﻨﺒﺄ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫) ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﹸﻘﺪﱠﺭ – ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ(‬ ‫__________________________ × ‪100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﹸﺘﻨﺒﺄ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻭﺗﻠﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺫﺍﻙ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﻠﺒﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻵﺟﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻵﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺟﺎﻝ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫_____________________________‬ ‫× ‪100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﰎ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ؛ ﻭﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﱵ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺗﺴﻄﲑﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺰﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫________________________________________________‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﺍﳒﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺰﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫× ‪100‬‬

‫___________________________________________________‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪225‬‬

‫× ‪100‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬

‫_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳُﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ‬

‫________________________________ × ‪100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﹸﺘﱠﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﺍﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﻬﻮ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳُﻌﺪُ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻤﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ) ﺃﻱ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ (‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻤﻠﺤﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﻭﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(01‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬

‫)ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺎﻝ(‬

‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ(‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬

‫ﲢﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬

‫‪Source : Françoise Giroud et autres, contrôle de gestion et pilotage de la performance, 2eme édition,‬‬ ‫‪Gualino éditeur, Paris, 2004, p 65.‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪. Ecosid « dialogues autour de la performance en entreprise », édition harmattan, Paris, 1999, p18.‬‬ ‫‪. Hamadouche Ahmed, Critères de mesure de performance des entreprises publiques industrielles dans les P.V.D ,‬‬ ‫‪Thèse de doctorat d’état, institut de sciences économiques- Université d’Alger( 1992), p 135.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪. Danielle Kaisergruber et josee landrieu, Tout n’est pas économique , édition l’aube, Paris, 2000, p 119.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﳊﺴﲔ ﻓﻼﺡ ﺣﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،2000 :‬ﺹ ‪.231‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪. B. Doriath, contrôle de gestion, Dunod, Paris :1999, P125.‬‬ ‫‪. Ph. Lorrino, comptes et récits de la performance, Editions d’organisations, Paris, 1996, p p 47- 48.‬‬

‫‪226‬‬

‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010 - 2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪. P. Druker, l’avenir du management selon Druker, Editions village mondial, Paris,1999, p73.‬‬ ‫‪. Yves Simon et Patriche joffre, encyclopédie de gestion , 2eme édition, Economica, 1997, p 220.‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪. B. Dervaux, A . Coulaud, dictionnaires du management et de contrôle de gestion, 2eme édition, dunod, Paris, 1999,‬‬ ‫‪p78.‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪. Ibid, p 66.‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪. Vincent plauchet, mesure et amélioration des performances industrielles, tome 2 UPMF, France, 2006, p6.‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪. Jean- emile denis et autres, orientation marche et performance , www.orient.fr, consulté le : 27-03-2009, p11.‬‬ ‫‪ .13‬ﳏﻔﻮﻅ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.71‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬

‫‪14‬‬

‫‪. Jean- emile denis et autres, Op.cit, p11.‬‬ ‫‪. Vincent plauchet, Op-cit, 2006, p7.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬

‫‪ .16‬ﺣﺴﻦ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪ ،2005 ،‬ﺹ ‪.41‬‬ ‫‪ .17‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ‪ " ،‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴـﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،2001 ،‬ﺹ ‪.6‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬

‫‪. M.J. KORICHI, Measuring economic efficiency in manufacturing industry : a case study of electricity in Algeria‬‬ ‫‪and some other countries( 1974-1983),London, 1988, P.1.‬‬ ‫‪ .19‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺦ‪،‬ﳓﻮ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﲰﻨﺖ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﲣﺼﺺ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻴﲑ‪،‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،1999،‬ﺹ‪.4‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫‪. B. Dervaux, A. Coulaud, Op- cit, p78.‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪. Françoise Giroud et autres, contrôle de gestion et pilotage de la performance , 2eme édition, Gualino éditeur, Paris,‬‬ ‫‪2004, p65.‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪. Ibid , p72.‬‬

‫‪ .23‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺗﻴﺸﻮﺭﻱ‪ " ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻪ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑﻩ"‪.( , consulté le : 02/03/2009WWW.ahwar.org ) ،‬‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﻋﺎﺩﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ ‪.239‬‬ ‫‪ .25‬ﻳﺮﻗﻲ ﺣﺴﲔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻮﻧﺎﻃﺮﺍﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﲣﺼﺺ ﺗﺴـﻴﲑ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،2008 ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.194-193‬‬ ‫‪ .26‬ﺭﻭﺑﺮﺕ ﺑﻜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺳﻰ ﻳﻮﻧﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،1999 ،‬ﺹ ‪.26‬‬ ‫‪ 27‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﲏ ﲪﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺻﺒﺤﻲ ﺇﺩﺭﻳﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺯﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸـﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳـﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،2007 ،‬ﺹ ﺹ‪.386-385‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬

‫‪. Gregory Denglos, la création de valeur, édition Dunod, Paris, 2003, p67.‬‬

‫‪ .29‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﻳﻮﺳﻒ‪ " ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺀ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،2005 ،‬ﺹ ‪.126‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬

‫‪. Françoise Giroud et autres ,Op.cit, p 105.‬‬ ‫‪. Ibid , p 105.‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪. R.chark, et autres, 7 mesures de performance, édition, Afnor, Paris, 2004, pp 26-30.‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬

‫‪227‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺎﺫ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺝ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﳌﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﻥ ﺣﻴﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﲨﻴﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﲔ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺴﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻠﻄﺘﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﺗﺪﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ( ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ )ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ( ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻻﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺘﲔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ؟‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﲣﺼﺺ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﱯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﳘﺎ ؟ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻻ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻛﻔﺎﺀ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺠﺴﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺣﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻤﻨﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻪ ﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﲞﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻳﻨﺪﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻻ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﻘﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳍﺮﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﲏ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﱂ ﺗﺄﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺇﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﲣﻠﻖ ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﻘﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻪ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺘﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﻓﻌﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ )ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻄﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ؛‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ؛‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ؛‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺘﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ؛‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1-1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ’’‪ “Authority‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‪ " :‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻨﺢ ﺍﳊﻖ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﺳﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺅﻭﺳﲔ‪،‬‬‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﺘﺜﺎﳍﻢ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻜﻠﻔﲔ ‪‬ﺎ "‪.‬‬

‫‪229‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ " ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬‫ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﻀﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﳛﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳍﺎ "‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ " ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻲ ﲝﻜﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﻬﻢ ‪‬ﺎ "‪.‬‬‫ " ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﳊﻖ ﰲ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻭﺇﲣﺎﺫ‬‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ "‪.‬‬ ‫ " ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺇﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﳛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻨﺢ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﳍﺎ ﻭﻃﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﻓﻘﻬﺎ "‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﻭﺯﻱ ’’‪ 6“M.Crosier‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﲔ ﺑﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﲑﻭﻗﺮﺍﻃﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻖ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻛﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺃﻥ ﳛﻠﻞ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﲡﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﲝﺜﲔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻓﻴﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺻﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺻﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﳍﺮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻛﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺗﺒﲏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻚ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻪ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺘﻨﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﻖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺗﺼﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻘﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳊﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-1‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪ :7‬ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻣﺎ ﳕﺎﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﻘﺼﺪ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﲣﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﺟﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺒﻞ ﺭﺃﻱ ﺍﶈﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﺷﺮﻃﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺎ ﻓﻨﻘﺒﻠﻪ‪...‬ﺇﱁ‪ .‬ﻭﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺤﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻧﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﻔﻬﻢ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﳕﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﳛﺪﺙ ﰲ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺑﲔ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﳑﺎ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻓﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﻳﲔ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻭﻥ‪.‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺨﺬﻫﺎ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﳏﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺨﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﺄﰐ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻠﻢ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﳚﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪230‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -1-2‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪" : Line Authority :‬ﺗﺸﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﻭﻣﺮﺅﻭﺳﻴﻪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻼ ﳝﻠﻚ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻯ ﺷﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻐﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺅﻭﺳﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﳝﺘﻠﻚ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺅﻭﺳﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪...‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪".‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺅﻭﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﺍﳊﻖ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺅﻭﺳﻴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻭﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ’’‪ “Line Function‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻠﻪ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ .9‬ﻭﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻳﺪ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺑﺘﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺭﺅﺳﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﲤﺎﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﺳﺎﺀ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﳍﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-2‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪" : Staff Authority :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺢ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻠﻚ ﺍﳊﻖ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﲔ"‪ .11‬ﻓﺄﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻢ ﻻ ﳝﺘﻠﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﳍﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺃﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆ‪ ،‬ﻭﲟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﺘﻠﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﳝﺘﻠﻚ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻟﻮﻥ ﺭﺋﺎﺳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃ‪‬ﻢ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .12‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﲔ ﳘﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻨﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ : 13Personal Staff :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺮﻕ ﺗﻔﺮﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻌﺒﲑﻱ )ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺎﺋﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻷﻭﻝ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻪ ﻭﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺟﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﳛﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﳒﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻨﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﳏﺪﺩ ﻭﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﻨﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﳏﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪.‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺭﻭﺗﲏ ﰲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺽ ﰲ ﺻﻔﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﳑﺜﻼ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺮﺋﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﳑﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﳛﺪﺩﻩ ﻟﻪ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﳏﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺎ ﻭﳊﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺑﻞ ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﳑﺜﻼ ﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﺎﺋﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺇﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺎ ﺑﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪231‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ ،(01‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺎﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﺎﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﳛﻞ ﳏﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﳊﻖ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﳛﻞ‬ ‫ﳏﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﻖ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﺪﺩ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺄﻟﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻻ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﲟﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﱃ ﻧﺎﺋﺒﻪ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪ : 14Specialized Staff :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﲣﺼﺼﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﳒﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺎﺭﺳﻮ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﰲ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﲞﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺑﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲟﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﳝﺎﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﻣﺜﻼ(‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺟﻼﻝ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺪ‪ 15‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺷﻜﻠﲔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﲔ ﳘﺎ‪ :‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ’’‪ “Advises‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﱴ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﺭﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳝﻠﻚ ﺍﳊﻖ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﲡﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ’’‪“Compuisory Advises‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺎﱄ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻳﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳋﱪﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﲔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺪﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺭﺃﻳﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-2‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‪ : Functional Authority :‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ‪" :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﻟﺔ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺄﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ‪ 16".‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺅﺳﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ؛ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﰲ ﻧﻮﺍﺡ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻟﻨﺎ ﳌﺎﺫﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﺳﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻔﻮﺽ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .17‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺰﺍﻭﳍﺎ ﺭﺅﺳﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬

‫‪232‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻮﻥ ﺧﱪﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﺍﺡ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺳﻠﺒﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﻄﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﲜﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﲣﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺭﻗﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻔﻘﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ( ﲢﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﰲ ﻧﻮﺍﺡ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺿﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﰲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﻢ ﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻮﺣﺪ ﲡﺎﻫﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻮ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﱪﺍﺀ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻌﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻚ ﰲ ﺇﺧﻀﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺒﲑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳊﻜﻤﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻮ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ :‬ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺣﺼﺮ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳏﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻷﺩﰊ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺳﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺍﺡ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺆﻭﻥ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺆﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ ﰲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻏﲎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﲨﻴﻌﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﺒﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻧﺎﺟﺤﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﳒﺪﻩ ﰲ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.(02‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺐ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ‪: 18‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪...‬ﻳﻘﺮﺭ‪...‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪...‬ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪...‬ﻳﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪...‬ﳛﺪﺩ‪...‬ﻳﻨﺴﻖ‪...‬ﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪...‬ﻳﺮﺍﻗﺐ‪...‬ﻳﻌﻘﺪ ﺇﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻭﳏﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺎ ﰒ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻊ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚﻤﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﳒﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪...‬ﺇﱁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﻭﺗﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﻭﺻﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀﻫﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺳﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﲑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪233‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎﻛﺲ ﻓﻴﲑ ’’‪ “Max Weber‬ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﳌﺎﱐ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﺘﻨﻊ ﺑﺎﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻩ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ : Traditional Authority :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺘﻠﻬﺎ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﺰﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ‪ : Charismatic Authority :‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﺰﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻄﻞ ﺫﻭ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﺰﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﺃﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻋﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﻴﺪﺓ‪ : Rational Authority :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﺐ ﻻ ﰲ ﺷﺎﻏﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﺼﺐ ﺃﻥ ﳝﺎﺭﺳﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1-3‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﻱ ﻷﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺠﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﳝﻪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺠﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻭﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﱪﺯ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﱂ ﺗﺒﻖ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﳕﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺩﺕ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻬﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﻟﻸﲝﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺮ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﳑﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ .20‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫"ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﰲ ﳕﻂ ﻣﻌﲔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺗﻘﻴﲔ ﻭ ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺣﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ"‪ .21‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ‪" :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻰ‪".‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ )‪ (American Hospital Association‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ‪" :‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻃﱯ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺘﺴﻬﻴﻼﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﲔ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫)‪ ،(Nursing‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺮﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﲔ"‪.23‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺔ )‪ (World Health Organisation‬ﺑﺄﻧﻪ‪" :‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺇﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻃﱯ ﺗﺘﻠﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲤﺘﺪ ﻋﻴﺎﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺇﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ‪ 24 ".‬؛ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﰲ‬

‫‪234‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﺔ )ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﺮﺍﺣﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-3‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻫﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻘﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﺔ‪...‬ﺗﺴﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﻫﺪﻓﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﺕ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻴﺰﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻏﲑﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻳﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﻪ ﻣﻌﻘﺪﺓ ﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺲ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻲ ﻭﺟﺴﺪﻱ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﳑﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﰲ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻃﻒ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﲏ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﳚﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺑﺈﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﱯ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﰲ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﳌﻬﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻀﺎﻓﺮ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﻌﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺘﺤﻖ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﳌﻤﺮﺿﺔ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﺖ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﻫﻼ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﻃﺒﻘﻴﺎ ﻳﺜﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄـﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳـﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﲑ ﺍﳊﺴﻦ ﳌﺼﺎﳊﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ 26.‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺸﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺘﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﲣﻮﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺍﳊﻖ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺻﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﺳﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺅﻭﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳜﻀﻌﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺑﺪﻭ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﲝﻖ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﰲ ﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺣﻖ ﳜﻮﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪" .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﻭﺗﺴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪".‬‬

‫‪235‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺳﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﻴﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﻜﺎﻓﺌﺘﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻘﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻴﻪ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﳕﻄﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻭﳘﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1-4‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳـﺔ‪ : 28‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻮﱃ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﺆﻭ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﱐ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺟﻞ ﳐﺘﺺ ﰲ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻄﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺧﻀﻌﺖ ﳍﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﲢﺖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-4‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄـﺒﻴﺔ‪ :29‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪.‬ﻭﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﺳﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳉﺮﺍﺣﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺃﺧﺼﺎﺋﻴﲔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻋﻼﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﲑ ﺍﳊﺴﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻄﻲ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺮﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﻭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺅﻭﺳﻮﻩ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﲟﻬﺎﻣﻬﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺮﺅﻭﺳﻴﻪ ﻛﻤﻨﻔﺬﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﻘﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺘﻬﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﻢ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷ‪‬ﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻌﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻮﺍ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺅﻭﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﳎﱪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﻄﺘﻪ ﳌﺮﺅﻭﺳﻴﻪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺒﲎ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌـﺎﻭﻥ ‪ :‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺘﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﻄﺘﻪ ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺯﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺫﺍ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﻛﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﲔ ﺑﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﻳﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺸﲑﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﻖ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺠﺴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﻮﻝ ﳍﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴـﺔ )ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴـﺔ( ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﱪﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﺴﺒﻬﻢ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ )ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺼﺎﺋﻴﲔ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﲔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻌﻮﻥ ﺑﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻧﺴﻤﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ‪ -‬ﺧﻼﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻌﻮﻥ ﺑﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﲰﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻳﺸﻜﻠﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪236‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‪" :‬ﺟﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻬﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﲟﻬﻨﺘﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪".‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﺻﺤﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﱪﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺆﻫﻼ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺮﻑ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﲔ ﳘﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻌﲏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﳍﻢ ﲟﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻛﺈﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﻃﺒﻌﺎ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﳕﺎ ﺗﻌﲏ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬

‫ﻭﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﲔ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﺒﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻓﻴﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺼﺎﺋﻴﲔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﲤﻨﺤﻬﺎ ﳍﻢ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺼﻠﻮﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﻢ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻣﺘﻼﻛﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺇﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﳍﻢ ﺑﺈﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻋﻄﻰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﺍﳊﻖ ﰲ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺳﻠﻄﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺿﺎﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺸﻐﻠﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻫﻴﻞ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺮﻑ ﳍﻢ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﲡﻌﻠﻬﻢ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻌﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺆﺛﺮﻭﻥ ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻪ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺃﻫﻞ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﳘﻴﺘﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﺧﻼ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﳌﻬﲏ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻔﻜﲑ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻬﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻨﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﳌﻬﲏ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻋﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳜﻄﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻷﺧﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﻠﻪ ﲝﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻴﺴﲑﻭﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﻢ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻮﺍ ﻃﺮﻗﻬﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻠﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻌﻤﻠﻮﺍ ﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻌﻬﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺒﻬﻢ ﻭﺧﻄﻮﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﺎﻭﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻷ‪‬ﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﻌﺮﻭﺍ ﺃ‪‬ﻢ ﻣﺴﲑﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻴﺪﻭﻥ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻬﺎﻣﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺼﺎﺋﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﲔ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺼﺎﺋﻴﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﻢ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﲝﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺘﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻫﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 106-91‬ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪108-91‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﻫﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﻐﻞ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬

‫‪35‬‬

‫‪ -1-6‬ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 18‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،108-91‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻢ ﻣﻜﻠﻔﻮﻥ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪237‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﲑ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﳌﻌﻤﻮﻝ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻳﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﲟﺠﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﻢ ﻭﺇﳒﺎﺯﻩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﲟﻬﺎﻡ ﺇﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺇﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﲟﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺶ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 28‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ )‪ ،(108-91‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻈﺒﺎﻁ ﻭﳝﺎﺭﺳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﲔ ﲢﺖ ﺳﻠﻄﺘﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 37 466-97‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻵﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﳜﺺ ﻧﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻜﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻜﻠﻒ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻜﻠﻒ ﺑﺈﺑﺮﺍﻡ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﻣﻀﺎﺋﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻪ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﻳﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﺮﻯ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺟﻞ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﲟﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ‪ 22 ،21 ،20 ،19‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.(108-91‬‬ ‫‪ -2-6‬ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﲔ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﺎﺭﺳﻮﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﻣﻬﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،106-91‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﻮﻥ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﳌﺪﺍﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﲢﺖ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﳌﻤﺎﺭﺱ ﻃﱯ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﳐﺘﺺ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ‬‫ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﳜﻀﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﱯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺺ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ )‪،20 ،19 ،18‬‬ ‫‪ (21‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .106-91‬ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺗﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺿﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﲔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﲔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﻣﻬﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ (57 ،56 ،55 ،24 ،23 ،22‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.106-91‬‬

‫‪238‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻮﺍﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺑﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺇﻛﺘﺴﺒﻮﻫﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻼ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﻢ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 466-97‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻫﻴﻜﻼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ )ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،(03‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺆﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ؛ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ؛ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﺮﻗﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺒﻠﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﱯ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﻨﺎﻗﺸﺘﻬﺎ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﻫﻞ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﺐ ﺃﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻱ؟ ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺣﻮﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﺩﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﳍﺎ ﺍﻵﺭ ﺍﺀ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺒﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺠﺘﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪:‬‬‫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﲡﺎﻭﺑﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻗﻨﺎﻋﻬﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺒﻴﺐ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺄﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﱯ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﳝﻴﻠﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﻬﻢ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﻢ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻘﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟـﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺣﺠﺘﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪:‬‬‫ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﲔ )ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ( ﳚﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﺮﺻﺘﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﱯ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻌﻠﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪39‬‬

‫ﻭﳓﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺘﻨﺎ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺪﻯ ‪ -‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ -‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﲟﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺰﺯﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻬﻢ ﺣﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﳛﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺧﱪﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻜﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪239‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻤﻠﺤﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﻭﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ : (01‬ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻨﺎﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،353‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ : (02‬ﻣﺰﺍﻳـﺎ ﻭﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌـﻴﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﳌـﺰﺍﻳﺎ‬ ‫ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺐﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺑﺴﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ ‪ -‬ﳝﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺳﻠﻄﺘﻬﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﱪﺍ‪‬ﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﲔ ﳊﺪﻭﺩﻫﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ ﺻﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﺬﻳﲔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﲔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﲣﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺐﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﲔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻏﺎﻣﺾ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﲣﻔﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺐﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﲔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﺮ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.96‬‬

‫‪240‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(03‬ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﺕ – ﻭﻻﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﻮﺅﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﺂﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﺯﻋﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﱀ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪241‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﺲ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻴﺪﻱ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ"‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﻭﻳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،1997 ،‬ﺹ ‪.174‬‬ ‫‪2-Bernoux.p et autres," les nouvelles approches sociologique des organisations",‬‬ ‫‪Ed Seuil, paris, 1996, p 50.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﳏﻤﺪ ‪‬ﺠﺖ ﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﷲ ﻛﺸﻚ‪" ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﺲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ، 2003 ،‬ﺹ‪.225‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻔﺎﺭ ﺣﻨﻔﻲ‪" ،‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،1997 ،‬ﺹ ‪.291‬‬ ‫‪-5‬ﻓﺎﺭﻭﻕ ﻣﺪﺍﺱ‪"،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺳﻴﻮﻣﻬﻨﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ،2001/2000‬ﺹ ‪.48‬‬ ‫‪6-Lafaye.C," la sociologie des organisations", Ed Nathan, Paris, 1996, P 43.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﳏﻤﺪ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻦ‪" ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪،2003 ،‬‬ ‫ﺹ‪.296‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺟﻼﻝ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺪ‪" ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ‬ ‫‪207.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻗﻴﺲ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪196.‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.197‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺩﻱ‪" ،‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.351‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ﺟﻼﻝ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪208.‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪352. ،351‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪354.‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬ﺟﻼﻝ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪209. ،208‬‬ ‫‪ -16‬ﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﻨﻮﺍﱐ‪"،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،1999 ،‬ﺹ ‪.625‬‬ ‫‪ -17‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪625.‬‬ ‫‪ -18‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪96.‬‬ ‫‪ -19‬ﳏﻤﺪ ‪‬ﺠﺖ ﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﷲ ﻛﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪227.‬‬ ‫‪ -20‬ﺑﻮﻣﻌﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﺎﺱ‪" ،‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﳏﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﻔﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻨﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺳﻄﻴﻒ‪ ،2000/1999 ،‬ﺹ ‪.02‬‬ ‫‪ -21‬ﺻﻼﺡ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺫﻳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﲝﺜﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪" :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﲑ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﰲ ﺍﻹﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ 29/27 ،‬ﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ ‪ ،2003‬ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺹ ‪83.‬‬ ‫‪ -22‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﺎﻥ‪" ،‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﱯ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪.1990 ،‬‬ ‫‪ -23‬ﻏﺎﺯﻱ ﻓﺮﺣﺎﻥ‪" ،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،1999 ،‬ﺹ ‪.06‬‬ ‫‪ -24‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.06‬‬ ‫‪ -25‬ﺃﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺳﻴﻒ‪" ،‬ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،1996 ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪15. ،14‬‬

‫‪242‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -26‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﺮ‪" ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،1995 ،‬ﺹ‬ ‫‪.31‬‬ ‫‪ -27‬ﻫﻠﲔ ﺗﻮﻣﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻓﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﺠﲑ‪"،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺳﻲ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ،1990‬ﺹ ‪.40‬‬ ‫‪ -28‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.51‬‬ ‫‪ -29‬ﺣﺴﺎﻥ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻧﺬﻳﺮ ﺣﺮﺳﺘﺎﱐ‪" ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،1990 ،‬ﺹ ‪.63‬‬ ‫‪ -30‬ﻓﺎﺭﻭﻕ ﻣﺪﺍﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.52‬‬ ‫‪31-Bolman. L, "Repensez les Organisations", Ed Maxima, Paris, 1996, P 164.‬‬ ‫‪32-Debonafos.G, "Les Identités Sociales des Techniciens", Information et‬‬ ‫‪Emploi, Revue Trimestrielle, N°56, Ed Centre de Recherche sur la Qualification,‬‬ ‫‪Paris, Octobre 1996, PP 55,56.‬‬ ‫‪33-Sekiou et autres,"Gestion des Ressources Humaines", Deboek, Université de‬‬ ‫‪Canada, 1993, P 390.‬‬ ‫‪ -34‬ﺃﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺳﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.36 ،35‬‬ ‫‪ -35‬ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 106-91‬ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺥ ﰲ ‪ ،1991/04/27‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -36‬ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 108-91‬ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺥ ﰲ ‪ ،1991/04/27‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﲟﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -37‬ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 466-97‬ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺥ ﰲ ‪ ،1997/12/02‬ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﻴﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -38‬ﺃﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺳﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.36 ،35‬‬ ‫‪ -39‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.36 ،35‬‬

‫‪243‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /.‬ﺑﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﻜـﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫـﺎﺏ – ﺃ‪.‬ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺘـﺮﻛـﻲ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ‪ -‬ﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﺖ ﺭﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﲢﻮﻻﺕ ﻋﻤﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺟﺬﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻊ ﴰﻠﺖ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﺤﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺯﺩﻫﺎﺭﻫـﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺑـﺪﺍﻳﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﻴـﺚ ﺃﺛﺒﺘـﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺼﲑ ﺟﺪﺍ )ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ، :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻌﺎﻇﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﺃﺿﺤﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،...،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺛﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﱴ ﺻﺎﺭﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻗﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻴﺎﺯﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻛﺎ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳎﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﲎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲝﻴﺎﺯﺓ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻵﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻻﺯﻣﺔ ﺣﺘﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺩﻓﻊ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺴﺎﺀﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ؟‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺳﻨﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﱃ‪-:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ؛‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‪" :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ – ‪ ،"NTIC‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻮﻣﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﳍﺎ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ)‪.(1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻮﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰒ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺗﺎﺣﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ)‪ .(2‬ﻭﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﱄ ﻓﻬﻤﻲ ﺣﻴﻀﺮ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﻭﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ)‪ .(3‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪245‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳍﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺻﻔﺔ "ﺍﳊﺪﺍﺛﺔ" ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺻﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻌﺪ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﱐ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ Groupe Ware‬ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﲑﻭﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ... Work Flow‬ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ)‪ .(4‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺧﻠﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﻴﺔ‪ ... ،‬ﺃﻱ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺘﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠﺖ ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺷﱴ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲨﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ )ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻘﻬﺎ( ﻭﺧﺰ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ)‪.(5‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ)‪ .(6‬ﺇﺫ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻛﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ)‪ .(7‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ)‪ ،(8‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻧﺼﻮﺹ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪ (...،‬ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺜﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺃﳓﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ )ﻧﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،(... ،‬ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ)‪.(9‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ‪" :‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ" ﻳﻌﺪ ﺃﴰﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ "ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ"‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﻘﺼﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﲎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‪ ICTS :‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﲔ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‪ ،Information :‬ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪،Communication :‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﲎ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﲎ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﻡ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ)‪ ،(10‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺪﺍﻭﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫)‪(11‬‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﻋﲔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫© ﺃﻭﻻ‪ -‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻵﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳒﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ﰲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻵﱄ ﺑﺄﺷﻜﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫© ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ -‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﳝﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪.(Télécommunication‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻵﱄ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ‪-:‬‬ ‫‪ .1-2‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﲞﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺣﻀﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﱂ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﳍﺎ ﻣﺜﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺟﻌﻠﺖ ﲟﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ‪،‬‬

‫‪246‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻜﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻭﺭﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﱪﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﺽ ﺛﻘﺎﻓﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻌﻮﺏ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﲤﺘﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﲤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺁﻓﺎﻗﺎ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻـﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﰲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﲝﻮﺙ ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﰲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﻭﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﻓﻠﻨﺪﺍ ﲝﻮﺙ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗـﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺭﻋﺖ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ )‪.(Euro Media ;Research‬‬ ‫ﻭﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﺕ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻮﻣﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‪ % 18.5 :‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧـﺔ ﺑﺎﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ - % 23 :‬ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ - % 25 :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ، % 39 :‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻗﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺼـﻐﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﲔ‪ % 49 :‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴـﺔ‪ % 46 ،‬ﰲ ﻛﻨـﺪﺍ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ % 11 :‬ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ ﺑـ‪ % 06 :‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .(17)1997‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ )‪ (B to B‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (01‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪) (02‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(Forrester Research‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻫﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺍﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻜﺜﲑ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲﺀ ﳉﺎﻫﺰﻳـﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺏ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﻴﺲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺷﺮﻛﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﻣﻦ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﲡﻌﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺧﻠﲔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺛﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻃﻤﺌﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﲤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻫـﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﺑﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺖ ﺃﻥ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ ﻛــ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺮﺍﺑﺔ‪ % 80 :‬ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﻒ‪ (B to B) :‬ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ 2006‬ﻭﺍﳌﻘـﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺑـ‪ 12275 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،% 20 :‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﳎﺘﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ‪.% 0.6 :‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﻒ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ )‪ (B to C‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻜﺘـﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ 53 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2000‬ﻭ‪ 96‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2001‬ﻣﻨﻪ‪ 74 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﻻﻳـﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤـﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‪ % 77 :‬ﻭ‪ 169‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2002‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼـﻨﻒ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳝﺜﻞ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪ % 08 :‬ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ‪ % 92 :‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﻒ ‪ B to B‬ﻭﻗـﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻟﻴﺒﻠﻎ‪ 284 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳـﻨﺔ ‪ ،2003‬ﻭ‪ 452‬ﻣﻠﻴـﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2004‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ‪ % 68 :‬ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2003‬ﻭ‪ % 59‬ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2004‬ﻭﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎ ﻃﻔﻴﻔﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﳝﺜﻞ‪ % 07 :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟـﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻮﺽ‪ % 08 :‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ – (18) 2003‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(03‬‬ ‫‪Forrester Research‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻃـﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬـﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﲢﻮﻟﺖ ﺇﱃ‪" :‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ – ‪ "Entreprise Réseau‬ﻭﲢﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺳﲑﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄـﺔ ﲟﺨﺘﻠـﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺑﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫‪247‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ)‪ .(19‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋـﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﳊﺮﻛـﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﱪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ % 60 :‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪ % 09 ،‬ﰲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪ % 27 ،‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ % 05 ،‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗـﻢ‬ ‫)‪.(04‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳝﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﰲ ‪ 1995‬ﺇﱃ‪ 600 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﰲ ‪ ،2000‬ﻟﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﰲ ‪ ،2005‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻮﺗﲑﺓ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺃﻥ‪ % 88 :‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﻌﻴﺸﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﳛﺘﻜﺮ‪ % 70 :‬ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ % 83‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ)‪ .(20‬ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ % 97 :2002‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﲤﻠﻚ ﻛﻮﻣﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ % 83‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ‪ % 38‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﲤﻠﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ % 56‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﲤﻠﻚ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ 3/1‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .(05‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺷـﺮﻛﺔ ‪DELL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻬﲑﺓ ﰲ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻣﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻀﺎﻋﻔﺖ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،1998‬ﻭﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ‪ 14 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1999‬ﻭﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ‪ 19 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ ﲟﺒﻠﻎ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ‪ 5.5 :‬ﺑﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ‪ 30 :‬ﻣﻠﻴـﻮﻥ ﰲ‬ ‫‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ‪) (21)1999‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.(06‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﳚﻤﻊ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،Radio téléphone‬ﻧﻘﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ ،Radio Messagerie‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‪ 35 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺧﻠﻮﻱ( ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘـﻞ ﻣـﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﻘﻄـﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻠﺜﻪ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺑــ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ % 50‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪ .1994 – 1985‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﻓﺮﺿﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ 19‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻼ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻌﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﳍﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﳏﺼﻮﺭ ﰲ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﱰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻜﺘـﺐ ﻧﺰﻟـﺖ ﺑﻘـﻮﺓ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺩﺍﻡ )ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.(02‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻜﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻲ ﲢﺘﻜﺮ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺜﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜـﱪﻯ ﲢﺘﻜـﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻃﻠﻖ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﺋﺔ )‪ (100‬ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ)‪.(22‬‬ ‫‪ .2-2‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺪﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺒﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻭﺻﻮﳍﺎ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ‪‬ﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺯﻉ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ)‪ .(23‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﳍﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺪ ﰲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‪ 10 :‬ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺛﺎﱐ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﱪﺍﻣﺞ )‪،(Logiciels‬‬ ‫ﻭﲨﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻛﺮﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﺎﳌﻲ ﰲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻤﻌﺔ )‪.(Puces‬‬

‫‪248‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻗﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‪ % 2.5 :‬ﰲ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‪% 0.01 :‬‬

‫ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،1997‬ﻭﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1995‬ﻓﻜﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ‪ % 5.62 :‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳـﺖ‪ % 3.5 ،‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤـﺮﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍ‪ % 0.3 :‬ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ % 0.17‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﰒ ‪ % 0.01‬ﰲ ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ)‪ .(24‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ﻭﻣﺼﺮ ﻫـﻲ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﺖ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺣﺮﺯﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠـﻖ ﻣﻨـﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﻮﺽ ﻳﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﰲ ﳎـﺎﻝ ﺗﻄـﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﳋﱪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻫﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴـﺘﻮﻯ ﺷـﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼـﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴـﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺘﻘﻠﺔ )ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻫﺰﻳﻠﺔ()‪ .(25‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻬﻤﺸﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻣـﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻋﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ‪ 1998‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﻟـ‪ 100 :‬ﻧﺴﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻣـﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،13.519 :‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،5.597 :‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،2.013 :‬ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،1.400 :‬ﻋﻤـﺎﻥ‪ ،666 :‬ﳎﻤـﻮﻉ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ )‪ 10‬ﺩﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ(‪.(26)24.024‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2001‬ﻗﺪ ﺑﻠﻎ ﳓﻮ‪ 11.5 :‬ﻣﻠﻴـﻮﻥ ﻣﺴـﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﳓﻮ‪ 22 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﲟﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ‪ 273 :‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳـﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ 42‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻻ‪% 10.2 :‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‪ % 03 :‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﲟﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪ % 2.3 :‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧـﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﻭﲟﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫)‪ 12‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ( ﺑﻨﺤﻮ‪ 07 :‬ﻣﻼﻳﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﲟﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ‪ 597 :‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺮﻭﻟﻴـﺔ )‪ 10‬ﺩﻭﻝ(‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺤﻮ‪ 04 :‬ﻣﻼﻳﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ‪ 372 :‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴـﺔ )‪ 06‬ﺩﻭﻝ( ﺑﻨﺤـﻮ‪ 245 :‬ﺃﻟـﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ‪ 41 :‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﳕﻮ )‪ 14‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ( ﺑﻨﺤﻮ‪ 340 :‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳـﻂ‪24 :‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺩﻭﻝ ﲤﻴﺰﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ 3.700 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺎ‪ 02 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺇﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‪ 02 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ 735 :‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺗﻘﻨﻴـﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﺸـﺎﺭ ﺍﺳـﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ)‪.(27‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﲢﻘﻘﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﳒﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺿﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗـﻪ ﳏـﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻳـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﺴـﺒﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ % 96‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﻤﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﳒﻠﻮﻓﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺗﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺿﺨﻤﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻴﻢ ‪ ...‬ﺇﱁ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻔـﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1999‬ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺒﻠﻎ‪ 1,2 :‬ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻮﻡ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2003‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺟﻠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ)‪) (28‬ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.(03‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‪" :‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ"‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‪ % 05 :‬ﰲ ‪ 24‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‪ % 01 :‬ﰲ ‪ 28‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ )ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ ،(2002/2001‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺪﱐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﲎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻗﻠﺔ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻹﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪ % 50.1 :‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ % 45.5‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ % 40‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ)‪ .(29‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪249‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻭﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻴﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼ ﺑﺬﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ)‪.(30‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻴﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ 2007‬ﳓﻮ‪ 29 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﳓﻮ‪ 330 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﳓﻮ‪ % 8,7 :‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺎﻫﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1997‬ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‪600 :‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﳓﻮ‪ :‬ﲬﺴﻮﻥ ﺿﻌﻔﺎ ﰲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺸﻬﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻨﺒﺌﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳍﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺣﱴ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻓﺪ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻭﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ)‪) (31‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪.(07‬‬ ‫‪(32):‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 370‬ﺻﺤﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﳎﻠﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻴﺔ ﺳﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 400‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪.2007‬‬ ‫ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫‪ %37‬ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﱵ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﳍﻮﺍﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﲬﺴﺔ ﺃﺳﺪﺍﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﰲ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻨﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺿﻌﻔﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻃﻨﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻻ ﳝﻠﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ % 01‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﻜﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﳝﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳌﱰﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ)‪،(33‬‬ ‫ﻭﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﲔ ﻟـ‪ 1000 :‬ﻧﺴﻤﺔ )ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ (1999‬ﳒﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،407 :‬ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪ ،263 :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،249 :‬ﻭﺗﺄﰐ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 12‬ﺑـ‪ ،% 52 :‬ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﺑـ‪% 53 :‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﻧﺲ ﺑـ‪ ،% 90 :‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻦ ﺑـ‪ ،% 17 :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‪ ،% 09 :‬ﻣﻮﺭﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ % 06 :‬ﺑـ‪ 205 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪ 50 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﲝﻈﲑﺓ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪ 12 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‪ 05 :‬ﺧﻂ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟـ‪ 100 :‬ﻧﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ)‪ .(34‬ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (04‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞﹼ ﻣﺌﺔ )‪ (100‬ﺷﺨﺺ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳑﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰒ ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺚ ﺃﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﲨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻜﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻭﺭﺩ ﰲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺮ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﲢﺘﻜﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ 11700 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪12100 :‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪ 235 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ 350 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪250‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻥ ﳚﺎﺩﻝ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺨﺒﻂ ﲢﺖ‬ ‫ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﳑﺎ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﰲ ﲣﻄﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺪﺭﻙ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﰲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺳﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﻔﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺏ)‪.(12‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺣﺘﻠﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺍ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﲑﺍﺩ ﺧﱪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻛﻔﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻖ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻓﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺒﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻞ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻊ ﺣﻀﺎﺭﻳﺎ)‪ .(13‬ﻓﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﳏﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﺘﻪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺧﺼﺖ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﰲ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺗﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ)‪.(14‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﻭﺇﻓﺮﺍﺯ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﲰﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﱐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﲏ ﺳﻴﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﲡﱪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﳉﻨﺴﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﲏ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﲑ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﻭﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻼﻣﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﲏ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻹﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﲰﺎﱄ ﻳﺴﻴﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‪ ،% 90 :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ % 38 :‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ )ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،% 2 :‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(01‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻭﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﳒﺎﻋﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺳﻮﻗﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺎ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺪ ﳏﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺴﺎﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳕﻮ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻻ ﲤﺘﻠﻚ ﻣﻘﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﺴﻊ ﺍﳍﻮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻜﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻨﺬ ﺯﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﺌﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪251‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﰎ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻃﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺼﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍﺀﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﻤﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻼﻋﺐ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺴﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳋﻮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﰎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺪﻫﺎ)‪.(15‬‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺩﺧﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻘﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻓﺠﻮﺍﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫© ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻤﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﳋﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺑﺄﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﻭﻳﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺄﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻄﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺃﺭﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻼﺩﻩ ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺸﺔ ﻟﺸﻌﻮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫© ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻟﺴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫© ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳍﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ)‪.(16‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻋﺼﺮﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳍﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻮﻫﺎ ﻭﺭﺃﲰﺎﻟﻴﻬـﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻏﺒـﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻮﺍﺫ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﰲ ﻋﺼﺮﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﻼﺭﺗـﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤـﺎ ﻫﻨـﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻵﱄ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺻﺎﺭ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﳌﺎ ﻏﲑﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻇﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﺮﺍ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﺷﺎﻉ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﱪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﻏﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺛﻪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﱂ ﻳﻐﲑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ )‪ (B to B‬ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻞ ﺳﺎﻫﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﳕﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻈﻬﺮﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﳏﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﺴﺎﻕ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﲟﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺛﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﺻﺎﺭﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺣﻴﺚ‬

‫‪252‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﱂ ﻧﻌﺪ ﻧﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺖ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻤﻠﺤﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﻭﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺩﻭل ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ :(02‬ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻟﺨﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺴﺎل ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺒﻌﺽ ﻤﻨﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺨﻼل ﺴﻨﺔ ‪2000‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﺩﻭل ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ :(01‬ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺭﻭﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻤﻥ ﺼﻨﻑ ‪B to B‬‬ ‫ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ‬ ‫)ﻤﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺃﻤﺭﻴﻜﻲ(‬ ‫‪% 90‬‬ ‫‪604‬‬ ‫‪2000‬‬ ‫‪% 90‬‬ ‫‪1138‬‬ ‫‪2001‬‬ ‫‪% 90‬‬ ‫‪2160‬‬ ‫‪2002‬‬ ‫‪% 70‬‬ ‫‪3675‬‬ ‫‪2003‬‬ ‫‪% 61‬‬ ‫‪5904‬‬ ‫‪2004‬‬ ‫‪% 49‬‬ ‫‪8823‬‬ ‫‪2005‬‬ ‫‪% 39‬‬ ‫‪12275‬‬ ‫‪2006‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻤﺭﻴﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺒﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺁﺴﻴﺎ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺨﺭﻴﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻴﺩ ﻤﻴﻼﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎﺘﻴﺔ ﻭﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺘﺼﺎل ﺍﻟﺤﺩﻴﺜﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ،2003‬ﺹ ‪.177‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺨﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺘﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪162.0‬‬ ‫‪153.2‬‬ ‫‪120.1‬‬ ‫‪69.1‬‬ ‫‪505.0‬‬

‫ﺇﺭﺴﺎل‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪31.5‬‬ ‫‪20.7‬‬ ‫‪16.9‬‬ ‫‪9.7‬‬ ‫‪78.8‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺘﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪47.2‬‬ ‫‪40.7‬‬ ‫‪44.9‬‬ ‫‪36.3‬‬ ‫‪169.1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻼﻟﻲ ﺯﻭﻗﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻤﺭﺠﻊ ﺴﺎﺒﻕ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.72‬‬

‫ﺍﳉـﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ : (03‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ ‪2001‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘـﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌـﺪﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ‪%‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2001‬‬

‫‪140.200‬‬

‫‪21,36‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋـﺮ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2000‬‬

‫‪12.500‬‬

‫‪0,05‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﺼﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2001‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2001‬‬

‫‪200.000‬‬

‫‪9,47‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻟﻴﺒـﻴﺎ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2001‬‬

‫‪20.000‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻟﺒﻨـﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2000‬‬

‫‪300.000‬‬

‫‪8,38‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2001‬‬

‫‪400.000‬‬

‫‪1.28‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻋﻤـﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2001‬‬

‫‪120.000‬‬

‫‪4,42‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴـﻮﺩﺍﻥ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2001‬‬

‫‪56.000‬‬

‫‪0.15‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻓﻠﺴﻄﲔ‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2001‬‬

‫‪60.000‬‬

‫‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺗﻮﻧـﺲ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2001‬‬

‫‪400.000‬‬

‫‪4.08‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻗﻄـﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2001‬‬

‫‪75.000‬‬

‫‪9,75‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2001‬‬

‫‪900.000‬‬

‫‪36,79‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2001‬‬

‫‪60.000‬‬

‫‪0,35‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤـﻦ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2001‬‬

‫‪17.000‬‬

‫‪0,09‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ‪2001‬‬

‫‪570.000‬‬

‫‪2,5‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻛﻨـﺪﺍ‬

‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪2002‬‬

‫‪16.84‬‬

‫‪52.79‬‬

‫ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻞ ‪2002‬‬

‫‪165.75‬‬

‫ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘـﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌـﺪﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ‪%‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪2001‬‬

‫‪180.000‬‬

‫‪0,57‬‬

‫‪600.000‬‬

‫‪0.85‬‬ ‫‪0.24‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﳊﻤﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﻠﻔﺔ‪،‬‬

‫‪59.1‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.03‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ :(04‬ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ‬

‫)ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻴﻮﻥ(‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪100‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴـﺎ‬

‫‪795‬‬

‫‪01‬‬

‫‪% 29‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﻮﺗﺴﻮﺍﻧﺎ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﺼـﺮ‬

‫‪481‬‬

‫‪0.72‬‬

‫‪% 93‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﻳﺲ‬

‫‪102‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﳌﻐـﺮﺏ‬

‫‪374‬‬

‫‪1.34‬‬

‫‪% 20‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻐﺎﻝ‬

‫‪73‬‬

‫‪0.80‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺝ‬

‫‪257‬‬

‫‪1.77‬‬

‫‪% 54‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋـﺮ‬

‫‪72‬‬

‫‪0.23‬‬

‫‪% 04‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺯﻣﺒﺎﺑﻮﻱ‬

‫‪174‬‬

‫‪1.51‬‬

‫‪% 42‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻏـﺎﻧـﺎ‬

‫‪70‬‬

‫‪0.36‬‬

‫‪% 31‬‬

‫‪5260‬‬

‫‪13.20‬‬

‫‪% 49‬‬

‫ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﳊﻤﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪،‬‬

‫ﺹ ‪.04‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‬

‫‪253‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ )ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻴﻮﻥ(‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪100‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬

‫‪12‬‬

‫‪7.51‬‬

‫‪% 50‬‬

‫‪8.88‬‬

‫‪% 28‬‬ ‫‪% 31‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜل ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ :(02‬ﺘﻁﻭﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺭﻭﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺼﻨﻑ ‪B to B‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜل ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ :(01‬ﺍﻟﺴﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻭﻟﻭﺠﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺘﺼﺎل )‪(1999‬‬

‫‪12275‬‬ ‫‪8823‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺒﺎﻥ; ‪%17‬‬

‫‪5904‬‬

‫ﺁﺴﻴﺎ; ‪%8‬‬

‫ﺇﻓﺭﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺴﻁ; ‪%2‬‬

‫‪6000‬‬ ‫‪4000‬‬

‫‪3675‬‬

‫ﺃﻤﺭﻴﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺘﻴﻨﻴﺔ; ‪%6‬‬

‫‪2160‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻤﺭﻴﻜﻴﺔ; ‪%38‬‬

‫‪2006‬‬

‫‪2005‬‬

‫‪2004‬‬

‫‪2003‬‬

‫‪2002‬‬

‫‪1138‬‬

‫‪604‬‬

‫‪2001‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﻤﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻤﺘﻁﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭل ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺨﻠﻔﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻤﺭﺠﻊ ﺴﺎﺒﻕ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.04‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻴﺩ ﻤﻴﻼﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎﺘﻴﺔ ﻭﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺘﺼﺎل ﺍﻟﺤﺩﻴﺜﺔ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ‪.177‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜل ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ :(03‬ﺘﻁﻭﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺭﻭﻨﻴﺔ )ﺒﺎﻟﻤﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ(‬ ‫‪5904‬‬

‫ﺼﻨﻑ ‪B to B‬‬

‫‪7000‬‬

‫ﺼﻨﻑ ‪B to C‬‬

‫‪6000‬‬

‫‪3675‬‬

‫‪4000‬‬ ‫‪3000‬‬

‫‪2160‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬

‫‪1138‬‬ ‫‪284‬‬

‫‪604‬‬

‫‪169‬‬

‫‪96‬‬

‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ــﺎﻤﻼﺕ‬

‫‪5000‬‬

‫‪452‬‬

‫‪53‬‬

‫‪1000‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬

‫‪2004‬‬

‫‪2003‬‬

‫‪2001‬‬

‫‪2002‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨـﻭﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻴﺩ ﻤﻴﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻤﺭﺠﻊ ﺴﺎﺒﻕ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.179‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜل ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ :(04‬ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺭﻭﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺭ ﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ ﻭﻋﺒﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺴﺎﺌل ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪2000‬‬ ‫‪1997‬‬

‫ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺘﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻜﺱ‬ ‫‪51%‬‬

‫ﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺭ ﻭﺴﺎﺌل‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺭﻭﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪10%‬‬ ‫ﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺭ ﺍﻷﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ‬ ‫‪15%‬‬

‫ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺘﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻜﺱ‬ ‫‪51%‬‬

‫ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺭﻴﺩ‬ ‫‪2%‬‬

‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﺒﺎﻟﻤﻠﻴــﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬

‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺒﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺒﻴﺔ;‬ ‫‪28%‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺒﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻗﻴﺔ;‬ ‫‪1%‬‬

‫‪14000‬‬ ‫‪12000‬‬ ‫‪10000‬‬ ‫‪8000‬‬

‫ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺭﻴﺩ‬ ‫‪1%‬‬

‫ﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪17%‬‬

‫ﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪22%‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﺸﺭﻴﻑ ﺸﻜﻴﺏ ﺃﻨﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺴﻌﻴﺩﻱ ﻁﺎﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻤﺭﺠﻊ ﺴﺎﺒﻕ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.05 ،04‬‬

‫‪254‬‬

‫ﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺴﺎﺌل‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺭﻭﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺨﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪8%‬‬ ‫ﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ‬ ‫‪42%‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜل ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ :(05‬ﺤﺠﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺭﻭﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﻋﺒﺭ ﺍﻻﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ )‪(2002-1994‬‬ ‫‪1400‬‬ ‫‪1234‬‬

‫‪1200‬‬ ‫‪1000‬‬ ‫‪800‬‬

‫‪717‬‬

‫‪600‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬

‫‪377‬‬

‫‪200‬‬

‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪73,9‬‬ ‫‪2002‬‬

‫‪2001‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬

‫‪1999‬‬

‫‪1998‬‬

‫‪21,8‬‬

‫‪2,9‬‬

‫‪1997‬‬

‫‪0,436‬‬

‫‪1996‬‬

‫‪0,008‬‬

‫‪1995‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪1994‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﺸﺭﻴﻑ ﺸﻜﻴﺏ ﺃﻨﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺴﻌﻴﺩﻱ ﻁﺎﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻤﺭﺠﻊ ﺴﺎﺒﻕ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.04‬‬

‫ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎ ﺨﻼل ‪2007‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜل ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ :(06‬ﺍﻨﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻭﺍل‬

‫ ‬

‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﺨﺩﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻭﺍل ﻨﺤﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺒﻠﻴﻭﻥ‬

‫ ‬

‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﺨﺩﻤﻲ ﺍﻹﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ ﻨﺤﻭ ‪ 1.3‬ﺒﻠﻴﻭﻥ‬

‫ ‬

‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﺨﺩﻤﻲ ﺍﻹﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺭﻴﻌﺔ ‪broadband‬‬

‫ﻨﺤﻭ ‪ 310‬ﻤﻠﻴﻭﻥ‬

‫ ‬

‫ﺃﺼﺒﺤﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻤﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻋﺩﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺩﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ ‪%930.2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ‪2007-2000‬ﻡ‬

‫‪ Source: www.internetworldstats.com , Nov. 2007‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻴﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻴﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺼﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻨﻘﻼ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺭﻭﻨﻲ‪) :‬ﺒﺘﺎﺭﻴﺦ‪(2008/04/17 :‬‬ ‫‪.http://www.saudiipc.com/images/public/dr-Mohammed.ppt#630,13‬‬

‫‪255‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜل ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ :(07‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺩﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺏ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺯﺩﻴﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﺨﺩﻤﻲ ﺍﻹﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺏ ﻴﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‪ 43‬ﻤﻠﻴﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2008‬ﻭﻻ ﺘﺯﺍل ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﻤﺴﺘﻤﺭ ﺴﺭﻴﻊ‬

‫‪34,1‬‬ ‫‪26,8‬‬ ‫‪21,1‬‬ ‫‪16,6‬‬

‫_‬

‫‪27,1%‬‬ ‫‪CAGR‬‬

‫‪2008‬‬

‫‪2006‬‬

‫‪2007‬‬

‫‪2005‬‬

‫ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﺨﺩﻤﻲ ﺍﻹﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺏ‬

‫‪43,3‬‬

‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬

‫‪2004‬‬

‫ﻴﺭﺘﺒﻁ ﻤﺩﻯ ﺍﻨﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻨﺘﺭﻨﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭل ﺒﻌﺩﺓ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل ﻤﻥ ﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﻤﺔ ﻭﺃﺠﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﺘﺼﺎل‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻤﻲ )ﻟﻠﻔﺭﺩ(‬ ‫ ﻤﺩﻯ ﺘﻁﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺘﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﻭﻋﻲ ﻭﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﺭﺍﺩ‬ ‫ ﺘﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺩﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺭﻭﻨﻴﺔ )ﺒﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻴﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻴﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻤﺭﺠﻊ ﺴﺎﺒﻕ‪http://www.saudiipc.com/images/public/dr-Mohammed.ppt#630,13 ،‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪ –(1‬ﻓﻀﻴﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻮ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ ‪.174‬‬ ‫)‪ -(2‬ﺑﻮﻣﻌﻴﻞ ﺳﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺱ ﺑﻮﺑﺎﻛﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﲨﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪،03‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪ ،2004‬ﺹ ‪.205‬‬ ‫)‪ -(3‬ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﳏﻤﺪ‪ ،‬ﳊﻤﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺣﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺧﻴﻀﺮ ﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ 13/12 ،‬ﻧﻮﻓﻤﱪ ‪ ،2005‬ﺹ ‪.287‬‬ ‫)‪ -(4‬ﺑﻮﻗﻠﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻐﺮﺳﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺣﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺣﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ"‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺧﻴﻀﺮ ﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 13/12‬ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻞ ‪ ،2004‬ﺹ ‪.22‬‬ ‫)‪ -(5‬ﻋﺎﻣﺮ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻗﻨﺪﻳﻠﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﳝﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺮﺍﰐ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،2002 ،‬ﺹ ‪.38‬‬ ‫)‪ -(6‬ﲨﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﻤﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻋﻼﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﺛﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﴰﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺧﻴﻀﺮ ﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‪ 29/28 ،‬ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻞ ‪ ،2007‬ﺹ ‪.01‬‬ ‫)‪ -(7‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﲞﱵ‪ :‬ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ 09/08،‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪ ،2005‬ﺹ ‪.318‬‬ ‫)‪ -(8‬ﻋﻼﻭﻱ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ)ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ )‪ ،((ANDRU‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﲣﺼﺺ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺧﻴﻀﺮ ﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ،2006/2005‬ﺹ ‪.51‬‬ ‫)‪ -(9‬ﲨﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﻤﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻋﻼﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.01‬‬ ‫)‪ -(10‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ )ﺟﻨﻴﻒ ‪-2003‬ﺗﻮﻧﺲ ‪ ،(2005‬ﻧﻘﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪http://www.itu.int/dms_pub/itu-s/md/03/wsispc2/cs03-wsispc2-c-0067!!msw-a.doc‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‬ ‫)‪ -(11‬ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻋﻼﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.51‬‬ ‫)‪ -(17‬ﺍﳉﻴﻼﱄ ﺯﻭﻗﺎﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ –ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﻼﻋﻴﺔ‪ -‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﰲ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ ‪ ،2003/2002‬ﺹ ‪.51... 49‬‬ ‫)‪ -(18‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.179 ،178‬‬

‫‪256‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫)‪ -(19‬ﺑﻮﻗﻠﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻐﺮﺳﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.23 ،22‬‬ ‫)‪ -(20‬ﺍﳉﻴﻼﱄ ﺯﻭﻗﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.55‬‬ ‫)‪ -(21‬ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻜﻴﺐ ﺃﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﻱ ﻃﺎﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.03 ،02‬‬ ‫)‪ -(22‬ﺍﳉﻴﻼﱄ ﺯﻭﻗﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.76 ...67‬‬ ‫)‪ -(23‬ﺟﻴﻬﺎﻥ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺭﺷﱵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.147‬‬ ‫)‪ -(24‬ﺍﳉﻴﻼﱄ ﺯﻭﻗﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.51‬‬ ‫)‪ -(25‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ‪http://www.itu.int/dms_pub/itu-s/md/03/wsispc2/cs03-wsispc2-c-0067!!msw-a.doc‬‬ ‫)‪ -(26‬ﺍﳉﻴﻼﱄ ﺯﻭﻗﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.66‬‬ ‫)‪ -(27‬ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻜﻴﺐ ﺃﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﻱ ﻃﺎﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.11‬‬ ‫)‪ -(28‬ﳊﻤﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.03‬‬ ‫)‪ -(29‬ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻜﻴﺐ ﺃﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﻱ ﻃﺎﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.11‬‬ ‫)‪ -(30‬ﺟﻴﻬﺎﻥ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺭﺷﱵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.151‬‬ ‫)‪ -(31‬ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪ www.protectionline.org/article :‬ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.2008/02/ 14:‬‬ ‫)‪ –(32‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ‪http://www.saudiipc.com/images/public/dr-Mohammed.ppt#630,13‬‬ ‫)‪ -(33‬ﳊﻤﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.03‬‬ ‫)‪ -(34‬ﺍﳉﻴﻼﱄ ﺯﻭﻗﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.73‬‬ ‫)‪ -(12‬ﺟﻴﻬﺎﻥ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺭﺷﲏ‪ :‬ﻨﻅﻡ ﺍﻻﺘﺼﺎل‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭل ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻁﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻤﺼﺭ‪ ،1972 ،‬ﺹ ‪.65‬‬ ‫)‪ -(13‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ )ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻋﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪http://www.abdelmajid-miled.com :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(14‬ﻡ‪.‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺃﻭﻛﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،1994 ،‬ﺹ ‪.24‬‬ ‫)‪ -(15‬ﳊﻤﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﴰﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺧﻴﻀﺮ ﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ 29/28 ،‬ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻞ ‪ ،2007‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.05 ،04‬‬ ‫)‪ -(16‬ﺟﻴﻬﺎﻥ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺭﺷﱵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪-‬ﺹ ‪.66 ،65‬‬

‫‪257‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺷﺎﺩﱄ ﺷﻮﻗﻲ – ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗـﻠﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﳛﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳـﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ؛ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣـﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺳـﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﳍﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﻣﻊ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ ﻭﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺛﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻓﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﺪﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪2009‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺖ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﺤﺖ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺮﺳﺦ ﻣﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺭﻏﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺬﻫﻞ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻟﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻈﻼﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺒﻴﲔ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﳍﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺇﳕﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﳏﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺣﱴ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻭﻳﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻪ ﺑﺘﻐﲑ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﱪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ " ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺇﱃ ﺁﺧﺮ" ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﻮﻱ ﰒ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺈﺷﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻜﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﲝﺎﺳﱵ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻭﱂ ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻘﻴﺖ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲨﺎﻋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﰒ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﰒ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ)ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﰊ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﺮ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﱄ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﻑ‬

‫‪259‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫____________________________________________________‬

‫ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﻭﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺷﻮﺍﻃﺎ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﳊﺮﺹ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻓﻜﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻋﺮﻩ ﻭﺧﱪﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﺣﱴ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺟﺎﺗﻪ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ" ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺟﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﲏ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﻏﻪ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺃﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ"‪ "communication‬ﺍﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﲏ ‪ commuins‬ﻭﻣﻌﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺄﻟﻮﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﲏ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﲔ ﰲ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺴﺖ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ" ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﺜﻞ ‪ Jean Lohisse‬ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻟﻼﻋﺐ )ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻞ( ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻫﻲ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻲ )ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ )ﺍﻷﺛﺮ( ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﴰﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺫﻭ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻆ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﻮ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺫﻱ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﺩﱄ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﳒﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫"ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺃﻭ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﳍﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍﻋﺘﻬﺎ )ﺑﺜﻬﺎ( ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻏﲑﻩ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﻘﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﰲ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﲔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﲏ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻋﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ )ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻞ ( ﺇﱃ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﻗﻨﺎﺓ( ﻭﺫﺍﻟﻚ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻋﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ " ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ "‪ "Rogers & Kincaid‬ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻗﻲ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺼﻪ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﻦ ﻳﻬﺪﻓﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﱪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻓﻴﻀﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ‪ feed–back‬ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ l’interactivité‬ﻭ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﺫﻭ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳍﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻊ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ؛ ﻓﻨﺠﺪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪" :‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ" ‪.‬‬ ‫‪260‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪" :‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺿﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﺰﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪،‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ" ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪" :‬ﻫﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺇﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻩ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﰲ ﲢﺴﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻴﺸﺘﻪ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺎﻫﻴﺘﻪ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ" ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺗﻘﲏ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻓﻴﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ ﳏﺎﻭﻻ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-2‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ "ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺄﺛﺮﺕ ﺑﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺷﱴ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﲨﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﲣﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ" ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ "‪ "Kenneth Laudon‬ﻭ" ‪ "Jane Laudon‬ﻓﻴﻌﺮﻓﺎﻥ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﰐ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﳉﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺑﺮﳎﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬‫ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺑﺮﳎﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ‬‫ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺁﺧﺮ ﲝﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻧﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪ (...‬ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ؛‬‫ ﺑﺚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺃﳓﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ؛‬‫ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﻭﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ )ﻧﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪(...‬؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ؛‬‫ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻭﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﺍﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪261‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫____________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﳚﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻲ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﻲ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺇﺫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺴﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﲝﻴﺚ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻊ ؛ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﳑﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﳏﻤﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﳍﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺸﺮﺓ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﳍﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1-3‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ‪ :‬ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬

‫‪ 1-1-3‬ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Wallonne‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ )‪ (awt‬ﰲ ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺑـ ‪ %98‬ﲢﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ %29‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻛﱪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﰒ ﺗﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻭ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﻮﺍﺳﺐ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﺎﳋﺎﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺃﲤﺘﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-1-3‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ (OCDE‬ﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻡ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪ 50‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 249‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻼﺗﻪ ﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ % 80‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ‪ 49‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻴﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﳍﺎ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ ‪، % 75‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪ %99‬ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻛﻔﻠﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﳕﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ ﻭﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3-1-3‬ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ‪AWT‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﻥ ‪ %58‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺠﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2006‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑـﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ‪ %7‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻓﻮﺟﺪﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻃﺮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬

‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ‪‬ﺎ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ BNP PARIBAS‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﳋﻤﺲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻓﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪262‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪، %82‬ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ، %77‬ﰒ ﺗﺄﰐ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %65‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ، %52‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﰲ ﳕﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %60‬ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ ‪ %44‬ﰒ ﺗﺄﰐ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪%39‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪.%28‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﲤﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﱪﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪: 1‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪2005‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺎﺑﺎااﺗﻐﺖ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬

‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻨﺘﻀﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‬

‫ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬

‫ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬

‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬

‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪BNP PARIBAS LEASE GROUP.Op.Cit. p38 . :‬‬ ‫‪ 2-3‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﺰﻭﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﱪﺭ ﻋﺰﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﰐ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1-2-3‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺆﻫﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻫﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻠﲔ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﻳﺮﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-2-3‬ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﰐ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻓﺘﻘﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪263‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫____________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺒﲏ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﳛﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﻛﺈﺑﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻻ ﳛﻮﻱ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3-2-3‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﲏ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﳎﱪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4-2-3‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﲎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲤﺎﺷﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺳﻠﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﺜﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻭﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2007‬ﺍﻟـ‬ ‫‪ 294612‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ ‪ %63.4‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺴﻨﺔ ‪ ،2001‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،19 %99.97‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻛﱪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭ ﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺜﻴﻼ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﳛﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺒﲏ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﺖ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳋﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ‪‬ﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1-4‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻳﺘﺮﻭﺍﺡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪ 1‬ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪ 250‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺟﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ‪ 41‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺪﺕ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ، 61.11%‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ % 25‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﲤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ % 13.88‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﱂ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2-4‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﺔ ﰎ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺗﺒﻌﻬﺎ ‪Régis‬‬ ‫‪264‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫‪ MEISSONIER‬ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻪ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺈﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﲝﺜﻨﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ‪21‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ ﲢﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫=‬

‫)‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ‪ +‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪ +‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ‬

‫(‬

‫‪100 X‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﱂ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪،‬ﻧﺎﻫﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻓﺴﺠﻠﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻌﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻜﺔ ﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻛﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻦ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﻬﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻨﺤﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﺄﺧﺮﺍ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻢ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪%29.5‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (2‬ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 50‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 250‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ‪ %57.55‬ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 9‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 49‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ ،%26.99‬ﰒ ﺗﺄﰐ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ‪ 1‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 9‬ﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺑـ ‪ ،%26.76‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻕ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻳﻜﺎﺩ ﻳﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻡ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻃﺮﺩﺍ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ :2‬ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪50‬ﺍﱃ‪ 250‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ )ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ(‬

‫‪57,55%‬‬

‫‪70,00%‬‬

‫‪60,00%‬‬

‫‪50,00%‬‬

‫‪40,00%‬‬

‫‪26,99%‬‬

‫‪10‬ﺍﱃ ‪ 49‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ )ﺻﻐﲑﺓ(‬

‫‪26,76%‬‬

‫‪1‬ﺍﱃ ‪ 9‬ﻋﻤﺎﻝ )ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ(‬

‫‪30,00%‬‬

‫‪20,00%‬‬

‫‪10,00%‬‬

‫‪0,00%‬‬

‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺎ ﺇﻥ ﱂ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺣﺘﻤﻴﺎ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﳍﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪265‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫____________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﳑﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳍﻮﺓ ﳚﺐ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﻄﺔ ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ ﻻﻗﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻘﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻃﲏ ﻟﺘﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﲟﺪﻯ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺸﻴﻴﺪ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﲎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ؛ ﻓﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﻬﻞ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Internet World Stats, (2009/08/14) , http://www.internetworldstats.com/stats.htm‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﲞﱵ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺭ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺻﺪﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ ‪.2006/2005،‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬ﺭﲝﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻧﺎﻥ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺑﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎﺀ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪،2005،‬ﺹ‪.27‬‬

‫‪ 4‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﻴﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،2000 ،‬ﺹ‪.253‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Jean Lohisse, la communication de la transmission a la relation, 2eme édition, Edition deboeck ,paris, 2006, p25.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺭﲝﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪،‬ﺹ‪.30‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻓﻀﻴﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻫﲑﻱ‪ ،‬ﳐﱪ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ‪.10‬‬ ‫‪L’internaute, (2007/06/13) ,http://www.linternaute.com/dictionnaire/fr/definition/technologie/ .‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪Définition de la technologie, (2007/06/13). http://www.olats.org/schoffer/deftech.htm .‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪ 10‬ﻣﲎ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﺮ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴـﻖ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﳘﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ " ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ " ﻃﺮﺍﺑﻠﺲ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻫﲑﻳﺔ ‪.2006/11/9-8‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﲨﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﻤﺎﺭﺓ ‪،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻋﻼﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﴰﺎﻝ ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺧﻴﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‪ ، 2007 ،‬ﺹ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬

‫‪Kenneth C. Laudon and Jane Price Laudon. Management Information Systems: Managing The Digital Firm .‬‬ ‫‪Prentice Hall. Ninth edition.USA.2006.p65.‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪Daniel April, Définition du secteur de la technologie de l'information et des communications‬‬ ‫‪CANADA, Mars 1999.p2.‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪Agence Wallonne des Télécommunications.‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪Agence Wallonne des Télécommunications,Usages TIC 2006 des PME wallonnes, Belgique,2007, p31‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪OCDE , LES TIC, LE COMMERCE ÉLECTRONIQUE ET LES PME ،2ème CONFÉRENCE DE L’OCDE‬‬ ‫‪DES MINISTRES EN CHARGE DES PETITES ET MOYENNES ENTERPRISES (PME) PROMOUVOIR‬‬ ‫‪L’ENTREPRENARIAT ET LES PME INNOVANTES DANS UNE ÉCONOMIE MONDIALE : VERS UNE‬‬ ‫‪MONDIALISATION PLUS RESPONSABLE ET MIEUX PARTAGÉE ,Istanbul, Turquie 3-5 juin 2004, P15‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪BNP PARIBAS LEASE GROUP. TECHNOLOGIES DE L’INFORMATION ET DE LA COMMUNICATION‬‬ ‫‪2005-2006. Enquête PME-PMI. france.2006.p38.‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪OCDE , 2004,op.cit ,p23.‬‬ ‫‪19‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪Régis MEISSONIER. Organisation virtuelle : Conceptualisation, ingénierie et pratiquesEnquête auprès des‬‬ ‫‪PME de la région des pays de la Loire. THESE DOCTORAT EN SCIENCES DE GESTION. Institut‬‬ ‫‪d’Administration des Entreprises Aix-en-Provence.France.2000.pp241-245.‬‬

‫‪266‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ‪(amazon.com‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺳﻬﺎﻡ – ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﻜﺮﺓ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﳛﻤﻞ ﻋﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﲡﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﻓﺮﺹ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠـﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻯ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﺯﺕ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﱪﺯ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺗﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﹰﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻣـﺎﺯﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻼﻕ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺗﺒﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺤﻮﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺪ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜـﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴـﺪ ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻴﻊ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳـﻮﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺐ‪... ،‬ﺍﱁ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻧﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﱃ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺃﺛﺮﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ؟‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻧﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺳﺮ ﳒـﺎﺡ ﺭﺍﺋـﺪ ﲡـﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ )‪.(amazon.com‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻧﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -I‬ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪ -II‬ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪ -III‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ -IV‬ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ )ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﺮ(‬ ‫‪ -I‬ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ "ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـﻪ ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ‪ ،"(1)(URL‬ﺃﻱ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ "ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ )‪ ،(WEB PAGE‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗـﻊ ﻓﻴﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴـﻬﺎ )‪.(2)" (HOME PAGE‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻓﻀﺎﺀ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻼﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻛﺘﺎﻟﻮﺟﺎﺕ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﺷﻬﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﺳﺲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪ ﺟﻴﻒ ﺑﺮﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺧﺮﻳﺞ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﺃﺩﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺄﻟﻖ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻰ ﺩﻱ ﺇﻱ ﺷﺎﻭ ﺟﻌﻠﺘﻪ ﻳﺮﺗﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﳌﻨﺼﺐ ﻧﺎﺋﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﺭﻏﻢ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺳﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺮﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1994‬ﺇﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺇﱃ ‪ % 2300‬ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺧﺮﺟﺖ ﻓﻜﺮﺗﻪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻣﻊ ﲡﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻮﻓﲑﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﺒﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮﻏﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻀﺤﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺼﺐ ﺍﳌﺮﻣﻮﻕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻟﻖ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻭﰎ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﰲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻼﺀﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 12‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﻣﻮﻇﻒ ﻭﺑﻠﻎ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2004‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪267‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -II‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﳏﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﺮﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺟﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﳚﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳉﻴـﺪ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺃﻥ ﲤﻴﺰﻩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺼﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﲨﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ )‪ (Dell computer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ )‪ (www.dell.com‬ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ )‪ (hummackerSchlmer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ )‪.(www.hammacker.com‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﲑ ﻟﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻨﻬﺮ ﻗﻮﻱ ﰲ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﲝﺜﻪ ﰲ ﳏﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻷﲰﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﺷﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻫﻠﻪ ﻭﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲟﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 300‬ﺃﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ‪ 20‬ﺃﻟﻒ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﻌﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫)‪( 4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ‪ amazon.com‬ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺬﻫﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﻓﻌﻼ ﰲ ﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺒﻮﻻ ﻟﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﻌﺖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻜﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺑﻮﺗﲑﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﻭ ‪ ، DVD, CD‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﱰﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ‪...‬ﺇﱁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺑﺮﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﳍﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺣﻠﻴﻒ ﺑﺪﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ )‪ (R) (Toys‬ﻭ (‬ ‫)‪( 5‬‬ ‫)‪ borders‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪.les site dédié‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻓﺮﻭﻉ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﺳﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺧﻠﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟـ ‪ Amazon‬ﲡﺴﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻴﻤﺎ ﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﰎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﺮﻋﲔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1998‬ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﲔ ﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻭﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺫﺭﻭ‪‬ﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2001‬ﻟﺘﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 25‬ﺑﺎﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻡ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﰎ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﺮﻉ ﰲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2000‬ﻟﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 220‬ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﲤﻜﻨﺖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‬ ‫)‪( 6‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ﻛﺄﻛﱪ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﲡﺰﺋﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪.2005‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﺍﻉ ﺻﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ﻟﻴﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ‪ amazon.com‬ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﺖ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﲑ‪.‬ﻛﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﲑﻛﻮﻡ ﲤﻜﻨﺖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫)‪( 7‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻼﻳﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ )ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ( ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﺬ‪‬ﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻃﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺳﻌﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﲞﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺯﺑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪...‬ﺇﱁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪268‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻭ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺯﻭﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﲨﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﲜﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﲝﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ‬‫ﺳﺘﻔﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺯﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﻨﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ‪...‬ﺇﱁ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺣﺼﺮﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪﻱ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺯﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﰲ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻨﺤﻮﻫﺎ‬‫ﻭﳏﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳓﻮ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳒﺪ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻯ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﳚﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ ﺃﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﲝﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻠﺠﺄ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺸﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻏﲑ ﳐﻮﻟﲔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ( ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲪﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ‪(SSL).‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ )ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬‫ﺣﱴ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻤﺜﻼ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻄﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻕ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﺠﺄ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺣﺎ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﺷﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﳉﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﲨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲟﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺩﳝﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀً ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲨﻌﺖ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻓﻘﺎﹰ ﳌﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺄﻥ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(FAQ‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﲔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻓﻮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﺪﺛﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺃﳓﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪.‬‬

‫‪269‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -III‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ : 1999‬ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻮﺫﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺫﻫﻠﺖ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ )‪(2008-1999‬‬ ‫‪2008‬‬ ‫‪2007 2006 2005 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000 1999‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪19170 14860,5 13597 10642 6000 5237 4461 3 120 2 760 1 640‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ‪+29% +9% +27% +77% +14% +17% +13% +13% +68% +169%‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﳎﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺑﻮﺗﲑﺓ ﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ‪ ،+169%‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﳉﺄﻧﺎ ﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺑﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﲟﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻴﻐﻄﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻀﺞ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺬ ‪ 1995‬ﺇﱃ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ‪: 2001‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﺭ )ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺯﺍﺋﺮ(‬

‫‪1999‬‬ ‫‪1998‬‬ ‫‪1997‬‬ ‫‪+169%‬‬ ‫‪+313%‬‬ ‫‬‫‪- 720‬‬ ‫‪- 128‬‬ ‫‪- 31‬‬ ‫‪176‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪16,6‬‬ ‫‪9,1‬‬ ‫‪2,04‬‬ ‫‪Source: Amazon.com‬‬

‫‪2000‬‬ ‫‪+68%‬‬ ‫‪-1 411‬‬ ‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬

‫‪2001‬‬ ‫‪+13%‬‬ ‫‪- 562‬‬ ‫‪138‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﺰﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺷﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪...‬ﺇﱁ‪ ،‬ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﲤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺘﻠﺖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 22‬ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2001‬ﺑﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪ 3.12‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻠﺖ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .2001‬ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪270‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪Carrefour‬‬ ‫‪Groupement des mousquetaires‬‬ ‫‪Groupe PPR‬‬ ‫‪Leclerc‬‬ ‫‪Auchan‬‬ ‫‪Rallye‬‬ ‫‪Casino Guichard‬‬ ‫‪Système U‬‬ ‫‪Logidis‬‬ ‫‪Cora‬‬ ‫‪Galeries Lafayette‬‬ ‫‪Volkswagen France‬‬ ‫‪Amazon‬‬ ‫‪Monoprix‬‬ ‫‪Attac‬‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪ 2000‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻳﻮﺭﻭ‬ ‫‪64 802‬‬ ‫‪33 000‬‬ ‫‪24 700‬‬ ‫‪23 782‬‬ ‫‪23 496‬‬ ‫‪19 942‬‬ ‫‪19 073‬‬ ‫‪10 534‬‬ ‫‪8 364‬‬ ‫‪7 600‬‬ ‫‪5 747‬‬ ‫‪4 153‬‬ ‫*‪3 558‬‬ ‫‪3 376‬‬ ‫‪2 767‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬

‫‪http://www.lemondeinformatique.fr/actualites/commentaires-annuels-amazon‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﺛﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺡ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺬﻫﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﺳﻴﺴﻪ ﰎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1995‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ‪ 13‬ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺰﺍﻭﺝ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﺮﻉ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻴﺰﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻜﻨﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻮﺍﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻓﻌﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻪ ﻭﻭﻃﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻭﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﻪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ‪ 654‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .2008‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺼﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .IV‬ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ)ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﺮ( ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﺖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺀ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻏﲑﺕ ﻓﻌـﻼ ﻣـﻦ ﻟﻌﺒـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻜﻨﺖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻮﺍﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻓﺎﺀ ﻭﻭﻻﺀ ﺯﻭﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪9A.com‬‬

‫)‪(8‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﺃﻃﻠﻘﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻼﻕ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧـﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﺴـﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴـﺔ ‪Beta‬‬

‫‪ version‬ﻣ ﹺﻦ ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ ،9A.com‬ﰲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻨﺖ ﰲ ﺳﺒﺘﻤﱪ ‪ 2004‬ﺍﳌﺎﺿـﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 9A‬ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﺮﺩ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﲝﺚ ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ )ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻡ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻟﻴﻜﺴﺎ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻏﻮﻏﻞ ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗـﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘـﻮﺩﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﱪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻳﺎﻫﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﶈﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺃﻧـﻪ ﻟـﻴﺲ ﲦـﺔ ﺇﺿـﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﳑﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺤﻪ ﳏﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻏﻮﻏﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ 9A.com‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﻼﻣﺢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺭﲟﺎ‬ ‫ﲡﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ )ﻏﻮﻏﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻖ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻼﻣﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ‪ 9A‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳏﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ)‪: (9‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ 9A.com‬ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﰲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺕ ﻛﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪271‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬

‫____________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫• ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲝﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،9A.com‬ﻭﻫـﻲ ﻟﻴﺴـﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﲰﻪ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴـﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻧﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳝﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﺜﻞ "ﺍﻟﺒﺤـﺚ ﺩﺍﺧـﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘـﺎﺏ" ﻭ"ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ"‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﲝﺚ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲝﺜﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫـﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻇﻬﺮ ﰲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤـﺚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻘﺮﺭ ﻣﺒﻜﺮﺍ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ 9A.com‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ‪ :‬ﻛﺸﻔﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﲑﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟـ ‪ 81‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻄﻮﺍ " ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ" ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎ‪‬ﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻃﻠﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﻻﻳﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﺗﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﲑﻛﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻢ " ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ "‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺄﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺍ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺸﺎ‪‬ﺔ ﺃﻃﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺩﻓﻊ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ" ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫"‪ ،"paypal‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻃﺮﺣﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﺃﻻ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺸﺘﻬﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺣﺴﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻟﺪﻱ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺅﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻝ ﺳﻜﻮﺕ ﺩﻳﻔﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻱ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﲑﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﻌﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪‬ﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ؛ ﻓﺘﺒﲏ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﲰﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻋﺰﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ ؛ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﲤﻨﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺴﻦ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺟﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﳒﺎﺣﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻛﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﳋﺪﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪272‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻟﻒ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺣﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﱪﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﲤﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﳏﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪ ،9A.com‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ‪‬ﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﻻ ﻳﺄﰐ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﲢﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺃﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﻣﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺯﻭﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻮﺣﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻟﻪ ﰲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺣﻴﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﺯﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻓﺮﺿﺖ ﺳﻴﻄﺮ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻘﻼ‪‬ﻢ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻐﻔﻞ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﳘﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻓﻼ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻴﺰﻩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﻻ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﻭﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻪ )ﺍﻟﻴﻘﻈﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪ .(1‬ﺃﻻﻥ ﺳﻴﻤﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻮﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪ ،1999 ،‬ﺹ‪.272 :‬‬ ‫)‪ .(2‬ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،2006 ،‬ﺹ‪.28:‬‬

‫)‪ . (3‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻃﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺼﲑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻣﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳـﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،2005 ،‬ﺹ‪.242 :‬‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬ ‫‪15/01/2009, http://www.journaldunet.com/0201/020124amazon.shtm‬‬ ‫)‪(5‬‬ ‫‪15/01/2009, http://www.journaldunet.com/0201/020124amazon.shtm‬‬ ‫)‪(6‬‬ ‫‪20/01/2009, http://www.actualitte.com/actualite/5411-amazon-vendeur-livres-etats-unis.htm‬‬ ‫)‪(7‬‬ ‫‪20/01/2009, http://www.startuparabia.com/arabic/2008/09/amazon-joins-taufeercom-e-channel‬‬‫‪(8) 24/01/2009, http://a9.com‬‬ ‫)‪(9‬‬ ‫‪24/01/2009, http://www.bahrainonline.org/showthread.php?t=92755‬‬

‫‪273‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /.‬ﲞﱵ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ)*( & ﺩ‪ /‬ﺷﻌﻮﰊ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﺯﻱ)**‬

‫(‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﺋﺤﲔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﳌﻘﻮﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﳌﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﲏ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﳉﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺇﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﳉﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﲑﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﳉﻮﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳊﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺟﺔ ﻧﻈﲑ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﳑﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺡ ؛ ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )‪ (TIC : Technologies de l'Information et de la Communication‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﲡﻤﻊ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺪﺍﻭﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﱪ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﳍﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺗﺆﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺘﻠﻘﻲ ؛‬ ‫ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ؛ ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﲰﺤﺖ ﻋﻮﳌﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )‪ 24‬ﺳﺎ‪ 7/‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﲢﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳓﻮ »ﺷﺒﻜﻲ« ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺫ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﲰﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺨﲑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ ؛ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺟﺪﺭﻱ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺴﻴﲑﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﲏ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺍ ﻣﻌﺘﱪﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﻡ ‪ PIB‬ﰲ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﰲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﶈﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ ،OCDE‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﲰﺔ ﰲ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻗﺤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﲢﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﳍﺎﻡ ﻹﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺪﻓﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﺴﲎ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫______________________________________________________________‬

‫)*(‪: (**) ،‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ "ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪275‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ؛ ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺑﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﱯ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎﺝ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻨﺔ ﻷﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﻭﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻀﺤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻭﻇﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺳﻠﻔﺎﹰ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻠﺲ )‪" (3Castells 2000‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ" ﰲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﲝﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 7‬ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،4‬ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ‪ 46 :‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ‪ 35 :‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ‪ 16 :‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ ‪ 13 :‬ﺳﻨﺔ( ؛ ﻓﻴﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﺔ ؟ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ؟‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧ‪‬ﺒﻴﻨﻪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪(e-tourism‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺩﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ TIC‬ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ - 4‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪: (e-tourism‬‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﱪ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺃﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ؛ ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺣﱴ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻘﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻟﺔ )‪ (m-tourism‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﳍﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻔﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻴﻴﺪ ﻭﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻯ ﺭﻭﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺑﻨﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻜﺒﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪ ،(World Wide Web‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺜﻴﻼ‪‬ﺎ )‪ (B2B‬ﻭﻣﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ )‪ (B2C‬ﻭﻣﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﺃﻧﻔﺴﻬﻢ )‪ ،(C2C‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻇﻬﺮ‬ ‫دﻳﻜﺮﻳﻔﺘﻮر ‪ degriftour.com‬ﻛﺄﻭﻝ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪.1990‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﲣﻄﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ‪ 89‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2004‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ %45‬ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎﹰ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ 5‬؛ ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺤﺖ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻥ ‪ 40‬ﺑﺎﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ‪ 938‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﺍ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺠﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻭﺑﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻛﺴﺒﻴﺪﻳﺎ ‪ 50 expedia.com‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺯﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻭﺭﺑﺘﺰ ‪ 35 orbitz.com‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺯﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 80‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺯﺍﺋﺮ ﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻳﺎﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ‪.6yahootravel.com‬‬

‫‪276‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺤﻮﺩ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ %24‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ Forrester‬ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺴﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﳉﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ ،2008‬ﺣﺎﺯﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﳉﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 32.8‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 16.4‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ‪.7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﺴﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،8‬ﻭﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ )ﻋﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ‪( ... ،‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺭﻗﻤﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺯﻋﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ )ﻭﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﱃ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﺮﺍ ﻭﲝﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﻄﻮّﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﰲ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﺮﻧﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻮﻟﻪ ﻭﺭﻏﺒﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻕ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻟﻠﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻼ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﻮﺟﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻄﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻋﻢ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻉ ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻈﻤﻮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﲤﺮ ﺣﺘﻤﺎﹰ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳌﻮّﺯﻉ‬ ‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ‪ -‬؛ ﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ّ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﲝﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍ ‪ -‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻭﺳﺎﻃﺔ‪ -‬ﻓﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻮﺿﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪:‬‬

‫‪277‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ : 1‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬

‫ﲣﻄﻴﻂ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ‬

‫وآﺎﻻت اﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎت وﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬

‫أدﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﻮاح‬

‫ﺣﺠﺰ‬

‫هﻴﺌﺎت ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺪ‬

‫‪........‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪/‬ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻋﲔ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﲟﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴـﻠﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﲟﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻋﲔ ﻛﻮﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﲰﺎﺳﺮﺓ ﻟﻜـﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﳏﺘﻔﻈﲔ ﲟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿـﻲ‪ ،‬ﲢـﺖ ﺇﺳـﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳـﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﲔ ‪ ،Cybermédiaires‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫ﲝﺚ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳍﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺢ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺩﻭﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻳﺘﻔﺎﻭﺽ ﻭﻳﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﱪ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﻭﺳﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣـﻦ ﺧـﻼﻝ ﻣﻮﻗـﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ‪‬ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗ‪‬ﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﺇﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﲟﻮﺯﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻘﺪ ‪‬ﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟـﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟـﺪﻩ ﺃﻳﻀـﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴـﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﺫﺍﰐ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﳏﺮﻙ ﲝﺚ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﺭﺝ ﻭﺳﻴﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﻋـﻦ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﻳﺒﺤﺜﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﻌﲔ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻭﻗﻪ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ؛ ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻠﺠﺄ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ )‪.9(Infomèdiation‬‬

‫‪278‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ : 2‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬

‫ﲣﻄﻴﻂ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ‬

‫وآﺎﻻت اﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎت وﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬

‫أدﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﻮاح‬

‫ﺣﺠﺰ‬

‫هﻴﺌﺎت ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺪ‬

‫‪........‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﲔ‬

‫‪Cybermédiaires‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻧﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺗﻌﲏ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻋﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﲔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﳏﺘﻔﻈﲔ‬ ‫ﲟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﲔ ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ )ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺷﺮﻧﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،2‬ﺑﺄﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﻮﺍ ﻫﻢ ﲟﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻫﻢ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ( ؛ ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺃﻧﻔﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺘـﻮﱃ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﻛـﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﻫﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻌﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺭﻏﺒﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﻳـﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳏﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )‪ 120‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻃﻠﺒﺔ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ ﰲ ﳏﺮﻙ ﻗﻮﻗﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﻭﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ )‪ 10(pure-player‬ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺹ ﲤﻜﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻬﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻛﻮﺳﻂ ﲡﺎﺭﻱ ﺁﱄ ﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﻮﺝ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﱐ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺒﺪﻭﻝ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﺍﳌﺒﺬﻭﻝ ﻟﻺﻗﺘﻨﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻧﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﰲ ﺇﻗﺤﺎﻡ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳏﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻻ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺍﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ؛ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺠﺎﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﰲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﺣﱴ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺒﺘﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻣﺘﺠﺪﺩﺓ ﳉﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺘﻬﻢ"‪.11‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﲣﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﳏﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺰ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﲑﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﻭﺗﺄﺟﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪279‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺩﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ TIC‬ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺈﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﲣﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺠﺰ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻗﺪ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ...،‬ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻧﺒﻬﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﳘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ ؛ ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺒﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﱂ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺣﺘﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺇﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺟﻮﺩ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﲝﻴﺚ ﲤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﱂ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﲣﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﲣﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺮﺣﻠﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺯﻳﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻪ ﳍﺎ ﺣﱴ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﲎ ﻟﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﰲ ﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻧﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ( ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﻹﻗﺘﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﺺ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﻳﺒﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻵﱄ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﰲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﱯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻀﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﺇﲨﺎﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،TIC‬ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﺪﺭﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﳍﻢ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪‬ﻢ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻭﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲣﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ‬‫ﰲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﳑﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺟﻠﺐ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻱ ﺗﺄﺧﲑ ﰲ ﺁﺟﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻭ ﳑﻴﺰﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ‬‫ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪280‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺷﻬﺎﺭ ﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﺣﱴ ﲡﻠﺐ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﲝﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ‪.‬‬‫ ﺭﻛﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻺﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻖ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺡ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﺘﻬﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ - 4‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻻﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﻫﺶ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ؛ ﻭﳒﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﻀﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﲤﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺷﺮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺦ ﻳﻌﻘﺪﻩ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ “EUOTI”13‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ”‪“ATO‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ”‪ ،“IFITT‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺇﻧﻌﻘﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻣﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻭﺣﱴ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ ‪ ،2008‬ﲢﺖ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭﻙ ﰲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻛﺎﺩﻣﻴﲔ ﻭﺧﱪﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴـﺚ ﻳﻬـﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿـﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴـﺔ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﻭﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻨﻮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻋﱪ ﺗﻨﺴـﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﺋﺢ ﺗﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻫﺘﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﴰﻠﺖ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴـﻮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴـﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻋـﱪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳊﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﳎﻠﺲ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤـﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻭﺻﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﳛﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺻـﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳋـﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺮﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﲤﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،14‬ﻭﺣﺚ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪281‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﲟﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﰎ ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﺼﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﺮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻏﺒﲔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﺩﻭﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻋﻤﺪﺕ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳉﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻜﻚ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ )ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﻤﲔ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲦﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﺄﺷﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺫﻫﺒﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﻜﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﲔ ﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ ﲟﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﺍ ﳌﺴـﺎﻋﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻛﺒـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﲤﺎﺷﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻹﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﰊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺪﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﰊ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﻯ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﳓﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻟـﺪﰊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﺍﳊﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺩﰊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺩﰊ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﺎ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺩﰊ ‪ :‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺩﰊ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴ ّﻮّﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺪﰊ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﳍﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﺰ ّﻭّﺍﺭ ﺩﰊ ﺍﳊﺠﺰ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻬﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌـﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺃﺭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﺄﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﰊ ﺑﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻴﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﺷﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ %99‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳉﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺑﻮﻇﱯ‪ ،‬ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﱃ ‪ 90‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﻫﻢ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ 2009‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ 81,1‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﻫﻢ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ .2008‬ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪ %16,5‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2008‬ﺇﱃ ‪%16,7‬‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ ،2009‬ﻭﲝﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﰲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪ 455‬ﻓﻨﺪﻗﺎ ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ 2008‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 470‬ﻓﻨﺪﻗﺎ ﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ ،2009‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 9,9‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺯﺍﺋﺮ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 2008‬ﺇﱃ ‪10,5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺯﺍﺋﺮ ﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪ 16،2009‬ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﰐ‪.‬‬

‫‪282‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﺴﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻟﺬﻛﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ‬ ‫"ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﺔ" "‪ ،"www.algeriantourism.com‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﳊﺠﺰ ﻣﻊ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳉﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺠﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ "ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﺔ" ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺮﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ )‪ (www.ont-dz.org‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻮﺯﺍﺭﺓ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺴﻜﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﱃ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﻭﻣﻄﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﳐﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻀﺎﺋﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ؛ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﳜﻠﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻔﺘﻘﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﲔ ﰲ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ؛ ﻭﳚﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ )‪ ،(http://www.onat-dz.com‬ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺳﺠﻠﺖ ﺃﺩﱏ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،200617‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺮﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺩﻓﻌﺎ ﻗﻮﻳﺎ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻫﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﻨﻬﻮﺽ ‪‬ﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻳﺘﺤﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺨﺮ ﺟﻬﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﲏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﻢ ﳉﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺄﻫﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺗﺎﺣﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺡ ؛ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﳉﻠﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪.18‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳉﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ )‪ ،Networked Readiness Index (NRI‬ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻘﻬﻘﺮ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ : 3‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳉﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ‬

‫)‪(NRI‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻀﺪﺭ ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻓﻮﺱ‬ ‫‪283‬‬

‫‪19‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﳍﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺫﻭ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﰲ ﺩﻓﻊ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﻭﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﲤﻜﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﻻ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺑﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﻛﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺘﻘﺮ ﻋﺮﻭﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺪﻯ ﻋﻄﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ‬ ‫‪ (http://www.holidays4arab.com/vb‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﺇﳚﺎﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﺦ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ )ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻮﺭﻧﺖ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﺘﲔ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺘﲔ )ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻭﲤﺜﻠﺖ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﳑﺎ ﻣﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﲣﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺛﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺘﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻣﻜﺸﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﱂ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺼﺮﻩ ﲟﺠﺎﻝ ّ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﻃﻴﻒ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲞﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﲑﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﳑﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ّ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﻋﱪ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻴﻠﺘﻴﻤﻴﺪﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳊﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺪ ﲢﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ ﳏﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﻭﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﲑﺍﻥ ﻭﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﳍﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﺮﺩ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﲡﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﳎﱪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﱪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﲤﻜﹼﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺘﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﱪ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻪ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﺮﺹ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪284‬‬

2010-2009 / 07 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

: ‫ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬‫ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬698 ‫ ﺇﱃ‬2000 ‫ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ‬1 .‫ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ‬1.6 ‫ ﻟﻴﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺡ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻟﲔ ﰲ ﺃﳓﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ‬2020 ‫ ﻣﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ‬20 ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻢ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ 2

23/02/2009, http://www.tourisme.gouv.fr/fr/navd/mediatheque/publication/prospective/att00006267/2.pdf

Castells, 2000, "Information, Technology and Global Capitalism, in Hutto and Giddens, Eds. On the :‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬- 3 edge, essays on a runaway world, London, Jonathan Cape. ‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﳔﻠﺔ )ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ( ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ – ﳎﻤﻊ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺁﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﻡ‬: ‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬- 4 3 ‫ ﺹ‬2002 ‫ ﻧﻴﺴﺎﻥ‬19/18 ‫ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ – ﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻧﻴﺴﻜﻮ – ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‬ 5

02/11/2008, http://ar.wikipedia.org/wiki/‫ﺳﻴﺎﺣﺔ_ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬

6

23/02/2009, http://www.asharqalawsat.com/details.asp?section=43&issueno=10983&article=499954&feature=

7

17/12/2008, Electronic Union Of Travel Industry, http://www.euoti.net/ArticleDetails1.asp?id=1 .‫ﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ‬‫ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭ‬-8 .‫ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‬،‫ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻪ‬9

10

- Pure-player : désigne une entreprise ayant démarré et exerçant son activité uniquement sur internet. Ce terme peut s'appliquer au commerce électronique, le pure player ne proposant aucun magasin où ses clients pourraient venir physiquement effectuer leurs achats. Un exemple de pure play est Amazon.com. Il s'applique également à des sites internet d'information sans édition papier. Pour une entreprise, le choix d'agir en pure play peut être motivé par la rapidité de mise en œuvre, la réduction des coûts, mais aussi par le choix d'une clientèle recherchant ce type d'entreprises. (Extrait de : 29/02/2009, http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pure_play). http://www.euoticonf.com/p2%20dr%20Adel%20anafi.doc ،6‫ ﺹ‬،‫ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﻋﺎﺩﻝ ﺣﻨﻔﻰ ﺣﺴﲔ‬11 20/12/2008, 20/12/2008, http://www.euoticonf.com ،‫ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‬12 ‫ ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ‬- ‫ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻺﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺳﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ – ﻓﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ – ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬،www.euoti.net 13 ‫ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ‬،‫ ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬،‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺧﺘﲑﺕ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺮﺍﹰ ﻟﻺﲢﺎﺩ‬

14

03/02/2009, http://www.islamictourism.com/index_A.php/news_A.php/news_A.php/news_A.php/news_A.php/news_A. php/news_A.php/4170 28/02/2009, http://www.misr.gov.eg/arabic/default.aspx ،2009/01/02 ،‫ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﺮ‬15 14/01/2009, http://www.almasalla.travel/News/News.asp?id=8348 ،‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬16 285

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________

17

18

19

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺪﻗﺔ‬

19/04/2006, http://www.eden-algerie.com/actualite/spip.php?article38 Le schéma directeur d’aménagement touristique (SDAT 2025), 03/12/2009 : http://www.assisesdutourisme.dz/index.php?option=com_content&task=view&id=14&Itemid=34 26/12/2009, http://www.weforum.org/en/media/publications/index.htm

286

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009/07‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (E.G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺸﺎﻭﻱ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻨﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﱐ ﻭﻏﲑﻩ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻣﻮﺣﺪ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻴﺴﺮ ﻭﺑﺈﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﳒﺎﺣﻪ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﹼﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺎﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﻆ ﺍﻷﻭﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻬﺮ ﰲ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﺧﺼﺖ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﲑﺕ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﱐ ﻭﺭﺑﻄﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻦ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﲣﺼﺼﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﲰﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﺶ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺪﻝ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﲑﻭﻗﺮﺍﻃﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻜﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻮ‪‬ﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﱰﻋﺔ ﺳﺎﺭﻋﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﻛﻠﻨﱳ ﻭﰲ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1999‬ﻭﺣﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﰊ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2000‬ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﰐ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﱪﺯ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻇﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺣﻴﺎﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (E.G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ؟‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﲟﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻭﺃﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻗﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﳒﺎﺣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺄﻫﻢ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﲏ ﺗﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺇﺯﺍﺀ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺄﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺃﳘﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﳓﻮ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﺎ ﳏﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻨﺔ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪287‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (E.G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﳊﺪﺍﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﳌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﲜﻮﺍﻧﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺛﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﲤﻴﺰﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﻨﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮ‪‬ﻝ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻘﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﺎﺝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﺗﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮ‪‬ﺟﺖ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﲟﻴﻼﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻬﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﺣ‪‬ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﻮﻑ ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﱃ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺩﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﰲ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺑﺎﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺮ‪‬ﻑ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺆﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﻭﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺴﻜﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﲏ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻨﲔ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﺘﻬﻢ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﺸﺘﻬﻢ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﱃ ﻏﲑﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )‪.(1‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻧﺎﻗﺸﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ "‪ "Electronic Government‬ﻭﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ )‪ (E.G‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ "ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﱪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ"‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ‪‬ﺎ "ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ" ﻭﻏﲑﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻞ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻓﻬﻮ "ﺇﻥ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺎﺭﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺗﻌﻴﺶ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﲢﺎﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ" )‪ .(2‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺑﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ ﳍﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬‬ ‫ﺟﻞ ﻣﻴﺎﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻭﺩﻓﻌﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﲪﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮ‪‬ﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﲔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺇﳚﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.(3) :‬‬

‫‪288‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009/07‬‬

‫‪ -1-3‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﲤﺜﻠﺖ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﰲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﲔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -2-3‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺃﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﺮ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪.‬‬‫‪ -3-3‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﳌﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪...‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﳓﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ -4‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻘﻖ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪.(4) :‬‬ ‫‪ -1-4‬ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻘﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺄﻫﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-4‬ﲣﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﲑﻭﻗﺮﺍﻃﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﻴﺔ ﻹﳒﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﲣﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻨﲔ ﻭﲣﻔﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﰲ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-4‬ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻏﺮﺑﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻔﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4-4‬ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻀﻔﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳑﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﳏﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﰲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﲤﺎﺭﺳﻪ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.(5) :‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻏﲑﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -6‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺃﳘﻬﺎ)‪.(6‬‬

‫‪289‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (E.G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -1-6‬ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻋﱪ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﳍﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻖ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-6‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﰲ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻨﲔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-6‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻵﱄ‪ :‬ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﳎﻤﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﱪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻻ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻗﺘﻨﺎﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﳌﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4-6‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻘﻲ ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻭﻏﲑﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺄﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5-6‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻋﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺪﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺣﻴﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﻌﻰ ﳑﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﲟﺠﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻃﻪ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﺃﳘﻬﻤﺎ ‪.(7) :‬‬ ‫‪ -1-7‬ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺄﻥ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﻣﲔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-7‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺸﻜﹼﻞ ﻋﻘﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﲰﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-7‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺟﺪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻻ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺮﺳ‪‬ﺦ ﰲ ﺫﻫﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻨﲔ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4-7‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﺄﻫﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5-7‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﱪﺯ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﻋﻜﺲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳜﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪290‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009/07‬‬

‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﳑﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻟﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﳓﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﲟﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﱄ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺇﱃ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻜﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﺪ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳓﻮ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻳﻀﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻵﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻟﻜﲔ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻪ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ)‪.(8‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ‪ :‬ﺳﺒﻖ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﰲ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﲤﻜﲔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻵﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﻤﻴﻊ)‪.(9‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﳊﺎﻣﻞ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﻢ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺠﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.(10) :‬‬ ‫ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺄﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﲟﻨﻄﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪ -4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ :‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺗﺘﺰﻭ‪‬ﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻇﻔﲔ)‪.(11‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﳌﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﲟﻨﺘﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ)‪.(12‬‬

‫‪291‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (E.G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺪﻋﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﳌﺎ ﲢﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﳓﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ)‪.(13‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ‪ :‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺇﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﺤﻪ ﺍﻹﳓﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻫﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺟﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﳍﺎ ﲟﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ)‪.(14‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻀﻞ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻵﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻈﻢ ﻣﺪﳎﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻳﺴﺮ ﺗﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻭﺑﺄﺟﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪.‬‬‫)‪(15‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﲤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﻮﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪. .‬‬ ‫ﲤﻜﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ‪ :‬ﳑﺎ ﻻﺷﻚ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﲨﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭﺇﺑﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﲢﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚﹼ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﲟﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺍﳌﻮﺣ‪‬ﺪ)‪.(16‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻭﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺣﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﻌﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﰊ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﹼﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ)‪.(17‬‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺎ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ؟ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺃﳘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ؟ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺠﺴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﰎ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﱂ‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴـﻦ ﺃﳘـﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳـﻠﻲ‪.(18) :‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻋﺠﺰ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﰲ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﺄﺧﲑ ﰲ ﺇﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻟﺴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻈﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪292‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ – ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009/07‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺎ ﻻﺯﺍﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺣﱴ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺫ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪ %14,36‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ‪ %5,33‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻏﻢ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺜﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺨﻮﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺇﻥ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻨﲔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﻢ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﰲ ﲢﻴﲔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﻋﻘﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺄﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1-1‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﻆ ﺍﻷﻭﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﳕﻂ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻣﻮﺣ‪‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-1‬ﺗﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﻌﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-1‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻵﱄ‪ ،‬ﺇﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻞ ﻭﻏﲑﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4-1‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﳘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5-1‬ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻟﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺇﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﲝﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻵﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻟﻜﲔ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6-1‬ﻭﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ ﲢﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻋﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1-2‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻫﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻔﹼﻞ ﲟﺠﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻟﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-2‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺴﻴﺲ ﻭﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻨﲔ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﳍﻢ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻗﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻭﻗﻊ ﰲ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﲑﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-2‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻣﺎﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﳔﺮﺍﻁ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪.‬‬

‫‪293‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (E.G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -4-2‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﳉﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺮﺍﻉ ﰲ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻃﻠﻖ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2004‬ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻘﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﻌﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﻭﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﱐ ﺑﻨﺴﻖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺣﺪ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﲨﻴﻌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﳛﻘﻖ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﰲ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﻌﻰ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﺮﻉ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2004‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﱂ ﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﰲ ﺇﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪ ،2004 ،‬ﺹ ‪.25‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪45.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪47.-46‬‬ ‫‪-4‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻋﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،2002 ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،255-253‬ﻳﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-5‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﻣﻲ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ -‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،abata 400@ Yahoo.co.uk،2007/12/08 :‬ﺹ ‪ ،02‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﻣﻲ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ‪،2007/12/10 :‬‬ ‫‪ ،abata 400@ Yahoo.co.uk‬ﺹ ‪ ،04‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﻣﻲ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،12-10‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،261‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،261‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪262.‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،264‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،266‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﺗﻴﺸﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،http://www.minshawi.com.2007/12/04 :‬ﺹ‪ ،02-01‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬ﺗﻴﺸﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،02‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻤﻰ ﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.258-253‬‬ ‫‪ -16‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،251-249‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -17‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،258‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -18‬ﻫﻴﺸﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﲨﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﳋﱪ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.2006/05/14 ،‬‬

‫‪294‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺍﳌﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ(‬

‫ﲪﻴﺪﺓ ﳐﺘﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﻠﻔﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﳍﺎ ﻭ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺪ ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻢ ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ‪،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺮﻕ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﻭ ﻳﺪﺭﺱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﻓﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﳌﱪﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﳒﺎﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺍﲡﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻓﺎﺟﺘﺎﺣﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻔﺤﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻓﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﲑ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﲔ ﺑﺄﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻧﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﳍﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻌﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻔﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﳌﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﻧﺎ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳌﺎ ﳝﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻻﻥ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻫﻢ‬‫ﳏﺪﺩ ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺇﱃ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﳏﺎﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻵﰐ ‪-:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪-:‬‬ ‫‪ .1-1‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺼﻮﺩ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫‪295‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ‪،‬ﻓﺄﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪،‬ﰒ ﺗﻄﺮﺡ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻌﻞ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻋﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﳏﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﻘﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ‪،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﳌﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺻﻐﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻭﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺴﺠﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﳚﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻮﺳﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳜﻠﻖ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻰ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﺿﲔ ﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﲔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺜﲑ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺠﺖ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ)‪ (1‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ‪ ،‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻷﻭﱃ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ‪،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻠﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺑﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﲏ ﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﺨﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﺟﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺆﺧﺬ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺘﺘﺒﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺆﺧﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﰲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻤﻬﻢ ‪.‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﻊ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.British‬‬ ‫‪ Petroleum‬ﻭ ‪ Cable and warless‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪.2 1973‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﲰﻲ ‪،‬ﻭ ﺍﻻﲰﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻜﻮﻙ ﻭ ﺇﳕﺎ ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ ‪،‬ﻭ ﻧﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ‪،‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ‪،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ‪.:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﳌﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﻘﺼﻮﺩ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻦ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ‪،‬ﻭ ﰲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺘﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺣﻮﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﺸﺘﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﳛﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻴﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﳉﺄﺕ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺭﺧﻴﺼﺔ ‪،‬ﻓﺘﺒﲔ ﳍﺎ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺋﺺ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﳌﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺠﻊ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻨﻔﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻤﻮﺽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩ ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻴﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﳍﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻬﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻛﺪﺕ ﻏﻠﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ‬

‫‪296‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ‪،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﲔ ‪، 4‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﰲ ﻫﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺗﲔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﱰﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺙ ﰲ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪British .Petroleum‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻜﻮﻙ ﲡﻨﺒﺎ ﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ً‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﳌﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻓﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺘﺒﲔ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩ ‪ :‬ﻭﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺧﻄﺮﺍ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻜﻚ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺎﳌﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﺄﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﳚﻌﻞ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺎ ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪،‬ﻓﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﻭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ‬ ‫‪ .2-1‬ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫‪،‬ﻓﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰒ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ‪،‬ﺃﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﰱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ؟‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﹰ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻧﻼﻗﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻓﻴﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﺳﻌﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻯ ﺣﺘﻤﺎﹰ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻋﺪﻡ ﳒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﺳﻌﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﲞﺲ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻯ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻘﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺬﺍﺏ ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺿﺎﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺟﻴﺪ ‪،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﳔﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﻐﺎﻻﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺁﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻛﻞ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﺗﻌﱪ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻧﺴﱮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺗﺆﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺸﺄﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﻌﻼﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ‪،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻝ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻭﺳﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ ﳒﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﳌﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﻣﻐﺎﻻﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺰﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﲔ ﳘﺎ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﳛﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺳﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ‪،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩ ﻓﺎﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳋﱪﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﻮﻥ ) ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﱪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪﻭﻥ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺷﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪297‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻫﻮ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺘﺒﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻇﻔﲔ ﻭ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳝﻴﻠﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺇﳕﺎ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﺭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﺎ ﻣﺆﻛﺪﺓ ‪،‬ﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﹰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺘﺒﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﰲ ﺍﻵﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻠﺠﺄ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﲑﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻮﻙ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﳜﺺ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺒﺨﺲ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪،‬ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﲝﺠﺔ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ‪،‬ﻓﻤﺜﻼ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﳓﻮ ‪ 23,6‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ""Amersham International‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ، 1982‬ﻭ ﰲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﻭ ﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ Paribas‬ﻭ ‪ 36‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺛﺮ ﺑﻴﻊ " ‪ " Sogenal‬ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ، 51987‬ﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﺑﲔ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻠﻠﲔ ﻳﻌﺘﱪﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺳﺒﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﳑﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺸﻮﺀ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻛﱪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ_ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﰲ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﻪ ﰲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﲔ ) ﺑﻴﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ( ‪،‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻴﻊ ﻛﺘﻞ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ ﻳٌﺨﺘﱪ ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪،‬ﰒ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺘﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺑﺄﻋﺪﺍﺩٍ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ‪،‬ﻓﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻚ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﳛﺴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﳊﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪،‬ﻓﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﺘﻀﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲣﻔﻴﻀﻬﺎ ﳋﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﱂ ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪،‬ﻭ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3-1‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺄﻟﻮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ‪،‬ﻭﲢﺪﺩ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﰱ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪،‬ﻭﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺮﺍ ﺃﺩﱏ ﲢﺪﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﻭﻝ ﲢﺘﻪ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ "ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ" ‪،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﳍﺒﻮﻁ ﻭﻓﻘﺎﹰ ﻵﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪،‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ‪،‬ﻭﰱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺿﺎﻣﻨﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺿﺪ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳ‪‬ﻠﺰﻡ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻜﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪:‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻜﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﺨﺼﺘﻬﺎ ‪،‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺖ ‪،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺭﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻜﻮﻙ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪.6‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻜﻮﻙ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻃﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻟﻸﺳﻬﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺣﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ‪،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺮﻫﻮﻥ ﲟﺪﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻬﻢ ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ﳑﺎ‬

‫‪298‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﳚﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﺖ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻜﻮﻙ ﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ـ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻓﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺼﻄﺤﺒﺔﹰ ﺑﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﳍﺎ ‪،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﳛﻘﻖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺧﺸﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﻭﻝ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺻﻜﻮﻛﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻳﺆﻭﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﻧﺪﺛﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎﹰ ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍﹰ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻜﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ‪:‬‬‫ﻓﺎﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻌﲑ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺝ_ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﲎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ‪،‬ﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﺴﺢ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ‪،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺘﺐ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ‪،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﲣﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ‬ ‫ﻭ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻔﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﻪ ﳝﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻓﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﻔﺎﺿﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻓﻬﻞ ﺳﻴﻠﺠﺄ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ – ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ – ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﻠﻔﺔ ﳌﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﻥ ﺑﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﳉﺬﺏ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﺎ ﳍﺪﻑ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺮ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻱ ﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺷﺪ ﺻﺮﺍﻣﺔ ؛ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﲟﺎ ﲤﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﻼﻙ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﲔ ) ﺍﳉﺪﺩ ( ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻋﺎﱄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﲣﻠﻲ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﰊ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳍﺒﻮﻁ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻧﺪﻓﺎﻉ ﻣﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ) ﺇﻏﺮﺍﻕ ( ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈ‪‬ﻢ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺠﺄﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﳍﻢ ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﳌﺎ ﳛﻮﺯﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺣﱴ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪﻩ ﺍﳋﺒﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ " ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﳍﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ " ‪ :‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﰲ ﻳﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﳏﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺛﺮﻩ ﺳﻴﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ ) ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ( ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪299‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﲦﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺘﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺠﺢ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﻬﻤﺎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﻬﻤﺎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﺳﺘﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻳﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺳﺲ ﻭﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1-2‬ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻕ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺇ‪‬ﺎﺀ ﳊﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻏﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺬﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺮ ﻻ ﲤﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﻪ ﳌﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .2-2‬ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ) ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﻠﻔﺎ ؛ ﻛﺘﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺘﺒﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﲑﻫﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻃﲏ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻓﺎﺋﺾ ( ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻻ ﺗﺜﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻴﻠﺖ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺧﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﺘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3-2‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ :‬ﻓﻨﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﳏﺎﻁ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲞﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺰﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺿﺎﺀ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﳝﺜﻞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ ؛ ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻜﲑ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ " ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺔ " ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺑﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺍ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺎ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻐﲑ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻲ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺜﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4-2‬ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﱯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ‪ :‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﺎﻉ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺿﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻤﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻪ ﺣﲔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5-2‬ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﲟﺨﺎﻃﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﻮﺍﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﻳﻦ )ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ – ﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﻳﻦ –‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﲟﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﻟﻸﺟﺎﻧﺐ ( ﲢﻘﻖ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﻤﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ‪. 8‬‬ ‫‪.6-2‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ " ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ "‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺒﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺘﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫ ﺗﻐﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﲝﺼﺺ ﺿﺨﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺨﺎﻣﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ، 9‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻃﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﰲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺍﻣﻰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻮﺍﺝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻏﺒﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﳌﺎ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺄﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﱏ‬

‫‪300‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﺎﻋﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺩﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.10‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺴﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻜﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺼﻨﻒ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﳉﺄﺕ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﲞﺎﺻﺔ ﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻛﺎ‪‬ﺮ ﻭﺑﻮﻟﻮﻧﻴﺎ‪.11‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ – ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻪ – ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﱪﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ –‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1-3‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ – ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ – ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻏﲑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﺍﺕ – ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ – ﻏﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﺒﲔ ‪ ،‬ﳘﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﳒﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻴﺪﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﻐﺮﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﲟﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺘﻬﺎ ؛ ﻓﺮﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﲤﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﲡﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺀﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ؛ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﻓﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﲟﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺰﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳚﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺰﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ‬‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻬﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺇﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪..2-3‬ﺃﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩ ﰲ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ) ﻫﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺄﻟﻮﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻊ ( ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻓﺄﻳﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ؛ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺃﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩ ؟‬ ‫ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩ ﺃﻋﺘﻤﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ؛ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬

‫‪301‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩ ﳛﻘﻖ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻠﺐ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻟﻸﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺩﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻪ ؛ ﺇﺫ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ – ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﺨﺲ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﰲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ – ﺣﱴ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﲔ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻻ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﲣﺘﻔﻲ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺐ ‪،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﻴﺔ ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲣﺼﺺ ﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﳏﺪﺩ ﻻ ﳛﻘﻖ ﳒﺎﺡ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺮﻭﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﻳﻦ ؛ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺟﺬﺍﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺘﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻧﺴﱯ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Relative sous – evaluation‬ﻷﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﲔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ؛ ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺋﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﺸﺄ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ) ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ( ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻨﺢ ﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﲢﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ) ﻛﺎﺷﺘﺮﺍﻁ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺣﻴﺎﺯﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﻮﺯ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﲔ ‪...‬ﺍﱁ ( ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﳒﺎﺡ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﺎﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻗﻮﻯ ﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺨﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪،‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﳒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺸﺮﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻹﳒﺎﺡ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3-3‬ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻓﺎﺋﺾ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻏﲑ ﳏﺪﺩ ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻚ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻼﺕ ؛ ﺇﺫ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺼﻞ ﲟﻘﺘﻀﺎﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎ ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺜﲑ ﺷﻜﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ؛ ﻛﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺭﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻐﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﻧﺐ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ – ﻛﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ – ﳛﺒﺬ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺘﺒﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4-3‬ﺗﻼﺅﻡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﳘﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻼﺀﻡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﲤﺮ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻬﻮﺽ ﲝﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺧﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭﺭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪302‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺩﻓﺘﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﺒﻴﻌﻪ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳌﺮﻭﺭﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﺘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳜﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺷﺊ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫‪،‬ﻭﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﺒﲏ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﻤﻴﻪ ﺑﺜﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺛﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻼﺅﻡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺗﺸﲑ ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺜﲑ ﺷﻜﻮﻛﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﱴ ﻭﻟﻮ ‪‬ﻴﺄﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﳒﺎﺣﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ؛ ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺍﺗﻴﺔ )ﻛﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﱐ ﰲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻨﺠﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﻭﲞﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﰲ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻻ ﲤﻨﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻚ ﺣﲔ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻟﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﲟﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻭﳒﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﲦﺔ ﻣﱪﺭ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.5-3‬ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﻧﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﻕ ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻟﻸﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ؛ ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﲣﻄﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺪ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳌﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ – ﺃﻭ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ – ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺫﺍ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺊ – ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ – ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﲤﺖ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻃﻮﻛﻴﻮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺷﻬﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻲ ﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫)‪ (1988-86‬ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﻔﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 17.4‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻧﻚ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1985‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 71.2‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻧﻚ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1986‬ﰒ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻧﻚ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪.1987‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ 8.7‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻧﻚ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ، 1986‬ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻧﻚ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ، 1987‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻮﺑﻠﺖ – ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻈﻬﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﳍﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ – ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﻄﻂ ﻃﻤﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﻕ ﻓﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﲞﻄﺮ ﺍﳍﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ .13‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﰲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻬﻢ ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻻ ﲡﺪ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﻥ ﱂ ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪303‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﲞﺴﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ؛ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ " ﻭﻫﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺑﻐﲑ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ " ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺍﳍﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﲣﺼﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻻ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﲝﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﳑﺎ ﲡﺪﺭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﻛﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﳍﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻳﺆﰐ ﲦﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﻣﻲ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ – ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ – ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺃﻣﺎﻝ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺟﻠﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﱂ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺘﻐﻴﻪ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻨﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻔﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﳋﺼﺨﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺎﳋﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﳍﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺎﰲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺩ ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻄﺮﻗﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﲟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻫﲑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪- Michel Durand, la bourse, édition la découverte, paris, 1987, p:42‬‬ ‫‪-Santitni J J: Les dénationalisation Britanniques, sans date, Puf, France, p: 118‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪- DANGEARD F : nationalisation et dénationalisations en grande- Bretagne , notes et études‬‬ ‫‪documentaires , La documentation française Paris 1993 ,N 4739_4740 .‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Longueville Guy: Les privatisation Française avant et après la crise boursière de 1987, Dunod,‬ـ‬ ‫‪Paris, 1990 p: 19‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪-DANGEARD F : nationalisation et dénationalisations en grande- Bretagne, op. Cit. PP 42-45‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪- Joyrette Jean: Comment réussir La privatisation, Dunod, Paris, sans année d’édition, p:130‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪- Ibid, P:135‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪- Ibid ,p:192‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪- Problèmes économique chronologie de privatisation, N° 118, France 1992, p:15‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪- Wright V: chacun privatiser a sa manière, op. Cit. P:44‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪- Ibid, p:24‬‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﲪﻴﺪﺓ ﳐﺘﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺼﺨﺼﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،2001 ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ‪98 ،97 :‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪304‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺻـﺮ – ﺟﺎﻣـﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗـﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃ‪ /‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺷﺮﻣﺔ – ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺟﻴﺠﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﳛﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺪﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﲑﻫﺎ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﱏ ﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋـﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻯ ﻣﺎ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺣﱴ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺹ ﳒﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻷﻏﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﻼ ‪‬ﺣ‪‬ﻆ ﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﳊﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺻﺪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻱ ﺣﻘﻘﺘـﻪ ﺗﻠـﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﲡﺮﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ)*(‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼـﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳـﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻫـﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ 729‬ﻣﻠﻴـﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳـﻨﺔ ‪ ،2007‬ﻭﻣـﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ 840‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ‪ ،2008‬ﻭ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪ 3,5‬ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺳـﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣـﺔ ﺃﻱ ﰲ ﺳـﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،2013‬ﻭﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﳕﻮ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ‪ ٪ 24‬ﺳﻨﻮﻳﹰﺎ)‪ ،(1‬ﻭﺍﳌﻠﻔﺖ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩﹸﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﻄـﺎﱐ ﺑـﺎﺭﺭﻛﻠﻴﺰ‬ ‫)‪ (BARCLYS BANK‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺴﺮﻱ )‪ (UBS‬ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ؛ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﻳﻀـﺎﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺇﻥ ﺑﻨﻮﻛﺎﹰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻴﱵ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ )‪ (CITI BANK‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜـﻲ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﲰﻪ )ﺳﻴﱵ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﳉﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘـﺎﱄ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﺗـﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﺮﻋﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻴﹰﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﻬﺪﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻭﻟﻴـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺮﻓﻀﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻟﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺮ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺣﺎﻟﻴـﹰﺎ)‪ ،(2‬ﻗـﺪ ﺃﺩﺕ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺒﲏ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺗﺮﺍﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1-1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﻌ ‪‬ﺮ‪‬ﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ـﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﻏﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﺜﻞ ﻭﺍﳋﻠﻖ ﺍﻹﺳـﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎـﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌـﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫‪305‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻘﺼﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴـﻖ ﺍﳊﻴـﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺒـﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﳝـﺔ ﻟﻸﻣـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ)‪.(3‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌـﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﲟﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﻣﻘﺘﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ)‪.(4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺼـﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟـﱵ ﺗﺰﺍﻭﳍـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-1‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﲤﻴﺰﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻏﲑﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺬﹰﺍ ﺃﻭﻋﻄﺎ ًﺀ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻨﺴﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ ﻗﺪ ﺣ ‪‬ﺮ‪‬ﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ )ﺍﳌﻤـ ‪‬ﻮ‪‬ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ( )‪.(5‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺋﺪﻱ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﹰ ﳉﻤﻴـﻊ‬‫ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳋﻠﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﲣﻀﻊ )ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ( ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﷲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﳍﺎ)‪.(6‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤ ‪‬ﻮﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳊﻼﻝ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﱄ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻼﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﲦﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻤﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳـﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﲤﻮ‪‬ﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ)‪ ،(7‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﳛﺮ ‪‬ﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ ﻭﺗﺴ‪‬ﺒﺐ ﺿﺮﺭﹰﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﲡﻌﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻪ ﳑﻴﺰﹰﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺮ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺸـﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻮ ﹼﻇﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻓﻌﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺿﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﲣﻀﻊ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳊﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﺍﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ ﻛ ﹼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘـﻮﻡ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨـﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﺼﺎﳊﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ)‪.(8‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﺻـ ﹰ‬‫ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﳌـ ‪‬ﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻷﻓـﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﳌﺼﺎﱀ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺗﻮﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻷﻣﻮﺍﻟﻪ ﻻﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪306‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻼﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﻗﺮﻭﺿﻪ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻭﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻋﺎﺋﺪﹰﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﳒﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺣﻘﻖ ﺭﲝﹰﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻳﻬـﺘﻢ ﺃﻛﺜـﺮ ﺑﺴـﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ)‪ ،(9‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﺜﺮﻭﺍﺕ )ﺳﻠﻊ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ( ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺋﺪ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻮﺑﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﹰﺎ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﳘﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-1‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﳎﺮﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﲤﺘﻨﻊ ﻋﻦ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﶈ ‪‬ﺮﻣﺔ ﻓﻘـﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﳍﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﳜﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻳﺴﲑ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺣﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺣﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻹﺳـﻼﻣﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌـﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﳊﺮﺝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﻤﲔ)‪.(10‬‬

‫ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷـﺎﺩ ﻷﻓـﺮﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﱐ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺋﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ)‪.(11‬‬

‫ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﻃﻤﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺑﻪ ‪ :‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﳍﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳊـﻼﻝ‬‫ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﳛﺮﺻﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳـﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜـﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲤﻜﻨﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ)‪: (12‬‬ ‫ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﲰﻌﺔ ﻃﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﰲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻣﻌﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﳌﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻭﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻨﻮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪:‬‬‫ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺃﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ )ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ (...‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤـﻊ ﺍﻟـﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺸـﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨـﻮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ)‪.(13‬‬

‫ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﳏﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﻨﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻓﺮﺹ ﻭﺻﻴﻎ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ)‪ ،(14‬ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﻷﻭﻟﺌﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﻳﺮﻓﻀﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎ ‪.‬‬

‫ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺧﻠﻖ ﻓﺮﺹ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪﺓ‬‫‪،‬ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪307‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳـﻴﺔ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬‫ﺗﻮﻇﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ‪ :‬ﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﲔ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜـﻞ‬‫ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻮ‪‬ﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺷﺮﻋﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻛﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔ ‪‬ﻮﺿﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﰲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺻﺪ‪‬ﻢ ﻧﻴﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﻛﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻋﻤﻼﺋﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻭﻳﻔ ‪‬ﻮﺿﻮﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﱪﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓـﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ)‪.(15‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻨﻮﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﻘﲔ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫـﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻗﻮﻟﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ‪" :‬ﺇﳕﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻛﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﻟﻔﺔ ﻗﻠﻮ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺭﻣﲔ ﻭﰲ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨـﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳـﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺑـﺎﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳊﺴـﻨﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﷲ ﻭﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﷲ ﻭﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻢ ﺣﻜﻴﻢ")‪ ،(16‬ﻓﻀ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4-1‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﱂ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺍﻣﺘـﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜـﺜﲑ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﺮﺻﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﲏ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺍﻹﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﺖ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1997‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ‬‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﺮﺍﹰ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺰﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻵﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳـﻞ‬‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﲟﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺼـﺎﺭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ﺒﲎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ )ﺃﻱ ﺍﻗﺘﺴﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ( ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻠﻎ ‪ 1,3‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ )‪ % 20‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﳝﺜﻞ ﲬﺲ ﺳﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻋـﺪﺩ ﺍﻟـﺬﻳﻦ‬‫ﻳﺮﻏﺒﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﳓﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺷﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺃﺿﺤﻰ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺳﻮﻗﺎﹰ ﻣﺮﲝﺎﹰ ﻭﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﰎﹼ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (2008-2007‬ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻈـﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺼـﺮﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺻﻴﻎ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺴﻤﲔ ﳘﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪308‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ -1-2‬ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻦ ﺑﺎﳌﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﰲ ﲢ ‪‬ﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺑﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻗﺘﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1-1-2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﳘﺎ ‪ :‬ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻜﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﲰﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺑﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺴـﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻥ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻓﻴﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ)‪ .(17‬ﺇﺫﻥ ﻓﺎﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﲟﺎﻝ ﻏﲑﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﹼﰎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻃﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳋﺴـﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ )ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻪ( ﻓﻴﻜﻔﻴﻪ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺼـﲑ‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-1-2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻄﺒ‪‬ﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﻣﻮﺍﻟﻪ ﺷﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻛﻪ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻬﺎ)‪.(18‬‬ ‫‪ -3-1-2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺰﺍﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻗﺎﺓ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﺭﻋﺔ ﻧﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﳌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺮﻭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﺭﺽ( ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳَﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻉ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻪ ﲟﻌﲎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻘـﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺈﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﳌﻦ ﻳﺰﺭﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﱂ ﻳﻄﺒ‪‬ﻖ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟـﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﺘﺴﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ % 75‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ)‪.(19‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻗﺎﺓ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺭﺽ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺰﺭﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺄﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻉ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ)‪.(20‬‬ ‫‪ -2-2‬ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟـﱵ ﻳﺘﻴﺤﻬـﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳـﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1-2-2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺍﲝﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺑﻨﺎ ًﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﺎ ًﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻋﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻳﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻤﻼﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﲝﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻠﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻏﲑﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﲝﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺮﻭﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺒﻠﻐﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟـﺮﺑﺢ ﳌـﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ)‪.(21‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﻳﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺴﻤﲔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ ﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﺘﻬﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺟـﺔ ﺇﱃ‬‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻋﺪ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﺑﺜﻤﻦ ﻭﺭﺑﺢ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻋﺪ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒـﺎﺋﻊ ﻭﺍﳌﺸـﺘﺮﻱ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﻋﺪ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻋﺪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺜﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﱪﺓ ﺷﺮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺭﺑﺢ ﻣﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎﹰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-2-2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺟﲑ ‪ :‬ﻭﻣﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ( ﻻﻳﺴـﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺮﻳﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ﺪﻓﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺟﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﲤﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌـﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﻘﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪309‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻮ ‪‬ﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﲟﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺟﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘـﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻠﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺟﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺄﺟﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻧﻪ)‪.(22‬‬ ‫ﺴﻠﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﻬﺎﺀ ﻫﻮ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺁﺟﻞ ﺑﻌﺎﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲟﻮﺟﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟـﺜﻤﻦ‬ ‫‪ -3-2-2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻢ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﺪﳝﻪ ﻧﻘﺪﹰﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﻀﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺟﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺟﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﻦ)‪.(23‬‬ ‫ﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴـﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺴﻠﻢ ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﻲ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﺘ‪‬ﺤﺪﺛﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﺻ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﲔ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻀﺞ ﺍﶈﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4-2-2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﺼﻨﺎﻉ ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺼﻨﺎﻉ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻘﺪ ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﺸﺘﺮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺼﻨﻊ ﺻﻨﻌﹰﺎ ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﳝﻪ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﲟـﻮﺍﺩ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻭﺻﺎﻑ ﳐﺼﻮﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺜﻤﻦ ﳏﺪﺩ )‪.(24‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺼﻨﺎﻉ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻳﻄ‪‬ﺒﻖ ﻓﻴﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﳒﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﻜﻦ ﻳﺼﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﰒ ﻳﺒﻴﻌﻪ ﺇﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ـﺪﻓﻊ ﻟـﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5-2-2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺴﻦ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲟﻘﺘﻀﺎﻩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺎﻝ ﳑﻠﻮﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺮﺽ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺩ ﻣﺜﻠﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ)‪ ،(25‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "ﺣﺴﻦ" ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺑﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺭﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﳏﺮﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘ ‪‬ﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳊﺴﻨﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺳﺒﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺗﻨﻈﹼﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘـﺪ ﻛـﺎﻥ ﳍـﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﺦ ﺩﻋﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻛﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺩﻭ ﹰﻻ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﳊﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‬ ‫ﰲ ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ)‪.(26‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧـﺪﻣﺎﺕ "ﺑﻨـﻚ ﺍﻟﱪﻛـﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋـﺮﻱ" ﺍﻟـﺬﻱ ﺗﺄﺳـﺲ ﰲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1990/12/06‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ ﻭﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻨـﻮﻙ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ)‪ ،(27‬ﰒ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺑﻪ ﺭﲰﻴﹰﺎ ﰲ‪ ،1991/05/20 :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺃﺣﻜـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸـﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳـﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ .‬ﰒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﰒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻭﻫﻮ "ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﹰﺎ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺛﺎﱐ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺼـﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ "ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ" ﺍﻟﺪﻱ ﰎ ﺇﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻪ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 2008/ 10/ 20 :‬ﺑـ ‪ 72‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﻨـﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺍﺋـﺮﻱ )‪100‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ)‪.(28‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺼﺮ ﲡﺮﺑﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺧﻀﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻄ‪‬ﺒﻖ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ )ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺘﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺇ ﹼﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲤﺜﻠﺖ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴـﻖ‬ ‫‪310‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﱪﻛﺔ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲡﻠﺖ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﰲ ﺗﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﲤﻮﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﲝﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻃﻔﺮﺓ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﲡﺎﻭﺯﺕ ‪ 676‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،2008‬ﳏﻘﻘﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪ 48‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺼـﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣـﻦ ‪،(29)2007‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﺲ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳉﻮ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻬﻢ ﺗـﺪﺭﳚﻴﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺳﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﳑﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺤﻪ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﳕﻮ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪ ‪‬ﻋﻢ ﻭﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﲔ ﻳﻔﻀ‪‬ﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻨﺎﺯ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﺩﻋﻬﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣـﻲ ﺍﻟـﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻔﻘﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﱂ ﳛﻘﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﱂ ﹺﻳﹺﺆﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﻛﻪ ﳏﻠﻴـﹰﺎﹰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﱃ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺬﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳊﺒﻮﺏ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﹰﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ﻌﺘﱪ ﺣﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟـﻚ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ‪‬ﻴﺌـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1-3‬ﺗﻘﻨﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﳏﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﻭﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬـﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺳﻦ‪ ‬ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﰲ ﻫﺪﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺆ ‪‬ﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳ ‪‬ﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﰲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻔـﻖ ﻣـﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ)‪:(30‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﳉﻨﺔ ﳐﺘﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﱪﺍﺀ ﺷﺮﻋﻴﲔ ﻭﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﻭﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﲔ ﻭﻣﺼﺮﻓﻴﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻠﻴﻔﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺼـﺎﺭﻑ‬‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﹼﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﲡﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﳒﺎﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ‬‫ﺃﺧﲑﹰﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﳌﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-3‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﰲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛـﺰﻱ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺭﻗﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﺘﻼﺀﻡ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﲡﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﹸﺫﹸﻛﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻦ‪ ‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻳﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ )ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ( ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻫـﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻈﻢ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ )ﰲ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﳌﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪311‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -1-2-3‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺩﺍﺋﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻋﲔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ﻔﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺩﺍﺋﻊ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻷﻥ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﲏ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺴـﺒﺔ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻷﻣـﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺩﺍﺋﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻻ ﳚﺐ ﺇﺧﻀﺎﻉ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟـﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﲣﻔﻴﻀﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻼﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ)‪:(31‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺩﺍﺋﻊ ﺍﻵﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﳏﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺸـﺎﺭﻙ ﰲ‬‫ﻼ ﻋـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻭﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺃﺻﺤﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ ‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﻀ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻛﺄﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺩﺍﺋﻊ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﻲ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﳌﺎ ﰲ ﺫﻟـﻚ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﳐﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺷﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺗﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻭﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2-2-3‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﺠﺄ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻟﻺﻗﺮﺍﺽ ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ )ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ( ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆ ‪‬ﺩ‪‬ﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻛﻤﻠﺠٍﺄ ﺃﺧﲑ ﻟﻺﻗﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺣﲔ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﻷﺯﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮ‪‬ﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺳﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺪ‪‬ﻡ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻼﺕ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ‬‫ﻳﻨﺎﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻔﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻮﺩﻋﺔ )ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﹰﺎ(‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺃﻥ ﳚﻤﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﻳﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳛﺪ‪‬ﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﳍﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺼـﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﻲ ﲤﻜﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﺠﺄ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻟﻺﻗﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮ‪‬ﺿـﻬﺎ ﻷﺯﻣـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ)‪ ،(32‬ﻭﻳﺘ ‪‬ﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺛﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻷﺳـﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﻓﻮﺭﺍﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3-2-3‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻷﺯﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻛﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﺳـﻲ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺘـﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴـﻴﻮﻟﺔ)‪ ،(33‬ﺇﺫ‬ ‫ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻋـﻦ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﻻ ﺍﳋﺼﻢ ﻷﻧﻪ ﳏﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤـﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻴﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃ ﹼﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﻀﺎﻉ ﺟﺰ ٍﺀ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺩﺍﺋﻊ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﺰ ٍﺀ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺑﻞ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻭﲢﺖ ﺭﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺗـﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻋﲔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺳﻠﻔﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺩﺍﺋﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4-2-3‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺗ‪‬ﻘﺎﺱ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ )ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ( ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺻـﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﺤـﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺯﻝ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻝ ‪ II‬ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﹰﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2007‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﱪﻛﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ )ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ( ﺗﻄ‪‬ﺒﻖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺯﻝ ‪ ،I‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒ‪‬ﻴﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧـﻼﻝ ﻫـﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒ‪‬ﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨـﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳـﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻋـﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﳋﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ)‪.(34‬‬ ‫‪312‬‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﳊ ﹼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﺒﲏ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﻩ ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪ IFSB‬ﲟﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،2005‬ﺣﻴﺚ ‪‬ﻭ‪‬ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺯﻝ ‪ II‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺧﺼﻮﺻـﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤـﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻲ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﻓﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺯﻝ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺇﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﹰ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﺮﺿـﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻨ‪‬ﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5-2-3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﻴﺐ ﻛﺜﲑﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﳚﺐ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﻳﱯ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻭﲣﺮﻳﺞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻠـﺔ‬‫ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﺴ ‪‬ﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﳌﺪﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴـﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻨـﻮﻙ ﺑـﺎﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺻﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺗـﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜـﺎﺭ ﺍﳌـﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻛـﺰ‬‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﳏﻠﻴﹰﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﲡﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺭﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻫـﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ـﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ )ﺟﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺳـﻼﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜـﻞ ‪ :‬ﻫﻴﺌـﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﺳـﺒﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﳏﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ‪) IFSB‬ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳊﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺬﺭ‬ ‫‪ Les règles prudentielles‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺑﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺧﺼﻮﺻـﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤـﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨـﻮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻤﻴﺔ ﳚﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺰﺍﻳـﺪ ﻋـﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﲔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺣ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﹰﺍﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎ ﹰﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻃﻦ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋـﺮﻱ ﺍﳌﺴـﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧـﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻁ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻂﺀ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻔـﺎﻕ ﻻﺑـﺪ ﻭﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻀ ‪‬ﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ﺘﺎﺡ ﳍﺎ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫)*(‪ -‬ﻭ ﻧﻌﲏ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﱯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﺃﻃﻠﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﺗﺎﺭﳜﻴﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴ ﹰﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ -(1‬ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻱ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ؛ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ 17 :‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪ ،2009‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪.11067‬‬ ‫)‪ -(2‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻣﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻨﻄﻘﺠﻲ ‪ :‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺸﻖ – ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪.2008 ،‬‬ ‫‪313‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﲑﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫)‪ -(3‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﲨﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﻤﺎﺭﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺄ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،1996 ،‬ﺹ ‪.48 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(4‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﰊ ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،2004 ،‬ﺹ ‪.86 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(5‬ﻧﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺸﻮﻑ ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪ ،www.kantakji.com :‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ‪.2009/03/17 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(6‬ﺣﺴﻦ ﺳﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ "ﻣﺴﺘﺠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﰲ ﺳـﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﰲ ﺿـﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ" ﺍﳌﻨﻌﻘﺪ ﺑﺪﻣﺸﻖ ‪ -‬ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ‪ 3 - 2 :‬ﲤﻮﺯ ‪.2005‬‬ ‫)‪ -(7‬ﻃﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﷲ ﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،1998 ،‬ﺹ ‪.17 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(8‬ﺑﺸﲑ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺸﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﱂ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ‪ :‬ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ؛ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲝﺚ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟـﻮﻃﲏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﺑﺒﺸﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ‪ 25 - 24 :‬ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻞ ‪.2006‬‬ ‫)‪ -(9‬ﻃﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﷲ ﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.17 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(10‬ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،2006 ،‬ﺹ ‪.22 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(11‬ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.23 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(12‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﰊ ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.90 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(13‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻠﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻔﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،1983 ،‬ﺹ ‪.153 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(14‬ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.22 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(15‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻐﺮﰊ ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.93 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(16‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪.60 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(17‬ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﲨﻌﺔ ﺩﺭﻭﻳﺶ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭ ﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﲝﺚ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳـﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻌﻘﺪ ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻫﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ‪ 29 - 27 :‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ‪.2006‬‬ ‫)‪ -(18‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،2006 ،‬ﺹ ‪.175 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(19‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺳﺤﻨﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﻜﺮﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩ ‪ :‬ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﲝﺚ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟـﺪﻭﱄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺣﻮﻝ "ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻗﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻨﺔ" ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻢ ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ‪ 12 - 11 :‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪.2008‬‬ ‫)‪ -(20‬ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﲨﻌﺔ ﺩﺭﻭﻳﺶ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ -(21‬ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺪ ﻃﺎﻳﻞ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﻏﺒﺎﺷﻲ‪ ،‬ﻃﻨﻄﺎ ‪ -‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،1999 ،‬ﺹ ‪.201 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(22‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻏﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ؛ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ ﻭﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﲝﺚ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﻌﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻣﺸﻖ ‪ -‬ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ‪ 14 - 13 :‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪.2006‬‬ ‫)‪ -(23‬ﺧﺪﳚﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﺪﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻫﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﺎﻭﻱ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ؛ ﻓﺮﺹ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ،2004/4‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.52 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(24‬ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎ ‪ :‬ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺼﻨﺎﻉ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺓ‪ ،1999 ،‬ﺹ ‪.20 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(25‬ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻰ ﺣﺴﲔ ﺳﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ – ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،1990 :‬ﺹ ‪.51 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(26‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ ‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ 244 :‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ -(27‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻫﺮ ﻟﻄﺮﺵ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،2005 ،‬ﺹ ‪.203 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(28‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺭﻭﻣﻲ ‪" :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ" ﺛﺎﱐ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻳﻘﺘﺤﻢ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪ .www.islamonline.net :‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ‪.2009-3-17 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(29‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺭﻭﻣﻲ ‪" :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ" ﺛﺎﱐ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻳﻘﺘﺤﻢ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ -(30‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺳﺤﻨﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﻜﺮﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩ ‪ :‬ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ -(31‬ﺑﻜﺮ ﺭﳛﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺭﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .www.arablawinfo.com :‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ‪.2008-10-28 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(32‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﺷﻌﺒﺎﻥ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﻭﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،2007 ،‬ﺹ ‪.216 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(33‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﳏﻤﻮﺩ ﺳﺤﻨﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﻜﺮﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩ ‪ :‬ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺁﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.18 :‬‬ ‫)‪ -(34‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ ‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪، ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ 278 :‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪314‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺩ‪/‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ )ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ(‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻋﺮﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺩﻳﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﺑﺈﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ؛ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ؛ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲤﺎﺛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺬ ﺃﲝﺎﺙ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻘﻠﻴﺎﱐ ﻭﻣﻴﻠﺮ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1958‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻭﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻭﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻌﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳚﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﻧﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺫﺍ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻛﱪﻯ‪ .‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﳍﺎ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻓﻼﺱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺇﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺬ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ( ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻠﺔ ‪(Sous‬‬ ‫)‪ ، capitalisées‬ﺃﻭ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻁ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ )‪ .(Surendettées‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﳋﻄﺮ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﲟﺜﻴﻼ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﲑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻟﲔ ﻳﻌﻤﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﻭﲤﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺴﺠﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﳌﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺩ )‪ Ang (1992‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﳉﻮﺀ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﳉﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﲑﻯ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﲨﻠﺔ ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺿﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬‫ﻟﻸﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻨﲔ ﺇﱃ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺰﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻻ‬‫ﺗﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﰲ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪315‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲟﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ )ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ( ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻓﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﳑﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﰲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻭﻕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻟﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ(؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺿﺔ ﻭﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺩﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ )‪ Pettit et Singer (1985‬ﻳﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﻻﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ ﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ Levin et Travis (1987‬ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﲝﺴﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻﺣﻆ )‪ Buckland et al (1989‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻏﲑ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺄﻟﻮﻓﺔ ؛ ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ ‪Cooley et Edwards‬‬ ‫)‪ (1983‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺠﻮﺍﺏ ‪ 97‬ﻣﺴﲑﺍ )ﻣﺪﻳﺮﺍ( ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﻓﻌﻬﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻴﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺿﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﳌﻦ ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﱪ )‪ ،(Significatif‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﳌﻦ ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺷﺎﺭ )‪ Constand et al (1999‬ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺟﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 35‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﻴﻨﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﲝﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﲑ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ "ﺳﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪-‬ﺇﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ" ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻀﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ؛ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺇﻧﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﳏﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻛﺰﺕ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻓﻼﺱ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪316‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﰎ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﳍﻴﺎﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﻼﺱ؛‬‫ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ؛‬‫ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ؛‬‫‪ -‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺘﱪ )‪ Masulis (1988‬ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳜﻔﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﱯ‬ ‫ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻓﻼﺱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻻﺑﺪ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺐﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﱯ‪ ،4‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻫﻮﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻓﻼﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺒﺢ ﳉﻮﺀﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻓﻼﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻓﻼﺱ )ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻗﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺗﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﶈﺎﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺗﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪ .(...‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ ،Copeland et Weston (1988‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﺕ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺧﻀﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﱯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﳘﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺰﻡ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻴﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻓﻼﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﲟﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ" )‪ .(Relation d’agence‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Jensen‬ﻭ ‪ Meckling‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪« Il existe une relation d’agence lorsqu’une partie (le principal) engage par contrat une autre partie (l’agent‬‬ ‫‪qui doit lui procurer certains services de gestion, en lui donnant certains pouvoirs sur les ressources qui ne‬‬ ‫‪lui appartiennent pas »5.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﺻﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ( ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻨﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻤﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ ،Charreux (1985‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ )ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ( ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺘﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Jensen et Meckling‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1976‬ﺑﺈﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﺎﺩﳝﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ‪.6‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﳌﻼﻙ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﲔ )ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ( ﻭﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﻨﲔ )ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﳓﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﻭﺽ( ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺸﻮﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ﺑـ ﺻﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ‪‬ﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺝ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﳐﺎﻟﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﻛﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪317‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻮﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﱀ ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻮﻥ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺘﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺻﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﲔ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺘﲔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﻙ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻋﺪ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻣﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﳏﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﻛﻞ )ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺛﺮﻭﺗﻪ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ )‪ : (Coûts de contrôle‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﻛﻞ ﻭﺭﺻﺪﻩ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺴﲑ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﺼﻠﺤﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﻣﻨﺴﺠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻼﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺮ )‪ : (Coûts de justification‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﳎﺴﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ ﻟﻴﺒﺪﻱ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻪ ﻭﻳﱪﻫﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻛﻞ‬‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﳜﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﳊﺪﻱ ﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﲢﻜﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺿﻲ )ﻣﱰﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ( ﺑﲔ ﺃﳕﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﲝﻞ ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﱀ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﲔ ﲟﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲢﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﰲ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﺜﲑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺘﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﲤﻨﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ 9‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ؛‬‫ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﲤﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺨﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻮﻑ‬‫ﺗﺴﺪﺩ؛‬ ‫ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﳏﺮﺿﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﻮﻥ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻬﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺣﻞ ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﱀ‪ ،‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﱄ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺻﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﱀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﻰ؛‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪) Jensen et Meckling‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ (1976‬ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﲝﺎﺛﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﱐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳝﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﱪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻭُﺟﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻭﻥ ﲤﻜﻨﻮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﱄ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﺩﻩ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺘﲔ ‪:‬‬

‫‪318‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ )ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ( ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﱯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻠﺐ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺮ؛ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬‫ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﳓﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﻭﺽ؛ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻓﻼﺱ ﻭﻓﺴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )‪ (Désorganisation‬ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﰲ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻫﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻖ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﻮﻥ )ﻣﻼﻛﺎ( ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﱀ ﻣﻨﺴﺠﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﻼﻙ ؛‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﲤﺎﺛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺮﺻﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ )‪ (Pouvoir‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲣﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺘﻬﺎ )ﻛﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﳛﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﲤﺎﺛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲤﺎﺛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳓﻮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻬﻢ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﻮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﻢ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻸﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﳜﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ؛ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ )‪.(Propriétaires majoritaires‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻞ ﰲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Ross‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .1977‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﰐ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﺜﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺴﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ )‪ (Signaux‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﲤﻴﺰﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻓﻜﺮﺗﲔ ﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺯﻋﺔ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺎ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ؛‬ ‫ ﻭﺣﱴ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳉﻤﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺭﻙ ﻭﻻ ﺗُﻔﻬﻢ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻔﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﺪﺓ )‪ (Complexes‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﱃ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ )‪ (Clauses‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﳎﺮﺩ ﺳﺮﱟ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻀﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﱄ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪319‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﺎ ﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﲔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ .B‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻭﻳﺼﻨﻔﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ‪ A:‬ﻭ ‪ ،B‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻔﲔ‪ ،‬ﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺣﺮﺟﺎ )‪ (Critique‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ *‪ . D‬ﻓﺘﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ )ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ‪ (A‬ﳍﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ *‪ D‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺘﻪ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺬﺟﺎ ﰲ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻘﻪ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻳﺘﺴﺎﺀﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ؛‬‫ ﳛﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ؛‬‫ ﻳﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺸﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺜﲑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﺤﺔ ﺗﻘﻔﺰ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺠﺄ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪.14‬‬ ‫ﺇﲨﺎﻻ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (Initiés‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﲝﻜﻢ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﳏﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ )‪ Norton (1991‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 400‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﳕﻮ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﺩﻓﺎ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻼﺀﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﳍﺎ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻣﻌﲔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ‪ Norton‬ﺇﱃ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻻ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟـ ‪ Norton‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻟﲔ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﳛﺎﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﱯ – ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -Myers‬ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳊﺼﺺ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺀ )ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ‪.15‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳋﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻪ ﺗﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﺟﺪ ﻫﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﱪﻳﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ )‪ Landstöm (1993‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺎﻡ ﲟﺴﺢ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 207‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺳﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ 62 ،‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﳑﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻏﲑ ﺭﲰﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ 145‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ )ﻣﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ‪،16‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺐ )‪ ،Ang (1991‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺕ ﰲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﺸﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻌﻬﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺴﲑﻭﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺷﺎﺭ ‪ Ang‬ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻮﻛﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺛﺮﻭ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﲰﻬﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪320‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﺠﺄ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﳏﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺧﻔﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﺟﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺄﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﲑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺽ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳚﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺽ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺭﲰﻴﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺘﱪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﱄ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻮﻝ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲣﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﲟﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳕﻮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﲎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺟﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ )‪ (Franchisage‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ )‪ (SPA‬ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺮﻯ )‪ Ang (1992‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺩﻳﻮﻧﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﰲ‬ ‫"ﺗﺴﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ" )‪ (Avances de propriétaires et prêt des dirigeants‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ "ﺃﺷﺒﺎﻩ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ" )‪ ،(Quasi-fonds propres‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻋﺮﻑ ‪ Ang‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ‪" :‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺈﻓﻼﺱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺘﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﻘﻘﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ"‪.19‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﺃﺷﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﰲ ﺭﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪ .capitalisées‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺊ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺨﺬ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻛﻮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺷﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ¼ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ 05‬ﺇﱃ ‪ %06‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ‪.20‬‬ ‫‪(Sous-‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ "ﺗﺴﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ"‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﺎﺭ )‪ Ang (1992‬ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺗﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪ ،‬ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ )‪ ،(Propriétaire‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻛﻀﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﻭﺽ؛‬ ‫ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ؛‬‫ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ )‪ (Sous-évaluation‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻟﺰﻣﻦ؛ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺭ؛ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﱐ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﻓﺾ ‪ Ang‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺐ ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺻﺎﺋﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪﺍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺰﻡ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺷﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻓﺮﺯ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻫﺎﺋﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪321‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﲟﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻟﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﺴﻌﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺷﺎﺭ )‪ Walker (1989‬ﺇﱃ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻻ ﰲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ )‪ (Marché obligataire‬ﻭﺳﻮﻕ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ )‪ ، 22 (Imparfaits‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﱂ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺟﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟـ )‪Myers (1984‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫? ‪« Je commencerai en demandant : comment les firmes choisissent-elles leurs structure de financement‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫» ! ‪Encore maintenant, la réponse est : nous ne le savons toujours pas‬‬

‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﺑﻠﻎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺒﺔ ‪ Josée ST-Pierre‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ )‪ (Management‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺟﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻭﻟﲔ‪.24‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲰﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫)‪ (Théorie du choix managérial‬؛ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ )‪(Théorie du cycle de vie de l’entreprise‬؛ ﻭﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺗﱯ )‪.(Théorie de l’ordre hiérarchique‬‬ ‫‪ .I‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ )‪ Norton (1991‬ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺤﺴﺐ‬ ‫‪ ،Norton‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺁﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻟﲔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﰲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻪ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻏﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﺇﺫ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﻢ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪﻡ ‪Barton et‬‬ ‫)‪ ،Matthews (1989‬ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﲬﺴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺃﻋﺪﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ )‪ Andrews (1980‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻥ – ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ – ﻟﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﱂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﺎ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﳍﺪﻑ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺛﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲎ ﳍﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻠﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺮﻭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻣﻼ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﻟﻨﻤﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻃﻤﺌﻨﺎﻥ‪...‬‬

‫‪322‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﲟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ(‪ .‬ﻓﻴﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻭﻥ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺬﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻨﻊ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﰲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﺘﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻨﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺪ ﲰﻌﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﰲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻻ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﲢﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﳏﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﲡﺪﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻻﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﱪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ‪ (...‬ﳍﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﲔ )‪ Sott et al (1972‬ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻟـ ‪ 135‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ‪ %50‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺣﻜﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ )‪ ،Barton et Matthews (1989‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﱪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﲑ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻪ ﻟﺘﻨﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﲤﺨﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫)‪ Cooley et Edwards (1983‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 97‬ﻣﺴﲑ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺮﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﺃﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﺘﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺸﻐﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﺪﻭﺍ ﻧﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﲡﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ؛ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﲞﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳍﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ‪ ،(...‬ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ :‬ﺍﳊﺠﻢ؛ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ؛ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ )ﺩﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﲔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼ‪.‬‬

‫‪323‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻓﻔﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ – ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ – ﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫)‪ 26(1971‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1545‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻋﺔ )ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ( ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺘﱪﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺟﺮﻯ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ )‪ Holmes et Kent (1991‬ﲝﺜﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ 391‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﰲ ﳐﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺃﳕﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ( ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺒﲔ‪ :‬ﺇﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻛﻬﻢ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Bird et Juttner (1975) ; Bates‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‬ ‫)‪ ،Petty (1978) ; Bates (1971‬ﻭﻛﻠﻬﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﻮﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻳﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﱪﻯ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻆ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﻐﲑ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﰲ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Davidson et Dutia (1991) ; Walker et‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ )‪ Norton (1991‬ﻭ )‪ Ang (1991‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﺠﺄ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪ .28‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻔﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ )‪ Tamari (1980‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎ )‪ Gagnon et Papillon (1984‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻜﻨﺪﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺼﲑ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺭﺗﻴﺒﺔ )‪ 29 (Monotone‬ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﳍﺎ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻼﻳﲔ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﻭﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﺍﳉﻞ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ )‪ (Sous estimé‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﳍﺎ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺪ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﻨﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﲰﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺸﻔﺖ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟـ )‪ ،Suret et Arnoux (1995a‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ،Revenu Québec‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ‪ 100000‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭ‪ 1000000‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﲟﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪Niang‬‬ ‫)‪ (1996‬ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 133‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻮﺑﺎ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺕ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻮﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩﻳﻦ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ 30‬؛ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﻫﺎﻕ )‪ (Stress‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﺭ‪ 31‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺄﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﲝﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﲰﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﺭ )‪ (Crédit-bail‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺼﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ :‬ﳑﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﲰﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺣﻈﻮﻇﻬﺎ ﰲ‬‫ﺟﻠﺐ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﲰﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺟﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪324‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺃﻯ )‪ Constand et al (1991‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﲑﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﻭﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪Constand et al‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ )‪ Cooley et Edwards (1983‬ﻭ )‪ ،Suret et Arnoux (1995a‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳝﺎﺭﺱ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻟﻴﺲ ﳍﺎ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻳﺒﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻭﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺽ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﺻﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﺼﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﱪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺝ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﺎﺭﺱ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﳐﺘﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻬﺎﺩ ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺄﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻋﺮﺿﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻋﺎ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﲤﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳏﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻌﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ )ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻓﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ ﺃﻭ ﳉﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺿﲔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .II‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ )‪ ،Ang (1991‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﳍﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ؛ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ )ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ( ﰲ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﱃ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ‪ ،32‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﲑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻌﱪ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪‬ﺎ ؛ ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ )ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ( ﺑـ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻣﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ )‪ (Crédibilité‬ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ؛‬‫ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪33‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﻴﺔ )ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ(‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻨﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺿﻌﺎ )‪ (Modeste‬ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺎ )‪ (Contrôlée‬ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻭﻟﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ‪ :‬ﳛﺘﻤﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﱴ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﰲ ﺃﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﻗﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﳑﻜﻦ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺟﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪325‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ .III‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﱯ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺃﻯ )‪ Norton (1991‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻓﻼﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﲤﺎﺛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﻭﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﺒﻨﻮﻥ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﳑﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ )ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻞ ﰲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﺀ ﺩﻋﺎﺋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ ،Myers‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﺪﻓﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ )‪ (Emprunts‬ﰒ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ )‪ ،(Obligation convertible‬ﻭﺁﺧﺮﺍ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻟـ )‪ Barton et Mttheuws (1989‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻘﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬

‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺪﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ )ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ( ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ ﲟﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،35‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﲤﻮﻳﻼ ﲝﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ،(Hiérarchie des financements‬ﲤﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﱄ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﲑﻱ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ – ﲡﻨﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ -‬ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﺗﺼﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺮﻭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﳘﲔ )ﺍﳌﻼﻙ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﳌﺼﺎﳊﻬﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﲔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ )‪ Myers et Majluf (1984‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﺼﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻬﺘﻤﺔ ﲟﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻫﺮﻣﻴﺔ )‪ (Hiérarchie‬ﺑﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﱏ ﺧﻄﺮ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳍﺮﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ )‪ (Hiérarchie financière décroissante‬ﻫﻮ ﻛﺎﻵﰐ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﱏ ﺧﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺘﻬﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺋﺾ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ )‪(Surplus organisationnel‬‬‫ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺳﻠﻊ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﺢ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺂﺕ ﻭﺍﳍﺒﺎﺕ ‪ ،...‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻵﰐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺿﺎﻑ ‪ Myers‬ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺸﻮﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇ‪‬ﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﻴﻘﻈﺔ )‪ (Vigilance‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺳﺎﳘﺖ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﱯ ﰲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺷﻬﺪﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﲝﺎﺙ )‪ ،Williamson (1988‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ )ﻣﺴﺎﳘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﲑﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺍﺋﻨﻮﻥ‬ ‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺿﻮﻥ(( ﳍﻢ ﺭﺷﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﻭﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺯﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﳍﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﺎ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﻌﺪ ﺇﻣﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻴﺔ )‪ (Ajustements ex-post‬ﺣﱴ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﲎ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﻘﺪ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﳎﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﺤﺴﺐ ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ ،Williamson‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ )‪ (Spécificité‬ﺃﺻﻞ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺃﺻﻞ ﺫﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﻛﺄﺻﻞ ﻟﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺳﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭ( ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﳏﻞ ﻋﻘﺪ ﻏﲑ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺣﱴ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ )ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﲝﺠﻢ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻜﺒﲑ( ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ .37‬ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻚ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺿﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫‪326‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻓﻼﺱ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ؛ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻔﻀﻼ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻟـ )‪ ، Williamson (1988‬ﻳﺄﰐ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ )‪ ،Myers (1990‬ﻣﺸﲑﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺛﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ )» ‪ .(Richesse sociétale ou « corporate wealth‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺛﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ = W‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ‪ + E‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻮﺍﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ‪S‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ :1‬ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺛﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ )‪Myers (1990‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ :PVA‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﺮﺓ ﳍﺎ ‪ :D‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ : E‬ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪ :PVGO+‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ :S‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻮﺍﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ :PVTAX+‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪] :‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ[ ‪Samira Rifki, Abdessadeq Sadq, Op cit, P19.‬‬

‫ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ‪ Myers‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﲢﺎﻟﻒ‪/‬ﺗﻜﺘﻞ )‪ (Coalition‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﲟﻌﲎ ﺳﻠﻄﺘﻪ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ(‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﲤﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺫﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .W‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 100.000‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 60000‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﻮﻥ ‪ 40.000‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺛﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﱘ ﺍﳌﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﳍﺬﻩ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ‪ E‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ‪.S‬‬ ‫ﺇﲨﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﺒﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺃ‪‬ﻢ ﺳﻴﺠﻨﻮﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳚﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺾ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺎ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﻟﻸﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ؛ ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎ ﲝﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﰒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﺂﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﺠﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈ‪‬ﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪﺍ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﻛﻞ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﳕﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﺎ ﺟﺎﺀ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﲔ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ Balakrishman.S et Fox.I‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﻬﲑﺓ ﻧﺸﺮﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .1933‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ‪ Evelyne Poincelot-Butel‬ﺑﻔﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﻟﺬﺍﺕ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ .1996‬ﻭﻳﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﰐ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪327‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ :2‬ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ‪ William‬ﻭ ‪Myers‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪Balakrishman.S et Fox.I‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪ William‬ﻭ‪Myers‬‬ ‫ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪:William‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﲤﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻮﻻ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ )ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ( ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ‪William‬‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪:Myers‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ‪ Free Cash-‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ flow‬ﲤﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪Samira Rifki, Abdessadeq Sadq, Op cit, P21. :‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪Evelyne Poincelot-Butel‬‬

‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﺋﺺ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﱯ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﹸﺃﳒﺰﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﲝﺎﺙ ﲞﺼﻮﺹ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻮﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻌﲑﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﻌﺮﺓ )‪ ،(Non cotées‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﲰﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﲝﺎﺙ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻟﺔ )‪ (Firmes entrepreneuriales‬ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﻌﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻵﰐ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ :3‬ﺍﻹﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﻌﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﻌﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﲤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﲑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﱯ ﻟﺬﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﲣﺼﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲣﺼﺺ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳕﻄﺎ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳕﻂ ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺛﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻴﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﲑﻳﻦ‬‫ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺿﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﲑﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺮﺿﲔ‬‫‪ .2‬ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺷﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫• ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ )ﺭﻓﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪Samira Rifki, Abdessadeq Sadq, OP cit, P22.:‬‬

‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺧﻠﺼﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺣﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﳕﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪328‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﳍﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﻭﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪St-pierre Josée, La gestion financière des PME Théories et pratiques, PUQ, Québec, 1999 ,P87.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Idem.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﳓﻮ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.126‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ibidem, P89.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﲣﺬﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ" )‪،(Théorie moderne de la firme‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻴﻮﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻗﺮﻳﺸﻲ ﻳﻮﺳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻳﺸﻲ ﻳﻮﺳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪،2005 ،‬‬ ‫ﺹ‪] .161‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ[‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪Samira Rifki, Abdessadeq Sadq (2001), «Un essai de synthèse Des débats théoriques à propos de la‬‬ ‫‪structure financière Des entreprises», In revue du financier, N°31, P16.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻟﻸﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪Idem.‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪Samira Rifki, Abdessadeq Sadq, Op cit, P18.‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪Pierre Vernimmen, Finance d’entreprise, 3ème éd., Dalloz, Paris 1998, P469.‬‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ )‪" ،(2006‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻣﺜﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ،2006/4‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.112‬‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻔﺎﺭ ﺣﻨﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.369‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪Norton, E. (1991) : « Capital structure and small growth firms », The Journal of Small Business Finance,‬‬ ‫‪vol. 1, n°2, PP. 161-177.‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪Landstöm, H. (1993) : « Agency theory an dits application to small firms : Evidence from the Swedish‬‬ ‫‪venture capital market», The Journal of Small Business Finance, vol. 3, n°2, PP.167-170.‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪St-pierre Josée, Op cit,P91.‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻘﺪ ﲤﻨﺢ ﲟﻮﺟﺒﻪ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﲰﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﰲ ﺻﻨﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪St-pierre Josée, Op cit,P91.‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪Suret , J.M. et L. Arnoux (1995a), « Capitalisation des entreprises québécoises : évolution et état de la‬‬ ‫‪situation », Revue internationale PME, vol. 8, n° ¾, PP. 165-179.‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪St-pierre Josée, Op cit,P93‬‬ ‫‪ 22‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑـ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻮﻻﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﻃﺔ )ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻟﺔ(؛ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ؛ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ؛ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺇﻓﻼﺱ؛ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﺽ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺧﻄﺮ؛ ﺗﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪St-pierre Josée, Op cit,P94.‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪Idem.‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪Barton, S.L. et C.H. Matthews (1989) ،«Small firm financing : Implications from a strategic management‬‬ ‫‪perspective», Journal of Small Business Management, vol. 27, n° 1 (janvier), PP. 1-7.‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪McMahon et ai (1993) , Small Entreprise Financial Management Theory and Practice, Australia,‬‬ ‫‪Harcourt Brace, P488.‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪St-pierre Josée, Op cit,P97‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪Idem.‬‬ ‫‪ 29‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪St-pierre Josée, Op cit,PP97-98‬‬ ‫‪ 31‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺷﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪...‬‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﺣﱴ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﻗﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻔﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪329‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪St-pierre Josée, Op cit,P100.‬‬ ‫‪Norton (1991), Op cit, P287.‬‬

‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬

‫‪ 35‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 36‬ﻗﺮﻳﺸﻲ ﻳﻮﺳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪].177‬ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻑ[‬ ‫‪ 37‬ﻓﻤﺜﻼ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻣﻞ ﳋﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﳑﺜﻼ ﰲ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﲝﺚ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﲔ ﺳﻴﻘﺒﻠﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺮﺿﲔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻵﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪Samira Rifki, Abdessadeq Sadq, Op cit, P20.‬‬

‫‪330‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻌﺰﻭﺯ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻠﻒ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺟﺰﺀﺍﹰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺰﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﱐ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﺷﺪ ﺟﻼﺀ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎﹰ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻭﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺻﻔﺔ ﻣﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺯﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻏﲑ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ‪‬ﺎﺋﻲ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺁﺛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺸﱴ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺎﹰ ﳍﺎ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﺮﺍ ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳌﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﱴ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﺫﺍ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻻﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻟﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﻔﺮﺩ ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﺘﻨﻔﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻻ ﳜﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺳﻨﺘﻨﺎﻭﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺄﰐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻨﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻀﺎﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﳏﺘﻮﺍﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻌﲎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺧﻄﲑ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﲏ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬ﻭﻫﻲ "ﺍﳊﺎﻟـﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﻟﺔ" ]‪ 1.[Vaughan & Therese (1999),P.7‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﻭﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗـﻊ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻪ‪2.‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺘﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺃﻭﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﺃﻭﻣﻦ ﺯﻣﻨﻪ ﺃﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻣﻪ ﺃﻭﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﳎﺘﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ‪ :‬ﻫﻮ"ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪﻳﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻬﻠﻚ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺑﺴﺒﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻣﻨﻪ"؛‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪331‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻓﻬﻮﻻ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻟﺰﻭﺍﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﻟﺴﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﳋﻄﺮ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻫﻮ"ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﳏﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﰎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ؛‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳓﺮﺍﻑ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﲝﻴﺚ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﺗﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬‫ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ"ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﺘﺨﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻲ؛‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﰊ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ( ﻭﺭﺃﲰﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺴﺒﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﺨـﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟـﻪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﺸﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧـﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻷﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ)‪ :(1‬ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫ﻭﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﻭﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺄﰐ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻤﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪332‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﻧﺔ )ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﳍﺎ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﲦﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺑﲔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻷﻭﱃ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺄﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲟﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﻞ )ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ( ﳏﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﱪ ﻭﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺣﻜﻢ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺁﺛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻮﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﲨﻴﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ( ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﺨﺬ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﲤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺴﻮﻕ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫) ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺳﻠﻊ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺣﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇ‪‬ﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺒﺆ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺣﱴ ﻟﻮ ﱂ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺫﻭﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﲞﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺰﺍﻫﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍﹰ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﻣﲑ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﺎﺯﺗﻪ( ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﱰﺍﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﱐ‪ .‬ﻭﲤﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﲟﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺒﺆ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ‪:‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻔﺎﹰ ﳛﻤﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺴﺒﺎﹰ‪ 12.‬ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺎﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﻞ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﺴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺍﻫﻦ ﺑـ ‪ 10‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺒﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺴﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﻌﻴﺎﹰ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ؛ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺭﺑﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﳍﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﱰﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻣﺎﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺛﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪333‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ :‬ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟـ‪:‬‬

‫‪16‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻞ ﻣﺎ )ﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻌﺔ(؛ﺃﻭ ﻋﻘﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ) ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ‪.(...‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﻲ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﺐ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﺐ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﳏﻔﻈﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﺐ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﺐ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﻓﺎﺀ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬‬

‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻷﻣـﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣـﺔ ﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠـﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ـﺎ‬ ‫)ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻـﺔ ﲟـﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴـﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺪﺑﲑ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍﹰ ﻭﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﻘﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻩ‪ .‬ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﻼﺀﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺨﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻭﺗﺘﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻣﺎ ﳛﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪‬ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﳑﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻓﺼﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﰲ ﻋﻦ ﺁﺛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﰲ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﲑ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻼ ﺃﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﺩﻋﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺋﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﻹﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻗﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺒﻴﻊ ﻋﻘﺪ ﻣﺎﱄ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺰﺍﻉ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﱐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ .‬ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺠﺪﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻋﺎﱂ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﲏ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺨـﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻟﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﲢﻘﻖ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﻻ ﲢﻘﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﲏ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﻢ ﻟﻺﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ )ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﺱ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﻌﲏ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪334‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺾ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﻃﻮﺭﻭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﲣﺘﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ .‬ﳍﺬﺍ ﺳﻨﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﻧﺸﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ‪ :‬ﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ )‪ (Flanagan & Norman, 1993‬ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ‪" :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺮﻓﻬﺎ )ﻛﺮﺯﻧﺮ( ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ‪" :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ"‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ‪ (APM)21‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﲢﺠﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺿﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﲑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﲝﺮﺹ‪.22‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﺑـ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﱀ ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻋﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻨﲔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ؛‬‫ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺃﺻﻮﳍﺎ ‪‬ﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻼﺕ‬‫ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ؛‬ ‫ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺩﱏ ﺣﺪ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻭﺗﺄﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ؛‬ ‫ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲟﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ؛‬‫ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻋﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻨﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﲝﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‬‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﻠﺺ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬

‫‪23‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮة‪::‬ﻳﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ( ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﻭﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻭﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﺭﻱ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ؛ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﳛﺮﻡ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺳﻠﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﻮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﳌﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﲑﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﺎ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﻼﳘﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﺎ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ؛‬

‫‪335‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮة‪ :‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑـﺮﺻﺪ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻣﺒﻜﺮﺍﹰ‪،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ؛‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻻ ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﲢﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﲦﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﲬﺴﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺿﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺘﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﲏ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﰲ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ )ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﲡﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(؛ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺤﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ_ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺃﺑﺮﺯﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺬﻫﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﻮﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪25‬ﻓﺬﻫﺐ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺫﻫﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ؛ ﳑﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺘﲔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1.1‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻭﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪:‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺭﺟﺎﳍﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻳﻬﺪﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺫﻣﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺴﺐ ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻳﻬﺪﺩ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﺴﻤﻪ‪.‬ﻭ ﲤﺘﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﻓﺴﺮﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ...‬ﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺧﺬ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﱂ ﲤﻨﻊ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﰲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﱂ ﲢﻂ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ؛‬ ‫‪ .2.1‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻟﻺﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ‪‬ﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﻬﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺧﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺼﺪﻯ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺇﻻ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻟﻸﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﲨﻌﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﱄ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺬﻫﺐ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﻬﻢ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﺪ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﺮﻛﻦ )ﻋﻨﺼﺮ( ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﺒﻪ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻣﻦ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﻯ ﺭﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﻘﺴﻤﻮﺍ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﻳﻘﲔ؛ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻧﺎﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ .1.2‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻠﻮﻥ ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﺭ ﳏﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﰲ ﻣﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺮﺭﻭﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲞﺴﺎﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ‪ .26‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺆﺧﺬ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﻟﺼﺎﱀ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻳﻨﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻮﻟﻪ؛ ﻓﻬﻨﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﺼﺎﺭ ﺭﺩﻭﺍ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﲟﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳚﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺮﺍﺀ‪ ...‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻏﲑ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺭﻛﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪.‬‬

‫‪336‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ .2.2‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻠﻮﻥ ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﻱ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﻟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺆﺧﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ‪:‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻣﺘﻪ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﳍﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﳍﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﲏ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪:‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻼﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﳍﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﳍﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻭ‪‬ﺬﺍ‬

‫ﺍﻧﻘﺴﻤﻮﺍ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﻳﻘﲔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1.3‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺘﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻣﻦ ﳍﻢ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻬﻮﻥ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﺘﺸﺎ‪‬ﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻐﻄﻰ ﲨﺎﻋﻴﺎ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﲟﻔﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻛﺎ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﶈﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﳍﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻷﺳﺲ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ ﰲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻌﻞ ‪ CHAUFTON‬ﺷﻮﻓﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ "ﺃﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀ ﺑﺂﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ" ‪ .27‬ﲤﺘﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﳍﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ .‬ﻏﲑ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﲏ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻭﺃﳘﻠﺖ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺼﻔﺘﻪ ﻋﻘﺪﺍ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2.3‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻛﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻓﻨﻴﺎ‪:‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻠﻮﻥ ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻘﺪﺍ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺄﻧﻔﺴﻬﻢ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻘﺪ ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﳍﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﲤﺘﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﲏ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻓﻨﻴﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ؛ ﻓﺎﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺜﻼ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻨﻴﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻫﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻏﲑ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﻷ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ )ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻣﲔ ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﳌﺬﺍﻫﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎﻫﺎ ‪ -‬ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻓﻠﻢ ﺗﻔﻠﺢ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎ‪‬ﺎ؛ ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺮﺩﻩ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻛﺘﻔﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﲏ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﱐ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﺭﺃﻯ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ؛ ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ "ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﳍﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺲ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﻈﻤﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻦ ﳍﻢ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ_ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺀﻣﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﱯ ﻭﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﰒ ﺗﺒﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻭﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻋﺪ ﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﲑ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺗﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻛﺎﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﲑﺕ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﻔﺸﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺀﻣﺔ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪337‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳌﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﳋﺼﻮﻡ ﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﺮﺍﹰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ_ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﰲ ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﻛﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﳒﺎﺯﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،29‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﱪﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﳘﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﺿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻻﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﻋﻄﻴﺖ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﺿﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ_ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌـﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗ‪‬ﺸﺘﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ )ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ( ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪....‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﹼﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﻻﺕ‪ 30...‬ﻭﻫﻲ " ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎﹰ ﰲ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ )ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ(‪،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (02‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﳊﺠﻢ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1998‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 330‬ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻀﺎﻋﻔﺖ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .32‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺜﲑﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 7‬ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﲟﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﳕﻮ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ )ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻧﺸﺌﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻠﻪ ﺃﺻﻼﹰ( ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺇﳕﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻀﺎﺭﺑﺔ؟‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ)‪ :(02‬ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﲰﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‬

‫‪338‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1-2‬ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﳊﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﺍﳊﻖ‪ ‬ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺃﺻﻼ ﻣﻌﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎ ﻛﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﻳﺴﻤ‪‬ﻰ‬

‫ﳏﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ )ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ( ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺗﺴﻤ‪‬ﻰ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﺣﻖ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﰲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻴ‪‬ﻦ )ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﳏﺪ‪‬ﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻪ ﱢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،33‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﻌﻼﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ"‪ 34.‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺣﱴ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻋﻘﺪ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎﹰ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻼﻳﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻻﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﱂ ﻳﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺇﻻ ﰲ ﻋﻘﺪ‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﲔ ﺳﻮﻗﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 2-2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻵﺟﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻵﺟﻞ ﻋﻘﺪ ﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﲟﻘﺘﻀﺎﻩ ﻃﺮﻓﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪﳘﺎ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﺃﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬

‫ﺳﻠﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﳏﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﹰ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ 36،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ ﳛﺘﻤﻞ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ‪ 37.‬ﻭﺑﺎﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﺻﻞ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻌﺮ ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻵﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻵﺟﻠﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ 38.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻳﺘﻔﺎﻭﺿﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﳝﺘﻠﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻉ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫_ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﻛ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻳﺮﻭ‪‬ﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺳﻠﻌﺔ؛‬ ‫_ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻵﺟﻞ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﳚـﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﹰﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﳛﻞ ﳏﻠﻪ ﻭﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﻟﻪ؛‬ ‫_ ﻳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻭﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻵﺟﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻸﺻﻞ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ؛‬ ‫_ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﻵﺟﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋـﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌـﻘﺪ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻮﺩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3-2‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪:‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺷﺒﻴﻬﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻵﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇ ﱠﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻨﺪﺭ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻌﺎﻗﺪ ﻭﺇ‪‬ﻧﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟ‪‬ﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺃﺳـﺎﺱ ﻓـﺮﻭﻕ‬

‫ﺴﻤﺴﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳـﺔ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﻛ ﹼﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟ‪‬ﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ ﺑﺈﻳﺪﺍﻉ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻟ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﳕﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺇ‪‬ﻧﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘـﹰﺎ ﻟﻜـﻞ‬ ‫ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﺮ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗ ‪‬ﻐ‪‬ﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺩﺍﺋﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﺒﺔ ﺍﻟ‪‬ﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻞﱡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﳝﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻴﻊ ﺣ ﱠﻘﱠﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ‪.40‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻭﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﻔـﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﲏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺰﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﳌـﺰﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺶ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺳﻌﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺳﻌﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﻴﻘﹰﺎ ﳌﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺜﲎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌـﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠـﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤـﺎﺳﺮﺓ )ﲡﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻮﻟﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4-2‬ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻀﺎﺕ ) ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ(‪:‬ﻫﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻃﺮﻓﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻌ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟ‪‬ﺘ‪‬ﺒـﺎﺩﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻟﻸﺻﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻻﺣﻖ ﳏ ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻫ ‪‬ﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ‪ .42‬ﻭﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺒـﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪ 1970‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻃﻮﺭ ﲡﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪339‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ)‪ :(03‬ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫‪43‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ_ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ :‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺍ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳊﺎﺿﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ‪50‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﳜﺸﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺭ ﺑﻴﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﲢﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﺇﺫ ﺍﳔﻔﺾ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺇﱃ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻣﲏ‬ ‫ﲞﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 20‬ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﻧﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻪ ﺍﳊﻖ ﰲ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﶈﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ )ﲬﺴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﺬﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﻮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺄﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺩﻭﻻﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﺎ ﶈﻔﻈﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﻋﻘﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮﺀ ﺇﱃ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﻖ‪ 45‬ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺪ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪:‬ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﹼ‬

‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻳﺪﺭﺱ ﲢﺖ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﻈﻠﺔ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﹼﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺫﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،46‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﺪﺛﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺆﺳ‪‬ﺴﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﲝﺸﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪ‪‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﻛﺄﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹼﰒ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ‪‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،47‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﻮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎ ‪‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺘﺎﺏ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﹰ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﻮﻥ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،48‬ﻭﻳﻌﲏ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ‪‬ﻧﻪ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻣﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ) ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ( ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺮﺿﲔ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ) ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﱄ‪.49‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﱪﻳﺔ )‪ ،(Bridging‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﱪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪ‪‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﻮﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻮﺭﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﹼﺣﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺪﻑ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺪ‪‬ﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻹﻓﻼﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘّﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﻛﺈﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﺿﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻹﻓﻼﺱ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪340‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪ‪‬ﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﻇﻴﻔﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪50‬؛‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﹼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮ‪‬ﻫﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ؛‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻠﻖ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻜﻦ ﻭﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺳﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﻖ؛‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﲤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﺪ‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨ‪‬ﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼ‪‬ﻐﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )‪ ،(PME‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥﹼ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨ‪‬ﺴﺒﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ‪51‬؛‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ‪ %3.3‬ﻭ‪ %5‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻸﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻧﻌﺎﺵ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺪ‪‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮ‪‬ﺍﻛﺪﺓ؛‬ ‫ﺍﳓﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ‪‬‬ ‫ﲣﻔﻴﻒ ﻭﻃﺄﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑ‪‬ﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻜﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ؛‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺧﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﹰ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻮﺭﻳﻖ‪52‬؛‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻷﻧﻪ ﹼ‬ ‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸ‪‬ﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻮﻕ‪ ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳ‪‬ﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﳑ‪‬ﺎ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻮﻕ ﻹﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﻠﺒﺎ ﻣﻠﺤﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﳍﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺎﻃﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﺿﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻄ ﹰ‬

‫ﺟﺎﺀﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ)ﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﲝﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺃﺕ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺒﺒﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﺮﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ )ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﰒ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺷﺮﻧﺎ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺃﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻻﺗـﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﺜﲑ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻝ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻻ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺭ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻞ ﳎﺮﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻳﺮﺑﺢ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭﳜﺴﺮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺃ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﻠﻊ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺘﻀﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎ‪‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﺪﺍﻓﻌﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻳﺮﻭﻥ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﲢﻤﻞ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺧﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﺿﲔ ﻳﻘﻮﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﺯﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻒ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﺯﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪341‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺍﳍﻮﺍﻣﺶ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Vaughan, Emmett and another,” Fundamentals of Risk and Insurance”. Johnwiley & sons,‬‬ ‫‪1999.P.7.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺪ‪" ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ –ﺍﳉﺰﺀ‪:1‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻞ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،1985 ،‬ﺹ‪.109‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻃﻨﻴﺐ ﻭﻋﺒﻴﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺷﻔﻴﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،1‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،1997 ،‬ﺹ‪.112‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪" ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،363‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ"‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ .،1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ‪ ،2‬ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪،‬‬

‫‪ ،1992‬ﺹ‪.57-56‬‬

‫‪ 6‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺷﺪ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ‪" ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻁ‪،1‬‬ ‫‪ ،1989‬ﺹ‪38‬‬ ‫‪“A Risk Management Standard”, Published by AIRMIC, ALARM, and IRM: 2002, British Standards Institution‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪“A Risk Management Standard”, Published by AIRMIC, ALARM, and IRM: 2002.‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻃﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﷲ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺒﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﲪﺪ‪" ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨـﺎﻃﺮ‪ :‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨـﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌـﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳـﻼﻣﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪،5‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ‪.29-28‬‬

‫‪ 10‬ﻃﺎﺭﻕ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﺩ‪" ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،2003،‬ﺹ‪.25‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﻭﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺒﺆ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬

‫ﻃﺎﺭﻕ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﺩ‪" ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ"‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.26‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﻼ( ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﻴﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺴﻌﺮ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﻓﺎﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﻇﻒ ) ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺟﲏ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪http://www.investopedia.com/terms/s/speculativerisk.asp:‬‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ )‪http://www.investopedia.com/terms/p/purerisk.asp:(2008/06/10‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺿﺪﻫﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺑﺎﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺭﺑﻴﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ‪‬ﺎ ﻃﻮﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺭﺑﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺿﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺿﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬

‫‪Erik Banks and Richard Dunn, “Practical risk management: an executive guide to avoiding‬‬ ‫‪surprises and losses”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, England, 2003, p15.‬‬

‫‪ 17‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‪ :‬ﳏﻔﻈﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮﺓ ﻭﳏﻔﻈﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪" ،‬ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ )ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻨﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ ‪ ،2005‬ﺹ‪.26‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.11‬‬

‫‪19‬‬

‫‪Erik Banks and Richard Dunn, “Practical risk management: an executive guide to avoiding surprises and‬‬ ‫‪losses”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, England, 2003, p22.‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬

‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ :‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻨﺔ‪" ،‬ﺃﻃﺮ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ"‪ ،‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪،‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻮ ﻇﱯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ‬

‫‪ ،2006‬ﺹ‪.38-36‬‬

‫‪APM : Agency of Project Management‬‬

‫‪342‬‬

‫‪21‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ 22‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ :‬ﻃﺎﺭﻕ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﺩ‪" ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ‪ ،32‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﺷﻲ ﻭﺍﳋﻔﺾ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺴﺎﻡ )ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺘﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﲔ ﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬

‫ﺭﺿﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﲰﲑ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ‪" ،‬ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍ‪‬ﺎ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،2005 ،‬ﺹ‪.315-314‬‬

‫‪ 24‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻓﻬﻤﻲ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ‪" ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪ ، 19 ،‬ﺹ‪.747‬‬ ‫‪ 25‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺹ ‪.16‬‬ ‫‪ 26‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪. 23-21‬‬ ‫‪ 27‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ‬

‫‪.26-25‬‬

‫‪ 28‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻱ ﻋﻴﺪ‪" ،‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ"‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫‪http://www.elgari.com/article87.htm‬‬

‫‪ 29‬ﺩ‪.‬ﺃﺳﻌﺪ ﺭﻳﺎﺽ‪" ،‬ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻛﺎﺩﳝﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،2001 ،‬ﺹ‪.72‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬

‫ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﺩ‪" ،‬ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘـﺎﺕ ﺍﳌـﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪- :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ -‬ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،2001 ،‬ﺹ‪.5‬‬

‫‪31‬‬

‫ﲰﲑ ﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﺭﺿﻮﺍﻥ‪" ،‬ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ" ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ 2005 ،‬ﺹ‪.58‬‬

‫‪32‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻁ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،10‬ﺍﳌﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﻠﻢ‪ " ،‬ﱡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،2007 ،‬ﺹ‪.31‬‬ ‫‪- 33‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃ‪ /‬ﳏﻔﻮﻅ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ ،2003‬ﺹ‪.288‬‬

‫‪ 34‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻓﻬﻤﻲ"ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‪،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،1981 ،2‬ﺹ ‪.175‬‬ ‫‪ 35‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻱ‪" ،‬ﳓﻮ ﺳـﻮﻕ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‪ ،1‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،1993 ،1‬ﺹ‪.21‬‬

‫‪ 36‬ﻳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻛﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 37‬ﺩ‪.‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﺻﻼﺡ ﻋﻄﻴﺔ‪" ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻝ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ‪.219‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﺩ‪" ،‬ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ‪-‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪ -‬ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.12‬‬

‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.116‬‬

‫‪Lewis Mandell, and Thomas O’Brein, Investments, Macmillan Publishing, N.Y 1992 p 262. 40‬‬ ‫‪ 41‬ﳐﺎﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﺪﻱ‪"،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺎﺕ"‪،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،3‬ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‪،2000،19‬ﺹ‪.71-70‬‬

‫‪ 42‬ﻳﻮﺳﻒ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﳏﻤﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺯﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺮﺝ–ﺝ‪،2‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪،1996‬ﺹ ‪.211‬‬ ‫‪ 43‬ﺩ‪.‬ﲰﲑ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪ ﺭﺿﻮﺍﻥ‪" ،‬ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍ‪‬ﺎ"‪ ، ،‬ﺹ‪.143‬‬ ‫‪ 44‬ﻫﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻨﲑ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﰲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ"‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،2003 ،‬ﺹ‪.20‬‬

‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 1982‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫‪ 45‬ﺑﺪﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﹼﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺼﻔﺔ ‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺳﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ‪‬ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻄﺒﻘﺎﹰ ﳋﻄﺔ "ﺑﺮﺍﺩﻯ" ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺇﻗﺘﺮﺡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﻮﻧﻴﺎﺕ ‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻳﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﱪ ﺳﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺿﻤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻨ‪‬ﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺪ‪‬ﻭﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪ‪‬ﻭﱄ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪343‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﻛﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘ‪‬ﺤﺪﺓ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﹼﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﳊﺪ‪ ‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻒ " ﺟﻨﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﹼﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ‪ "The Frenzy of the 1980’s‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﺩﻳﻮ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 46‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘ‪‬ﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘ‪‬ﻮﺭﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ 28‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Caouette, John.I, Alteman, and Paul Narayan, Managing Credit Risk : The Next Graet‬‬ ‫‪Financial Chalange, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York, 1998.‬‬ ‫‪ -47‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﰲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 2006/05/09‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﻴﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪vb.arabsgate.com/showthread.php?t=460288 - 68k - Résultat complémentaire -consulté le‬‬ ‫‪18/08/2008.‬‬

‫‪ -48‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﻤﺰﺍﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻲ )ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﱐ ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﳏﺪﺩﺍﺗﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،2002 ،‬ﺹ‪.48‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﻃﺎﺭﻕ ﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻭﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ -‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ -‬ﻣﺼﺮ ‪ ،2000‬ﺹ ‪.132‬‬

‫‪ -50‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﳊﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﲔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪:‬‬

‫‪www.jps-dir.com/Forum/forum_posts.asp?TID=2426&PN=4&get=last - 144k - Résultat‬‬ ‫‪complémentaire consulté le 18/08/2008.‬‬ ‫‪Les PME, nouvel enjeu de la tirisation de créances commerciales Les Echos 25/ 04/ 2005, P34.‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﻨﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘّﻮﺭﻳﻖ ﺃﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﻌﺎﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ،272‬ﺟﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ‪ ،2002‬ﺹ ‪.10‬‬

‫‪344‬‬

‫‪51‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩ‪ /‬ﻓﺎﺭﺱ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺭ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺮﻑ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻗﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳊﻴﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻋﺸﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ‪‬ﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻖ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻄﺮﻗﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﻄﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎ ﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻮﻫﺮﻱ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺮﻕ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻛﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻛﺒﺢ ﲨﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻭﺿﺤﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﻞ ‪‬ﺮﺏ ﻭﻏﺶ ﺟﺒﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﲢﻔﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﻰ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺍﺟﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﰊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳍﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺻﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺣﱴ ﻻ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺟﺪﻭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺭﻗﻌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﻜﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﻞ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﺯﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﻗﻤﺎ ﻭﺩﻓﻌﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﻠﺢ ﰲ ﻛﺒﺢ ﲨﺎﺡ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﺎﺟﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﲦﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﳒﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﻮ‪ :‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ؟ ﰒ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﰊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻮﺙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺒﺪﺀﺍ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺎ ﻗﺪ ﳚﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺗﺘﻬﺮﺏ ﺑﺸﱴ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ؟ ﰒ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻓﺰ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﲏ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ؟‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‬ ‫أ( ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻌﻘﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻮﻛﻬﻮﱂ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1972‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﻲ‪“ :‬ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﳛﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ” ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﻓﺖ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‪“ :‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﳛﺼﻞ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺬﺍﺀ ﻭﻛﺴﺎﺀ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺀ ﻭﻣﺄﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﺎﺭﺱ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﲏ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ”‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ‪ Environment = environnement‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻲ “ﺳﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻴﻠﺮ ‪st.‬‬ ‫‪ ”Heliere‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1835‬ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،3‬ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﻌﲏ‪“:‬ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳍﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﰲ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﲟﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ”‪.4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ب( ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻭﺭﺩﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﱘ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺴﺨﲑ ﺍﷲ ﺳﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺁﻧﻴﺔ ﳒﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• “ﻭﺍﺫﻛﺮﻭﺍ ﺇﺫ ﺟﻌﻠﻜﻢ ﺧﻠﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺎﺩ ﻭﺑﻮ‪‬ﺃﻛﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺗﺘﺨﺬﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻬﻮﳍﺎ ﻗﺼﻮﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﻨﺤﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻮﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﺫﻛﺮﻭﺍ ﺁﻻﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﷲ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺜﻮﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻔﺴﺪﻳﻦ” )ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﻑ‪(74:‬‬ ‫‪345‬‬

‫ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫• “ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻟﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﺮﺍﺷﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ” )ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺮﺓ‪(22 :‬‬ ‫• “ ﻭﺃﻧﺰﻟﻨﺎ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺄﺱ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ” )ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪ‪(25 :‬‬ ‫• “ﻭﺟﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺣﻲ” )ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻴﺎﺀ‪(30 :‬‬ ‫• “ﻭﺟﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺳﻘﻔﺎ ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺎ” )ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻴﺎﺀ‪(32 :‬‬ ‫• “ﺃﱂ ﺗﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﷲ ﺳﺨﺮ ﻟﻜﻢ ﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻠﻚ ﲡﺮﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻩ ﻭﳝﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺈﺫﻧﻪ” )ﺍﳊﺞ‪(65 :‬‬ ‫• “ﻭﺟﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﺳﺮﺍﺟﺎ ﻭﻫ‪‬ﺎﺟﺎ” )ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺄ‪(13 :‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺍﻗﺢ ﻓﺄﻧﺰﻟﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺎﺀ ﻓﺄﺳﻘﻴﻨﺎﻛﻤﻮﻩ” )ﺍﳊﺠﺮ‪(22:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺨﺮﺕ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻻ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻣﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﱪ‬ ‫ﺭﺷﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﳋﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﲏ ﺟﻠﺪﺗﻪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ت( ﻣﻼﻣﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﺑﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﺑﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺃﻟﻔﻮﺍ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﻋﻄﺘﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻖ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺸﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﲡﺴﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:5‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳉﺎﺣﻆ )ﺕ ‪255‬ﻫـ(‪ :‬ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ “ﺍﳊﻴﻮﺍﻥ” ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﺍﱐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺯﻛﺮﻳﺎ ﺑﻦ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﻭﻳﲏ )ﺕ ‪682‬ﻫـ(‪ :‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻴﻪ “ﻋﺠﺎﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﻠﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ” ﻭ”ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺩ” ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻤﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﲑﻱ )ﺕ ‪ 808‬ﻫـ(‪ :‬ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ “ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﳊﻴﻮﺍﻥ”‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻦ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻳﻄﻲ )ﺕ ‪ 398‬ﻫـ(‪ :‬ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﲎ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﻲ ﻭﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﺀ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ‪“ :‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻴﺔ”‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺑﻮﺣﻨﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻮﺭﻱ )ﺕ ‪282‬ﻫـ(‪ :‬ﺻﻨﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ “ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ” ﻭﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻼﻗﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺑﻦ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻄﺎﺭ )ﺕ ‪ 646‬ﻫـ(‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺱ ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ “ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻊ ﳌﻔﺮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﺬﻳﺔ” ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﰲ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ﻭﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻬﻴﺊ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ث( ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻳﺪﺭﺱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ )ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ( ﻟﻴﺠﺪ ﳍﺎ ﺣﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﱴ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺇﺣﻼﻻ ﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.6‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﲏ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺨﲑ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪‬ﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﻭﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ)ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﲟﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﳕﻮﺍﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺪﳝﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻴﺲ ﲟﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﺳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﻴﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﻪ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﺌﻲ ﻋﻘﻼﱐ ﳛﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﲟﺎ‬

‫‪346‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﺪﳝﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻀﺮ ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﳛﻘﻖ ﹰ‬ ‫ﳕﻮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﺖ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﻭﻗﺒﻠﻪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺍﳊﺮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳍﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﱯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺤﺜﻮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ )ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺟﺸﻌﻪ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻣﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺰﺯﺕ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺑﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ‪ 48‬ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻫﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﻮ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻼ ﰲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ؟ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺆﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﳓﻦ ﻧﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﺼﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻣﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫أ( ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﺪ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ‪ %60‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺗﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﺍﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻤﺴﲔ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﺍﺕ ﺟﺬﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻓﺎﻗﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻀﺖ ﰲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺸﻮﺀ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳛﺘﺎﺟﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﳕﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻔﻴﺔ‪.7‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺣﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻮﺗﻮ )ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ( ﰲ ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ ‪ 1997‬ﲞﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻭﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻌﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪ 160‬ﺑﻠﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺛﺎﱐ ﺃﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ –ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﲔ ﰲ ﻛﻴﻮﺗﻮ‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﱪﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺪﻋﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪ 2012-2008‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ 1990‬ﲝﻮﺍﱄ ‪ .8 %5‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﲡﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﰊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %8‬ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺒﺘﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺛﺎﱐ ﺃﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﻋﺘﻤﺪﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %7‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.9%6‬‬ ‫ب( ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻛﻴﻮﺗﻮ؟‬ ‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ( ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻨﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﱂ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳋﻮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳋﻮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﱯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ )ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ( ﺇﻥ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻣﺖ ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪347‬‬

‫ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺭﻏﻢ ﺿﻌﻔﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﶈﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺎﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻻﻓﺘﻘﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲡﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺜﺎ ﳍﺎ ﰒ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﶈﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺜﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺘﺮﻭﻝ ﳒﺪ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺻﺮﺡ ﻭﺯﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺗﺘﻜﺒﺪ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲣﻔﺾ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺬﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺗﺒﻨﺖ ‪ 12‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﺎ ﲰﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.10‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻋﺰﺯﻫﺎ ﻭﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﳒﺪ‪:11‬‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺗﺪﱐ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﳏﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﺮ ﻭﺯﺣﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﲑﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻥ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ( ﺗﺰﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺰﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﺟﻴﺔ ﻷﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺨﲑ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺮﻭﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻼ( ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺘﺮﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻘﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺤﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺣﻒ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺴﻴﺔ‪...،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻠﺞ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ :‬ﻫﻞ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺒﺢ ﲨﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ؟‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺘﺠﻠﻰ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﳌﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻛﻐﺮﺍﻣﺔ )ﻋﻘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﰲ ﳏﻮ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﺷﱴ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﱯ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻧﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﲔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎ‪‬ﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪348‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫أ( ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﲔ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﳛﺪﺛﻮﻥ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﱠﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﲰﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫)ﺑﻴﺠﻮ ‪ (Pigou‬ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻰ )‪(les taxes pigouviennes‬‬ ‫ب( ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﳌﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻬﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎ‪‬ﺎ )ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻬﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺏ‪(...‬‬ ‫ﻭﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﲟﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.12‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺪﺍﺛﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﳛﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﰲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﳌﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻣﺎ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳒﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻵﰐ‪:13‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﱐ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺴﺲ ﺍﻷﻋﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﲞﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﺦ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻘﻮﻝ ﺗﻼﻣﻴﺬ ﻭﻃﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺍﺭﺱ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﻨﻌﺔ ﺑﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻜﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻴﻨﺔ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ :‬ﻫﻞ ﻳﻜﻒ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ؟‬ ‫ت( ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻓﺰ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻠﻪ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻓﺰ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺶ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳌﺪﺓ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻤﺲ ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﰲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺳﻠﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻓﺰ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﲢﻔﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﲑﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﺗﻀﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪349‬‬

‫ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺧﺎﻣﺴﺎ‪ :‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻛﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻳﺮﺗﻜﺰ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺎ )ﺗﻠﻮﺛﻲ( ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺪﻓﻊ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﻌﻘﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻣﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﺣﺲ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺛﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﳚﻌﻠﻬﻢ ﻳﻐﲑﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻜﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺧﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ ﺳﺒﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻓﺰ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺫﻛﺮﻧﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﲣﻔﻒ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ﻭﻃﺄﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺿﻤﺤﻠﺖ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻧﲏ ﺃﺭﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫أ( ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ب( ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ )ﻷ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺘﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺭﻗﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺧﻠﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻭﻥ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ت( ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﺎ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﲝﺚ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﺒﺎﺀ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻠﻴﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺑﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻮﺍﺹ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺃﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ث( ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﻼﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲣﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺨﻮﺍﺹ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰒ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﳑﺎﺭﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﰊ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ ﺭﻳﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﲟﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﳍﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻛﻠﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻣﻮﺍﻻ ﻃﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻧﺘﺠﺖ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺩﺳﺎ‪ :‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬ ‫أ( ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻰ ) ‪ (output tax‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺿﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺎ‪ ،14‬ﺃﻱ ﻻ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ب( ﺿﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻰ )‪ ،(Emission Tax‬ﻭﺗﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﲤﺎﺭﺱ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.15‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﱯ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﰊ ﳌﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺠﺄ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﺒﲔ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪350‬‬

‫_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﳚﻌﻞ ﳐﺮﺟﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﻊ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻏﲑ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻛﺸﺮﻳﻚ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﻴﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻨﻪ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﰲ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻔﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻮﺑﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﳍﺎﺩﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﲤﻮﻳﻞ ﲪﻼﺕ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﲢﺴﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ ﻧﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﲝﻮﺙ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﻮﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺒﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻊ‪" ،‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،1975 ،‬ﺹ ‪.9‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﳊﻤﺪ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﺸﻜﻼ‪‬ﺎ"‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،1986 ،‬ﺹ‪.29‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﺭ‪" ،‬ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ‪ ،1986 ،‬ﺹ ‪.17‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﻲ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎﻫﺎ"‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺳﻴﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،1993 ،‬ﺹ ‪.10‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺭ‪" ،‬ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺇﺳﻼﻣﻲ"‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ‪ ،1999 ،‬ﺹ‪41‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻤﺎﻭﻱ‪" ،‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﰊ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ 7-5 ،‬ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮ ‪ ، 2007‬ﺹ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﳎﻠﺲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻓﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ"‪ ،‬ﻧﲑﻭﰊ‪ 9-5 ،‬ﻓﱪﺍﻳﺮ ‪ ،2007‬ﺹ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺟﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﻏﺎﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﲑﻱ ﺭﻳﺒﻠﲔ ﻫﻴﻞ‪" ،‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺧﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ"‪ ،‬ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،25‬ﻭﺍﺷﻨﻄﻦ‪ ،‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﱄ‪ ،2000 ،‬ﺹ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻣﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻳﻜﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ"‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﳋﱪ‪ 18 ،‬ﺃﻭﺕ ‪ ،.2004‬ﺹ‪. 1‬‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﲪﺪﻱ ﺻﺎﱀ‪" ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﳌﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻛﺎﺩﳝﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،2002،‬ﺹ‪.41‬‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺟﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﻏﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﲑﻱ ﺭﻳﺒﻠﲔ ﻫﻴﻞ‪،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﺎﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪ 30-29 ،‬ﺃﻭﺕ ‪ ،2006‬ﺹ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪DAVIDcl Nellor, D.C, "Environmental Taxes", Washington,1995, p108-109. 14‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﻋﺼﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﲑ ﻧﺎﻋﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﱯ ﻭﺃﺛﺮﻩ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‪ ،2007،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ‪ ،29‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪، 1‬‬ ‫‪ ،2007‬ﺹ ‪.71‬‬

‫‪351‬‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﻳﻠﺪ ﻋﻔﺎﻑ ‪ -‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻟﻠﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺃﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺸـﻂ ‪‬ـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﲑﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳓﻮ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺱ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨـﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﳊﻴـﺎﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﳛﻤﻞ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻼﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﳚﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻩ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﲡﺎ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﻤـﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺐ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﻭﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﺭﻏﺒﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺼﻞ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘـﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌـﺪ ﳑﺎﺭﺳـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻬﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ ﰲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺑﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳـﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ ﻟﻌﻞ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻨﺎﻗﺶ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﺎﰿ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪-:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ؛‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ؛‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﳛﺘﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﳚﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺇﻥ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻌﺮﻑ ‪ Kotler‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ":‬ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺫﺍﻋﺔ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺣﺜﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺳﻠﻊ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﻴﺎﻗﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﳋﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻊ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻦ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ "‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﲣﺺ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،...‬ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﲔ ﻭﺇﻗﻨﺎﻋﻬﻢ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻓﻌﻬﻢ ﻻﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﲔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻋﻤﻼﺋﻬﻢ ﲟﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺠﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪353‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﱐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1-1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺭﻛﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺪﺑﲑ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﳜﺮﺝ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1-1-1‬ﲨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﲨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﲨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻷﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﲣﻄﻴﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﻴﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،...‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺪﺙ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ‪:‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫♦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻘﺒﲔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-1-1‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬

‫ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺗﻘﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،3‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺮ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﰲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﻟﻌﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ‬

‫ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ‪:4‬‬

‫♦ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺩ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺳﻠﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺚ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3-1-1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4-1-1‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﺪﻭﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5-1-1‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﱐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6-1-1‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺪﻯ ﰎ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫‪354‬‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫‪ .2-1‬ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﲑ ﰲ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﱪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﻠﺮ ‪‬ﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺩ‪ :5‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﲝﺴﻨﺘﲔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺘﲔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳍﺎﻡ ﻭﻓﻜﺮ ﻓﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﺒﺪﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﻝ ﳚﺴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﳋﻴﺎﻝ ﻟﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3-1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﰲ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳌﺎ‬

‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭ ﻛﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻨﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1-3-1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﺀﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪:‬‬

‫♦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻒ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻻ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﺷﻬﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،6‬ﳌﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺇﺫ ﲤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺧﺺ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﰲ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،7‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺼﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍ‪‬ﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ) ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﰲ‪ (...‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،8‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬

‫ﻭﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﲏ‪ ،9‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻢ ﻫﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ‬

‫ﺃﻥ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺬﻳﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﳌﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻟﺘﺬﻛﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،10‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﲝﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﺎﺏ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺎﺟﺤﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻻ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﻟﻮﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﻄﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﲑﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﳏﻔﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،...‬ﻭﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺇﺫ ﻳﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻦ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪355‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﲔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ‪،11‬‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﳘﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-3-1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻗﺒﺎﻻ ﻛﺒﲑﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﳒﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻪ‬

‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﲡﻌﻠﻪ ﳛﻈﻰ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻦ ﻧﻌﺪ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺧﱪﺓ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻓﺘﻘﺎﺭﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺬﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺼﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،12‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﲔ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﻧﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻬﺠﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻼﺅﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،13‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻘﻠﺺ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬

‫♦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻳﺘﺠﻠﻰ ﰲ ﻛﱪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻛﻪ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﲝﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﺟﲔ ﻣﻘﺎﻋﺪﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺻﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﳛﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4-1‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ )ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ( ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﱐ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺗﻪ ﰲ‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﻧﺬﻛﺮ‪:‬‬

‫‪14‬‬

‫‪ .1-4-1‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫♦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺼﺎﺀ )ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ( ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺑﺴﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺧﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﺤﻜﻤﻮﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﻓﻖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﻋﻄﻴﺖ ﺃﻭﺯﺍﻧﺎ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻷﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺇ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻴﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﳜﺘﻠﻔﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﳌﺒﺘﻜﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪356‬‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫♦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﻠﻔﲔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﺑﺘﻘﻮﱘ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻧﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﺑـ ﺃﺣﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺃﺣﺐ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﲢﺴﻨﺎ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺼﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﲑ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻛﻬﻢ ﻭﺗﺬﻛﺮﻫﻢ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺭﺁﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﰲ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﳚﺬﺏ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-4-1‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ( ‪ :‬ﺪﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻴﺲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﳜﻀﻊ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﻙ‪.‬‬

‫♦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻼﺯﻡ ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﲔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺄﻝ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺬﻳﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺎﻫﺪﻭﻧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﻌﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﻭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﲰﻌﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،15‬ﻭ ﻳﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻﻥ ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻮﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺴﺢ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻭﲝﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﳒﺎﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﺮﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﶈﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ)‪ ،(...‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻮﺧﻰ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﺀ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﹰ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺎﹰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍﹰ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﱪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪%12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻌﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲨﺎﻫﲑﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﻛﻬﺎ‪.16‬‬

‫‪357‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ .1-2‬ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻇﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺃﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1-1-2‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﱐ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﲢﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺼﻮﺹ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﳋﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ) ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺆﻭﻝ ﻟﻼﳓﺼﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﺍﶈﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻉ ﺫﻫﲏ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﺼﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﱐ ) ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﲔ ‪2.5‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﱐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻻﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪،Banner Advertisuing Swapping 17‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﲟﻘﺘﻀﺎﻩ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺇﻋﻼﱐ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﱐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺟﻢ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﱐ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﱐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﳍﻤﺎ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻛﱪﻯ ﰲ ﺟﺬﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻔﺤﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-1-2‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻻﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ‬

‫ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﲔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻭﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﳚﺎﰊ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻬﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻱ‪.18‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬

‫‪ .3-1-2‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪ :‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺿﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ‬ ‫ﰲ‪: 19‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪ :‬ﳝﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻳﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫♦‬

‫ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﲟﻘﺘﻀﺎﻩ ﻳﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲤﻠﻚ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻛﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺭﲰﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻦ‬

‫♦‬

‫ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﻘﺘﻀﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ‬

‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺄﺟﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺘﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺟﺄﺓ ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺷﻜﻠﲔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﲔ ﳘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫♦‬

‫ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺟﺄﺓ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺄﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺨﺬ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺣﺠﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﱐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻦ )ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫♦ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺟﺄﺓ ‪ :‬ﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺄﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﲔ‪.‬‬

‫‪358‬‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ‪ : Links‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻇﻬﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﲟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﻛﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4-1-2‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻮﺍﺫ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻋﻴﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-2‬ﺍﺑﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﳝﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﳚﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫♦ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻌﺔ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺣـﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪20.‬‬ ‫♦ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ‪ ،‬ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﻳﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﳏﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻭﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺍ‪‬ﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﳉـﺬﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴـﺔ ﺍﻹﻋـﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﰎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻀﻢ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺭﺗﺄﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﲟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﺡ ‪ 13‬ﺳﺆﺍﻻ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﳛﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻨﻌﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻭﰎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺴﻤﲔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼـﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻳﻌﱪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺧﺼﺼـﻨﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋـﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﰎ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪ 138‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﲤﻜﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ‪ 61‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻪ ﻣﻊ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﳑﺎ ﺣـﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﲤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﲣﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺪﺕ ‪ 08‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻀـﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺩﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ‪ 06‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻏﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 47‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (01‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍ‪‬ﺴﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ)‪.(01‬‬

‫‪359‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫‪ .1-3‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺎﱐ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﱐ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺕ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‪ 25‬ﺩﻳﺴﻤﱪ‪ 2008‬ﺇﱃ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 25‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪ ،2009‬ﻟﺘﺸﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺻﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻳﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻜﻴﻜﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2-3‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﰎ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻓﺸﻤﻠﺖ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺮﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﳑﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﱃ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (02‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3-3‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﲨﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺔ ﰎ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،EXCEL 2007‬ﻣﻦ ﺧـﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﻄـﺎﺀ )‪(1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺑـ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰎ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺏ)‪ (0‬ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺑـ‬ ‫]ﻻ[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻨﺎﻉ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﲤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ ،SPSS 16‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪ ،Spearman‬ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼـﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ )ﻛﻲ‪ ، khi-deux (2‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4-3‬ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ ، Spearman‬ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (03‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (03‬ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ،0.517‬ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ )‪ (0.00‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ،(٪1‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻮﻗﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ] ‪ ،[0.7 ، 0.3‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺳـﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5-3‬ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔﺓ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ، khi-deux‬ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉـﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫)‪ (04‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ )ﻛﻲ‪ (²‬ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳـﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﲨـﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ )‪ ،(8.460) ،(1.442) ،(2.168) ،(0.466) ،(0.305‬ﲟﺴـﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ )‪ ،(0.076) ،(0.696) ،(0.277) ،(0.708) ،(0.581‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻮﻝ)‪ ،(0.05‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸـﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ ﻭﺑﲔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ )ﻛﻲ‪ (²‬ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻜـﻞ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴـﺐ )‪،(7.434) ،(9.399‬‬ ‫)‪ ،(5.163‬ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ،(0.023) ،(0.050) ،(0.024‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻮﻝ‬ ‫)‪ ،(0,05‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﲔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (05‬ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼـﻬﺎ ﺍﻟـﱵ ﺃﺛﺒﺘـﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )ﻛﻲ‪.(2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ)‪ (05‬ﻧﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻥ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪250‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻼﺣﻆ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋـﻼﻥ‬

‫‪360‬‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻲ ﻓﻤﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6-3‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻋـﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﰲ ﳒﺎﺡ ﺍﳊﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟـﺪﻧﺎ ﺍﻧـﻪ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻓﺘﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻠﻎ ‪ ،%17‬ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪ ،%87‬ﻫﺬﺍ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﳚﺎﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻛﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﱪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺑـ ‪ ،%47‬ﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻟـﺪﻯ‬ ‫‪ %57‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻠﻎ ‪ %28‬ﻭ ﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺑــ ‪ ،%13‬ﻭﰎ ﳉـﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﳍﺎ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﲤﺜﻠﺖ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﰲ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌـﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻠﺐ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺩ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻲ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻘﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺐ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﳍﺎ ﺑﺘﺪﺍﺭﻙ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋـﱪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑـ‪ ،%29.17‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺫﺍﻋﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻛـﱪ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑـ ‪ ،%60‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﳌﺰﺍﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﲝﻜﻢ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺮ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻈﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﲝﺼﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺪ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧـﺎﺕ ﻟـﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ،%60‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻒ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ،%55‬ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲝﻜـﻢ ﺍﻟﺘـﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﻒ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﻒ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﲏ ﻭﻻﳔﻔﺎﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ % 49‬ﰒ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ ﺑـ ‪ %45‬ﻭﱂ ﲢﻈﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻯ ‪ ،%9‬ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﻼﻧـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑـ ‪ ،%28‬ﻭﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻒ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻼﺕ ﺑـ ‪ ،%19‬ﻭﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ ﺑـ ‪ ،%13‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﰲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ،%79‬ﰒ ﺳﱪ ﺍﻵﺭﺍﺀ ﺑـ‪ ،%53‬ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﰎ ﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻥ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ % 23‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )ﻛﻲ‪ ،(2‬ﱂ ﻧﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴـﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ ﻭﺑﲔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﲟﻌﲎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗـﺄﺛﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ )ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ)ﺧﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ( ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ‪‬ﺎ)ﳏﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗـﺔ ﺑـﲔ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻠﺼﻨﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺮﻭﳚﻴـﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﻳـﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﺠﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻣﻦ ﳑﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻭﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺋﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﳍﺎ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜـﺮ ﻗﺒـﻮﻻ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻻﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﲟﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤـﺎ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺸﺎ‪‬ﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺯﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳـﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒـﺔ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺈﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺒﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺧﻄﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﱂ ﺗﺘﺮﺳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜـﺎﰲ ﰲ ﻫـﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺘﻈـﺮﻩ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫‪361‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻋﻤﻼﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﳑﺎ ﺃﺗﺎﺣﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺑﺎﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻـﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﳏﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻬﺪﺍﻓﻬﻢ ﺗﺮﻭﳚﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧـﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﳕﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣـﺎ ﻓﺮﺿـﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﲣﻄﻴﻄﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺿـﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﻛﻔﺎﺀﺗـﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﺧـﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﲤﺜﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ‪:‬‬ ‫♦ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﺫﻟـﻚ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﲎ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻴﺴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺈﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻴﺔ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﻜﻠﻔـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﺎﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﺴﲎ ﻷﻛﱪ ﺷﺮﳛﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻨﻤـﻮ ﺛﻘﺎﻓـﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼـﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫♦ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﻟﻴﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﻲ ﲢﻘﻴـﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻤﻠﺤﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﻭﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺩﻭل ‪ _ 1‬ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﺒﻴﺎﻨﺎﺕ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪%‬‬ ‫‪% 27.65‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫‪% 14.89‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪% 10.63‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪% 10.63‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪% 25.53‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺳﻜﻴﻜﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪% 4.25‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪% 6.38‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺮﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ - 1‬ﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮادي‬ ‫‪6%‬‬

‫اﻟﺠﺰاﺋﺮ‬ ‫‪27%‬‬

‫اﻟﺒﻠﻴﺪة‬ ‫‪15%‬‬

‫اﻟﻮادي‬

‫ورﻗﻠﺔ‬

‫ﺳﻜﻴﻜﺪة‬

‫ورﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪4%‬‬

‫ﺳﻜﻴﻜﺪة‬ ‫‪26%‬‬

‫وهﺮان‬ ‫‪11%‬‬

‫اﻟﺒﻮﻳﺮة‬ ‫‪11%‬‬

‫وهﺮان‬

‫اﻟﺒﻮﻳﺮة‬

‫اﻟﺒﻠﻴﺪة‬

‫اﻟﺠﺰاﺋﺮ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺮﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪362‬‬

‫___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﺩﻭل ‪ _ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻭﻀﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ‬

‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺪﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﻭﺏ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬

‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬

‫‪%‬‬

‫‪% 34.04‬‬ ‫‪% 65.95‬‬ ‫‪% 38.29‬‬ ‫‪% 61.70‬‬ ‫‪% 21.27‬‬ ‫‪% 31.91‬‬ ‫‪% 46.81‬‬ ‫‪% 93.61‬‬ ‫‪% 6.38‬‬ ‫‪% 34.04‬‬ ‫‪% 14.89‬‬ ‫‪%34.04‬‬ ‫‪% 8.51‬‬ ‫‪% 8.51‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺮﺟﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﺩﻭل ‪ _3‬ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﺒﺎﻁ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻭﺍﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻭﻟﻭﺠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺩﻴﺜﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫**‪0,517‬‬ ‫‪0,000‬‬ ‫‪1,000‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫‪1,000‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫**‪0,517‬‬ ‫‪0,000‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ‪٪1 = α‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟـ‬

‫‪spss‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﺩﻭل ‪ _4‬ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺘﺤﻠﻴل )ﻜﻲ‪ (²‬ﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺨﺼﺎﺌﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻅﻤﺔ ﺒﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍ‪‬ﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻲ‪2‬‬ ‫‪0.305‬‬ ‫‪0.466‬‬ ‫‪2.168‬‬ ‫‪9.399‬‬ ‫‪7.434‬‬ ‫‪1.442‬‬ ‫‪5.163‬‬ ‫‪8.460‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪0.581‬‬ ‫‪0.708‬‬ ‫‪0.277‬‬ ‫‪0.024‬‬ ‫‪0.050‬‬ ‫‪0.696‬‬ ‫‪0.023‬‬ ‫‪0.076‬‬

‫*ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻮﻝ ‪ ٪5 = α‬ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟـ‬ ‫‪363‬‬

‫‪spss‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬

‫______________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﺩﻭل ‪ _5‬ﺘﺼﻨﻴﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺅﺴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺤﻘﻘﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬

‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪50‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻞ ‪250‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪250‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 200‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺝ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺝ‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻴﺐ‬

‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻲ‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟـ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪6,4%‬‬ ‫‪6,4%‬‬ ‫‪8,5%‬‬ ‫‪40,4%‬‬ ‫‪61,7%‬‬ ‫‪4,3%‬‬ ‫‪8,5%‬‬ ‫‪10,6%‬‬ ‫‪38,3%‬‬ ‫‪61,7%‬‬ ‫‪0%‬‬ ‫‪61,7%‬‬ ‫‪61,7%‬‬

‫‪ spss‬ﻭﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺎﻨﺔ ﺒﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺘﺤﻠﻴل )ﻜﻲ‪(2‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Philip Kotler, and ethers," principles of marketing", (en ligne), 2nd edition, New Jersey, USA: Prentice Hall Europe,‬‬ ‫‪1999, available at: <www.pdf-search-engine.com/kotler-principles-of-marketing-pdf.html - 64k - >, (29/05/2007), p‬‬ ‫‪793.‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﻋﺼﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺃﻣﲔ ﺃﺑﻮﻋﻠﻔﺔ‪ "،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ) ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ"‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ ،03‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺣﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳـﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،2002 ،‬ﺹ ‪.180‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺸﲑ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺭﺑﺎﻳﻌﻴﺔ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ"‪ ،‬ﺏ ﻁ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺯﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،1998 ،‬ﺹ‪.248‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﺼﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺃﻣﲔ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.181‬‬

‫‪ .5‬ﺑﺸﲑ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺭﺑﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ "،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺲ‪ -‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ -‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ("‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻴـﺎﺯﻭﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،2007 ،‬ﺹ ‪.313‬‬ ‫; ‪. Hansen Goston," découvrir la publicité", édition labor, Paris ،1984, p 184‬‬ ‫‪. Ron Newman, "How Advertising Differs: A Content Analysis of Traditional Print Advertising and Online‬‬

‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬

‫‪Media Models", Florida International University , 2007, available at :<www.scribd.com/doc/2618349/How‬‬‫‪Advertising-Differs- - 219k >, ( 05/07/2007), p9.‬‬

‫‪ .8‬ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺻﻲ‪ "،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ – ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ"‪ ،‬ﺏ ﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،2004 ،‬ﺹ ‪.416‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﻋﺼﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺃﻣﲔ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ‪.150‬‬

‫‪. Michael Phillips & Salli Rasberry," Marketing Without Advertising", 3ème edition, U.S.A: Peri pakroo, April 2001,‬‬ ‫‪available at: <http://www.writeexpress.com/legal/marketing-without-advertising.html>, (13/02/2007) ,p 18.‬‬

‫‪10‬‬

‫‪ .11‬ﻋﺼﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺃﻣﲔ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪.163‬‬

‫‪ .12‬ﺑﻨﺖ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻓﻄﻮﻣﺔ‪" ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ"‪،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻛﺘﻮﺑﺮ ‪ ،2001‬ﺹ ‪.191‬‬ ‫‪ .13‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺕ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‪" ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻁ‪ ،01‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﳎﺪﻻﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،1997 ،‬ﺹ ‪.172‬‬

‫‪364‬‬

2010-2009 / 07 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

., Jacques Lendrevie , Bernard Brochand," publicitor", 5eme édition, dalloz, paris، 2001, p 248.

14

. Robert Heath, "Measuring the hidden power of émotive advertising", International Journal of Market Research,), Vol 47 Issue 05, The Market Research Society, 2005, available at: <www.scribd.com/doc/984108/Emotive-Advertising - 150k ->, (06/07/2007) , p470.

15

‫ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ‬،2007/11/03 ،"‫ "ﻓﺮﺹ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﳌﺔ‬،‫ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﲏ‬.16 < www.asharqalawsat.com/details.asp?section=13&article=222358&issueno=9235 - 29k - > :‫ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﻢ‬ 17

. George E, Michael A, Belch," advertising and promotion( an integrated marketing communications

. 7‫ ﺹ‬،

perspective)", 6th edition, the McGraw-hill companies, 2003, available at: <www.scribd.com/doc/.../Advertising-andPromotion-An-Integrated-Marketing-Communication-Perspective-29k> , 26/02/2007, p 500.

18 . Alexis Demarquis," Promotion on-line(Évolution et enjeux pour les marques)", mémoire de fin d’études, 2004.

10/02/2008, P17.

.435 ‫ ﺹ‬،2005 ،‫ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬،‫ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬،‫ ﺏ ﻁ‬،"‫" ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﻃﺎﺭﻕ ﻃﻪ‬.19

،‫ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬،‫ ﺃﻃﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬،"‫ﺎ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬‫" ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﻴﺖ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎ‬،‫ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﲞﱵ‬.20 .86 ‫ ﺹ‬،(2007/20/04)،<http://bbekhti.online.fr/doctoart/13.pdf> :‫ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،2002/09/24

365

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ )ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺃ‪ /‬ﺑﻨﺸﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺃ‪.‬ﺩ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺍﺋﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﰲ ﺑﻘﺎﺀﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ‪21‬؛ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻫﲑﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺭﲝﻴﺘﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺬ‪‬ﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻛـﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﲝﲔ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ؛ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺩﺕ ﻟﻜﺜـﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺷﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺄﻳﻨﺎ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣـﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻻﺋﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ )‪ (BADR‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﲤﻬﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﱄ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ؛ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺪ ﺫﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳـﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻳﺔ )ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﱴ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺭﺑﻄﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﻃـﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠﻬﻢ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﰲ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗـﺔ ﻣـﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑـﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﰲ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺄﺗﻰ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧـﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﻦ ﲨﻊ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﻦ ﲡﺰﺋﺘﻬﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﳘﺔ ﰲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣـﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ؛ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻤﺜﻠـﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻳـﺪ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴـﻪ ﺍﻟﻌـﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷـﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﳓﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻟﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﲔ ‪-:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ؟؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﻌﻲ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻻﺋﻬﻢ؟؛‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ‪ 21‬ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺑﺎﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﲤﺜﻠﺖ ﺃﻏﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺕ ‪...‬؛ ﻭﺳﺎﳘﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺳﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﳓﻮﻩ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ )‪ (ONE to ONE‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﲏ ﻋﺮﺿﺎ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺯﺑﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﳛﺔ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬـﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻛـﺰﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﳋﺪﻣﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1-1‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ Kotler‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ‪..." :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ؛ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬـﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣـﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴـﻮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،1"...‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﲦﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺸـﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﳎـﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼـﻨﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ؛ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﻭﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﲔ؛ ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﻣـﻦ ﺧﻼﳍـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﱴ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﻹﻗﺎﻣـﺔ‬

‫‪367‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﲔ ﻭﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﳌﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﻮ "ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ"‪،‬‬ ‫‪ .2-1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺳﻴﺲ ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺑﻂ ‪...‬؛ ﺗﺘﺠﻤـﻊ ﰲ ﻃـﺮﻓﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜـﺮ‬ ‫)ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﲔ(؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻼﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﰲ ﻓﺘـﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،2‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣـﻊ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺯﺑﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺍﺧﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪﺓ )ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳـﺎﺋﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺗﻒ‪(..‬؛ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﱪ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﲤﺘـﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ‪ (...‬ﻭﻭﻓﺮﺓ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﰲ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ‪.(...‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ؛ ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺩ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑـﻮﻥ ﻳﺸـﺒﻪ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ‪‬ـﻢ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴـﺔ ﻋﻼﻗـﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ‪3‬؛ ﻭﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄـﺮﻓﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴـﻞ‬ ‫ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻬﺎ ‪ PAYNE‬ﺻﺒﻐﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ﻌﲎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲞﻠﻖ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻼﻗـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺋ‪‬ﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ؛ ﻭ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﲝﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺰﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻔﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺤﺴـﲔ ﺍﺳـﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.4‬‬ ‫ﻭﳑﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﲎ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﳎﺮﺩ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺜﻤﻨﻬﺎ؛ ﻓﻬﻨﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﻛﻮ‪‬ـﺎ ﺗﺒـﺎﺩﻻ ﲡﺎﺭﻳـﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﺻﻮﰐ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺑﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﲎ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺴﲑ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗـﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﲝـﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺯﺑﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ؛ ﻭﻛـﻞ ﺫﻟـﻚ ﺑﻀـﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3-1‬ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﳝﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ‪‬ﺗ‪‬ﻌﲎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﺮﻛـﺰ ﻋﻠـﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻃﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﰲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻣﻮﺟﻬـﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺯﻣﲏ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪: 5‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﻛﻴﺔ ﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﺇﳚﺎﰊ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﳑﺜﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﱐ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ؛ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ )ﺳﻠﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭ\ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ(‬

‫‪368‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻀﺤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻨﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﲨﻌﻨﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﻛﻴﺔ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺣﻜﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ؛‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﱐ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻼﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻭﺇﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﺇﳕﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲞﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺪﺍﻓﻌﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﱰﺍﻫﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻋﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ )‪ ،(Serviabilité‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺝ ﻣﺴﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ؛‬

‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ؛ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺈﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ )ﺳﻠﻊ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﺢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﺘﺮﺟَﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻴﱡﻒ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﳑﻜﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻴﻎ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪: 6‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺇﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻹﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ؛‬‫ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻗﻲ ‪ :‬ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻭﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺏ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﱏ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﱴ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺋﺔ(؛‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻠﻲ ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﻭﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﳋﺴﺎﺋﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﻴﺔ )‪ : (Reciprocity‬ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﰒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺷﻴﺌﲔ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﺰﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﺷﻌﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺘﺎﺟﻪ ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪...‬؛ ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﳝﺎﺭﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪: 7‬‬ ‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺃﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺎﺕ(؛‬‫ ﻻ ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﻳﺆﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺣﲔ؛‬‫ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻪ ﺇﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩ ﰲ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ؛‬‫ ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﻇﺮﻭﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻩهـ‪ --‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻳﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﲔ ﳘﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ ‪ :‬ﻛﺈﲤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻃﻴﺐ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﳑﺜﻼ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ؛‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻷﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻨﱪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ؛‬‫ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﻻﺋﻪ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒّﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗـﻢ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺮﺩ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﳝﻜﻨﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻔﺰﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺯﺑﻮﻧﺎ ﻣﺆﻫﻼ ﺃﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻓﻀﻪ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻻﻧﻌﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﲝﻴﺘﻪ‬

‫‪369‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻌﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺯﺑﻮﻧﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺿﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺃﻋﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺍ ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻧـﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﲔ ﻓﺘﻠﺠﺄ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻻﺋﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﰲ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﺲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺆﻳﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺎ )ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨـﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺸـﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﳌﻨـﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻏﲑﻩ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﻔﲑﺍ )ﳏﺎﻣﻴﺎ( ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﻳﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳـﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﻻﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺿﺎﻑ ‪ Kotler‬ﺳـﻨﺔ ‪ 2005‬ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﲑ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪.8‬‬ ‫‪ .4-1‬ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ )‪: (CRM strategy‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻨﺔ∗ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪:2‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻷﻛﱪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ) ‪marketing de‬‬ ‫‪ (masse‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻨﻤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺍﺧﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﺗﺪﺭﳚﻴﺎ )ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻠﺔ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﻢ( ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﻢ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺸﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ )‪.(marketing personnalisé‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،9‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﱃ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﺩﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺇﳕﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﻭﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺯﺑﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ؛‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﱃ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﲡﻤﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲢﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ؛‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﻌﲏ ﺗﺒﻨﱢﻲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺟﻮﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ؛ ﺇﺫ ﺗﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺯﺑﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﳛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ؛‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳ‪‬ﻜﻴﱠﻒ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺣﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺎﺗﻪ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ؛ ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﺺ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Dell‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺼﲑ؛‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ؛ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺎ ﺫﻭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻼﺀﻡ ﻭﺣﺎﺟﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪370‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﳕﻴﺰ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤ‪‬ﻞ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﲎ؛ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕٍ ﺗ‪‬ﻨْﺒﹺﺌﹸﻨﺎ ﺑﺸﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣَﻌْﺮﹺﻓﹰﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﺒّﻖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻛﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﲨﻊ ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﰲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ﺇﺫ ﻳﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﳎﻬﻮﻝ؛ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳍﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻪ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﲣﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﲑ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺗ‪‬ﺠﻤﻊ ﰲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ )‪ (Customer Databases‬ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﲟﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )‪ ،(Data Mining‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﲢﻔﻆ ﰲ ﳐﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )‪.10(Data Warehouses‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﳘﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ )‪: (CLV: Customer lifetime Value‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻭﺣﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺟﺬﺑﻪ ﻭﺇﺭﺿﺎﺋﻪ ﻭﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻓﻬﺎ ‪ Kotler‬ﺑﺄ‪‬ﺎ ﺭﲝﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ؛ ﺃﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﰐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳉﺬﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ ﻭﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺣﺴﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﳊﺴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 3‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺏ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺃ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺭﲝﻴﺘﻪ‪.11‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﺣﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ؛‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻌﺪﻡ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ؛‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ؛‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺭﻙ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻪ؛‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺭﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﳍﺎ؛‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻏﲑ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ؛‬‫ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ؛‬‫‪ -‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﰲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﻏﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪371‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﳕﻮﺍ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺌﻪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ )‪(CRM‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻟﻠﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﻔﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ؛ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﺜﻼ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﻬﺎ‪.12‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﺤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ؛ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﻟﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ؛ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﻙ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﻟﺘﻠﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﺟﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﺟﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻭﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑ‪ ،**(C to C) :‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻐﲑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﲢﻔﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺟﺪﺩ ﲟﻨﺤﻬﻢ ﻛﻮﺑﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﳎﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﱄ ﳚﺬﺏ ﺯﺑﻮﻧﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )‪ (FAQ‬ﻟﻴﻄﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗ‪‬ﻜﹶﻮﱢﻥ ﰲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ 2007 Delacroix‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ؛ ﺃﻻ ﻭﻫﻲ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ )‪.13(RAC : Relationship Animation between Customers‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ )ﺍﳌﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻠﺔ( ‪-:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺮﺿﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ )ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪ 11‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪ 10‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﺯﻋﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 68‬ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻭﲤﺖ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ؛ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ )ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﻨﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ( ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﻣـﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣـﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ ﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ؛‬‫ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ؛‬‫ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ "ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ" ﰲ "ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﻻﺋﻬﻢ"‪.‬‬‫‪ .1-2‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ؛‬

‫‪372‬‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ -‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2010-2009 / 07‬‬

‫ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ t‬ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﰎ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﳍﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪) :‬ﺍﳊﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ( )‪ (Microsoft office Excel 2003) ،(SPSS 15.0‬و)‪ (XLSTAT 2008 v2.03‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻳﻌﻤـﻞ ﲢـﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪.(Microsoft Excel‬‬ ‫‪ .2-2‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﺖ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﻨﺲ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻷﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻻﻟﺔ )‪ (Asymp. Sig. 2-sided‬ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟ ‪ (Pearson Chi-Square) :‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 0.052‬ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﻮﻝ‬ ‫)ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ،(0.05‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ( ﻷﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﻟﺔ )‪ (Asymp.Sig.2-sided‬ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟ ‪ (Pearson Chi-Square) :‬ﻫـﻲ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺍﻟﺘـﻮﺍﱄ‬ ‫‪ 0.069 ،0.062‬ﻭ‪ ،0.073‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﻟﺔ؛ ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻟﻠﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺑـﻮﻥ)ﺍﻟﺴـﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﻨﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ( ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﲑ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ t‬ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺧﻠﺼﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻌﻨـﻮﻱ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺑﺈﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻏﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﻢ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻡ ﻻ؛ ﻓﻜﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ %85‬ﺑﺄ‪‬ﻢ ﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﻘـﺮﺭﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈـﺮ‪‬ﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﻼﻗﺘﻬﻢ ﻛﺄﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺑﻨﻈﺮ‪‬ﻢ ﻟﻠﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻛﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺳـﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺜﻠﻮ‪‬ﺎ )ﺃﻱ ﻳﺘﺸﺎ‪‬ﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﳌﺴﻨﺎﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻱ ﰲ ﻭﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ )ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ( ﻋﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺘﲔ ﻗـﺎﺩﻣﺘﲔ؛‬ ‫ﻓﻜﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ 15‬ﺷﻬﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺘﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﲜﻤﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )‪68‬‬

‫ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ(؛ ﻭﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻣﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎ ﻟ ‪ 34 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺑﻘﺴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 55‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )‪ 11‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ ﰲ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻟﻴﻜﺮﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗـﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻨـﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 55/34‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ ،% 61.82‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻻ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﲢﺴﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓـﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻪ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﻲ ﻟﺘﻠﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﳋـﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗـﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻻﺣﻈﻨﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺑﺎﳋﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﱐ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪373‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ‬

‫________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﲜﻤﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻻﺳـﺘﻤﺎﺭﺓ )‪68‬‬

‫ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ( ﻭﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻣﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺎ ﻟ ‪ 33.19 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺑﻘﺴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 50‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )‪ 10‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺑﺔ ﰲ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ(؛ ﳒﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﻻﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﻫـﻮ ‪ 50/33.19‬ﺃﻱ ﻣـﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ ،% 66.38‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺼَﻨَﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃـﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴـﺎﺕ ﰲ ﳎـﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ‪َ :‬ﺧﹸﻠ ْ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟـﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻲ ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺎﰐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺍﻟﺼـﻔﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻧﻴﺔ( ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ؛ ﺃﻱ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻠﺼﻨﺎ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ )ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﻨﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻲ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻧﻔﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ )ﻟﻠﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ(؛‬ ‫ ﻻ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺮ‪‬ﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‬‫‪‬ﻢ ﻛﺄﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺑﻨﻈﺮ‪‬ﻢ ﻟﻠﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ )ﻛﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪ (...‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ‬ ‫ﳝﺜﻠﻮ‪‬ﺎ )ﺃﻱ ﻳﺘﺸﺎ‪‬ﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻚ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻟﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ ﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺑﺪﻯ ﺃﻏﻠﺒﻬﻢ ﻭﰲ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺘﲔ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ 15‬ﺷﻬﺮﺍ؛ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻭ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻧﻔﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﺓ ﳓﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ ﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ(؛‬ ‫ ﺃﺛﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺯﺑﺎﺋﻨﻪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺀ(‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬‫ﻭﺟﺪﻧﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ 62‬ﺑﺎﳌﺎﺋﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﻻﺀ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ 67‬ﺑﺎﳌﺎﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺃ‪‬ﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻟﲔ ﺇﻻ ﺃ‪‬ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﲔ؛‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ -1‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ﺗﻄﻮر اﻟﺰﺑﻮن أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻤﺸﻜﻭﻙ‬ ‫ﻤﺤﺘﻤل‬

‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺠﺩﻴﺩ‬

‫ﻤﺘﻜﺭﺭ‬

‫ﻤﺅﻴﺩ‬

‫ﻭﻓﻲ‬

‫ﺴﻔﻴﺭ‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺆهﻞ‬

‫ﺘﺤﻭل ﺍﻟﺯﺒﺎﺌﻥ ﻭﺍﻨﺤﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪Source: KOTLER Philip et autre, marketing management, 12e édition, Op Cit, P 185.‬‬

‫‪374‬‬

‫ﺸﺭﻴﻙ‬

.‫ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﺰﺑﻮن ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل دورة ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻪ‬-3 ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎت‬

‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‬ 1 2 3 4 5 6 ‫اﻟﺰﺑﻮن ب‬

.(CRM) ‫ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ إﺳﺘﺮاﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ إدارة اﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺰﺑﻮن‬-2 ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

‫ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬

‫ﻭﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻴﲑ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤـﺪ‬

‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‬

‫ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬

1 2 3 4 5 6 ‫اﻟﺰﺑﻮن أ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

Source : HAMON Carole, LÉZIN Pascal et TOULLEC gestion de clientèles, (Dunod, Paris, 2004), P 08.

‫ﻋـﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‬

‫درﺟﺔ ﻓﺮدﻧﺔ وﺷﺨﺼﻨﺔ اﻟﺰﺑﻮن‬

‫آﺜﻴﺮة‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻟﺪى اﻟﺰﺑﻮن‬

‫اﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎت‬

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

‫ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬

2010-2009 / 07 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬

Source : PAYNE Adrian, OP cit., P 231.

: ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ 1 - KOTLER Philip, Keller Kevin-lane, Dubois Bernard et Manceau Delphine, marketing management, 12e édition, (Pearson Education, Paris 2006), P 21.

2 - PEELEN Ed et autres, JALLAT Frédéric, STEVENS Eric, VOLLE Pierre, gestion de la relation client, 2eme édition, (Pearson éducation, Paris 2006), P 23.

3 - ANDERSON.K and KERR.C, Customer Relationship Management, (McGraw Hill, New York, 2002), P 02.

4 - PAYNE Adrian, handbook of CRM, (Elsevier Linacre House, Great Britain 2005), P 22. .283 ‫ ﺹ‬،(2006 ‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺭﺓ‬،‫ )ﻤﻨﺸﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻅﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻭﺭﺩ‬،‫ ﺠﻴﻬﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻡ‬- 5

.83-81 ‫ ﺹ ﺹ‬،(2005 ‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺭﺓ‬،‫ )ﻤﻨﺸﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻅﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻴﺔ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻭﻴﻕ ﺒﺎﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ‬،‫ ﻤﻨﻰ ﺸﻔﻴﻕ‬6 - PEELEN Ed et autres, Op Cit, P 31.

7 - PEELEN Ed et autres, Op Cit, P 29.

8 - KOTLER Philip, le marketing selon Kotler, (Pearson éducation, Paris, 2005), P 147. .‫ ﻭﺘﻌﻨﻲ ﺇﻀﻔﺎﺀ ﻁﺎﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻲﺀ ﻤﺎ ﻭﺘﺴﻭﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﺘﻌﻨﻲ ﺘﻘﺩﻴﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻜل ﺯﺒﻭﻥ‬Personnalisation ‫∗ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻨﺔ ﺘﺭﺠﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬ 9 - KOTLER Philip et autres, marketing management, 12e édition, Op Cit… P.P 182.284.

- PEELEN Ed et autres, Op Cit, P 78.

- PEPPERS Don et ROGERS Martha, le ONE to ONE, (édition d’organisation, Paris 2001), P 109.

10 - KOTLER Philip, le marketing selon kotler, Op Cit, P 28.

11 - AYACHE Antoine et autre, calculs de la valeur client, (Actes 22ème congrès international de l'AFM, Nantes 11-12/mai/2006), P 03.

- KOTLER Philip et autre, marketing management, 12e édition, Op Cit, PP 176-177.

12 - PAYNE Adrian, Op Cit, P 232. ** C to C: Customer to Customer.‫ﻢ ﻳﺒﻴﻌﻮﻥ ﻟﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬‫ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﻛﺄ‬،‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ 13 - DELACROIX Jérôme, chère client, (Electronic Business Group, Paris, 2007), P 133.

375

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2010-2009 / 7 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

Etude de quelques paramètres économiques chez les chameliers algériens Dr. ADAMOU Abdekader* & Dr. BAIRI Abdelmadjid**

Résumé: Les chameliers évoluant dans un milieu où la vie est difficile arrivent à soutirer une gamme diversifiée de produits et services grâce à l'activité cameline. Les objectifs et les stratégies différentes selon les différents types; et c'est dans ce contexte que la présente étude tente d'étudier certains paramètres économiques pouvant nous renseigner sur la pérennité de cette activité pastorale.

Les résultats font ressortir que la majorité des types identifiés vivent exclusivement des activités de l'élevage notamment le camelin et que les investissements restent insignifiants en l'absence de pluriactivité et de ressources extérieures.

Mots clés: activité cameline - revenus - investissements - pluriactivité - ressources extérieures Introduction: Grace à l'activité cameline, les chameliers peuvent disposer de toute une gamme de produits (lait, viande, poil…) et services (selle, bât…) dans un milieu caractérisé par des conditions de vie très difficile. Dans cette vie pastorale, le dromadaire est considéré comme une caisse d'épargne mobilisable en cas de besoin (1).

Certes, certaines fonctions ont tendance à disparaître telle la fonction de transport mais le dromadaire reste un bon pourvoyeur en viande et en lait et son avenir en Algérie est surtout comme animal de boucherie (2). Mais le dromadaire est-il un élément à prendre en compte dans un système économique bouleversé ?

Pour connaître les enjeux économiques et tenter d'apporter une réponse à notre questionnement, nous avons tenté d'étudier quelques paramètres économiques.

Une telle étude que nous avons réalisée par une approche systémique permettra d'orienter les décideurs quant à d'éventuels projets de développement dans lesquels, le chamelier, acteur principal du système, sera pris en considération.

Les systèmes étant évolutifs dans le temps, les décisions concerneront ceux dont la viabilité est certaine.

La finalité d'une telle étude revêt donc un intérêt particulier dans la mesure où les résultats obtenus serviront de base à tout plan d'action visant à préserver cette espèce jusque là en déclin et permettra de pérenniser l'activité du chamelier.

La mobilisation de cette ressource contribuera au développement de l'économie régionale par le maintien et l'encouragement des systèmes en progression.

1- Méthode La présente étude entre dans le cadre d'un projet visant à identifier les systèmes d'élevage camelins en Algérie, de comprendre leur fonctionnement et leur dynamique.

En Algérie, l'élevage camelin est réparti sur trois grandes aires de distribution (3). *Laboratoire Protection des Ecosysystèmes dans les Zones Arides et Semi Arides - Université de Ouargla **Université Badji Mokhtar de Annaba

-1-

Etude de quelques paramètres économiques chez les chameliers algériens _______________________________________________________

Pour que le travail soit représentatif, nous avons donc retenu trois régions dans ces aires de distribution: le Souf pour le Sud Est, Tindouf pour le Sud Ouest et le Hoggar pour l'extrême sud.

Dans une première étape, et au vu de l'immensité du territoire, dix (10) zones étaient retenues dans lesquelles des sites d'enquêtes ont été choisis et qui caractérisent les conditions les plus fréquemment rencontrées dans les différentes zones. Dans une seconde étape, nous avons retenu dans chaque site une ou plusieurs unités en essayant également de rendre compte des conditions suffisamment diverses notamment vis à vis de l’appartenance tribale, de la taille du troupeau et de la zone agro écologique. Cependant, il y a quelques contraintes supplémentaires qui ont été prises en considération : ne pas se limiter à un seul site d’enquête et ne pas imposer un itinéraire.

Le choix de l’échantillon, raisonné par quotas, nous a permis d'approcher un nombre total de 249 enquêtés (Tableau 1).

2- Résultats et discussion L'étude sur les facteurs économiques concernera les différents types de chameliers identifiés en Algérie. Il s'agit des nomades, des semi-nomades, des bergers, des sédentaires et des ramasseurs de bois (4).

2-1- les revenus : La répartition spatiale des différents types d'éleveurs justifie la multiplicité des activités, conséquence d'une diversité des revenus. Compte tenu de ces critères économiques, nous classerons les éleveurs comme suit : Les éleveurs n’ayant que l’activité d’élevage (notamment camelin) comme revenu sont majoritaires avec 69% dominés par les nomades qui représentent 72%.

Les éleveurs dont le revenu provient de trois activités dont l’élevage ne représentent que 14%, les sédentaires y sont majoritaires avec 54%. La classe intermédiaire, dominée par les semi nomades (48%) représente 17% de l’ensemble des personnes enquêtée (Fig.1).

2-1-1- Les éleveurs dont le revenu provient exclusivement del'activité de l'élevage notamment camelin (Fig.2) Dans la région du Hoggar, 52% des éleveurs enquêtés sont représentés par cette classe, dominée par les nomades (86.5%).

Cela concerne les nomades avec des faibles et moyens effectifs qui font appel beaucoup plus aux petits ruminants. Quant aux gros propriétaires nomades, ils s'adonnent en plus à l'activité du commerce du camelin. Ces opérations d'achat et de vente du camelin leur permet d'augmenter leur revenu avec en plus la possibilité de renouveler leur cheptel (achat de chamelons et de chamelles).

Viennent ensuite les semi-nomades avec 8.5% dont 28% sont de gros propriétaires. Par contre, les sédentaires sont minoritaires avec 5%. Ils se retrouvent dans les deux classes 25 – 49 têtes et 50 – 80 têtes.

Dans la région du Souf où 76% soutirent leur revenu de la seule activité de l’élevage, les ramasseurs de bois représentent 13%. Parmi eux, on peut compter 69% dont les recettes proviennent exclusivement de l'exploitation des dromadaires mâles, le reste procèdent, en plus, à la vente de petits ruminants (ovins).

Chez les ramasseurs de bois, l'activité cameline est représentée par la vente de fumier (crottin) et la vente de bois. Cette dernière reste l'activité principale puisque chez 77% de ces ramasseurs, elle dépasse 50% des recettes de l'activité camelines.

-2-

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2010-2009 / 7 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

Il est à noter que les ramasseurs ayant les meilleurs revenus avec la seule activité cameline sont ceux qui utilisent le maximum de dromadaires soit quatre mâles.

Il est à noter que ce genre d'activité est répandu dans les milieux pastoraux de nombreux pays comme le Niger (5).

On retrouve dans cette classe une proportion importante de bergers (39.5%) qui ne possèdent que l'élevage camelin comme source de revenu.

L'activité de gardiennage reste la principale ressource de l'activité cameline chez les bergers du Souf puisqu'elle draine à elle seule, chez 60% d'entre eux, une recette dépassant la moitié des recettes de l'activité cameline(54.8%).

Le grand nombre de cette classe est détenu par les semi-nomades où 47.5% n’ont que l’activité d’élevage comme unique ressource de revenu.

Dans la région de Tindouf, 88% du nombre total des enquêtés n'ont pour revenu que la seule activité de l'élevage. C'est le cas chez 97.5% des nomades et 2.5% des semi-nomades, les sédentaires n'y sont pas représentés.

Chez cette catégorie d'éleveurs, l'unique source de revenu demeure l'élevage bénéficiant de la gamme des produits qu'offrent aussi bien l'élevage camelin (lait, viande, poil) que des petits ruminants.

Pour l'approvisionnement du ménage en semoule, sucre, thé…, ils procèdent à la vente des petits ruminants en priorité, et quand les besoins s'avèrent plus importants (mariage, pèlerinage), ils seront contraints de vendre une ou deux têtes camelines.

Le recours de ces éleveurs à une seule source de revenu est l'évidence même au vu de la nature du milieu dans lequel ils évoluent et qui est dénué de toute possibilité d'exercer d'autres activités économiques permettant une diversification du revenu.

2-1-2- Les éleveurs dont le revenu provient de deux origines dont l'élevage (Fig.3).

Les semi-nomades et les sédentaires développent des stratégies de survie basées sur la diversité des sources de revenus Dans la région du Hoggar, on y retrouve les semi-nomades avec 52% et les sédentaires avec 48.1%.

La seconde source de revenue provient exclusivement de l'agriculture pour les semi-nomades, par contre, elle est très diversifiée chez les sédentaires (36% de salariés, 27% de saisonniers, 18% de commerçants et 18% d’agriculteurs) Autrefois, ces éleveurs – agriculteurs avaient la propriété de la terre mais la faisait cultiver par les Iklan (Hratines) détachés à cette besogne par leurs maîtres. Actuellement, ce sont eux mêmes qui travaillent leurs terres après la disparition partielle de cette classe sociale qu'est les "Hratines", mais l'agriculture est loin de dégager des rendements en mesure de satisfaire leurs besoins.

Le manqué d'eau et la non maîtrise de l'agriculture en sont les causes principales. Pour l'activité de tourisme, ils travaillent pour la plupart comme guides ou chauffeurs. Malgré le déclin de l'activité touristique ces derrières années, elle continue toutefois à procurer des revenus à même de compenser les maigres ressources soutirées de l'élevage vu qu'il s'agit de petits éleveurs.

Pour le commerce, il s’agit d’agences touristiques détenues par les gros éleveurs (plus de 80 têtes).Cette activité était très florissante avant que ne se pose le problème sécuritaire qui a paralysé le secteur du tourisme.

-3-

Etude de quelques paramètres économiques chez les chameliers algériens _______________________________________________________

Chez ces éleveurs, l'élevage camelin est considéré comme une caisse d'épargne mobilisable en cas de besoin. A noter qu'une partie des recettes hors élevage est investie dans l'élevage camelin ce qui justifie les grands effectifs.

Dans la région de Tindouf, seuls 3.5% des enquêtés ont recours à une seconde activité où les seminomades prédominent avec 66.6%. Ils font partie pour la majorité (65%) des petits éleveurs car possédant moins de 24 têtes.

Dans la région du Souf, 24% des enquêtés sont représentés dans cette classe dominée par les ramasseurs de bois avec 67%. Ces derniers, profitant du repos estival forcé, sont recrutés comme saisonniers dans les nombreux chantiers de construction.

Les bergers ne figurent pas dans cette clase car tous se contentent de la seule activité de gardiennage.

La seconde activité qui concerne 33% des semi-nomades est représentée par l’agriculture pour 50% d’entre eux. Il s’agit de la phoeniciculture mais avec un nombre faible de palmiers dattiers (moins de 20) Mais cette activité a tendance à attirer davantage d’éleveurs au vu des facilités et stimulations offertes par l’Etat dans le cadre du FNDRA. Ces semi-nomades se caractérisent également par la possession d’un faible effectif camelin (moins de 25 dromadaires chez la moitié d’entre eux. Le reste des semi-nomades soutire le second revenu de l’activité de la contre bande opérée aux abords de la frontière algéro-tunisienne.

2-1-3- Les éleveurs dont le revenu provient de trois origines dont l'élevage (Fig.4) Dans le Hoggar, 24.5% de la population enquêtée sont représentés dans cette classe. Seuls les seminomades et les sédentaires y figurent avec une prédominance pour ces derniers (53.5%). Comme source de revenu supplémentaire, il s'agit pour la plupart de commerce et d'agriculture.

Cette classe est représentée par les éleveurs possédant les plus faibles effectifs camelins d'où le recours à la pluriactivité. En effet 36% d’entre eux possèdent des effectifs camelins inférieurs à 25 têtes.

Dans la région du Souf, on note l’inexistence d’éleveurs dégageant plus deux revenus.

Dans la région de Tindouf, seulement 8% des enquêtés sont représentés par cette classe où les sédentaires prédominent avec 57%. La sédentarisation leur a permis de diversifier les revenus. Ils s’adonnent tous au commerce (boucheries) et à l’activité agricole après avoir bénéficié de lopins de terre dans le cadre de l’APFA, mais l’apport de l’agriculture demeure très négligeable. Il est à noter que 20% parmi eux sont utilisés par les administrations locales comme guides lors de leur sortie sur terrain, et bien que cette activité soit partielle et non rémunératrice, elle contribue dans la part du revenu du ménage. Un grand nombre est considéré comme nouveau dans l’activité de l’élevage après avoir acheté quelques têtes de dromadaires. C’est le cas de la tribu des Tajkent.

2-2- Les investissements D’une manière générale, durant les cinq dernières années les investissements étaient insignifiants.

En effet, 19% seulement de l’ensemble des enquêtés avaient procédé à des investissements. Seuls les ramasseurs de bois, parmi les types identifiés n’avaient pas investi (Fig.5).

Les semi-nomades restent, parmi les types de chameliers, ceux qui ont le plus opéré des investissements (33%). Il s’agit exclusivement des semi-nomades du Souf.

Ceux qui possèdent des lopins de terre dans le cadre de l’APFA (47%) ont surtout investi dans la mise en valeur (70%) Il s’agissait surtout de déblaiements et achat de rejets de palmiers. Le reste -4-

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2010-2009 / 7 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

des semi-nomade a investi dans l’immobilier (travaux de réfection), et très peu dans. le camélin (9%) par l’achat de dromadaire (Fig.6).

Les nomades dont seulement 13.5% ont procédé à des investissements (tous de la région de Tindouf), arrivent toutefois en deuxième position avec une part des investissements considérable puisqu’elle représente 35.5%.

L’ensemble des investissements concernait l’achat de moyens de transport et ce sont surtout les nomades grands propriétaires (effectif camelin supérieur à 80 têtes) qui ont opté pour ce créneau..

Quant aux bergers, seuls ceux du Souf ont procédé pour 66.5% à des investissements dont la totalité a concerné l’achat de dromadaires qui représente 21% de la masse des investissements.

Une autre catégorie des enquêtés a également investi dans le camelin bien que la proportion demeure faible (2% des investissements). Il s’agit des sédentaires de la tribu des Tajkant (anciens commerçants de la région de Tindouf).

Les investissements avaient en grande partie l’autofinancement comme origine (91.6%) Le reste provenait de crédits informels opérés par des semi-nomades du Souf n’ayant ni ressources extérieures ni activité supplémentaire et qui avaient investi pour la plupart (75%) dans des travaux de réfection de la maison en dur.

Les éleveurs concernés par de futurs investissements ne sont pas nombreux également (18.5%).

Seuls les semi-nomades (30% de l’ensemble de la région d’étude) et les sédentaires (77.7%) ont l’intention d’investir dans les cinq prochaines années (Fig.7). La grande part des futurs investissements revient aux sédentaires avec 61%. Il s’agit surtout des sédentaires du Hoggar qui représentent 89%. Ce sont également les semi-nomades du Hoggar qui représentent la moitié des futurs investisseurs.

Si pour les semi-nomades, les investissements concerneraient en premier lieu le camelin (72%), les sédentaires opteraient pour le commerce et l’immobilier (60.7%) (Fig.8). Le plus grand nombre de futurs investisseurs est détenu par les sédentaires.

Plus de la moitié (58%) des éleveurs concernés par de futurs investissements ont soit une ressource extérieure soit activité extérieure.

2-3- La pluriactivité C’est la monoactivité qui prédomine dans la région d’étude. En effet, le nombre de personnes enquêtées qui pratiquent une ou plusieurs activités autre que l’élevage ne représente que 28.5% (Fig.9).

Les bergers ont l’élevage camelin comme unique activité et ne bénéficient d’aucune ressource extérieure Les sédentaires sont de loin les plus pluriactifs avec 86%, viennent ensuite les ramasseurs de bois avec 61.5% et les semi-nomades avec 53.5%. Les nomades et les bergers quant à eux n’activent que dans l’élevage camelin.

Certaines personnes pratiquent plus de deux activités mais leur nombre reste insignifiant. Il s’agit des sédentaires (30.5%) et des semi-nomades (33.5%). Ces activités concernent l’agriculture avec le commerce.

-5-

Etude de quelques paramètres économiques chez les chameliers algériens _______________________________________________________

Chez les autres éleveurs, l’activité qui domine reste de loin l’agriculture avec (49%). Elle est pratiquée essentiellement par les semi-nomades – phoeniciculteurs du Hoggar (81%) et quelques transhumants-phoeniciculteurs du Souf. On trouve chez les sédentaires une diversification dans la pluriactivité : 35.5% travaillent dans l’agriculture et le commerce, 26% exercent dans le commerce, 16% dans l’agriculture, 13% sont des salariés et 9.5% comme saisonniers (Fig.10). Ces derniers sont des sédentaires du Hoggar qui travaillent temporairement comme guides touristiques. On retrouve également des saisonniers chez 61.5% des ramasseurs de bois qui profitent du repos estival forcé pour se faire engager comme manœuvre dans les nombreux chantiers de construction.

2-4- Les ressources extérieures Ceux qui bénéficient des ressources extérieures ne comptent que 12% de la population enquêtée.

Elle est représentée par les sédentaires (27.5%) les nomades (11%) et les semi-nomades (10%) (Fig.11).

Presque la moitié (46.5%) est détenue par les nomades tous de la région de Tindouf. Les sédentaires et les semi-nomades en détiennent respectivement 33.5 et 20%.

Ces ressources extérieures ont quatre origines (Fig.12): a) la pension qui représente le gros des ressources avec 46.5% détenu essentiellement par les nomades du Hoggar (78.5%), b) le salaire d’un membre du ménage demeure la seconde ressource avec 36.5% au bénéfice des sédentaires (63.5%), c) la retraite qui concerne les sédentaires du Hoggar est la moins représentée avec 6.5%, d) et enfin une ressource extérieure non négligeable opérée par les semi-nomades du Souf consiste en la contrebande aux abords de la frontière algéro-tunisienne, cependant et vu le risque encouru par une telle activité prohibée, le pourcentage de représentation reste faible avec 10%.

Conclusion : Les nomades et les chameliers arrivent à vivre de l'activité cameline et cette vie ne saurait exister sans la présence de cet animal énigmatique qu'est le dromadaire surtout dans un milieu caractérisé par des conditions de vie extrêmement difficiles. Dans cette vie pastorale, le dromadaire est considéré comme une caisse d'épargne mobilisable en cas de besoin.

Les objectifs et les stratégies différentes selon les types.

Les sédentaires, anciens chameliers installés en ville pour des raisons diverses ont gardé, par amour à cet animal, quelques têtes de dromadaires et continuent à pratiquer l'élevage camelin comme activité annexe qui sert à alimenter d'autres créneaux.

Les semi-nomades essayent de diversifier leurs activités en ayant un pied en ville comme c'est le cas des chameliers phoeniciculteurs du Souf.

Les bergers et les nomades dont l'activité reste exclusivement le camelin, risquent, au vu des contraintes diverses (sécheresse, absence de soutien…), la transition vers l'exploitation individuelle pour les premiers et le semi nomadisme pour les seconds.

Les ramasseurs de bois ne sont pas encouragés à poursuivre leur activité en exploitant le dromadaire comme animal de bât. Bien que cette activité soit rentable, elle reste très contraignante et temporaire.

-6-

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2010-2009 / 7 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

Les investissements restent insignifiants et le peu d'investissements opérés ou en projet, exercés par les seuls chameliers concernés par la pluriactivité, se trouve orienté vers d'autres secteurs (agriculture, commerce…).

Compte tenu de toutes ces contraintes, le devenir de la plupart des types identifiés reste incertain, seul le semi nomadisme qui a connu peu de trace de fléchissement peut se maintenir et mérite donc d'être conforté en essayant de trouver des voies pour son maintien dans une optique de développement durable.

Annexes : Tableau 1: Nombre d'enquêtés

Zones région Hoggar Hoggar Altitude Tinseririne

Zones région Souf 40 36 38

Total Région

114

Total général

249

Zones région Tindouf

Hamraya Sud Zone frontalière

15 22

50

80%

3 8,7 1,7 14,5

0

100%

19 0 54 33,5

60%

RB

80%

BE

60%

SE 40%

72,1 47,5

43

20%

R1

R2

85

5 8,5

SN N

20%

0 2,5

13 39,5

RB BE

86,5 40%

97,5

SE SN 47,5

3

0

0%

15 10 22 38

L es éleveu rs d o n t le reven u p ro vien t exclu sivem en t d e l'élevag e

R é p a rtitio n d e s ty p e s d 'é le v e u rs s u iv a n t le ty p e d e re v e n u

100%

Nord est Nord Centre Sud est

N

0% Hoggar

R3

Tindouf

S ouf

Fig.1: Répartition des éleveurs suivant le type de revenu N = nomades, SN = semi-nomades, S = sédentaires, B = bergers, RB = ramasseurs de bois

Fig.2: Les éleveurs dont le revenu provient exclusivement de l'élevage

Les éleveurs dont le revenu provient de deux activités

Les éleveurs dont le revenu provient de trois activités

100% 80%

100% 48

33 67

80%

RB BE

60% 52

67

33

20% 0%

0

0 Hoggar

BE SE

40%

SN

46,5

N

20%

0 Tindouf

RB

57

60%

SE 40%

53,5

0%

Souf

0 Hoggar

Fig.3: Les éleveurs dont le revenu provient de deux activités

SN

28,5

N 14,5 Tindouf

0 Souf

Fig.4: Les éleveurs dont le revenu provient de trois activités

-7-

Etude de quelques paramètres économiques chez les chameliers algériens _______________________________________________________

les investissements opérés au cours des cinq dernières années

Les investissements opérés durant les cinq dernières années 100%

0

13,5 80%

33,5

66,5

NO SN SE BE RB

m, en valeur

60%

immobilier

40%

camelin m, transport

20%

2,5

0% NO

SN

SE

BE

RB

Fig.5: Les investissements opérés chez les différents types

Fig.6: La nature des investissements opérés par les différents types

Les projets d'investissement

Les projets d'investissement 100%

0

20

80%

NO 60%

SN SE

immobilier camelin

40%

BE RB

commerce

20%

77,5

0% NO

SN

SE

BE

RB

Fig.7: Les projets d'investissements

Fig.8: La nature des projets d'investissements

La pluriactivité

la pluriactivité 100%

0 53,5

61,5

80% agr+com,

NO 60%

SN SE

saisonnier salarié

40%

commerçant

BE

0

RB

agriculteur

20%

86

0% NO

SN

SE

BE

RB

Fig. 9: La pluriactivité

Fig.10: Les différents types d'activité

Les ressources extérieures

les ressources extérieures 100%

0

11

80% NO

retraite

SE 10

pension

40%

BE

27,5

autre

60%

SN

sal, ménage

RB

20% 0% NO

Fig.11: Les ressources extérieures

SN

SE

BE

RB

Fig.12: La nature des ressources extérieures

-8-

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2010-2009 / 7 ‫ ﻋﺪﺩ‬- ‫ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬

Références bibliographiques : 1- Adamou A. (2008). Commercialisation du lait de chamelle en Algérie : mythe ou réalité ? in : prospectives agricoles. INRA Algérie N°3. pp. 76-82.

2- Leupold J. (1968). Le chameau, important animal domestique des pays subtropicaux. in: les cahiers bleus vétérinaires, N° 15. 1968. pp 1-6.

3- Benaissa R. (1986). Dossier camelin : note de synthèse. Alger : Ministère de l'Agriculture. 25 p.

4- Adamou A. (2008). L’élevage camelin en Algérie : quel type pour quel avenir ? in: Sécheresse (France), Volume 19, N°4 pp 253-260.

5- Viateau E. (1998). Bilan et perspectives sur la traction cameline au Niger, Montpellier : CIRAD-EMVT. 153 p.

-9-